Adobe PageMaker 7 0 Professional

Classroom in a Book
®
© 2002 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights reserved. Adobe® PageMaker® 7.0
Classroom in a Book® This book, as well as the software described in it, is
furnished under license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms
of such license. The content of this book is furnished for informational use only,
is subject to change without notice, and should not be construed as a commitment by
Adobe Systems Incorporated. Adobe Systems Incorporated assumes no responsibility or
liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this book. Please
remember that existing artwork or images that you may want to include in your
project may be protected under copyright law. The unauthorized incorporation of
such material into your new work could be a violation of the rights of the
copyright owner. Please be sure to obtain any permission required from the
copyright owner. Any references to company names in sample templates are for
demonstration purposes only and are not intended to refer to any actual
organization. Except as permitted by such license, no part of this documentation
may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form or by
any means, electronic, mechanical, recording, or otherwise, without the prior
written permission of Adobe Systems Incorporated. Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat,
Acrobat Reader, Adobe Certified Expert, ACE, Adobe Dimensions, Adobe Type Manager,
ATM, Classroom in a Book, Distiller, FrameMaker, Illustrator, PageMaker, Photoshop,
PostScript, and PostScript 3 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of
Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries. KODAK and
Photo CD are trademarks of Eastman Kodak Company. Apple, ColorSync, Mac, Macintosh,
Power Macintosh, and QuickTime, are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc., registered
in the United States and other countries. Microsoft, Windows, and Windows NT are
either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and/or other countries. Helvetica and Times are trademarks of Linotype-Hell
AG and/or its subsidiaries. “PANTONE Open Color Environment™ (POCE™) © Pantone,
Inc. 1994, 1996. Pantone, Inc. is the copyright owner of “PANTONE Open Color
Environment™ (POCE™)” and Software, which are licensed to Adobe Systems
Incorporated to distribute for use only in combination with Adobe PageMaker.
“PANTONE Open Color Environment™ (POCE™) and Software shall not be copied onto
another diskette or into memory unless as part of the execution of Adobe PageMaker.
The spelling portion of this product is based on Proximity Linguistic Technology.
The Proximity/Merriam-Webster Linguibase © 1983,1990 Merriam-Webster, Inc. TRUMATCH
4-Color Selector © 1992 Trumatch, Inc. All rights reserved. All other trademarks
are the property of their respective owners. Contains an implementation of the LZW
algorithm licensed under U.S. Patent 4,558,302. Written and designed at Adobe
Systems Incorporated, 345 Park Avenue, San Jose, California 95110, USA. Notice to
U.S. Government End Users. The Software and Documentation are “Commercial Items,”
as that term is defined at 48 C.F.R. §2.101, consisting of “Commercial Computer
Software” and “Commercial Computer Software Documentation,” as such terms are used
in 48 C.F.R. §12.212 or 48 C.F.R. §227.7202, as applicable. Consistent with 48
C.F.R. §12.212 or 48 C.F.R. §§227.7202-1 through 227.7202-4, as applicable, the
Commercial Computer Software and Commercial Computer Software Documentation are
being licensed to U.S. Government end users (a) only as Commercial Items and (b)
with only those rights as are granted to all other end users pursuant to the terms
and conditions herein. Unpublished-rights reserved under the copyright laws of the
United States. Adobe Systems Incorporated, 345 Park Avenue, San Jose, CA 95110-
2704, USA. For U.S. Government End Users, Adobe agrees to comply with all
applicable equal opportunity laws including, if appropriate, the provisions of
Executive Order 11246, as amended, Section 402 of the Vietnam Era Veterans
Readjustment Assistance Act of 1974 (38 USC 4212), and Section 503 of the
Rehabilitation Act of 1973, as amended, and the regulations at 41 CFR Parts 60-1
through 60-60, 60-250, and 60741. The affirmative action clause and regulations
contained in the preceding sentence shall be incorporated by reference. Printed in
the U.S.A. ISBN# 0-201-75625-0 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
iii
Contents
Getting Started
About Classroom in a Book Prerequisites Installing Adobe
PageMaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. .1
Installing the Classroom in a Book fonts Creating and printing lesson projects
Installing PPDs (Windows only) Additional resources Adobe Certification Copying the
Classroom in a Book files
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Lesson 1
Flyer
Locating files and fonts Restoring default settings Starting PageMaker Producing the
flyer Review questions Answers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . .8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Assembling a two-column flyer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . 43
Lesson 2
Architect’s letterhead
Before you
begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
46 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
69 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Assembling a custom template
Assembling an envelope Assembling a business card Printing the letterhead
Assembling a letter Review questions Answers
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
78 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . 80
iv CONTENTS
Lesson 3
Project proposal
Before you
begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
82 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
107 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Assembling a master page Assembling the
first page Assembling the second page Assembling the third page Producing the
proposal Review questions Answers
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . 116
Lesson 4
Jewelcase booklet
Before you
begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . 125 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Assembling the master page Assembling the booklet cover
Assembling the first double-page spread Assembling the last spread Assembling the
back cover Building a booklet Printing the booklet Review questions Answers
Assembling the second double-page spread
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . 154
Lesson 5
Cycling guidebook
Before you begin Finishing the cover Working with
styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
156 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . 169 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Setting up the document
Finishing the first spread Laying out the next spread Finishing pages 6 and 7 Review
questions Answers
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . 180
v
Lesson 6
Adventure newsletter
Before you
begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Starting the publication Beginning page 1 Adding
guides Placing the text Placing art on page 1
Setting up the master pages
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . 189 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . 198 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . 200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . 188
Formatting the Bungee article Adding the continuation line Adding the Editor’s Note
Finishing the Bungee article Positioning the pull quote Using the story editor
Checking spelling Review questions Answers
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Formatting the Kayaking article
Laying out the Tibetan Treks sidebar Finding and changing text
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . 210
Lesson 7
Recreational catalog
Before you begin Working with color Attaching rules to text . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . 214 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
216 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
228 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Placing a Kodak Photo CD image Working with inline
graphics About graphic file formats Placing and linking a graphic Managing links
Review questions Answers
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Preparing for commercial printing

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . 241
vi CONTENTS
Lesson 8
Sailing publication
Before you begin Creating a book list Adding index entries Generating an
index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
258 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Generating the table of contents Formatting the table of contents Printing the book
Review questions Answers
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . 264
Lesson 9
Newsletter on the Web

Before you begin Adding hyperlinks Testing hyperlinks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . 267 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . 273 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . 274 Comparing HTML and PDF
Adding a source on a master page Adapting color for the Web Exporting to Adobe PDF
Exporting to HTML Adobe on the Web Review questions Answers Preparing the HTML
version Comparing the final versions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . 294
Lesson 10
PDF Web page

Before you
begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . 298 . . . . . . . . . . 299 Previewing the final version
Setting up the publication Testing hyperlinks
Using text and graphics as hyperlink anchors Adding a source on a master page
Completing the hyperlink sources
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 . . . . . . . 302 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . 303
Setting up anchors for the rest of the publication
vii
Completing the linked table of contents
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Creating a multiple-source image map out of one graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 Linking to a movie
Creating URL anchors Importing URL anchors Dragging URL anchors Adding index
entries Exporting to PDF Review questions Answers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . 311 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
311 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . 314 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Generating the hyperlinked index Viewing the PDF in a Web browser
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . 318
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . 319
ADOBE PAGEMAKER 7.0 1
Classroom in a Book
Getting Started
Adobe® PageMaker® 7.0 is the ultimate software tool for producing
professionalquality business communications for print, press, or online
distribution as Adobe® PDF. With PageMaker, you can integrate text and graphics
from many sources into virtually any kind of publication, from newsletter and
brochures to color catalogs and magazines to Web pages, with maximum precision and
control. experimentation. You can follow the book from start to finish or do only
the lessons that correspond to your interests and needs. Each lesson concludes with
a review section summarizing what you’ve covered.
Prerequisites
Before beginning to use Adobe PageMaker 7.0 Classroom in a Book, you should have a
working knowledge of your computer and its operating system. Make sure you know how
to use the mouse and standard menus and commands and also how to open, save, and
close files. If you need to review these techniques, see the printed or online
documentation included with your Windows® or Mac® OS system.
About Classroom in a Book

Adobe PageMaker 7.0 Classroom in a Book® is part of the official training series for
Adobe graphics and publishing software developed by experts at Adobe Systems. The
lessons are designed to let you learn at your own pace. If you’re new to PageMaker,
you’ll learn the fundamental concepts and features you’ll need to master the
program. And if you’ve been using Adobe PageMaker for a while, you’ll find that
Classroom in a Book teaches many advanced features. The enhanced Export Adobe PDF
command is covered in detail. The lessons in this edition show how to assemble a
flyer, letterhead, booklet for a CD jewelcase, pamphlet, newsletter, catalog, and
book. Although each lesson provides stepby-step instructions for creating a specific
project, there’s room for exploration and
Installing Adobe PageMaker

Before you begin using Adobe PageMaker 7.0 Classroom in a Book, make sure that your
system is set up correctly and that you’ve installed the required software and
hardware. You must purchase the Adobe PageMaker 7.0 software separately. You must
install the application from the Adobe PageMaker 7.0 CD onto your hard disk; you
cannot run the program from the CD. For system requirements and complete
instructions on installing the software, see
2
Getting Started
the How_to_Install.wri (Windows) or How_to_Install.txt (Mac OS) file on the

application CD. Note: Be sure to install Adobe Acrobat® Distiller® 5.0, Adobe
Acrobat® Reader® 5.0, Adobe PostScript® Driver from the application CD unless you
have installed Adobe Acrobat 5.0 separately, and Adobe Type Manager(ATM). Make
sure your serial number is accessible before installing the application; you can
find the serial number on the registration card or CD sleeve.
System Folder/Application Support/Adobe/Fonts (Mac OS) If you install a Type 1,

TrueType, OpenType, or CID font into these local Fonts folders, the font appears in
Adobe applications only.
Creating and printing lesson projects

The lesson projects in this Classroom in a Book are designed to be printed on
blackand white-printers, desktop color printers, and four-color presses. Some
projects are designed to be distributed on the Web in HTML or PDF format rather
than printed. If you do not have access to any or all of these types of printers,
or if you don’t have access to a Web server, you can still complete the projects.
Although these projects are composed for a specific printer, you can print them on
your own printer by selecting your printer and its PPD in the Print dialog box when
it is time to print. (If your printer is not a PostScript printer, you do not have
the option to select a PPD.) Alternatively you can export the project files to Adobe
PDF and create an Adobe PDF version of the finished piece using the Export Adobe PDF
command. When you export to Adobe PDF, PageMaker creates a PostScript file, and then
automatically starts Acrobat Distiller to convert the PostScript file into Adobe
PDF. If you do not have enough free RAM to run Acrobat Distiller simultaneously
with PageMaker, you will need to close all open applications other than PageMaker.
For most of the lesson
Installing the Classroom in a Book fonts

To ensure that the lesson files appear on your system with the correct fonts, you
may need to install the Classroom in a Book font files. The fonts for the lessons
are located in the Fonts folder on the Adobe PageMaker Classroom in a Book CD. If
you already have these on your system, you do not need to install them. If you have
ATM (Adobe Type Manager), see its documentation on how to install fonts. If you do
not have ATM, installing it from the Classroom in a Book (CIB) CD will
automatically install the necessary fonts. You can also install the Classroom in a
Book fonts by copying all of the files in the Fonts folder on the Adobe PageMaker
Classroom in a Book CD to:
•
Program Files/Common Files/Adobe/Fonts (Windows)

Classroom in a Book
projects, you can use the default options for Export Adobe PDF, as described in
Lesson 1 “Creating an Adobe PDF version of the flyer” on page 41. For information on
using Export Adobe PDF to create separations, see Lesson 7 “Creating separations
using Adobe PDF” on page 239. For information on customizing the options associated
with Export Adobe PDF command—changing the file size or image quality, for example,
see Lesson 9, “Setting PDF Options” on page 277.
The PPDs for the two printers used in this Classroom in a Book are on the Classroom
in a Book (CIB) CD. Follow these steps to install them:
1 Insert the Classroom in a Book (CIB) CD,
and navigate to the folder containing the two PPD files, AGPRO981.PPD and
HPLJ5SI1.PPD.
2 Using Windows Explorer, open the folder
Program Files\Adobe\PageMaker 7.0\Rsrc\Usenglsh\Ppd4 on your hard drive.

3 Drag the two files, AGPRO981.PPD and
Installing PPDs (Windows only)

In Windows, you need to install the PPDs for the AGFA-ProSet9800 and the HP
LaserJet 5Si printers. These PPDs are included on the Classroom in a Book (CIB) CD
in the folder WinPPDs. Even though you may never print to these printers, you will
specify these printers as the final output device in several projects. Before you
begin any project that you plan to take to a service provider, you must know which
final output device the provider will use and, from the start, select that device
for Compose to Printer in the Document Setup dialog box, even if you plan to print
drafts on your own printer. (You’ll learn how to do this in the lessons.) In
PageMaker for Windows, font choices and sizes, resolution of text and graphics, and
the print area depend on the device you select. To ensure that you get the expected
results in these lessons, install these PPDs now.
HPLJ5SI1.PPD, from the Classroom in a Book (CIB) CD to the Ppd4 folder on your hard
drive.
4 Add the two corresponding printers in
turn, using the Windows Control Panel.

5 Select Start > Settings > Control Panel.
Double click the Printers icon. Double click the Add Printer icon, and follow the
Add Printer wizard instructions to add the two printers in turn, AGFA-ProSet9800
and HP LaserJet 5Si. You have successfully installed the drivers and printers
required to complete the lessons in this book.
4
Getting Started
Copying the Classroom in a Book files

The Adobe PageMaker Classroom in a Book CD includes folders containing all the
electronic files for the lessons. Each lesson has its own folder, and you must copy
the folders to your hard drive to do the lessons. To save room on your drive, you
can install only the necessary folder for each lesson as you need it, and remove it
when you’re done.
To install the Classroom in a Book files:
1 Insert the Adobe PageMaker Classroom in
In Windows, unlock the files you copied:

•
If you copied all of the lessons, doubleclick the unlock.bat file in the
PM70_CIB/Lessons folder. If you copied a single lesson, drag the unlock.bat file
from the Lessons folder on the CD into the PM70_CIB folder. Then double-click the
unlock.bat file in the PM70_CIB folder.
a Book CD into your CD-ROM drive.

2 Create a folder named PM70_CIB on your hard drive. 3 Copy the lessons you want to
the hard
Note: If as you work through the lessons, you overwrite the Start files, you can
restore the original files by recopying the corresponding Lesson folder from the
Classroom in a Book CD to the PM70_CIB folder on your hard drive.
drive:
•
To copy all of the lessons, drag the Lessons folder from the CD into the PM70_CIB
folder.
Additional resources
Adobe PageMaker Classroom in a Book is not meant to replace documentation that
comes with the program. Only the commands and options used in the lessons are
explained in this book. For comprehensive information about program features, refer
to these resources:
The Adobe PageMaker 7.0 User Guide.
To copy a single lesson, drag the individual lesson folder from the CD into the
PM70_CIB folder. If you are installing the files in Windows, you need to unlock them
before using them. You don’t need to unlock the files if you are installing them in
Mac OS.
Included with the Adobe PageMaker 7.0 software, this guide contains a complete
description of all features.
Classroom in a Book
Online Help,
an online version of the user guide, which you can view by choosing Help > Help
Topics (Windows) or Help > PageMaker Help Topics (Mac OS).
The Adobe Web site (www.adobe.com),
which you can view by choosing Help > Adobe Online if you have a connection to the
World Wide Web.
Adobe Certification
The Adobe Training and Certification Programs are designed to help Adobe customers
improve and promote their product proficiency skills. The Adobe Certified Expert
(ACE) program is designed to recognize the high-level skills of expert users. Adobe
Certified Training Providers (ACTP) use only Adobe Certified Experts to teach Adobe
software classes. Available in either ACTP classrooms or on-site, the ACE program
is the best way to master Adobe products. For Adobe Certified Training Programs
information, visit the Partnering with Adobe Web site at http://partners.adobe.com.
319
Index
A
Acrobat Printer Style 41, 275, 316 Acrobat Reader installing 1 Actual Size command
12 Add Cont'd Line plug-in 194 adjust layout Document Setup option 162 Master Page
Options setting 163 Master Pages palette option 175 Adobe Certified Expert (ACE)
program 5 Adobe Certified Training Providers (ACTP) 5 Adobe home page 293 Adobe
PageMaker 7.0 Preferences file restoring defaults 8 Adobe Type Manager 2 AGFA-
ProSet9800 printer 3 Align command 88 Align Objects command 88 alignment (text)
center 38 force justify 62 justify 98 anchor icon 302 anchors. see also hyperlinks,
sources to a URL 311–313 text 269–270 application defaults 47 Apply button 24
articles Distiller 279 viewing preferences in PDF 277 ATM 2 Attach Content 136
Auto-Color Balance option 214 Autoflow command 96, 172 automatic page-numbering 87
automatic text flow 96, 172 automatic trapping 234 converting spot to process 219
defining process 131 defining spot 53 defining tints 86 redefining 218 rich black
220 setting default 309 for the Web 273 Colors palette about 11, 29, 55 applying
color 36 specifying tints 29 tab 30 Column Break command 199 Column Guides command
19, 184 columns about 18 changing number of 203 setting 19 unequal width 121
varying on a single page 99 combining publications 245 compatibility options
Distiller 278 compose to printer 18 compression options Distiller 278 constrained-
line tool 40 continuation line 194 Control palette about 11 cropping 129 formatting
text 24 kerning 39 paragraph settings 38 proportional resizing 87 Proxy icon 58
B
Balance Columns command 257 baseline 26 baseline leading 95 bleeds 119, 216 book
list about 245 page numbering 246, 259 bookmarks Distiller 279 books assembling 245
book list 245 printing 263 Both button 30 Bring Guides to Front command 48 Build
Booklet plug-in 152 Bullets and Numbering plug-in 178
C
Center-align button 38 Change command 206 Change to Frame 177 Character-view button
39 CIELAB TIFF 214 clipping paths 228 CMS Setup option 214 color management turning
on 214, 233 colors applying 219 applying to rules 224
320 INDEX
reference points 58 resizing graphics 58 copying between publications 68, 71 Create

Index command 255 Create TOC command 259 cropping with cropping tool 127 using
Control palette 129 cropping tool 216 Cut command 34
ems 39 en space 222 EPS about 227 exporting page as 286–287 Exit command 43 Expert
Kerning command 191–192 Expert Tracking command 98 Export Adobe PDF creating color
separations 239 Export Adobe PDF command 2, 41, 274, 315
G
generating a book 263 graphic handles 20 graphics applying color to 36 circles 36
copying into publication 229 cropping 127, 216 display speed 299 drag and drop 68
file formats 227 frames 130 in libraries 187 inline 221 lines 39 links 228 moving
20 placing 20, 214, 228 rectangles 37 resizing 21, 58 special effects 203 Grid
Manager plug-in 186 grids 186 Group command 57, 197 grouping 57, 197 guides column
16, 121 displaying 16 locking 20, 51 margin 16, 161 moving 89 ruler 26, 32, 50
showing/hiding 16 gutter 19
D
defaults application 47 line style and weight 89 measurement units 15, 47
publication 47 restoring 8 Define Colors command 53, 131 Define Styles command 101
Deselect All command 299 dictionary, installing 156 Display Master Items command
92, 185 Distiller editing job options 278 Export Adobe PDF 41, 274 installing 1
screen job options 278 Document Setup command 162 Document Setup dialog box 17 drag
and drop 68 drawing circles 36 lines 39 rectangles 37 drop cap 25, 192–193 Drop Cap
plug-in 25
F
files restoring 4 unlocking lesson 4 Files Required for Remote Printing option 237
fill 30 Fill button 30 Find/Change commands 250–251 finding and changing text 206
first line indent 197 Fit in Window command 26 fixed spaces 222 font options
Distiller 278 fonts installing Classroom in a Book 2 Force Justify 185 Force-
justify button 62 Frame Options command 131 frames about 130 attaching text 136
converting to 177 creating 130, 158 entering text 132 placing images 159 placing
text 132
H
hand tool 32 hanging indent 31 Hide Colors command 14 Hide Guides command 40 Hide
Rulers command 16 Horizontal Reflecting button 55
E
ellipse tool 36 em dash 184, 206 em space 222
321
horizontal scaling 38 HP LaserJet 5Si printer 3 HTML and bullet characters 283
compared to PDF 267, 292–293 defined 267 exporting 289–292 formats 281 preparing
for export 279–289 preparing graphics 284–286 viewing in Web browser 268 Hyperlinks
palette 270 hyperlinks. see also anchors, sources defined 269 image map 308 on
master pages 301 to a movie 310 sorting 304 strategy for building 302 in table of
contents 305 testing 273, 300, 313 hyphenation 156
formatting entries 256 generating 314 generating an index publication 255–256 page
range 249–250 page reference 247–248 placing generated 256 previewing 253 proper
names 252 topic levels 249 inline graphics 221 invisible characters, showing/hiding
247
Library palette closing the library 204 using 187 lines 39 Link Options command 229
links creating 228 graphics 228, 229 managing 229 relinking a file 232 setting
defaults 229 updating 232 viewing status 230 Links Manager command 230 Lock Guides
command 20, 51 Lock Position command 196 locking guides 20, 51
J
justifying text 62, 98
K
kerning 39, 191 range kerning 39 keyboard shortcuts 36 knocking out defined 216
setting up 226 Kodak Photo CD images 214 Kodak Photo CD Import Filter dialog box
214
M
manual text flow 96 margin guides changing 161 setting 17 master pages applying 175
changing 163 creating 84 displaying and hiding elements 92 displaying and hiding
items 185 Master Pages palette 163 master-page icon 85 Maximize button 10
measurement system 15 misregistration 217
I
Image Control command 146, 203 image map 308 importing graphics 20 text 22 Include
in Table of Contents option 306 indenting text 31, 62, 98 Indents/tabs command 31
indexes adding entries 247 copying and pasting index markers 251 creating book list
for 245 cross-references 253, 254 customizing an entry 248–249 editing 253
Find/Change to create entries 250– 251
L
layers about 125 creating 126 locking 309 Layers palette 125 layout adjustment
preferences 161 leader tabs 262–263 leading about 24 leading methods 95 Left Indent
button 62 lesson files copying 4
N
New Anchor button 299 New Anchor command 299 New command 17 New Source command 300
Non-Printing command 78 nudging 197
322 INDEX
O
On Screen PDF Style 316 OnScreen PDF Style 41, 275 Open command 10 overprinting
defined 217 setting up 221
PDF Options dialog box 41, 275, 277 PDF Style 41, 275, 277, 316 Photo CD 214 picas
16, 47 Place command 20 placing graphics 20 text 22 text in frames 132, 136 plug-
ins Add Cont'd Line 194 Bullets and Numbering 178 Drop Cap 25 Grid Manager 186 Save
for Service Provider 236 point size 24 polygon frame tool 158 PostScript PPD 41,
275, 315 PPDs 233 installing 3 preferences 8 Preferences command General 15 Layout
Adjustment 161 Print command 40 Printer Style Acrobat 41, 275, 316 Printer Styles
defining 239 printing a book of publications 263 commercial 233 lesson projects 2
on press 216 registration 217 to a desktop laser printer 40 Promote/Demote button
249, 250 proportional leading 95 proportional resizing 87 Proxy icon 58 publication
defaults 47 pull quote 200
Q
Quit command 43
R
Reader installing 1 rectangle frame tool 130 rectangle tool 37 reference points 58
reflecting text 55 registration 217 resizing with Control palette 58 graphics 21
proportional 87 text blocks 23, 34, 52 rich black 220 Rich Text Format (RTF) 22
Right Indent button 62 rotating text blocks 65 ruler guides creating 26, 32, 50
locking 20, 51 moving 89 showing/hiding 16 rulers about 14 positioning zero point
14 resetting zero point 134 showing/hiding 16 zero point in double-sided
publications 120 rules attached to text 223 paragraph 137, 143 trapping on layout
220 running head 184
P
page icons 11 page imposition 152 page numbering across multiple publications 246,
259 inserting marker 87 page size, changing 161 PageMaker installing 1 palettes
about 11 Colors palette 29 Control palette 11 Layers 125 Master Pages 163 moving
and hiding 13 Styles palette 102 toolbox 10 panning page 32 PANTONE 54 Paragraph
command 95, 137 paragraph rules 137, 143 Paragraph-view button 38 Paste command 34
pasteboard 11 PDF compared to HTML 267, 292–293 defined 267 exporting 274, 315
viewing in Web browser 268 PDF options setting 277
S
Save As command 18 Save for Service Provider plug-in 236 Scaling button 87 screen
(tint) 196
323
Screen Job Options dialog box 278 screen redraw 25, 148 scrolling 12 searching and
replacing text 206 security Distiller 279 Select All command 24 selecting objects
underneath 88 semiautomatic text flow 96, 138, 188 Send Backward command 57, 197
Send Guides to Back command 37 Send to Back command 35 Show Guides command 16 Show
Index command 253, 254 Show Layers command 125 Show Library command 187 Show Master
Pages command 158 Show Rulers command 16 Show Styles command 14 sidebars 202 Snap
to Guides command 40 Sort Pages command 152 sources. see also anchors, hyperlinks
on master page 272 creating for a group 304 graphics 272 text 271 special effects
203 spell-checking 207 spot colors 48 applying 55 defining 53 stacking order 35, 57
start files restoring 4 Starting Adobe PageMaker 9 story 23 story editor closing
all windows 209 setting preferences 205 stroke 30 Stroke button 30
Stroke command 40 styles about 101 applying 101, 190 basing on other styles 166,
168 copying 189 creating 101, 142, 225 editing 101, 104, 165, 195, 226 removing 178
Styles palette 11, 102
reversing 124 selecting 24 threaded 97 tracking and kerning 191 text blocks about
22 drag and drop 68 dragging to define 37 grouping 57 reflecting 55 resizing 23,
34, 52 rotating 65 unthreading 100 text flow automatic 96, 172 manual 96
semiautomatic 96, 138 text tool 24 text wrap 109, 171 Text Wrap command 109, 139,
171 threaded text 97 TIFF 227 CIELAB 214 Tiling command 68 tints applying 29
defining 86 toolbox 10 moving and hiding 13 top of caps leading 95 tracking 98, 191
trapping 49 automatic 234 defined 217 overprinting a spot color 221 rules 220
T
table of contents creating book list for 245 formatting 259, 260, 262–263
generating 258–260 hyperlinks in 305 marking paragraphs to include in 258
regenerating 262 tabs 262–263 target output resolution 18 template 50 creating 49
opening 78 text baseline 26 coloring 30 Column Break command 199 creating a style
from 225 deleting 34 editing with Find/Change 206 entering 27 Force Justify 185 in
frames 132, 136 importing 22 indenting 31, 62, 98 justifying 62, 98 kerning 39
pasting 34 placing 188, 194 replacing existing 91 reverse 196
U
Undo command 21 Ungroup command 72 unlocking lesson files 4
324 INDEX
V
Vertical Reflecting button 56 view actual size 12 changing 12 fit in window 26
maximizing 10 panning page 32 scrolling 12 tiling 68
W
Web browser viewing PDF in 276 widows 193 windowshade handles 22 World Wide Web
Adobe home page 293 PDF settings for publishing 315
Z
zero point double-sided publications 120 positioning 14 resetting to default 134
zoom tool 12
Lesson 1
Flyer
In this project you’ll assemble a single-page, black-and-white flyer from start to

finish. The photograph and most of the text featured in this flyer are ready for you
to import into PageMaker. You’ll also learn how to type text directly into a
publication and you’ll draw several graphic elements (square, circle, and line).
8 LESSON 1
Flyer
For this lesson, you will open and view the final version of the flyer, and follow
the stepby-step instructions that introduce some of the basic features and tools of
PageMaker. Even if you have experience using the PageMaker application, this
introduction may reveal some useful tips and techniques.
This project covers the following topics:
• • • • •
• • •
Range kerning text Using the Snap to Guides option
Printing the flyer on a desktop laser printer Exporting the flyer to Adobe PDF
Restoring default PageMaker settings Changing the view of a publication Creating a

new publication Opening an existing publication
If this is your first time using PageMaker, it should take about 2 hours to complete
this lesson. If you have some experience using PageMaker, it should take about 90
minutes to complete this lesson.
Locating files and fonts

All files and fonts needed for this lesson are found on the Adobe PageMaker
Classroom in a Book CD-ROM in the folders 01Lesson and Fonts, respectively.
Setting up the horizontal and vertical rulers Displaying and hiding guides
Positioning the zero point
• • •
Using the pointer tool, the text tool, and the zoom tool
• • •
Restoring default settings

Before starting PageMaker, delete the PageMaker 7.0 preferences file to ensure all
settings are returned to their default values.
1 If PageMaker 7.0 is running, choose File >
Specifying multiple columns Locking the guides
Creating, placing, formatting, and positioning text and graphic elements Creating a
drop cap Applying a tint to text Specifying a hanging indent Creating ruler guides
Drawing circles, rectangles, and lines
Exit or Quit.
2 Locate the PageMaker preferences file in
• • • • • •
the following location, depending upon your system:

Windows \PageMaker 7.0\rsrc\usenglsh\
PM70.cnf Note: If Windows is set to hide filename extensions, the preferences file
will instead appear without the .cnf extension.
Adjusting the stacking order of elements on the page
Classroom in a Book
Macintosh System Folder: Preferences:
Adobe PageMaker 7.0P Prefs

3 Drag the preferences file to the Recycle
Bin (Windows) or Trash (Macintosh). The PageMaker preferences settings are returned
to their default values. To preserve your preference settings, drag the preferences
file to a different folder. When you are ready to restore the settings, drag the file
back to its original folder and click Yes when asked whether to overwrite the
existing file.
Myriad, a multiple master typeface, is a sans serif design. Myriad makes a good
text face as well as providing flexibility for filling display needs in all sizes and
media. Note: Serifs are the small strokes at the top and bottom of a letter.
Typefaces without serifs are generally called sans (without) serifs.
2 Depending on the platform, start
PageMaker as follows: In Windows, choose Start > Programs > Adobe > Adobe PageMaker
7.0 (your menus may differ depending upon your installation).
•
Starting PageMaker
After verifying that the correct fonts are installed on your computer, you will
start the PageMaker application.
1 In addition to the commonly used
fonts identified in the Getting Started chapter, make sure the following fonts are
installed on your computer: AGaramond, AGaramond Italic, and Myriad Roman. Windows
only: Because of the way Windows handles fonts, AGaramond Italic does not appear in
font menus in Windows applications. You must apply italic to AGaramond to use
AGaramond Italic.
In Mac OS, open the Adobe PageMaker 7.0 folder and double-click the Adobe®
PageMaker® 7.0 icon.
Once launched, PageMaker displays the menus and tool box. If necessary, close the
Template and Picture palettes (Windows).
10 LESSON 1
Flyer
Opening an existing publication

Opening the final version of the publication and following the step-by-step
instructions will help you become acquainted with PageMaker.
2 If the publication window does not fill the
screen, click the Maximize button in the right corner of the title bar to expand
the window.
Note: Windows users need to unlock the lesson files before using them. For
information, see Copying the Classroom in a Book files on page 4.
1 Choose File > Open, and, in the Open Macintosh Windows
Publication dialog box, locate and doubleclick the 01Final.pmd file in the 01Lesson
folder.
As you look at the publication window, notice the following elements:

A B C D E
Home Review
3 2 2 H a r v a r d S t r e e t , C a m b r i d g e
Spacious three bedroom, two bath Victorian

located in the historic city of Cambridge.
Freshly painted exterior and interior detail. Modern renovations boast the finest
electronic
appliances, and highest quality fixtures.
n the heart of the Boston area lies a true architectural gem. This Victorian
dwelling exemplifies turn-of-thecentury New England architecture at its best. In
addition to its prime location just minutes from
downtown Boston, this home enjoys spectacular views of the Charles River and the
downtown Boston skyline. Completely restored with attention to historic detail this
three-story, three-bedroom residence has incorporated all of the functional
requirements of today's home. The magnificent interior boasts all original oak
finishing, including a breathtaking spiral bannister, and built-in bookcases in the
library. The kitchen has been fully modernized with state of the art appliances,
yet retains the house’s original charm with its high ceilings, ornate moldings, and
fully operational woodstove. The original bay windows, refinished hardwood floors,
and ornate paint trim make this home’s interior complete and as spectacular as its
proud exterior. Consistent with the practical beauty of Victorian architecture, no
space is wasted. The most spectacular room of all is the converted attic. It
clearly takes full advantage of its immense size and high ceiling with skylights,
windows, and a stairway leading out to a small widow's walk. This Cambridge
residence bestows the colonial charm of New England's past upon this quaint
neighborhood. It resides just two blocks from the historic house used as George
Washington's headquarters in 1775, and later occupied by poet Henry Wadsworth
Longfellow. A stroll north on Lyon Street past a hilly intersection looks out over
the pine and maple woods of a nearby park, a dramatic contrast with the blue
Massachusetts bay beyond. These stunning views must have inspired architects to
execute
Landscaped
by a premiere Boston architect.
Close to the beautiful Charles River, this home shares the historic charm of its
Cambridge neighborhood.
their best work. For more information about this property please contact Joan
Rutherford at Harbor Realty.
K J
PageMaker opens the final version of the publication you will create in this lesson,
with horizontal and vertical rulers extending along the top and left edges of the
publication window.
A. Zero point marker B. Tool palette C. Horizontal ruler D. Page E. Publication

window F. Styles and Colors palettes G. Pasteboard H. Scroll bars I. Control
palette J. Page icons K. Vertical ruler
Toolbox Displays tools that you use for
drawing, entering or editing text, selecting and dragging objects on the page,
panning the page, and zooming in and out of the
Classroom in a Book
page. You click to select a tool. The toolbox appears in the upper left corner of
the publication window.
Styles and Colors palettes Displays the
Pointer Rotating Line Rectangle Ellipse Polygon Hand
Text Cropping Constrained line Frame tools Zoom
Control palette Lets you make precise
predefined paragraph styles and colors. PageMaker also has palettes for layers,
master pages, and hyperlinks (more about these in later lessons). To save screen
space, PageMaker lets you group the palettes you regularly use, or you can drag a
palette out of the group if you want to display it independently. To activate a
palette, you click its tab. Each palette also includes: a menu; a Maximize button
to expand and minimize the palette; and buttons to create or delete a style, color,
layer, etc.
A B C
changes to text and graphics without selecting a tool or choosing a menu command.
The Control palette appears in the lower portion of the publication window, and
changes modes depending upon what is currently selected.
Page Defines the print area of a publica-
D E
tion. Whenever you create a new publication, you specify the dimensions of the
page. Only text or graphics on the page will print.
Pasteboard Provides a workspace outside
A. Palette tab B. Maximize button C. Palette menu D. Trash button E. New button
Page icons Indicates the currently
the page where you can store and manipulate elements before positioning them on the
page. The term pasteboard, like many of the terms in this course, comes from
traditional publishing, where layout artists assemble text and graphics on a
physical pasteboard. The extra space on the board serves as a work space for
elements not yet placed on the page.
displayed page (page one in this case). PageMaker displays an icon for every page
in the publication. To view a page, you click its page icon. The L and R page icons
represent the left and right master pages.
12 LESSON 1
Flyer
Changing the view of a publication

PageMaker opens a publication in the view that was selected when it was last saved.
This publication was saved in the Fit in Window view. Note: When the size of this
page is reduced to fit within a 13-inch (or smaller) monitor, the 10-point text is
displayed as gray bars (an effect known as greeking).
1 Choose View > Actual Size.
The pointer changes to a magnifying glass. The zoom tool makes it easy to magnify
and reduce the view of selected portions of the page. With the zoom tool selected,
you can magnify the view of a specific portion of the page by either clicking or
dragging over the area.
6 With the zoom tool selected, hold down
Ctrl (Windows) or Option (Macintosh). The plus sign in the zoom tool changes to a
minus (–) sign.
7 Click the page to reduce the view of the
The view of this publication is magnified to its actual size (its size when
printed), making it possible to read the text.
2 To toggle between the Fit in Window and
page.
8 With the zoom tool still selected, drag
Actual Size views, while holding down the Ctrl key (Windows) or the Command and
Option keys (Macintosh), click the page (use the right mouse button in Windows).
Toggle back to the Actual Size view.
3 Click the scroll arrows or drag the scroll
over any portion of the page. Notice how PageMaker displays a rectangle with a
dashed line as you drag the tool. When you release the mouse button, the selected
portion of the page fills the publication window.
bars on the right and bottom edges of the publication window to scroll the page.
You may find it easier to use the following method to scroll in your publication.
4 Hold down the Alt key (Windows) or
Home Review

electronic
execute
Landscaped by a premiere Boston architect.
Option key (Macintosh), position the pointer on the page or pasteboard, hold down
the mouse button until the pointer changes to a grabber hand, and drag in any
direction to scroll the view of the page.
5 Click the zoom tool (
) in the toolbox to
9 Double-click the zoom tool in the toolbox
select it.
to switch to the Actual Size view. Using a similar shortcut, jump to the Fit in
Window
Classroom in a Book
view by holding down the Alt key (Windows) or Option key (Macintosh), and double-
clicking the zoom tool in the toolbox.
3 Click the Maximize button in the Styles
and Colors palette window until the palette window jumps to its minimum size (just
the title bar and palette tabs display).
Working with the toolbox and palettes

As you work, you may find the toolbox and palettes are in your way, especially if
you have a small screen. PageMaker gives you several options to minimize the impact
of the toolbox and palettes, while still keeping them handy. You can move the
toolbox or palettes, minimize the palettes so just the title bar and tabs show,
temporarily hide all the palettes at once, or hide each group of palettes
individually. Throughout these lessons, feel free to move or hide the toolbox and
palettes as necessary.
1 Select the hand tool (
Maximize
Minimize
4 Click the Maximize button in the palette window again to return the palette to
its full size.
If you like the palettes handy, but out of the way, you can move them to the bottom
of the screen. You’ll try this next.
5 Drag the Styles and Colors palette window
).
2 Position the pointer over the title bar of
the Styles and Colors palette window, hold down the mouse, and drag the palette to
the right edge of the publication window.
until its bottom edge aligns with the bottom of the publication window. (In Mac OS,
you may need to drag the palette window until its bottom edge aligns with the
bottom edge of the monitor screen.) Click the Maximize button in the palette
window. PageMaker reduces the palette to its minimum size and automatically drops
it to the bottom of the screen. (Normally when you minimize a palette the titlebar
remains stationary.)
6 Click the Maximize button in the palette
You can drag the toolbox or any palette anywhere within the publication window. You
can even let part of the palette or toolbox extend outside the publication window.
You’ll now see how small a palette can be while still visible.
window again to return the palette to its full size.

14 LESSON 1
Flyer
If you need to see the full screen, you can temporarily hide all the palettes and
the toolbox at once.
7 Press the Tab key.
11 Click the Colors palette tab to make it the
active palette (or choose Window > Show Colors).
The toolbox, Control palette, and Styles and Colors palettes disappear. Note: Be
careful using this shortcut when the text tool is selected. If you have text
selected with the text tool, pressing Tab replaces the text with a tab character.
If you have an insertion point in text, pressing Tab inserts a tab character into
the line.
8 Press Tab again to redisplay the toolbox and palettes.
Using the rulers

The rulers along the top and left borders of your publication window can help you
position text and graphic elements on a page.
1 Click the pointer tool ( ) in the toolbox to select it. 2 Without clicking in
your publication, move the pointer around the publication window, and notice how
the hairline indicators in the vertical and horizontal rulers correspond to the
position of the pointer.
Finally, you can hide and show the toolbox, Control palette, or other palettes
using the hide or show options on the Window menu. The Window menu has a hide or
show option for the toolbox and every palette. The options change from show to hide
depending upon whether the toolbox or palette is displayed or, for palettes that
are grouped, whether the palette is active.
9 Choose Window > Hide Colors.
Also notice how when no text or graphic elements are selected in your publication,
the Control palette displays the horizontal and vertical position of the cursor as
X and Y coordinates, respectively. Note: Since inches is the unit of measure
established for this publication, the Control palette and the horizontal and
vertical rulers display in inches.
Because the Colors and Styles palettes are grouped together, PageMaker hides both
palettes.
10 Choose Window > Show Styles to
Positioning the zero point

The point on your page (or pasteboard) that aligns with zero on both the horizontal
and vertical rulers is known as the zero point. By default, the zero point of
single-sided publications is located at the upper left corner of the page. To make
it easier to measure distances from specific areas of your page, you can move the
zero point to any location.
redisplay the palettes. Notice that both palettes are displayed, but now the Styles
palette is the active palette.
Classroom in a Book
1 Without clicking in your publication,
4 Double-click the crosshair of the zero
move the pointer to the upper left corner of the page. Notice how the zeros on the
horizontal and vertical rulers are aligned at this location. (If necessary, click
the scroll bars along the right and bottom edges of the publication window to view
the upper left corner of the page.)
2 With the pointer tool selected, position
point to restore the zero point to its default location at the upper left corner of
the page.
Setting up the rulers

You can set the horizontal and vertical rulers to the measurement system you
prefer. In general, it’s a good idea to choose a measurement system before you
assemble a publication.
1 Choose File > Preferences > General.
the pointer on the intersection of the rulers in the upper left corner of your
publication window (on the zero point marker as shown below), and hold down the
mouse button.
1 2 3 4 5
Zero point marker
Home Rev
The Preferences dialog box lets you customize PageMaker. If a publication is open,
the options you select in the Preferences dialog box apply to that publication
only. If no publication is open, the options you choose apply to all new
publications you create. Notice how Inches is selected for both the Measurements In
and Vertical Ruler options. PageMaker lets you set the horizontal and vertical
rulers to different units of measurement.
2 Choose Picas for Vertical Ruler and
3 With the mouse button still held down, drag the zero point down and right until
the horizontal and vertical guides are roughly aligned with the upper left edge of
the letter H in the display text Home Review, and release the mouse button.
1 2 3 4 5
click OK.
Home Rev
The horizontal and vertical rulers indicate the new location of the zero point.
16 LESSON 1
Flyer
The horizontal ruler reflects the unit of measure (Inches) originally selected for
the Measurements In option. The vertical ruler indicates picas as the unit of
measure. Note:: Derived from an old term for metal type of that size, a pica is a
measure of type (approximately equal to 1/6 of an inch), divided into 12 points
(each point equal to .0138 (1/72) of an inch). Notice how the text and graphic
elements remain in the same position on the page. Even though you usually work with
one unit of measure throughout a publication, you can see it is possible to change
to another unit of measure at any time without altering the positioning of
elements.
3 As a shortcut to the Preferences dialog
1 Choose View > Show Guides to display
all nonprinting guides used to create this publication. Notice the cyan horizontal
and vertical lines positioned at various locations on the page. These ruler guides
are used to position text and graphics on the page accurately. It is possible to
have as many as 120 ruler guides on the page, in any combination of horizontal and
vertical. The pink horizontal lines at the top and bottom of the columns are the
top and bottom margin guides. The darker blue vertical lines indicate the columns.
Column guides help define areas for text to flow into automatically. Note: Column
guides overlap the left and right margin guides.
A
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
box, double-click the pointer tool in the tool box. For Vertical Ruler, choose
Inches, and click OK to restore the original measurement system. Sometimes you will
want to hide the rulers so you have more room on the screen to view your
publication.
4 Choose View > Hide Rulers to hide the
rulers.
5 Choose View > Show Rulers to once again
display the rulers.
Displaying guides
Nonprinting guides make it easier to assemble a publication like this.
10
11
A. Column guides B. Bottom Margin guide C. Ruler guides

Classroom in a Book
2 If you have altered 01Final.pmd, choose
File > Revert, and when prompted, click OK to revert to the original version of the
file. Note: If you have saved any changes made to the 01Final.pmd file, copy the
original 01Final.pmd file from the 01Lesson folder on the Adobe PageMaker 7.0
Classroom in a Book CD-ROM.
PostScript printer) in the Print dialog box when it is time to print. You can also
use the
Export Adobe PDF command to create an Adobe PDF version of the project rather than
a printed copy, as described in Creating an Adobe PDF version of the flyer on page
41.
Assembling a two-column flyer

After creating a new publication, you will place and format text and graphics to
assemble this two-column flyer. So that you can use the 01Final.pmd publication as a
reference, leave it open as you assemble the flyer.
Planning to print this flyer

It’s a good idea to gather all printing requirements before you start to work.
Designed to be printed on a 300 dpi (dots per inch) desktop laser printer, this
flyer (including the grayscale TIFF image scanned at 100 dpi), can print
successfully on a wide variety of PostScript and non-PostScript printers. Most
printers do not print to the very edge of the page. You need to determine the
maximum printable area your printer can print, and adapt your designs accordingly.
If the documentation that came with your printer does not provide the dimensions of
the maximum printable area, you can manually determine it. To do so, draw a shaded
box in a PageMaker publication that covers an entire page, and print the page. (By
the end of this lesson you’ll know how to draw and fill objects.) The resulting
printed page will show you the print area, also known as the imageable area. Note:
If you do not have the required printer, you can still create the project as
directed and then print it on your own printer by
Creating a new publication

After setting the options in the Document Setup dialog box, you will name and save
your publication.
1 Choose File > New.
The Document Setup dialog box prompts you to establish some of the specifications
for the flyer.
2 In the Document Setup dialog box, click
Double-sided to deselect it and type .75 for the left margin. Make sure the Right,
Top,
selecting your printer and its PPD (if it is a

18 LESSON 1
Flyer
and Bottom options display a value of 0.75 (to establish a .75-inch margin around
the entire page).
5 Drag the column guide back to its original
position over the margin guide.
3 In the Document Setup dialog box,
choose 300 for Target Output Resolution and choose (Windows only) the printer that
matches your printer for Compose to Printer (or HP LaserJet 5Si if you don’t have a
300 dpi printer). Then click OK. By default, every publication has at least one
column that spans the area between the left and right margin guides. For this
reason, the dark blue vertical column guides overlap the pink left and right margin
guides.
4 With the pointer tool selected, position the pointer on either vertical dark blue
column guide, hold down the mouse button until the cursor becomes a double-headed
arrow, and drag the column guide left or right. When you release it, you can view
the pink margin guide behind it.
Note: Unlike many word-processing applications, PageMaker makes it possible to

print text and graphics positioned between the edge of the page and the margins.
6 Choose File > Save As, and in the dialog
box type 01Work.pmd for the file name and make sure Publication is selected for Save
as Type (Windows) or Save As (Macintosh). Locate and select the 01Lesson folder and
click Save.
PageMaker lets you adjust the size of a single column to a different width than the
area between the left and right margin guides.
Classroom in a Book
PageMaker saves the 01Work.pmd publication. The .pmd filename extension is required
in PageMaker for Windows and will be added to a filename if you don’t include it.
PageMaker on the Macintosh does not require the filename extension, nor will it add
it to filenames. However, if you transfer files to a Windows computer, the extension
lets PageMaker for Windows recognize and open the file.
entire area between the left and right margin guides. The vertical space between
the columns is called the gutter.
Gutter
Specifying column guides

With the .75-inch margins already established using the Document Setup dialog box,
you are ready to add column guides and ruler guides. For this flyer, you will divide
the page into two columns.
1 Choose Layout > Column Guides, and, in
To create columns of varying width, you can drag the column guides, manually
resizing the columns.
2 With the pointer tool selected, position the pointer on any column guide, and
drag the column guide to the left or right. 3 Choose Layout > Column Guides, and,
in the Column Guides dialog box, notice how Number of Columns is set to Custom.
Type 2 for Number of Columns to restore the two columns of equal width, and click
OK. 4 Choose File > Save.
the Column Guides dialog box, type 2 for Number of Columns and .25 for the Space
Between Columns (Windows) or Space Between (Mac OS), and click OK.
When you specify two or more (up to twenty) columns, PageMaker automatically
creates columns of equal width, filling the
20 LESSON 1
Flyer
Locking the guides

Once you have established the final design grid, it is a good idea to lock the
guides, preventing column and ruler guides being moved accidentally.
1 Choose View > Lock Guides to select the
To cancel importing when the loaded graphic (or text) icon is displayed, click the
pointer tool in the toolbox.
2 With the loaded graphic icon (
Windows or
option.
2 Attempt to move the column guides.
Mac OS), click anywhere on the page to place the photograph.

PageMaker positions the photograph so that its top left corner is aligned with the
position of the top left corner of the loaded graphic icon where you clicked to
place the photograph. The eight square graphics handles displayed at the corners
and edges of the photograph indicate the graphic is selected, and make it possible
to resize the graphic vertically, horizontally, or both. The Control palette
reflects the attributes of the selected graphic, and offers another way to
manipulate objects. You can move and resize objects precisely by entering values in
the Control palette. Now that the photograph is placed in the flyer, you will
position the photograph in the lower left portion of the page, reduce the size of
the photograph, and then undo the resizing operation.
Note: If you want to move or delete a guide (margin, column, or ruler) when the
guides are locked, choose View > Lock Guides to deselect the option. After you move
or delete a guide, relock the guides.
Placing a graphic
You will use the Place command to import a photograph into the flyer. PageMaker lets
you import, link, and export text and graphic elements that are saved in a
PageMaker-compatible format. For more information on placing graphics, refer to the
Adobe PageMaker 7.0 User Guide. This particular photograph was scanned on a flatbed
scanner, imported into Adobe Photoshop® to be sized for the flyer, and saved as a
grayscale TIFF image at a resolution of 100 dpi.
1 Choose File > Place. Locate and open the
3 With the pointer tool selected, click in the
01Lesson folder, and then double-click the 01ArtA.tif file. The pointer changes to a
loaded graphic icon. You will position the graphic icon where you want the upper
left corner of the graphic to appear.
center of the photograph, and hold down the mouse button until the pointer changes
to an arrowhead ( ).
4 With the mouse button still held down, drag the photograph beyond the bottom edge
of the page.
Classroom in a Book
PageMaker automatically scrolls the page when the pointer reaches the edge of the
publication window. If you drag outside the publication window, PageMaker stops
scrolling.
5 With the mouse button still held down,
6 With the pointer tool still selected, click
on one of the corner handles, and drag toward the center of the photograph,
reducing its size.
drag the photograph until its left and bottom edges are aligned with the left and
bottom margin guides, respectively, and release the mouse button.
Even though it is possible to resize bitmap images in PageMaker, you will get the
best printing results if your images are accurately sized before you import them
into PageMaker.
7 If necessary, choose Edit > Undo Stretch
After placing and aligning text in column 2, you will reposition the photograph to
be aligned with the text. For now, take this opportunity to experiment with
resizing the photograph.
to restore the photograph to its original size. Important: PageMaker lets you undo
only a single level of modification. Any subsequent action, even just clicking the
mouse, disables the Undo command. If you are unable to restore the photograph to
its original size, click the photograph with the pointer tool to select it, press
the Delete key, and re-import the 01ArtA.tif file as explained in steps 1 and 2.
22 LESSON 1
Flyer
8 With the pointer tool still selected, hold
The pointer changes to a loaded text icon.

2 Position the loaded text icon (
down Shift and drag the top-center handle of the photograph up towards the top of
the page. Normally when you drag a top or side center handle, PageMaker resizes
only in a vertical (or horizontal) direction. However, resizing with the Shift key
maintains the proportions of the image, regardless of the handle you use.
9 Choose Edit > Undo Stretch to restore the
) in
column 2 below the top margin guide. Click to place the text (avoid clicking
outside of the column).
photograph to its original size or place it again (as described in steps 1 and 2).
10 Choose File > Save.
Note: Choosing the Save command deselects all objects in a publication.
Placing text in column 2

You can insert text created in other wordprocessing applications into a PageMaker
publication. PageMaker supports a wide variety of word-processing applications and
text-file formats, including Rich Text Format (.rtf). You can also import text from
documents created using earlier versions of PageMaker. For information on
installing filters for importing different file types into PageMaker, see the Adobe
PageMaker 7.0 online Help.
1 Choose File > Place, and, in the dialog
The text flows into the column automatically. Note: If you click outside of the
column, the text will not flow into the column. If this is the case, make sure the
pointer tool is selected, click the placed text, press the Delete key, and import
the 01TextA.doc file again. The windowshades that stretch horizontally across the
top and bottom borders of the text indicate the text is selected as a text block. A
text block, like a graphic, is an object that you can move, resize, and reshape. In
box, double-click the 01TextA.doc file in the 01Lesson folder.

Classroom in a Book
addition to the loops in the center, a selected text block has square corner
handles at each end of the windowshade. With the pointer tool selected, you can
drag a corner handle to adjust the size of a text block.
A B
3 Position the pointer on the bottom
windowshade handle (bottom loop), and drag up to reduce the size of the text block.
In the heart of the Boston area lies a true architectural gem. This Victorian
dwelling exemplifies turn-of-the-century New England architecture at its best. In
addition to its prime location just minutes from downtown Boston, this home enjoys
spectacular views of the Charles River and the downtown Boston skyline. Completely
restored with attention to historic detail this three-story, three-bedroom
residence has incorporated the functional requirements of today’s home. The
magnificent interior boasts all original oak finishing, including a breathtaking
spiral banister, and built-in bookcases in the library. The kitchen has been fully
modernized with state of the art appliances, yet retains the house’s original charm
with its high ceilings, ornate moldings, and functional wood stove. The original
bay windows, refinished hardwood floors, and ornate paint trim make this home’s
interior equally spectacular as its exterior. Consistent with the practical beauty
of Victorian architecture, no space is wasted. The most spectacular
residence has incorporated the functional requirements of today’s home. The
spiral banister, and built-in bookcases in the library. The kitchen has been fully
with its high ceilings, ornate moldings, and functional wood stove. The original
bay windows, refinished hardwood floors, and ornate paint trim make this home’s
interior equally spectacular as its exterior. Consistent with the practical beauty
of Victorian architecture, no space is wasted. The most spectacular room of all is
the converted attic, taking full advantage of its utterly gigantic size and high
ceiling with skylights, windows, and a stairway leading out to a widow's walk. This
home bestows the colonial charm of New England's past upon this quaint
execute their best work. For more information about this property and others in the
Boston area contact Joan Rutherford at Harbor Realty.
A. Corner handle B. Top windowshade handle C. Bottom windowshade handle
A red triangle appears in the bottom windowshade handle, indicating the end of the
story is not displayed.
4 Position the pointer on the bottom windowshade handle (bottom loop), and drag
down, making sure the entire story is displayed.
The empty windowshade handle at the top of a text block indicates the beginning of
a story. The empty windowshade handle at the bottom of a text block indicates the
end of a story. A story is text recognized by PageMaker as a single unit. A story
can be one letter or several hundred pages of text, and can be contained in a
single text block or threaded through many different ones.
Note: Clicking, rather than dragging, the red triangle loads the remaining text,
causing the cursor to be displayed as a loaded text icon. If you clicked the
triangle by mistake, click the pointer tool in the toolbox to cancel. Then click
the text again to select it as a text block. Much like adjusting the height and
width of a graphic element, you can adjust the height and width of a text block by
dragging a corner handle (at the left and right ends of the windowshade).
24 LESSON 1
Flyer
the pointer on the bottom left corner handle of the text block in column 2, hold
down the mouse button until the pointer changes to a double-headed arrow, drag it
in any direction, and release the mouse button, adjusting the width and the height
of the text block. PageMaker automatically reflows the text within the text block.
Depending on the size of the text block, the red triangle in the bottom windowshade
handle may indicate the entire story is not displayed.
6 Choose Edit > Undo Stretch to restore the
The pointer changes to an I-beam, and the Control palette displays frequently used
character specification options, providing quick access to most of the options that
are available from the menus. You can select a single character or the entire
contents of a text block by dragging the text tool across the target text. To
select a word, double-click it with the text tool. To select a paragraph, triple-
click it with the text tool. For this flyer, you need to change the font and size of
all the text in the column. The next step shows you the easiest way to select the
entire story.
3 With the text tool, click the text in column 2 to establish an insertion point (a
blinking vertical bar where you can begin typing). Choose Edit > Select All.
text block to its original size. If you are unable to restore the text block to its
original size, click the text block with the pointer tool to select it, press the
Delete key, and import the 01TextA.doc file again as described in steps 1 and 2.
Formatting the text in column 2

You will apply character specifications (such as size, typeface, and type style) to
the text in column 2 using the Control palette. Note: To create, edit, or format
text, the text tool must be selected.
1 Choose View > Actual Size. 2 Click the text tool ( ) in the toolbox to select it.
The character specifications you select in the Control palette apply to selected
text only. You will change the font, point size, and leading. The point size of a
font is the height of the font from the bottom of the descenders (such as p) to the
top of the ascenders (such as h), but does not indicate the height of each letter.
For example, a lowercase “a” set in 12-point type is not 12 points high. Leading is
the vertical space in which text is placed. Like type size, leading is measured in
points. Unlike type size, which varies with each letter, leading is an exact
measurement.
Classroom in a Book
12-point leading is always 12 points high. This vertical space for type is also
referred to as the slug or the leading slug.
4 In the Control palette, choose Myriad
Creating a drop cap

A drop cap is a large initial letter that spans two or more lines of text.
1 Select the zoom tool ( ) in the toolbox, and drag over the first paragraph in
column 2 to magnify its view. 2 Select the text tool (
Roman for Font, type 9.5 for Size and 17 for Leading, and click the Apply button.
A B
), and drag to select the first letter of the first paragraph in column 2.
In the heart of the Boston area lies a true arch This Victorian dwelling
exemplifies turn-of-th England architecture at its best. In addition to tion just
minutes from downtown Boston, th
A. Font pop-up menu B. Size C. Leading D. Apply button
When formatting text using the Control palette, it is possible to apply the
specification by pressing Enter or Return, rather than clicking the Apply button.
However, if the Control palette is not active, pressing Enter or Return instead
replaces the selected text with a hard carriage return.
residence has incorporated all of the functional requirements of today's home. The
spiral bannister, and built-in bookcases in the library. The kitchen has been fully
with its high ceilings, ornate moldings, and fully operational woodstove. The
original bay windows, refinished hardwood floors, and ornate paint trim make this
home’s interior complete and as spectacular as its proud exterior. Consistent with
the practical beauty of Victorian architecture, no space is wasted. The most
spectacular room of all is the converted attic. It clearly takes full advantage of
its immense size and high ceiling with skylights, windows, and a stairway leading
out to a small widow's walk. This Cambridge residence bestows the colonial charm of
New England's past upon this quaint neighborhood. It resides just two blocks from
the historic house used as George Washington's headquarters in 1775, and later
occupied by poet Henry Wadsworth Longfellow. A stroll north on Lyon Street past a
hilly intersection looks out over the pine and maple woods of a nearby park, a
dramatic contrast with the blue Massachusetts bay beyond. These stunning views must
have inspired architects to execute their best work. For more information about
this property please contact Joan Rutherford at Harbor Realty.
3 In the Control palette, choose AGara-
mond (Regular) for Font. When you choose from a pop-up menu or click a button in
the Control palette, PageMaker automatically applies the formatting or effect to
the selection. In contrast, when you type a value in the Control palette you must
click the Apply button or press Enter or Return for the change to take effect.
4 Choose Utilities > Plug–ins >Drop Cap,
type 4 for Size, and click OK.
5 Press Ctrl (Windows) or Command (Macintosh) together with the Shift and F12 keys
to force PageMaker to redraw the screen at the current screen view.
26 LESSON 1
Flyer
6 Choose View > Fit in Window to view the
entire page.
snaps to the bottom margin guide, with its left and right edges still aligned with
the column guides.
execute their best work. For more information about this property please contact
Joan Rutherford at Harbor Realty.
7 Choose File > Save. 3 Choose File > Save.
Positioning the text block in column 2

You will position the text block in column 2, aligning its bottom edge with the
bottom margin guide.
1 Select the pointer tool, and click the text
Positioning the graphic

Aligning text and graphic elements within a publication is one of the keys to
successful page layout. To allow for a two-line caption under the photograph, you
will align the bottom of the photograph with the baseline of the text in the column
2. The baseline is the imaginary line on which the text (letters) rests. Descenders
(such as y) fall below the baseline.
1 Magnify the view of the lower third of
in column 2 to select it as a text block. You can use the Shift key as you drag
objects to move them in a straight line horizontally or vertically.
2 With the text still selected as a text block, position the pointer on the text in
the middle of the text block. Hold down Shift, and drag the text block until its
bottom edge
the page.
2 Position the pointer on the horizontal ruler, hold down the mouse button until
the pointer becomes a double-headed arrow.
Classroom in a Book
3 Drag down to create a horizontal ruler
guide that is aligned with the baseline of the third to last line of text in column
2, and release the mouse button. Because you locked the guides earlier in this
lesson, once you release the mouse you cannot adjust the guide. To move or delete
the guide, temporarily unlock the guides (choose View > Lock Guides to deselect the
option). So that you don’t accidently move the graphic or the text block, position
the pointer over the guide in the margin or between columns. Then, either drag the
guide to the correct location, or drag it off the page to delete it. Then, relock
the guides.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
edge snaps to the horizontal ruler guide (that you just created), with its left and
right edges still aligned with the column guides.
The photograph is aligned with the text in column 2, and you are ready to create
the caption for the photograph.
finishing, including a
breathtaking spiral bannister, and built-in bookcases in the library. The kitchen
has been fully modernized with state of the art appliances, yet retains the house’s
original charm with its high ceilings, ornate moldings, and fully operational
woodstove. The original bay windows, refinished hardwood floors, and ornate paint
trim make this home’s interior complete and as spectacular as its proud exterior.
Consistent with the practical beauty of Victorian architecture, no space is wasted.
The most spectacular room of all is the converted attic. It clearly takes full
advantage of its immense size and high ceiling with skylights, windows, and a
stairway leading out to a small widow's walk. This Cambridge residence bestows the
colonial charm
Creating the caption

Rather than importing existing text into PageMaker, you will type the two-line
caption below the photograph and position it so the text block snaps to the bottom
margin guide. PageMaker has all the word-processing capabilities you need to type
and format your text from scratch. While it is possible to create and edit text in
layout view, you may find many advantages to using Story Editor, the full-featured
word processor included
of New England's past upon this quaint neighborhood. It resides just two blocks
from the historic house used as George Washington's headquarters in 1775, and later
occupied by poet Henry Wadsworth Longfellow. A stroll
north on Lyon Street past a hilly intersection looks out over the pine and maple
woods of a nearby park, a dramatic contrast with the blue Massachusetts bay beyond.
These stunning views must have inspired architects to execute their best work. For
more information about this property please contact Joan Rutherford at Harbor
Realty.
10
11
4 With the pointer tool selected, hold down
Shift (to constrain the movement to 90º), and drag the photograph until its bottom
28 LESSON 1
Flyer
with PageMaker. For more information about the Story Editor, refer to the Adobe
PageMaker 7.0 User Guide. Just as with formatting text, you must select the text
tool to enter or edit text.
1 Select the text tool (
block until its bottom edge snaps to the bottom margin guide, with its left and
right edges still aligned with the column guides. Because the caption and the text
in column 2 both have the same leading value and are snapped to the same guide,
their baselines align.
just two blocks from the historic house used as George Washington's headquarters in
1775, and later occupied by poet Henry Wadsworth Longfellow. A stroll north on Lyon
Street past a hilly intersection looks out over the pine and maple woods of a
nearby park, a dramatic contrast with the blue Massachusetts bay beyond. These
stunning views must have inspired architects to execute their best work.
), and click in column 1 below the photograph to establish an insertion point.

The blinking cursor on the left margin guide indicates the position of the
insertion point.
For more information about this property and others in the Boston area contact Joan
2 Type the following sentence:
Cambridge neighborhood. Because you established an insertion point within column 1,
the width of the text block automatically equals the width of the column.
3 With the text tool still selected, triple-click
Placing text in column 1

Again, you will place text created and saved with a word-processing application,
automatically flowing it into column 1.
1 Choose View > Fit in Window. 2 Choose File > Place, and in the Place
the caption to select it. Triple-clicking text selects a single paragraph.

Document dialog box, double-click the 01TextB.doc file in the 01Lesson folder. The
pointer changes to a loaded text icon.
mond (Regular) for Font, type 11 for Size ( ) and 17 for Leading ( ), and click the
Italic button ( ). Note: When you apply italic to AGaramond, PageMaker uses
AGaramond Italic. On the Macintosh, you can get the same result if you select
AGaramond Italic directly.
5 Select the pointer tool, click the caption to
select it as a text block, hold down Shift (to constrain the movement to 90º), and
position the pointer over the text. Drag the text
Classroom in a Book
3 With the loaded text icon displayed, click
in column 1 a little below the top margin guide to place the text.
Roman for Font, type 10 for Size and 26 for Leading, click the Bold button ( ).
Spacious three bedroom, two bath Victorian located in the historic city of
Cambridge.
electronic appliances, and highest quality fixtures. Landscaped by a premiere
Boston architect.
execute
Applying a tint to text

The text flows into the column automatically.
4 Select the zoom tool (
) in the toolbox
A tint is a lightened color. For this lesson, you will use the Colors palette to
apply a 40% tint of black (gray) to the first word in each paragraph above the
photograph. In addition to applying colors and tints to text, you can apply colors
and tints to lines, rectangles, ellipses, polygons, and monochrome or grayscale
bitmap images (such as TIFF images) that you import into PageMaker.
and drag over the entire left column above the photograph.
5 Select the text tool ( ), click anywhere in the new text block to establish an
insertion point, and choose Edit > Select All to select the entire story.
30 LESSON 1
Flyer
1 If not already displayed, click the Colors
palette tab to activate the Colors palette.

Stroke button Fill button Both button Colors palette tab Tint pop-up menu
Double-clicking text with the text tool selects an entire word.

Spacious three bedroom, two bath Victorian located in the historic city of
Cambridge. Freshly painted exterior and interior detail. Modern renovations boast
the finest electronic
RGB model CMYK model Process color Spot color
appliances, and highest quality fixtures. Landscaped by a premiere Boston

architect.
PageMaker groups the Styles and Colors palettes together. (You’ll learn more about
styles in Lessons 3 and 4.) The Colors palette displays a list of available colors
with icons that indicate the model used to define the color (such as CMYK or RGB)
and the type of color (such as Spot or Process). You select the Stroke, Fill, or
Both button when you want to tint or color the stroke (the line or outline) or fill
(the interior) of an object you’ve drawn in PageMaker. To apply color (or a tint of
a color) to text, you must select the text with the text tool.
2 With the text tool selected, double-click
3 In the Colors palette, make sure [Black] is selected in the list of colors, and
choose 40% from the Tint pop-up menu to apply a 40% tint of black to the text.
In addition to applying a tint, you will format the first word of each paragraph to
display a 20-point italic font.
4 With the first word still selected, in the
the first word (in the first paragraph) in column 1 to select it.
Control palette choose AGaramond for Font, type 22 for Size, and click the Italic
button ( ).
Classroom in a Book
5 Repeat steps 2 to 4 for the first word in
each paragraph of this text block.

electronic

The Indents/Tabs dialog box displays a ruler. The zero point of the Indents/Tabs
ruler corresponds with the left edge of the column, not with the zero point of the
publication window. When you choose the Indents/Tabs command, PageMaker tries to
align the zero point of the Indents/Tabs ruler with the left edge of the selected
text. However, the current display size, the position of the selected text in the
publication window, together with the monitor size, may force PageMaker to center
the dialog box in the publication window.
3 In the Indents/Tabs dialog box, position
Indenting the text

You can use the Indents/Tabs command to set tab stops (up to 40 per column), the
indent levels of paragraphs, and the leader style (such as dots or dashes) for the
spaces between tab stops. In this example, you will indent all lines that follow
the first line of each paragraph by setting a hanging indent. Note: Indents move
text inward from the left and right edges of a text block, and tabs position text
at specific locations in a text block.
1 With the text tool selected, click the text in column 1 to establish an insertion
point, and choose Edit > Select All to select the text. 2 Choose Type >
Indents/Tabs.
the pointer on the bottom black triangle at the zero point on the ruler, and drag
it to the ½-inch mark on the ruler. (0.5 inches displays for Position.) Note that
the top triangle moves with the bottom triangle.
To move the bottom triangle independently, hold down Shift as you drag.
4 Drag the top black triangle back to its
original position aligned with the zero point on the ruler. (–0.5 inches displays
for Position.) Click OK.
5 Click outside the text to deselect it.
32 LESSON 1
Flyer
The text in column 1 displays a ½-inch hanging indent.
3 From the horizontal ruler, drag to create a
horizontal ruler guide that aligns with the baseline of the first line of text in
column 2.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1
electronic

2 located in the historic city of Cambridge.
electronic
3 appliances, and highest quality fixtures.
library. The kitchen has been fully modernized with state of

4

Creating a ruler guide

Now that the text in column 1 is placed and formatted, you are ready to align it
with the text in column 2. You will create a ruler guide that touches the baseline
of the text in column 2, and then align the baseline of the text in column 1 with
this guide.
1 Click the hand tool (
As you drag down from the horizontal ruler, the Y indicator in the Control palette
displays the precise position of the pointer.
in the top portion of column 1 to select it as a text block.

5 Position the cursor on the text block, hold down Shift (to constrain the
movement), and hold down the mouse button until the pointer changes to an
arrowhead.
) in the toolbox.
The pointer changes to a hand icon. The hand tool lets you move or pan the page
within the publication window. You will shift the page over a little so you can see
some of the text in column 2 as well.
2 Position the hand tool in the middle of the
text block in column 1, hold down the mouse button, and drag left until some of the
text in column 2 is displayed. (You want to be able to see a portion of the first
line of text in both columns.)
If you click on the object or text block and hold the mouse button down until the
pointer changes to an arrowhead, PageMaker displays the object or text while you
drag it. On the other hand, if you move a selection immediately, PageMaker displays
only the bounding box of the object or text block.
Classroom in a Book
6 With the Shift key still held down, drag
3 Click the pasteboard above the page to
the text block until the baseline of the first line of text is aligned with the
horizontal ruler guide you just created. Its left edge should still be aligned with
the left guide of column 1.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
establish an insertion point. (If necessary, shift the page down to view the
pasteboard.) To pan the page without changing tools, hold down Alt (Windows) or
Option (Macintosh), and drag the page as needed. When you release the mouse button,
the pointer returns to the selected tool. Before typing the text, you will specify
the character formatting.
4 In the Control palette, select AGaramond

electronic
library. The kitchen has been fully modernized with state of
The baselines of the text in both columns are now aligned.

for Font, type 82 for Size ( ), and click the Apply button ( ).
5 Type Home Review.
Creating the display text

You will create the display text (heading) and position it above the columns of
text. Display text, by its size, weight, or font design, is used to attract
attention. After typing the heading and assigning text attributes, you will align
the heading text on a ruler guide.
1 Choose View > Actual Size. 2 Select the text tool (
Note: When you create or place text on any part of the pasteboard (except the
pasteboard to the left of the page), the width of the text block automatically
equals the width of the area between the left and right margin guides.
horizontal ruler guide at 1.5 inches. You will align the baseline of the text with
this horizontal ruler guide.
7 Select the pointer tool, click the words
) in the toolbox.
Home Review to select it as a text block, position the pointer on one of the right
corner handles, hold down the mouse button until the pointer changes to a diagonal
double-headed arrow, drag it until
34 LESSON 1
Flyer
it is roughly aligned with the right edge of the text, and release the mouse
button, reducing the width of the text block.
2 Choose Edit > Cut to cut the selected text. 3 Select the pointer tool, click the
word
Home Review
8 With Home Review still selected as a text
Home to select it as a text block, and drag the bottom right corner handle until it
is roughly aligned with the right edge of the text, reducing the width of the text
block to better organize your work space.
Home
block, position the pointer on the text block, and hold down the mouse button until
the pointer changes to an arrowhead.
9 With the mouse button still held down, drag the text block until the baseline of
the display text is aligned with the 1.5-inch horizontal ruler guide, with the left
edge of the text aligned with the left margin guide, and release the mouse button.
Home Review
To toggle between the selected tool and the pointer tool, hold down Ctrl (Windows)
or Command (Macintosh), and press the spacebar. As you press the spacebar, the tool
changes to the zoom tool. However, when you release the spacebar, the tool switches
to either the pointer or the previously selected tool. (Holding down Ctrl or
Command and the spacebar while you click or drag is a zoom tool shortcut.)
4 Select the text tool, and choose Edit >
Cutting and pasting text

You will cut the word Review, paste it back into a separate text block, and then
increase its point size.
Paste. The pasted text appears as a selected text block.

5 Select the text tool again, and double-click
), and double-click the word Review to select it.

the word Review to select it.
6 In the Control palette, type 122 for Size,
and click the Apply button.

Classroom in a Book
The word Review is set in a larger point size than the word Home.
Applying a tint to the display text

You will apply a 20% tint of black to Review.
1 In the Colors palette make sure [Black] is
To move a text block (or graphic) in increments, select the text block or graphic
with the pointer tool, and either press the arrow keys or click the X and Y nudge
buttons in the Control palette.
selected in the list of colors, and choose 20% from the Tint pop-up menu. Now that
you have applied a tint of black to the text, reduce the size of the text block and
position it.
Adjusting the stacking order

Notice how the word Review overlaps the word Home. Since you just pasted the word
Review back into the publication, the text object Review is positioned at the top
of the stack. As you place, paste, draw, or create text or graphic elements,
PageMaker keeps track of their stacking order on the page. Moving or modifying an
object does not affect the stacking order.
1 With the pointer tool selected, click the
horizontal ruler guide at 1.75 inches.

3 Select the pointer tool, click the word
Review to select it as a text block, and drag a right corner handle until it is
roughly aligned with the right edge of the text, reducing the size of the text
block.
4 With the text still selected as a text block,
drag the text block until the baseline of the text is aligned with the 1.75-inch
horizontal ruler guide, with the stem of the uppercase R in the word Review
intersecting the lowercase e in the word Home.
word Review to select it as a text block.

2 Choose Element > Arrange > Send to
Back to stack the word Review behind the word Home, at the bottom of the stack.
Home Review
Home Review
dwelling exemplifies turn-of-thecentury New England architecture at its best In
I
36 LESSON 1
Flyer
Since the Send to Back command sends the selected text or graphic element to the
bottom of the stack, the word Home overlaps the word Review.
2 Click the ellipse tool (
) in the toolbox to
select it. The pointer changes to a crosshair icon. You can make the ellipse tool
draw a circle by holding down Shift as you drag.
3 Hold down Shift and drag to draw a circle
Drawing a circle
PageMaker offers a variety of drawing tools, giving you more options for creating
graphics. You will use the ellipse tool to draw a circle, accentuating the dot
above the letter i in the word Review.
approximately twice the size of the dot above the letter i, and release the mouse
button.
), and drag over
the letter i in the word Review.
Review Review
Home Review
If you are not satisfied with the size of the circle, make sure the graphic handles
are displayed around the circle (indicating it is selected), press the Delete key,
and draw another circle.
4 In the Colors palette, make sure the Both
Your Adobe PageMaker 7.0 Quick Reference Card and the PageMaker online help list
keyboard shortcuts for selecting tools and menu commands. To access shortcuts in
online help, choose Help > Help Topics, and select Windows Shortcuts from the
Contents listing (Windows), or choose Help > PageMaker Help Topics, and select
Macintosh Shortcuts from the Contents listing (Macintosh).
button ( ) is selected, and click [Black] to apply the color black to the stroke
and fill of the circle.
5 Select the pointer tool, click the circle to
select it, and drag it until it is centered on the dot above the letter i.
Classroom in a Book
Drawing a box
After drawing a box, you will assign a width to the stroke around the box, and
manually position it below the words Home Review.
1 Choose View > Actual Size, and scroll to
5 Choose Element > Stroke > Hairline to
assign a stroke style and weight to the stroke of the box. Note: Even though you
will not perceive a difference in stroke width on most monitors, the stroke will
print correctly on printers with 600 dpi or greater. Most monitors cannot display
fractional stroke widths in the Actual Size view. Notice that after you release the
mouse button, part of the box is obscured by the ruler guide. By default, the ruler
guides appear in front of all text and graphics.
6 Choose View > Send Guides to Back to
view the page just below the display text Home Review.
2 From the horizontal ruler, drag once to
create a horizontal ruler guide at 2 inches and again to create one at

approximately 2.3 inches.
3 Click the rectangle tool (
) in the tool-
box to select it. The pointer changes to a crosshair. Using the rectangle tool, you
can draw rectangles or squares of any size.
4 Position the crosshair on the intersection
display the guides behind the text and graphics. The hairline is displayed on the
page.
of the left margin guide and the 2-inch horizontal ruler guide. Hold down the mouse
button, and drag to the intersection of the right margin guide and the 2.3-inch
horizontal ruler guide. Release the mouse button to complete the box.
Dragging to define a text block

After creating the address text, you will center the text in the hairline box using
the paragraph view of the Control palette. To create the display text Home Review,
you may recall selecting the text tool, clicking the pasteboard to establish an
insertion point, and typing the display text. Now, to create the address text, you
will use a different approach that involves selecting the text tool, dragging to
define a text block (rather than just clicking), and then typing the address text.
Home Review
If you are not satisfied with the rectangle, make sure the rectangle is selected,
and either drag a graphic handle to the correct location or press the Delete key,
and draw another rectangle.
38 LESSON 1
Flyer
) and position the
I-beam on the bottom left corner of the box (let it snap to the left margin guide).
Hold down the mouse button, drag diagonally up across the box to the right margin
guide (exact height is not important), and release the mouse button. This defines a
text block that spans the area between the margin guides. When you release the
mouse button, the blinking cursor is displayed on the left margin guide, indicating
the text insertion point.
You are ready to use the Control palette to apply the paragraph specifications to
the address. Note: When applying one or more paragraph specifications to a single
paragraph, you must establish an insertion point in the paragraph. When applying
paragraph specifications to multiple contiguous paragraphs, you must select some
text in each paragraph you want to format.
4 With an insertion point still established in
Home Review
the address, click the Paragraph-view button ) in the Control palette.
Before you type the address, you’ll choose the font and point size, and scale the
width of the characters using the Horizontal scaling option.
As with character specification options, the paragraph view of the Control palette
provides quick access to frequently used paragraph specification options available
in the menus.
5 Click the Center-align button in the
Control palette to center the text in the text block.
Roman for Font, type 10 for Size ( ), click the Bold button ( ), and choose 130%
from the Horizontal Scaling pop-up menu.
Center-align button
PageMaker centers the text within the text block.

Horizontal scaling pop-up menu 3 Type the following address: 6 Choose File > Save.
322 Harvard Street, Cambridge

Classroom in a Book
Range kerning the address

In addition to the fonts you use, the spacing between letters, words, and lines can
have tremendous impact on the look of a publication. Range kerning is one of the
available techniques for increasing or decreasing the space between letters.
PageMaker’s kerning is measured in ems. An em is a horizontal space as wide as a
font’s point size. In 12-point type, an em is 12 points wide, while in 48-point
type, an em is 48 points wide. PageMaker accepts kerning values between -1 and 1 (1
equals 1 em space), accurate to .01 em space. Negative values move characters
closer together, and positive values move characters further apart. To kern the
address, you will select the entire range of address text, and enter a precise
value in the Control palette to increase the original letter spacing of the text.
1 With the text tool selected, triple-click the
2 Click the Character-view button in the
Control palette, type .75 for Kerning, and click the Apply button to apply range
kerning to the address.
A B C
A. Apply button B. Character-view button C. Kerning 3 From the horizontal ruler,

drag to create a
horizontal ruler guide at approximately 2.2 inches. The baseline for the address is
established.
4 Select the pointer tool, click the address to
select it as a text block, press the Up or Down Arrow key on the keyboard until the
baseline of the text is aligned with the 2.2-inch horizontal ruler guide.
Home Review

address to select it. As you learned earlier, triple-clicking text with the text
tool selects an entire paragraph. Also, notice how the Control palette still
displays the options for formatting paragraphs. Note: You can apply range kerning
only to a selected range of text. For example, you cannot set a range kerning value
before typing text.
Drawing a vertical line

As a finishing touch to the flyer, you will use the constrained-line tool to draw a
vertical line that will be centered in the gutter (the vertical space between the
columns). The constrained-line tool makes it possible to draw straight lines that
are constrained to 45º angles.
40 LESSON 1
Flyer
1 Choose View > Snap to Guides to deselect
7 With the vertical line still selected, choose
it, making sure it is unchecked. Activated when you create a publication, the Snap
to Guides option causes the guides to exert a magnetic-like pull on text and
graphics objects.
2 From the vertical ruler, drag to create a
Element > Stroke > Hairline to apply a stroke style and weight to the line. You
have completed assembling the flyer, so take a moment to view your work.
8 Choose View >Hide Guides to hide the
guides.
9 Choose File > Save to save the
vertical ruler guide at 4.25 inches. The vertical ruler guide appears in the center
of the gutter.
3 Choose View > Fit in Window. 4 Drag to create a horizontal ruler guide
01Work.pmd publication.
Home Review

aligned with the baseline of the last line of text in both columns.
5 Click the constrained-line tool (
electronic
windows, and a stairway leading out to a small widow's walk.
Landscaped
) in the
toolbox to select it. The pointer changes to a crosshair icon.

6 Align the crosshair with the intersection
This Cambridge residence bestows the colonial charm of New England's past upon this
quaint neighborhood. It resides just two blocks from the historic house used as
George Washington's headquarters in 1775, and later occupied by poet Henry
Wadsworth Longfellow. A stroll north on Lyon Street past a hilly intersection looks
out over the pine and maple woods of a nearby park, a dramatic contrast with the
blue Massachusetts bay beyond. These stunning views must have inspired architects
to execute
of the bottom edge of the address box and the 4.25-inch vertical ruler guide, and
drag down to the new horizontal ruler guide at the bottom of the page to draw the
line.
Producing the flyer

Given the specifications and requirements of this black-and-white publication, you
can print it successfully on any 300 dpi desktop laser printer, and then photocopy
the number of copies you want as needed. You can also create an Adobe PDF version
of the flyer that you can post on the Web or send to colleagues as an e-mail
attachment.
Home Review

electronic
execute
Landscaped
Classroom in a Book
Printing the flyer

1 If you are planning on printing this
Creating an Adobe PDF version of the flyer

First you will re-save the publication from which you will export to Adobe PDF.
1 Choose File > Save, and save the publica-
project, turn on your printer now and check the printer setup on your computer For
information on setting up your printer and selecting the appropriate printer
driver, see the Adobe PageMaker 7.0 User Guide.
2 Choose File > Print to open the Print
tion 01Work.pmd in the 01Lesson folder. When you export to Adobe PDF, PageMaker
automatically starts Acrobat Distiller, which processes the file and produces an
Adobe PDF version.
2
Document dialog box for the type of printer you selected.
If you do not have enough free RAM to run Acrobat Distiller simultaneously with
PageMaker, close all open applications other than PageMaker.
3 Choose File > Export > Adobe PDF.
Note: In Mac OS, be sure you have already selected a PostScript driver in the
Chooser.
4 In the PDF Options dialog box, select
In addition to displaying the most frequently used settings, the Print Document
dialog box contains buttons that let you set additional print options.
3 Select the correct printer (Windows) and
PPD for your printer. Note: The PPD option is not available if you are printing to
a non-PostScript printer.
4 In the Print Document dialog box, click
OnScreen for PDF Style and Acrobat for the Printer Style. (The Acrobat printer
style is created automatically the first time you export to PDF. For information on
creating and editing PDF styles and printer styles, see chapter 12 of the Adobe
PageMaker 7.0 User Guide.)
the Color button. In the Print Color dialog box, make sure Grayscale is selected.
5 Click the Print button to print the flyer.
You’ve created and printed the flyer. You can exit PageMaker now or you can create
an Adobe PDF version of the flyer.
42 LESSON 1
Flyer
In this lesson, you’ll use the default settings in the PDF Options dialog box to
create your Adobe PDF file. These default settings are designed to create an Adobe
PDF file optimized for onscreen viewing.
the only panels in this dialog box in which you can change information without
defining a new PDF Style.)
6 Click Export. 5 Click the Doc Info tab, and enter informa7 In the Export PDF As
dialog box, make
tion for filename, subject, author and keyword. For Title, select and delete the file
name. Type Home Review in the Title text box. Leave the Subject, Author, and
Keyword entries as is. Document information is often used to refine index searches
in document collections. For this reason, you should always replace at least the
file name with the document title. (Note that this and Security are
sure the filename is 01Work.pdf. Select the View PDF option (Windows) or View PDF
Using option (Mac OS) if you want to open the newly created Adobe PDF file in
Acrobat or Acrobat Reader rather than save it and open it at a later time. Click
Save to save the PDF version into the 01Lesson folder. PageMaker creates a
PostScript file, and then starts Acrobat Distiller to convert the PostScript into
Adobe PDF. This may take a few minutes, depending on the speed of your computer.
Note: On Mac OS, a window opens showing the progress of Distiller. The settings
displayed in this window may not match those you selected in the PDF Options dialog
box. Your PDF files will be created using the correct settings you specified.
Classroom in a Book
Acrobat or Acrobat Reader will launch automatically and display the Adobe PDF
version of your file. Close this PDF file and Acrobat or Acrobat Reader when you have
finished reviewing it. (If the PDF file doesn’t open automatically, navigate to the
01Lesson folder and double click the 01Work.pdf. Acrobat or Acrobat Reader will
launch and open the newly created Adobe PDF file.)
8 Click the close box in the title bar of
Answers
1 You can do any of the following:
•
Select the zoom tool in the toolbox, and click on or drag over the area you want to
magnify. To zoom out, hold down Ctrl (Windows) or Option (Macintosh), and click on
the page. Choose a magnification level from the View menu. In Windows, hold down the
Ctrl and Alt keys and click the right mouse button to toggle between Fit in Window
and Actual Size views. Double-click the zoom tool in the toolbox to switch to
Actual Size view. Hold down Alt (Windows) or Option (Macintosh) and double-click
the zoom tool to switch to Fit in Window view.
01Work.pmd to close it. If prompted to save, click Yes.

9 Click the close box in the title bar of
01Final.pmd to close the publication. If prompted to save, click No. Since you will
reset the PageMaker preferences at the beginning of every lesson, exit the
PageMaker application, even if you plan to move on to the next lesson.
10 Choose File > Exit (Windows) or File >
Quit (Macintosh) to exit PageMaker.
• Hold down Ctrl (Windows) or Command (Macintosh) together with the spacebar and
click or drag (covered in Lesson 2).
Review questions
1 What are two ways to change the magnification of a page? 2 How do you create a
non-printing guide line on your page? 3 What does a red triangle in a text block’s
2 First, make sure rulers are visible along the
top and left edges of the window. If not, choose View > Show Rulers. Then position
the pointer in either ruler, drag away from the ruler, and release the mouse button
to create the guide.
3 The text block contains more text that has
bottom windowshade handle indicate?

4 How do you center the lines in a
not been placed on the page or pasteboard.

4 Select the text tool and click an insertion
paragraph?
5 What do you call the space between text
point in the paragraph. Click the Paragraphview button in the Control palette, and
then click the Center-align button.
5 The gutter.
columns?
Lesson 2
With Adobe PageMaker, you can create part or all of your letterhead design
yourself. This lesson shows how fictitious Madrid architects Braga+Braga used Adobe
PageMaker to arrange text and graphics for a simple yet striking letterhead design.
The letterhead design incorporates the use of two spot colors (premixed inks
printed on a commercial printing press) and tints of spot colors (spot colors that
are lightened by printing a dot pattern instead of a solid color).
46 LESSON 2
This lesson also shows you how to save the letterhead design as a custom template.
Once the letterhead is printed, it’s easy to use the custom template to assemble
text to be printed on your own printer. To demonstrate the entire process, you will
create the Braga+Braga letterhead template, and then assemble a letter that is
meant to be printed on the letterhead stationery. The text featured in the lesson
is in Spanish, since Marie Braga is addressing a Spanish-speaking client in her
letter.
This lesson covers:
•
Before you begin

All the files and fonts needed to assemble the letterhead are found on the Adobe
PageMaker 7.0 Classroom in a Book CDROM in the folders 02Lesson and Fonts,
respectively.
Starting PageMaker
Before beginning to assemble the publication for this lesson, you will use the
Preferences dialog box to establish application defaults, and then you will open
the final version of the letterhead you will create.
1 Before launching PageMaker, return all
Establishing an application default measurement system Creating, saving, and

opening a custom template Selecting and applying spot colors Creating a tint of a
spot color
• • •
Resizing, reflecting, and rotating a text block Grouping and ungrouping objects
Using the Tile command
settings to their defaults by deleting the PageMaker 7.0 preferences file. See
“Restoring default settings” in Lesson 1.
2 In addition to the commonly used fonts listed in the Getting Started chapter,
make sure the fonts AGaramond, AGaramond Italic, AGaramond Semibold Italic, Myriad
Bold, and Myriad Roman are installed.
• •
• Dragging objects from one publication to another •
Using the Lock Position and Non-Printing commands Printing on a commercial printing
press
It should take you approximately 2-3 hours to complete this lesson.
Windows only: Because of the way Windows handles fonts, AGaramond Semibold Italic
appears in the ATM Fonts list as AGaramond, Bold Italic (notice the comma).
However, neither AGaramond Semibold Italic nor AGaramond, Bold Italic appear in
font menus in Windows applications. You must apply bold and italic to AGaramond to
use AGaramond
Classroom in a Book
Semibold Italic. You must apply italic to AGaramond to use AGaramond Italic. You
must apply bold to Myriad Roman to use Myriad Bold. Like the Myriad typeface used
in the previous lesson, Adobe Garamond is an Adobe Originals typeface.
3 Start PageMaker.
Because you will be creating letterhead, an envelope, and a business card, it will
save time to set the default measurement system once as an application default.
Then, each new publication will already have the measurement system set.
Setting an application default

PageMaker has two kinds of defaults:
•
Publication defaults are settings that apply to a specific publication. You set a
publication’s defaults when it is the currently active publication and has no
objects selected. The defaults are stored in the publication when you save the file.
Application defaults are settings that PageMaker uses each time you create a new
publication. These defaults are stored in the PageMaker preferences file. You set
application defaults when no publications are open. Publication defaults override
application defaults. This project uses picas as the measurement system. Picas are
the units most commonly used in graphic design. Picas are divided into 12 points.
When you specify a measurement in picas and points, you separate the picas and
points with the letter p. For example, 22p9 means 22 picas and 9 points.
The Preferences dialog box displays some of the application defaults that will be
applied to any new publication you create. You may recall from the previous lesson
that the horizontal and vertical rulers reflect the units of measure selected in the
Measurements in and Vertical ruler pop-up menus, respectively.
2 In the Preferences dialog box, choose
Picas for Measurements In and Picas for Vertical ruler. Leave all other options at
their default values. Click OK.
Since no publication is open, this application default will be applied to any new
publication you create. Application defaults can be overridden at any time for the
particular publication you are working on, setting a publication default. Unlike
application defaults, publication defaults have no effect on new publications you
create.
48 LESSON 2
Opening an existing document

Let’s take a look at the final version of the letterhead you will create in this
lesson.
1 Choose File > Open, and locate and
double-click the 02FinalA.pmd file in the 02Lesson folder.

+
publication defaults, set when the letterhead was last saved, take precedence.
Again, the application defaults you just set in the Preferences dialog box apply
only to new publications you create.
4 Choose View > Bring Guides to Front.
b
Sr. and Sra. Pérez Alcalá, 18 Madrid, España 2P4 N47
1 4 C a l l e L i b e r t a d e 2 8 0 0 4 M a d r i d E s p a ñ a
Now the guides are displayed over the text and graphics.
5 Choose File > Open, and locate and
F a x - 3 4 - 1 - 5 6 4 1 - 3 2 8
T e l é f o n o - 3 4 - 1 - 5 6 4 1 - 9 1 8
Atentamente,
Marie Julieta Braga e-mail: [email protected]
MB.be Perez.1
BRAGA + BRAGA
The full view of the page displays a single column of text framed on the top and
left edges with a letterhead design. The letterhead design features a variety of
text and graphics elements and uses two spot colors.
The 02FinalB.pmd publication displays the envelope and business card you will
assemble as well.
screen, click the Maximize button in the title bar to expand the window.
3 Choose View > Show Guides to display all
Talk with your printer

Printing these letterhead publications on a commercial printing press involves
delivering files to your prepress service provider (who can perform prepress tasks,
and who will ultimately create film separations of your publication on an
imagesetter), and then delivering film separations to your printer.
guides (column, ruler, and margin) used to assemble this publication. Notice how
all guides are displayed behind the text and graphics elements. Even though you
just accepted the application default to display guides in front of text and
graphics (in the Preferences dialog box), the
BRAGA + BRAGA
A r q u i t e c t o s
Estimados Esperanza y Rodrigo, Realmente disfruté la visita a su casa y estoy muy

interesada en trabajar con ustedes para desarrollar al máximo su potencial. La
videocinta de Esperanza, en conjunto con la visita y su lista de requisitos, han
plasmado sus metas arquitectónicas y paisajistas. El diseño actual de la casa y el
de sus alrededores están bien integrados, así que creo que se pueden lograr esas
metas. La casa, especialmente desde el exterior, es fuerte y puede beneficiarse con
un tratamiento más uniforme de las ventanas y las puertas. El interior requiere un
poco más de trabajo, pero definitivamente el potencial está allí. Estamos
orgullosos de informarles que la Doña Calderón, la directora de la renovación del
Museo del Prado, ha pasado a formar parte de nuestro distinguido grupo de
arquitectos y diseñadores de nuestra oficina en Madrid. Nuestros diseñadores tienen
acceso a las mejores telas, muebles Europeos y del Mediterráneo así como a baldosas
pintadas a mano. Por favor refiéranse a la lista incluída respecto a costos. Creo
que su casa tiene un gran potencial y que juntos podemos compartir buenos momentos
diseñando un hogar que cumpla con las necesidades estéticas y funcionales,
aprovechando al máximo el bello sitio que ustedes han escogido para ello. Esperamos
poder ayudarles a convertir en realidad sus sueños.
double-click the 02FinalB.pmd file in the 02Lesson folder.
b
1 4 C a l l e 2 8 0 0 4 E s p a ñ a
BRAGA + BRAGA
L i b e r t a d e
M a d r i d
T e l é f o n o - 3 4 - 1 - 5 6 4 1 - 9 1 8
F a x - 3 4 - 1 - 5 6 4 1 - 3 2 8
Classroom in a Book
Well in advance of delivering publications to be printed, be sure to review the

design with your printer and your prepress service provider. Based on the design,
your skills, time, and equipment, your printer and your service provider can
evaluate the requirements of the project and the services you require. Note: In
some cases, imagesetting and printing services are provided at the same facility.
In this example, expect a service provider to point out how the adjacent colors
featured in the letterhead will require trapping (before creating film separations).
Art that has not been trapped can easily misregister on the press, causing gaps to
appear between adjacent colored elements. Trapping compensates for misregistration
by slightly overlapping adjacent colors. For more information on trapping, see
Lesson 7, which uses PageMaker trapping options, or refer to the Adobe PageMaker
7.0 User Guide. It is crucial to anticipate this sort of issue, since it will
determine how you prepare files to be delivered to your service provider.

Whenever you create a new publication, the Document Setup dialog box prompts you to
specify the page size, orientation, page numbering, margins, and printer type
resolution.
1 Choose File > New, and notice that Letter
is selected for Page Size. When you create a new publication, Letter is selected
for page size. The page dimensions appear in the application default measurement
system, in this case, picas (51 picas by 66 picas equals 8.5 inches by 11 inches).
choose Legal for Page Size, and notice how the corresponding page dimensions in
picas are displayed (51 picas by 84 picas equals 8.5 inches by 14 inches). The
Legal page size is one of the preset page sizes available in the Page Size pop-up
menu. If the page size you want is not available in the Page Size pop-up menu, you
can enter precise values for Dimensions to customize the page size. For this
lesson, however, you will use the Letter page size.
Assembling a custom template

Before creating the letter you see in the final publication, you will create and
save a custom template that can be opened whenever you want to compose a letter.
Remember: Feel free to zoom in or out and to move or minimize palettes as needed to
complete a step.
choose Letter for Page Size, and then click the Double-sided check box to deselect
it. For Margins, type 10 for Left, 4p6 for Right, 4p6 for Top, and 4p6 for Bottom.
(4p6 indicates 4 picas and 6 points, where 1 pica equals 12 points.) You can press
the Tab key to jump from edit box to edit box. Choose a Target Output Resolution of
1200 dpi, and
50 LESSON 2
choose (Windows only) the AGFAProSet9800 for Compose to Printer. Then click OK.
Note: If you do not have the required printer, you can still create the project as
Choose File > Save As, and type 02WorkA.pmt for the file name, open the 02Lesson
folder, select Template for Save As Type (Windows) or Save As (Macintosh), and
click Save.
selecting your printer and its PPD (if it is a PostScript printer) in the Print
dialog box when it is time to print. You can also use the
41.
Establishing a design grid

Horizontal and vertical ruler guides will help you align text and graphics
precisely, without printing or restricting the flow of text.
1 Make sure the entire page is displayed. If
necessary, choose View > Fit in Window. The margin guides form a rectangle
enclosing the image area, which is where you will put most of your text and
graphics. The horizontal and vertical rulers reflect the currently selected unit of
measure, picas.
2 Position the cursor on the vertical ruler that extends along the left edge of the
publication window, and drag to create a vertical ruler guide at 2p (2 picas),
referring to the X coordinate value in the Control palette if necessary.
6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48
Saving the publication as a template

Even though the template is not assembled, you will name it and save it as a
template. (In PageMaker 7.0, templates have the extension .pmt.) Saving a
publication as a template means that when you open this template, PageMaker opens
an untitled copy of the template, not the original document.
6 12
18
24
30
3 Using the same method, create two
additional vertical ruler guides at 7p and 8p.

Classroom in a Book
4 From the horizontal ruler, drag to create
), and click the
horizontal ruler guides at approximately 9p, 9p6, 12p, 14p, 15p6, and 64p.
6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48
pasteboard above the page to magnify that area. (To click the pasteboard, you may
need to scroll the page using the scroll bar on the right side of the window.)
12
18
), and click above the page to establish an insertion point.

Notice the blinking cursor and that the Control palette displays the default type
specifications (font: Times New Roman or Times, size: 12 points).
24
30
Locking the ruler guides

Now that you have positioned the ruler guides, you will use the Lock Guides command
to lock them in place. The Lock Guides command locks ruler guides and column guides
in place, preventing you from moving them accidentally.
1 Choose View > Lock Guides.
3 With the insertion point already
established, type an uppercase letter B.

4 With the text tool selected, double-click
the uppercase B to select it.

Note: To reposition or delete a ruler guide, choose the Lock Guides command again
to unlock the guides.
Roman for Font, type 65 for Size ( ), and click the Bold button ( ) to apply the
type specifications to the selected text.
Creating the display text

With imagination you can use PageMaker to create display text elements that go a
long way toward enhancing your publications. Display text, usually 14 points or
larger, serves to attract attention. You’ll use the pasteboard to initially
assemble the pieces of the letterhead.
B
6 With the text tool still selected, click the
pasteboard above the page (a little away from the uppercase B to avoid inserting
the cursor in the same text block as the B), and type + (a plus sign).
52 LESSON 2
7 Double-click the plus sign to select it, and
in the Control palette choose Myriad Roman for Font, type 50 for Size, and click
the Bold button.
Notice that you did not need to click the Apply button (or press Enter or Return)
to apply the new font and size to the letter. When you click a button in the
Control palette, PageMaker applies any values you’ve typed as well as applying the
button’s style or effect.
Resizing text blocks

8 With the text tool still selected, click the pasteboard above the page (a little
away from the uppercase B and plus sign, again, to avoid inserting the cursor in
the same text block as the other two characters), and type a lowercase letter b. 9
Double-click the lowercase b to select it,
Since you did not define the text block size of the three text objects just created,
take a moment to resize each one.
1 Select the pointer tool, and click the
uppercase B to select it as a text block.
and in the Control palette choose AGaramond (Regular) for Font, type 110 for Size,
and click the Italic button ( ). Note: Because of the way fonts are defined, when
you apply italic to AGaramond, PageMaker actually uses AGaramond Italic. On the
Macintosh, you can get the same result if you select AGaramond Italic directly.
Once a text element is selected as a text block (with the pointer tool), the text
block can be resized, positioned, or transformed. Notice how the windowshades
extend well beyond the bounds of the uppercase B. Since you did not define the
dimensions of this text block, PageMaker defined the width of the text block to
equal the image area between the left and right margin guides. It is easier to work
with a text block when its width is close to the width of its content, especially
in a design like this where you are
b
Classroom in a Book
manipulating three text blocks close together. The selection area of text includes
the text block. So, when a text block is oversized, you can mistakenly select it
even though you are clicking quite a distance from the actual text.
2 With the uppercase B still selected as a text block, drag a right corner handle
until it is roughly aligned with the right edge of the uppercase B, reducing the
width of the text block.
As mentioned before, spot colors are printed on a printing press using premixed
inks. Use spot colors when an element (such as a corporate logo) requires an exact
color match, or to add impact to your publication. Note: Incorporating spot and
process colors into a publication created in PageMaker is simple, but to get the
best printed results, you need to understand how spot and process colors are
printed. Always discuss a project with your service provider and printer.
1 Choose Utilities > Define Colors, and click New.
3 Use the same method to reduce the width
of the text blocks for the plus sign and the lowercase b. With the width of the
text blocks reduced, it is easier to select, view, and manipulate these text
blocks.
Defining spot colors

Before applying colors to the display text you just created, you will select two
predefined spot colors from one of the color libraries included with PageMaker.
The Color Options dialog box prompts you to select a color. You can specify a spot
or process color as RGB (red, green, and blue), HLS (hue, lightness, saturation),
or CMYK (cyan, magenta, yellow, and black). Each model represents a different
approach to describing color. For more information, refer to the Adobe PageMaker
7.0 User Guide.
54 LESSON 2
2 In the Color Options dialog box choose
4 Type 660 for PANTONE CVU, and
PANTONE® Uncoated from the Libraries pop-up menu.
click OK. Note: CVU stands for Computer Video Uncoated.
PANTONE offers 736 spot colors that set the industry standard for reproducible
spotcolor inks, and 3,006 process colors organized chromatically, including
process-color simulations of the spot-color library.
3 In the Color Picker dialog box, scroll
5 In the Color Options dialog box, click OK
to accept the default color name displayed for Name. The Define Colors dialog box
displays the color you have just selected. Now you can select or create another
color.
6 In the Define Colors dialog box, click
through the colors. Although you can click a color to select it, typing the ink
number (if you know it) is often faster than scrolling to locate a color.
New.
7 In the Color Options dialog box, make
sure the Spot and CMYK options are selected, and choose PANTONE® Uncoated for
Libraries.
8 In the Color Picker dialog box, type 5595
for PANTONE CVU, and click OK.

9 In the Color Options dialog box, click OK
to accept the default color name displayed for Name, then click OK to close the
Define Colors dialog box.
Classroom in a Book
Applying spot colors

After opening the Colors palette, you will apply the spot colors you just selected
to the display text. In addition to text, you can apply colors to lines,
rectangles, ellipses, and monochrome and grayscale bitmap images.
1 Click the Colors palette tab to activate the
), double-click the
uppercase B to select it, and in the Colors palette click PANTONE 660 CVU to apply
the spot color to the uppercase B. Note: To apply color to text, you must first
select the text with the text tool. You won’t see the applied color until you
deselect the text.
Colors palette. In addition to displaying the two spot colors you selected, the
Colors palette displays three spot colors, Blue, Green, and Red; four process
colors, Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and [Black]; and four items you cannot remove,
[None], [Paper], [Black], and [Registration]. The Stroke, Fill, and Both buttons
apply to objects. When you apply color to text, it doesn’t matter which button is
selected.
Stroke button Fill button Both button
b
).
3 With the text tool still selected, doubleclick the lowercase b to select it, and
in the Colors palette click PANTONE 5595 CVU. 4 Choose File > Save.
Tint pop-up menu Palette menu
Reflecting a text block

You can reflect any object (text or graphic element) vertically or horizontally,
using the Reflecting options in the Control palette.
Process color Spot color
uppercase B to select it as a text block.

2 In the Control palette, click the
Trash icon New color button
Horizontal Reflecting button (
b
56 LESSON 2
The uppercase B is reflected horizontally.

3 With the uppercase B still selected as a
text block, click the Vertical Reflecting button ( ). The uppercase B is reflected
vertically.
drag the text block until the vertical stem of the plus sign is aligned with the
vertical stem of the uppercase B as shown in the illustration below, and release
the mouse button.
In order to compose a logo design using the display text, you manually position the
text blocks to overlap one another. First you’ll zoom in to the area.
1 Hold down Ctrl (Windows) or Command
(Macintosh) together with the spacebar. The pointer changes to the zoom tool. Drag
across the three text blocks to magnify the view. This magnification short-cut lets
you quickly zoom in to an area without changing tools. To align these text
elements, you will use the slow-drag method of positioning objects, displaying text
as you drag a text block. When you use the quick-drag method, a bounding box
indicates the dimensions of the text block as you drag, but no text is displayed.
the lowercase b to select it as a text block, and drag the text block until the
stem of the lowercase b overlaps the uppercase B as shown in the following
illustration.
uppercase B to select it as a text block, position the cursor on the text block,
and hold down the mouse button until the pointer changes to an arrowhead.
B B
Positioning text blocks
b
Classroom in a Book
Adjusting the stacking order of text objects

Notice how the lowercase b overlaps the uppercase B and the plus sign. Since the
lowercase b was created last, it is positioned at the top of the stack. You will
use the Send Backward command to move the lowercase b from the top of the stack to
the middle of the stack. Unlike the Send to Back command that moves an object to
the bottom of the stack, the Send Backward command moves an object back in the
stack in single-position increments.
Grouping text objects

Now that the three text objects are positioned, grouping them together will let you
position them as a single entity on the page.
1 With the pointer tool still selected, choose
Edit > Select All to select all text and graphics elements in your publication.
2 Choose Element > Group.
The text objects are joined together as a single entity, with handles indicating
the group is selected.
3 Position the pointer in the center of the group, and drag the logo design to the
upper left corner of the page. 4 Find the intersection of the 9p6 horizontal
lowercase b to select it as a text block.

2 Choose Element > Arrange > Send
Backward. With the lowercase b positioned in the middle of the stack, it is

overlapped by the plus sign, now positioned at the top of the stack.
ruler guide and the 8p vertical ruler guide.

5 Once again, position the pointer in the
center of the group, and drag it until the bottom edge of the logo design is
aligned with the 9p6 horizontal ruler guide, and until the left edge of the
uppercase B is aligned with the 8p vertical ruler guide.
b
58 LESSON 2
Using the Control palette to resize a rectangle

After using the rectangle tool to draw a box, you will enter precise values in the
Control palette to resize the box. The Control palette lets you make several
changes to an object without switching tools and offers a precision that is
difficult to duplicate when manipulating an object manually. The Control palette
lets you resize, move, scale, crop (imported images), rotate, and skew.
A B C D E F G H
anchor, depending upon the action. For example, if you change W and H, the
corresponding handle remains stationary as the width and height change. If instead
you change X and Y, the entire object moves until the corresponding handle is at
the new location. Arrow When the point is an arrow, the corresponding handle is the
focus of change. For example, if you change W and H, that handle is dragged to
establish the new size. In the same way, if you change the X and Y values,
PageMaker drags that handle to resize the object. (For more information on the
Control palette, refer to the Adobe PageMaker 7.0 User Guide.)
A. Apply button B. Proxy icon C. Coordinates D.Width and height E. Percent scaling
F. Scaling button G. Rotating H. Horizontal reflecting I. Vertical reflecting J.
Skewing
Before
Before
When you select an object, the Control palette displays a Proxy icon to the right
of the Apply button. The Proxy icon contains nine spots called reference points.
Changes you make to an object with the Control palette are affected by the
reference point you select and the state of that point. Except for the center
point, the reference points correspond to handles of the object. Each reference
point in the Proxy icon has two states, represented by a square point or an arrow.
To toggle between the states, you click a selected point or double-click an
unselected point. Square When a selected point is a square, the object’s
corresponding handle remains stationary or serves as an
After
After
Before After
Before
After
Changing the X value in the control palette from 2 to 3
Changing the W value in the control palette from 2 to 3
Note: Unless otherwise stated, throughout this book, when a step says to select a
point in the Proxy icon, it means a square point.
Classroom in a Book
1 Select the rectangle tool (
) in the
Applying spot colors to the boxes

Using the Colors palette, you will apply spot colors to the stroke and fill of the
two boxes. As was mentioned before, the three buttons Stroke, Fill, and Both allow
you to apply or change the color of stroke, fill, or both on a rectangle or ellipse.
In this example, you want to apply color to the stroke and fill of both boxes.
toolbox, and drag to draw a box of any dimension near the top of the page.
2 With the box still selected, in the Control
palette make sure a corner reference point in the Proxy icon is selected (to make
it possible to resize both dimensions of an object), type 11p for W (width) and 1p6
for H (height), and click the Apply button ( ). To create another box, you will
copy and paste the first box, and then use the Control palette to resize the pasted
box.
3 With the box still selected, choose Edit > Copy to copy the box to the Clipboard.
4 Choose Edit > Paste to paste a second box
to be slightly offset from the first box.

5 With the second box selected, in the Con-
trol palette type 17p4 for W, and press Enter or Return to increase the width of
the second box. Note: Depending on where you drew the boxes, your artwork may look
different from the illustration below.
3 With the pointer tool selected, click the outline of the larger box to select it.
Make sure the Both button is selected in the Colors palette, and select PANTONE
5595 CVU. 4 Choose File > Save.
B B
outline of the smaller box to select it. When a PageMaker-drawn shape has no fill,
you select it by clicking its stroke.
2 In the Colors palette click the Both but-
ton, and click PANTONE 660 CVU to apply a spot color to the stroke and fill of the
box.
b
60 LESSON 2
Positioning graphics
You will manually position the boxes to be aligned with existing ruler guides.
1 With the pointer tool selected, click the second (larger) box to select it, and
drag it until its left edge is aligned with the right edge of the first (smaller)
box.
Remember: If the palettes are in the way, you can move them, minimize them (with
the Maximize button in the title bar), or temporarily clear them from the window by
pressing the Tab key.
b
2 Magnify the view of the boxes to see if
their edges are precisely aligned. If not, press the Right or Left Arrow keys (or
click the X or Y nudge buttons in the Control palette) to move the selected box in
1-pixel increments.
3 With one of the boxes still selected, hold
Placing, formatting, and positioning the Braga+Braga text

After placing text, you will format it, cut and paste a portion of it, and then
position it in the left box.
1 Choose File > Place, and double-click the
down the Shift key (to select multiple objects), and click the unselected box so
that both boxes are selected.
4 Choose Element > Group to group the
02TextA.doc file in the 02Lesson folder.

2 With the loaded text icon displayed, scroll
to view the pasteboard above the page, and click the pasteboard to place the text.
3 Magnify the view of the placed text on the
boxes into a single entity.

5 Drag the boxes until their bottom edges
pasteboard if necessary.
are aligned with the 9p6 horizontal ruler guide, and the right edge is aligned with
the right margin guide.
), and drag to select the words Braga+Braga in the first line.
Roman for Font, type 12 for Size ( ), type .2 for Kerning ( ), click the Bold
button ( ), and click the All caps button ( ).
B
Classroom in a Book
6 With Braga+Braga still selected, choose
Edit > Cut. Before pasting the text you just cut, you will drag to define a text
block that spans the width of the left box, making it easier to center the text
inside.
7 With the text tool still selected, drag to define a text block in the left box,
spanning the width of the left box; the exact height is unimportant.
Applying [Paper] to text or graphics elements causes the color of the paper on
which you print to show through the selected object. Before aligning Braga+Braga,
you will turn off the Snap to Guides option.
11 Choose View > Snap to Guides to
deselect it, making sure it is unchecked.

12 Select the pointer tool, click Braga+Braga to select it as a text block, press
the Up or Down Arrow key on the keyboard until the baseline of the text is aligned
with the 9p horizontal ruler guide.
8 Choose Edit > Paste to paste
By default, the text is left aligned in the text block.

9 With the insertion point still in Braga+Braga, click the Paragraph-view button
( ) in the Control palette, and click the Center-align button ( ) to center the
text in the text block.
Since you defined the text block to span the width of the left box, the text is
centered horizontally inside it.
Formatting and positioning the Arquitectos text

You will follow a similar procedure for Arquitectos (meaning architects in Spanish)
that fills the right box of the double box.
Braga+Braga in the text block you just defined.
Note: Because of the way fonts are defined, when you apply bold to Myriad Roman,
PageMaker actually uses Myriad Bold. On the Macintosh, you can get the same result
if you select Myriad Bold directly.
10 With the text tool selected, drag to select
Braga+Braga, and in the Colors palette click [Paper] to apply the paper color to
the text.
b
BRAGA + BRAGA
BRAGA + BRAGA
62 LESSON 2
1 If necessary, scroll to view the placed text
on the pasteboard.
), double-click the
word Arquitectos to select it.

3 In the Control palette, click the Character-
view button ( ), and choose AGaramond (Regular) for Font. Then type 13 for Size
( ), and click the Bold ( ) and Italic buttons ( ). Note: Because of the way fonts
are defined, when you apply bold and italic to AGaramond, PageMaker actually uses
AGaramond Semibold Italic. On the Macintosh, you can get the same result if you
select AGaramond Semibold Italic directly.
4 With Arquitectos still selected, choose Edit > Cut. 5 With the text tool still
selected, drag to define a text block in the right box, spanning the width of the
right box (exact height is not important). 6 Choose Edit > Paste to paste
Arquitectos
In force-justified text, PageMaker justifies (aligns) the text with the left and
right edges of the text block even if it contains only a few characters, spacing
them so that the text fits exactly between the vertical edges of the text block.
Since you set 1p2 left and right indents, the text is force-justified 1p2 away from
the vertical edges of the text block.
8 Select the pointer tool, click Arquitectos
to select it as a text block, and press the Down Arrow key on the keyboard until
the baseline of the text is aligned with the 9p horizontal ruler guide.
Choose File > Save.
Formatting and positioning the address

After cutting the address from the placed text on the pasteboard, you will position
it in the upper right portion of the page.
1 If necessary, scroll to view the placed text
in the text block you just defined.
BRAGA + BRAGA Arquitectos
on the pasteboard.
2 Select the text tool ( 7 With the insertion point still in Arquitec-
tos, click the Paragraph-view button ( ) in the Control palette, and type 1p2 for
both Left Indent ( ) and Right Indent, and click the Force-justify button ( ).
the first three lines (the address) of the remaining placed text on the pasteboard.
(Do not select the telephone and fax numbers.)
BRAGA + BRAGA
), and drag to select

Classroom in a Book
4 In the Colors palette, click PANTONE 660
CVU to apply a spot color to the text.

5 With the address still selected, choose Edit > Cut. 6 From the vertical ruler,
drag to create a
A portion of the address is positioned within the top margin.

vertical ruler guide at 29p2.

7 With the text tool still selected, drag to
define a text block that spans from the 29p2 vertical ruler guide to the right
margin guide, above Arquitectos (exact height is not important).
Drawing lines
The letterhead design includes two dashedlines that you will create using the
constrained-line tool. The constrained-line tool lets you draw straight lines that
are constrained to 45º angles on the page.
1 Choose View > Fit in Window.
BRAGA + BRAGA
8 Choose Edit > Paste to paste the address
into the text block you just defined.

The first line you will draw is a horizontal line aligned with the 14p horizontal
ruler guide.
2 Select the constrained-line tool ( ) in the toolbox, position the crosshair on
the intersection of the 14p horizontal ruler guide and the 2p vertical ruler guide,
and drag to draw a horizontal line that extends to the right margin guide.
horizontal ruler guide at 7p. Before aligning the address, you will turn the Snap
to Guides option back on.
10 Choose View > Snap to Guides to
select it. to select it as a text block, and press the Up or Down Arrow key until
the baseline of the last line of text is aligned with the 7p hori-
11 Select the pointer tool, click the address
view button ( ), and choose Myriad Roman for Font, type 10 for Size ( ), 15 for
Leading ( ), .73 for Kerning ( ), and click the Bold button ( ).
zontal ruler guide, and until the right edge of the text block is aligned with the
right margin guide.
BRAGA + BRAGA
BRAGA + BRAGA
64 LESSON 2
Since the guides (margin, column, and ruler) are in front of the text and graphics,
the 14p horizontal ruler guide overlaps the line you just drew.
3 Choose View > Send Guides to Back to
7 With the second line still selected, choose
Element > Stroke > 1 pt dashed line, and in the Colors palette click PANTONE 660
CVU.
+
display the horizontal line over the horizontal ruler guide.

4 With the line still selected, choose Element > Stroke > 1 pt dashed line to apply
a stroke style and weight to the line. 5 In the Colors palette make sure the Stroke
button is selected, and click PANTONE 5595 CVU to apply a spot color to the line.
The second line you will draw is a vertical line that is aligned with the 8p
vertical ruler guide. So that you can use the control palette to help you position
the line, you’ll deselect the first line.
6 Select the constrained-line tool again to
Applying a tint of a spot color to a box

After drawing a box in the left margin, you will use the Colors palette to fill the
box with a 30% tint of a spot color.
deselect the line you just drew. Position the crosshair on the intersection of the
12p horizontal ruler guide and the 8p vertical ruler guide, and drag to draw a
vertical line that extends to the 64p horizontal ruler guide.
BRAGA + BRAGA
Classroom in a Book
), position the
1 If necessary, scroll to view the remaining
crosshair on the intersection of the dashed lines, and drag to the intersection of
the 64p horizontal ruler guide and the 2p vertical ruler guide to draw a box.
+
line of placed text on the pasteboard and use the zoom tool ( ) to enlarge the text
line.
BRAGA + BRAGA
). Click an insertion point before the letter T of Telefono. Press the Backspace
(Windows) or Delete (Macintosh) key to remove the line above the numbers and any
spaces.
to select it as a text block.
2 With the box still selected, make sure the Both button is selected in the Colors
palette, click PANTONE 5595 CVU, and choose 30% for Tint.
Formatting the rotated text

You will format the text before positioning it in the tinted box, since formatting
text after positioning it can alter its alignment.
1 If necessary, hold down Ctrl (Windows)
Rotating a text block

After using the Control palette to rotate a text block, you will format the rotated
text, and then position it in the tinted box.
or Command (Macintosh) together with the spacebar, and drag across the rotated text
to magnify the view.
Teléfono-34-1-5641-918 + Fax-34-1-5641-328
3 Select the pointer tool, and click the text 4 In the Control palette, make sure
the top
left corner reference point is selected in the Proxy icon. Type 90 for Rotation
( ), and press Enter or Return.
66 LESSON 2
), and drag to select
the telephone number, Telefono-34-1-5641-918.

guide, and the left corner handles (now at the bottom) snap to the bottom edge of
the tinted box.
4 Drag to select the remaining rotated text,
Don’t worry if the fax number wraps to the next line. You’ll resize the text block
in the next procedure.
rotated text to select it as a text block. Rather than drag the text block to the
page, you will cut it, zoom in to the bottom left corner of the page, and then
paste it.
6 With the text block selected, choose Edit > Cut. 7 Zoom in to the bottom left
corner of
Resizing a text block

To center the rotated text between the top and bottom edges of the tinted box, you
will manually resize the text block to span the vertical length of the box, and
then you will use the Control palette to center the text in the text block.
1 If necessary, with the pointer tool selected,
the page.
8 Choose Edit > Paste. 9 With the rotated text block still selected, position the
pointer over the text, hold down the mouse until the pointer changes to an
arrowhead. Then drag the text block so that the baseline of the rotated telephone
number is aligned with the 7p vertical ruler
click the rotated text to select it as a text block.

2 Zoom out if necessary to see the entire text block.
T e l é f o n o - 3 4 - 1 - 5 6 4 1 - 9 1 8
+ Fax-34-1-5641-328, and, in the Control palette, choose AGaramond (Regular) for

Font, type 11 for Size, type .6 for Kerning, and click the Bold and Italic ( )
buttons.
F a x - 3 4 - 1 - 5 6 4 1 - 3 2 8
Roman for Font, type 9 for Size ( ), type .6 for Kerning ( ), and click the Bold
button ( ).
Classroom in a Book
3 Position the pointer on the handle shown
5 In the Control palette, click the Para-
below, and drag the handle up until it is aligned with the top edge of the tinted
box, resizing the text block.
graph-view button ( ), and click the Center-align button ( ).
F a x - 3 4 - 1 - 5 6 4 1 - 3 2 8
T e l é f o n o - 3 4 - 1 - 5 6 4 1 - 9 1 8
The text block spans the vertical length of the tinted box, and you are ready to
apply the paragraph formatting that centers the rotated text in the text block.
Since the text block spans the vertical length of the tinted box, the text is
horizontally centered in the vertical box.
6 Choose View > Hide Guides to hide the
), and click an
insertion point in the rotated text. Note: As mentioned earlier, to apply paragraph
specifications to a single paragraph, you must click an insertion point in the
paragraph or select some portion of the text in the paragraph. To apply paragraph
specifications to multiple contiguous paragraphs, you must select text in each
paragraph you want to format.
nonprinting guides used to assemble this template.

02WorkA.pmt template.
+
T e l é f o n o - 3 4 - 1 - 5 6 4 1 - 9 1 8
F a x - 3 4 - 1 - 5 6 4 1 - 3 2 8
T e l é f o n o - 3 4 - 1 - 5 6 4 1 - 9 1 8
F a x - 3 4 - 1 - 5 6 4 1 - 3 2 8
BRAGA + BRAGA
68 LESSON 2
The letterhead template is completely assembled. You are ready to create the
envelope and business card.
3 Choose Window > Tile to tile the
PageMaker window with all open publications and templates. The PageMaker window
displays the 02FinalA.pmd and 02FinalB.pmd, and the 02WorkA.pmt and 02WorkB.pmd
files.
4 Click the close boxes in the title bar of the
Assembling an envelope
Using the text and graphics elements from the 02WorkA.pmt template, you will create
the design for an envelope.
Tiling the publication window

After opening a custom template that includes outlines of a business-size envelope
and a business card, you will use the Tile command to display all open publications
within the publication window.
1 Without closing the open publications,
02FinalA.pmd and 02FinalB.pmd publications to close them. If prompted to save

before closing, click No.
5 Choose Window > Tile to tile the
PageMaker window with two publications. It will be easier to assemble the envelope
with a large view of the publications.
choose File > Open, and double-click the 02Templt.pmt file in the 02Lesson folder.
Dragging a group from one publication to another

PageMaker makes it possible to copy text, graphics, and groups from publication to
publication by simply dragging the objects. Before you drag and drop a portion of
the letterhead design from the 02WorkA.pmt publication to the 02WorkB.pmd
publication, you will group the required text and graphic elements.
1 Click the title bar of the 02WorkA.pmt
publication to make it the active publication. The untitled copy of the template
displays outlines of a business-size envelope and a standard-size business card.
2 Choose File > Save As, and type 2 Select the pointer tool, drag to select all
letterhead elements at the top of the page (B + b logo, double box containing
Braga+Braga and Arquitectos, and
02WorkB.pmd for the file name, open the 02Lesson folder, and click Save.
Classroom in a Book
address) in the 02Lesson publication. Be careful not to select the dashed lines or
the tinted box and rotated text.
7 Drag the text to the upper left corner of
the envelope as shown below (approximately 3p from the top and left edges of the
envelope outline).
3 If necessary, hold down Shift, and click
individual elements to include or exclude them from the selection.

text and graphics elements into a single entity.

5 Position the pointer in the center of the group in the 02WorkA.pmt publication,
hold down the mouse button, drag the group to the center of the 02WorkB.pmd
publication, and release the mouse button.
The envelope design is complete.

02WorkB.pmd publication.
Assembling a business card

In addition to creating text and graphic elements, assembling the business card
involves copying and pasting existing elements, and applying new type specifications
to the pasted text elements.
The group is still selected in the 02WorkA.pmt publication (because it’s the active
publication), and the Control palette displays the available options for modifying
a group.
6 With the pointer tool selected, click the group in the 02WorkB.pmd publication to
select it, activating the 02WorkB.pmd publication.
Creating a tinted box

After drawing a box, you will use the Control palette to resize the box and the
Colors palette to fill the box with a 30% tint of a spot color.
(Macintosh) together with the spacebar, and drag across the business card outline,
magnifying its view.
BRAGA + BRAGA
+
BRAGA + BRAGA
70 LESSON 2
), and drag to
1 Select the constrained-line tool (
),
draw a box of any dimension.

3 With the box still selected, in the Control palette type 11p2.5 for W and 3p7.5
for H, and click the Apply button ( ). 4 With the box still selected, in the Colors
position the crosshair on the top right corner of the tinted box, and drag left to
draw a horizontal line that extends about one pica (1p) beyond the left edge of the
tinted box.
2 With the line still selected, choose
palette make sure the Both button is selected, click PANTONE 5595 CVU, and choose
30% for Tint.
Element > Stroke >1 pt dashed line.

3 In the Colors palette, make sure the Stroke
vertical ruler guide at 13p3.

6 Select the pointer tool, click the tinted box
button is selected, and click PANTONE 5595 CVU to apply a spot color to the line.
The second line you will draw is a vertical line that is aligned with the left edge
of the tinted box.
4 With the constrained-line tool still selected, position the crosshair on the
bottom left corner of the tinted box, and drag up to draw a vertical line that
extends about 1p beyond the top edge of the tinted box. 5 With the second line
still selected, choose
to select it, and drag the box until its left edge is aligned with the 13p3
vertical ruler guide, about one pica (1p) above the bottom edge of the business
card as shown in the illustration below.
Element >Stroke > 1 pt dashed line, and in the Colors palette click PANTONE 660
CVU.
6 Choose View > Send Guides to Back. 7 Choose File > Save.
Drawing lines
Like the letterhead design, the business card design includes two dashed lines that
you will create using the constrained-line tool. The first line you will draw is a
horizontal line that is aligned with the top edge of the tinted box.
Classroom in a Book
Copying text from one publication to another

Since the business card includes some text not found on the envelope, you will copy
the telephone/fax text in the 02WorkA.pmt template, and paste it to the 02WorkB.pmd
publication.
1 Click the title bar of the 02WorkA.pmt
7 Double-click the plus sign between the
two numbers to select it, and press Enter or Return, replacing the plus sign with a
hard carriage return. Although it may be hard to tell, the telephone number and the
fax number are now separate paragraphs.
8 Triple-click the first paragraph (the tele-
template to make it the active window.

phone number) in the pasted text to select it.

), triple-click the telephone/fax text in the tinted box to select it, and choose
Edit > Copy.
publication to make it the active publication.
3 Click the title bar of the 02WorkB.pmd
view button, and choose Myriad Roman for Font, type 6 for Size ( ), 11.5 for
Leading ( ), and .2 for Kerning ( ), and click the Bold button ( ).
10Triple-click the second paragraph (the fax
4 Select the text tool, drag to define a text
block that spans the width of the tinted box (exact height is not important).
number) in the pasted text to select it, and in the Control palette type 7 for
Size, 11.5 for Leading, and .35 for Kerning, and click the Apply button ( ).
11 With the insertion point still in the text
block, choose Edit > Select All to select the entire text.
12 In the Control palette, click the
5 Choose Edit > Paste.
Paragraph-view button ( ), and type p8 for both Left Indent ( ) and Right Indent
( ), and click the Force-justify button ( ).
The pasted text is not rotated like the copied text, because you copied the text
only, not the rotated text block.
6 Click outside the selection to deselect it.
72 LESSON 2
13 Select the pointer tool, click the text to
1 Scroll to view the envelope design in the
select it as a text block, hold down Shift (to constrain the movement), and drag
the text block until the text is vertically centered in the tinted box.
group in the envelope outline to select it.

3 Choose Element > Ungroup to ungroup
all elements, making it possible to move the text and graphic elements
independently.
4 Click the pasteboard (or an empty portion
of the page) to deselect all objects.

T e l é f o n o - 3 4 - 1 - 5 6 4 1 - 9 1 8
F a x - 3 4 - 1 - 5 6 4 1 - 3 2 8
You can also click the pointer tool in the toolbox to deselect all selected
objects. To move a text block (or graphic) in increments, select the text block or
graphic with the pointer tool, and either press the arrow keys or click the X and Y
nudge buttons in the Control palette.
14 Choose Window > Cascade. 15 Choose File > Save. 5 With the pointer tool
selected, click the
address to select it as a text block, and choose Edit > Copy. As with text, you can
also copy and paste a text block.
6 Choose Edit > Paste to paste a copy of the
address text block slightly offset from the original address text block.
7 Drag the pasted address text block into the
Copying, pasting, and formatting the address

After ungrouping the text and graphic elements in the envelope, you will copy the
address and drag it to the business card outline, applying new type specifications
and aligning it in the upper right portion of the business card.
top half of the business card outline.

8 Hold down both Ctrl (Windows) or Com-
mand (Macintosh) together with the spacebar, and drag to magnify the text block.
You are ready to apply new type specifications to the pasted address.
Classroom in a Book
), click an insertion
13 With the pasted address still selected as a
point in the pasted address, and choose Edit > Select All to select all text in the
text block.
10 In the Control palette, click the Charac-
ter-view button, and type 7 for Size ( ), 12 for Leading ( ), and .55 for Kerning (
), and click the Apply button ( ) to apply the new type specifications to the pasted
address.
11 Select the pointer tool, click the pasted
text block, drag the text block until the left edge of the text is aligned with the
13p3 vertical ruler guide in the upper right portion of the business card as shown
in the illustration below.
1 4 C a l l e L i b e r t a d e 2 8 0 0 4 E s p a ñ a M a d r i d
T e l é f o n o - 3 4 - 1 - 5 6 4 1 - 9 1 8
address to select it as a text block, and drag the top right corner handle until it
is roughly aligned with the right edge of the first line of address, reducing the
width of the text block.
F a x - 3 4 - 1 - 5 6 4 1 - 3 2 8
Creating the double boxes

After drawing the boxes, you will use the Control palette to resize the boxes, and
the Colors palette to fill each box with a spot color.
T e l é f o n o - 3 4 - 1 - 5 6 4 1 - 9 1 8
F a x - 3 4 - 1 - 5 6 4 1 - 3 2 8
), and drag to
The bottom windowshade handle may display a red triangle, indicating the entire
story is not displayed.
12 If the red triangle is displayed in the
draw a box of any dimension to the right of the business card.

2 With the box still selected, in the Control palette type 7p9 for W and 1p2 for H,
and press Enter or Return. 3 In the Colors palette, make sure the Both
bottom windowshade handle, drag the bottom windowshade down to display the entire
story.
button is selected, and click PANTONE 660 CVU.

4 With the rectangle tool still selected, drag
to draw another box of any dimension to the right of the first box.
74 LESSON 2
5 In the Control palette, type 11p3 for W
and 1p2 for H, and press Enter or Return.

6 In the Colors palette, click PANTONE
5595 CVU.
7 Select the pointer tool, and drag the sec-
ond box until its left edge touches the right edge of the first box.
drag the group until the vertical edge (where the boxes are joined) is aligned with
the 13p3 vertical ruler guide, positioned between the address and the top of the
vertical line, and release the mouse button.
(Macintosh) together with the spacebar, and drag to magnify the view of the edges
to check for precise alignment. Adjust the selected box if necessary.
9 With one of the boxes still selected, hold down Shift and click the adjacent box
so both boxes are selected. Then choose Element > Group.
T e l é f o n o - 3 4 - 1 - 5 6 4 1 - 9 1 8
F a x - 3 4 - 1 - 5 6 4 1 - 3 2 8
You will slow-drag this group to the business card outline to view the objects as
you drag. If you quick-drag a group, the bounding box of the group is displayed as
you drag, but not the objects.
10 With the group still selected, position the
Copying, pasting, and formatting the Braga+Braga text

After copying Braga+Braga (in the left box of the double boxes in the envelope
design), you will drag to define a text block in the left box in the business card
design, applying new type specifications and aligning it in the left box.
1 Scroll to view the envelope design.
pointer in the center of the group, and hold down the mouse button until the
pointer changes to an arrowhead. Note: If the ruler guide you are about to drag the
boxes to is not on the screen, you can let PageMaker scroll the screen while you
drag. Just drag to the edge of the publication window; when the pointer reaches the
edge, PageMaker will scroll until you stop the mouse.
), triple-click Braga+Braga in the envelope design to select it, and choose Edit >
Copy.
3 Scroll to view the business card outline.

Classroom in a Book
4 With the text tool selected, drag to define
1 Scroll to view the envelope design. 2 Select the text tool (
a text block that spans the width of the left box of the double boxes (exact height
is not important), and choose Edit > Paste to paste Braga+Braga into the text
block. You are ready to apply new type specifications to the pasted text.
5 With the insertion point still in the pasted
), triple-click Arquitectos in the right box (of the double boxes) in the envelope
design to select it, and choose Edit > Copy.
3 Scroll to view the business card outline. 4 With the text tool selected, drag to
define a text block that spans the width of the right box of the double boxes (exact
height is not important), and choose Edit > Paste to paste Arquitectos into the
text block.
text, choose Edit > Select All, and, in the Control palette, type 8 for Size ( )
and .3 for Kerning ( ), and click the Apply button ( ).
6 Select the pointer tool, click Braga+Braga
to select it as a text block, and use the arrow keys or Control palette nudge
buttons until the text is vertically centered in the left box.
You are ready to apply new type specifications to the pasted text.
text, choose Edit > Select All to select it, and in the Control palette type 10 for
Size ( ), and click the Apply button ( ).
BRAGA + BRAGA
T e l é f o n o - 3 4 - 1 - 5 6 4 1 - 9 1 8
F a x - 3 4 - 1 - 5 6 4 1 - 3 2 8
graph-view button ( ), and type p10 for both Left Indent ( ) and Right Indent ( ),
and press Enter or Return.
7 Select the pointer tool, click Arquitectos
to select it as a text block, and use the arrow keys or nudge buttons until the
text is vertically centered in the right box.
Copying, pasting, and formatting the Arquitectos text

You will format and position the word Arquitectos in the right box of the double
boxes using a similar procedure used to format and position the words Braga+Braga
in the left box.
BRAGA + BRAGA
T e l é f o n o - 3 4 - 1 - 5 6 4 1 - 9 1 8
F a x - 3 4 - 1 - 5 6 4 1 - 3 2 8

76 LESSON 2
Applying new type specifications to the B+b logo

After copying and pasting the three text elements in the B+b logo design, you will
apply new type specifications to each text object, and realign the text objects into
the logo design.
1 Scroll to view the envelope design, with
Applying new type specifications to the text objects has forced them out of
alignment.
10 Select the pointer tool, and align the three text objects of the B+b logo,
clicking individual text objects to select them as text blocks, and dragging the
text blocks until the B+b logo looks like the original logo on the envelope.
the pointer tool selected, select the B+b logo design in the envelope (hold Shift
as you click to select multiple objects).
three text objects, choose Edit > Copy, and then choose Edit > Paste to paste a
copy of the grouped B+b logo.
3 With the pasted group still selected, drag
b
the group to the right of the business card outline.

4 With the B+b logo still selected, choose
Element > Ungroup.

5 If necessary, magnify the view of the
11 With the pointer tool selected, shift-click to select the three B+b logo text
objects, and choose Element > Group to group the text objects into a single entity.
12 With the group selected, position the pointer on the B+b logo group, and drag it
until it is positioned in the lower left portion of the business card outline as
shown in the illustration below.
B+b logo.
), and double-click
the lowercase b to select it.

view button, type 55 for Size ( ), and click the Apply button ( ).
8 Double-click the uppercase B to select it,
BRAGA + BRAGA
9 With the text tool still selected, doubleclick the plus sign to select it, and,
in the Control palette, type 25 for Size, and click the Apply button.
and, in the Control palette, type 32 for Size, and click the Apply button.
B
+
T e l é f o n o - 3 4 - 1 - 5 6 4 1 - 9 1 8
F a x - 3 4 - 1 - 5 6 4 1 - 3 2 8
Classroom in a Book
You are finished assembling the business card design.

13 Choose View > Fit in Window. 14 Choose View > Hide Guides to hide the
Using the Lock Position command

To prepare the individual letterhead publications (letterhead, envelope, and
business card) to be sent to your service provider, you will use the Group command
to group all text and graphic elements in each publication into a single entity,
and then apply the Lock Position command to each publication to lock all text and
graphic elements, protecting your work from any accidental changes.
1 With the 02WorkB.pmd publication still activated, choose Edit > Select All to
select all text and graphic elements in the publication. 2 Choose Element > Group
to group all
view of the guides.
b
1 4 C a l l e 2 8 0 0 4 E s p a ñ a
BRAGA + BRAGA
Printing the letterhead

Now that you have assembled all elements for the letterhead (stationery, envelope,
and business card), you are ready to prepare these publications to be sent to a
service provider. In addition to performing trapping (unless you decide to do it
yourself using PageMaker’s trapping options) and various prepress tasks, your
service provider will create the spot color film separations on an imagesetter that
will be delivered to your commercial printer.
B
+
BRAGA + BRAGA
L i b e r t a d e
M a d r i d ,
T e l é f o n o - 3 4 - 1 - 5 6 4 1 - 9 1 8
F a x - 3 4 - 1 - 5 6 4 1 - 3 2 8
elements into a single entity.
3 With the group still selected, choose Element > Lock Position to lock the group.
5 Choose 02WorkA.pmt from the Window
menu to activate the template you assembled.

6 With the 02WorkA.pmt publication displayed, select the pointer tool in the
toolbox. Then choose Edit > Select All. 7 Choose Element > Group to group all
elements into a single entity.

8 With the group still selected, choose Element > Lock Position to lock the group.
02WorkA.pmt template as a PageMaker file.

78 LESSON 2
You are ready to deliver these letterhead publications to your service provider. In
addition to verifying the correct trapping specification with the printer, your
service provider will expect you to verify the line screen frequency with the
printer. For this example, a suitable line screen frequency could range from 80 lpi
(lines per inch) to 150 lpi. Knowing the line screen frequency, your service
provider will create film separations that range from 1200 dpi (dots per inch) to
2400 dpi. Once the film separations are complete, you are ready to deliver them to
your printer.
All text and graphic elements are still displayed, allowing you to view them as you
assemble the letter.
3 Choose View > Show Guides. 4 Save the file.
Opening the letterhead template

Now that all text and graphics in the 02WorkA.pmt template have been designated to
be nonprinting, you are ready to open a copy of the template.
1 With 02WorkA.pmt template activated, click the close box in the title bar to
close the letterhead template.
Assembling a letter
Using the 02WorkA.pmt template you assembled, you will place and align the letter
text, and prepare the letter publication to be printed on a desktop laser printer.
Closing the 02WorkA.pmt template before you reopen it better demonstrates how you
would use a custom template.
2 Choose File > Open, and select the
02WorkA.pmt file in the 02Lesson folder. The Open Publication dialog box indicates
a copy of the template will be opened. Even though you will open a copy of the
template, it is possible to open the original template by clicking the Original
button.
3 In the Open Publications dialog box, click
Using the Non-Printing command

Since the letterhead stationery includes the text and graphics for the letterhead
design, you will use the Non-Printing command to designate all text and graphics in
the letterhead template to be nonprinting.
1 With the 02WorkA.pmt publication acti-
Open (Windows) or OK (Macintosh). Because you have saved 02WorkA.pmt as a template,

PageMaker opens an untitled copy of the template, preserving the contents of the
template.
vated, choose Edit > Select All to select all text and graphics in the publication.
2 Choose Element >Non-Printing if it is not
already checked.
Classroom in a Book
4 Choose File > Save As, and type
3 With the letter text still selected as a text
02WorkC.pmd for the file name. Make sure the 02Lesson folder is selected, and click
Save.
block, drag it until the baseline of the first line of text is aligned with the 15p6
horizontal ruler guide, with the left edge of the text aligned with the left margin
guide.
+
Placing the letter text

After placing the letter text in this single-column publication, you will align it
with an existing horizontal ruler guide.
b
Sr. and Sra. Pérez Alcalá, 18 Madrid, España 2P4 N47
1 4 C a l l e L i b e r t a d e 2 8 0 0 4 M a d r i d , E s p a ñ a
F a x - 3 4 - 1 - 5 6 4 1 - 3 2 8
02TextB.doc file in the 02Lesson folder.

2 With the loaded text icon displayed, click between the margin guides, below the
letterhead design, to place the text.
T e l é f o n o - 3 4 - 1 - 5 6 4 1 - 9 1 8
BRAGA + BRAGA
The letter publication is complete.

F a x - 3 4 - 1 - 5 6 4 1 - 3 2 8
nonprinting guides.
T e l é f o n o - 3 4 - 1 - 5 6 4 1 - 9 1 8
02WorkC.pmd publication. If the preprinted letterhead stationery were available,

you could print the 02WorkC.pmd publication on a desktop laser printer.
6 Load the letterhead stationery in a 300 dpi
The left-aligned text flows between the margins of the page. Since the desired type
specifications have been applied to the letter text already, you are ready to
position the letter text on the page. Note: The empty top and bottom windowshade
handles indicate the entire story is displayed.
desktop printer, choose File > Print, select the desired options in the printing
dialog boxes, and click the Print button to print the letter.
7 Close all open publications, and choose
File > Exit (Windows) or File > Quit (Macintosh) to exit the PageMaker application.
BRAGA + BRAGA
Estimados Esperanza y Rodrigo, Realmente disfruté la visita a su casa y estoy muy

interesada en trabajar con ustedes para desarrollar al máximo su potencial. La
videocinta de Esperanza, en conjunto con la visita y su lista de requisitos, han
plasmado sus metas arquitectónicas y paisajistas. El diseño actual de la casa y el
de sus alrededores están bien integrados, así que creo que se pueden lograr esas
metas. La casa, especialmente desde el exterior, es fuerte y puede beneficiarse con
un tratamiento más uniforme de las ventanas y las puertas. El interior requiere un
poco más de trabajo, pero definitivamente el potencial está allí. Estamos
orgullosos de informarles que la Doña Calderón, la directora de la renovación del
Museo del Prado, ha pasado a formar parte de nuestro distinguido grupo de
arquitectos y diseñadores de nuestra oficina en Madrid. Nuestros diseñadores tienen
acceso a las mejores telas, muebles Europeos y del Mediterráneo así como a baldosas
pintadas a mano. Por favor refiéranse a la lista incluída respecto a costos. Creo
que su casa tiene un gran potencial y que juntos podemos compartir buenos momentos
diseñando un hogar que cumpla con las necesidades estéticas y funcionales,
aprovechando al máximo el bello sitio que ustedes han escogido para ello. Esperamos
poder ayudarles a convertir en realidad sus sueños. Atentamente,
Marie Julieta Braga e-mail: [email protected]
MB.be Perez.1
B
80 LESSON 2
Review questions
1 What is the difference between a spot color and a tint? 2 What’s the difference
between opening a
normal publication and a template?

3 What can you do if an object appears on top of others in an order you don’t want?
4 What is the easiest way to keep multiple objects together in the same
arrangement? 5 When dragging an object, how do you
ensure that it moves in a straight line?
Answers
1 A spot color is a premixed ink applied to
specified areas of the page on a commercial printing press. A tint is a spot color
that is lightened by printing a dot pattern instead of the solid color.
2 When you open a template, a new,
untitled publication is created by default.

3 Select the object, and choose Element >
Arrange. Then choose one of the commands on the Arrange menu.

4 Select the objects and choose Element >
Group. If you simply don’t want the objects to be moved, select them and choose
Element > Lock Position.
5 Hold down the Shift key as you drag.
Lesson 3
Project proposal
The project proposal you’ll create in this lesson presents an architect’s plan for
the development of a community facility within the town of Bella Coola, British
Columbia. This three-page, black-and-white publication uses the same framework and
design elements on each page. So that you’ll only have to create them once, you’ll
build a master page containing the text, graphics, column guides, and page-numbers
that you want to appear on every page.
82 LESSON 3
Project proposal
In addition to assembling a master page, this lesson introduces you to using styles
to apply character and paragraph formatting attributes to paragraphs. More than
ensuring consistency in a publication, styles free you from repeatedly selecting
and applying individual formatting attributes to each paragraph in a publication.
Although the PageMaker application provides a collection of styles (style sheet),
you will create and edit styles to build a style sheet specific to this publication.
Creating a custom text wrap
It should take you approximately 2 hours to complete this lesson.
Before you begin

All files and fonts needed for this lesson are found on the Adobe PageMaker
Classroom in a Book CD-ROM in the folders 03Lesson and Fonts, respectively. Note:
Windows users need to unlock the lesson files before using them. For information,
see Copying the Classroom in a Book files on page 4.
This lesson covers:

• • •
Establishing a master page Adding tints to the Colors palette
Using the Control palette to resize objects proportionally and to move objects
Specifying automatic page numbering
Let’s take a look at the final version of the proposal you will create in this
lesson.
• •
Establishing a publication default stroke style and weight Using page icons to turn
pages
• •
2 In addition to the commonly used fonts listed in the Getting Started chapter,
make sure the following fonts are installed: AGaramond, AGaramond Bold, AGaramond
Bold Italic, Birch, Myriad Bold, and Myriad Roman.
Displaying and hiding master-page elements Overriding the default leading method
Autoflowing text
• • •
Adjusting the tracking (the spacing between words and letters) Varying the number
of columns on a page Overriding type and paragraph specifications Creating, editing,
and applying styles
•
•
Windows only: Because of the way Windows handles fonts, AGaramond Semibold Italic
appears in the ATM Fonts list as AGaramond, Bold Italic (notice the position of the
comma), while AGaramond Bold Italic appears as AGaramond Bold, Italic. However,
neither AGaramond Bold Italic nor AGaramond
Classroom in a Book
Bold, Italic appear in font menus in Windows applications. You must apply italic to
AGaramond Bold to use AGaramond Bold Italic. You must apply bold to Myriad Roman to
use Myriad Bold. All fonts used in this publication are Adobe Originals fonts.
Birch is a particularly legible condensed display typeface and is notable for its
angled serifs.
3 Launch PageMaker.
6 Click the page 2 icon in the lower left
corner of the publication window to view the second page. To move forward one page,
press the Page Down key. To move backward one page, press the Page Up key.
Project Plan
4 Choose File > Open, and double-click the
03Final.pmd file in the 03Lesson folder to view the proposal you will create.
1
Preservation of thirty-one major trees identified in the northeast corner of the

site would significantly reduce the total space available for development. It is
recommended that the soil should remain undisturbed within 25 feet of the perimeter
of the trees’ root systems. Consequently, an area of some 185 feet by 320 feet
would be excluded from development plans in an effort to preserve the grove of
Douglas Fir trees. Preliminary analysis of the site has indicated that it would be
feasible to construct three below grade levels. However, structural considerations
of excavation and proximity to adjoining buildings may be reviewed. With these
parameters in mind, it can be calculated that, for below grade construction alone,
there is cubage available to accommodate 273,650 square feet of space in three
levels. This assumes that recommended measures would be taken to preserve the
Douglas Fir trees, and utilized in the design. The extent of above grade
construction is constrained by a desire to limit the maximum height of new
construction to about 25 feet to 28 feet above grade, and to largely preserve the
present garden environment of the
An open design: interior plan of lower level conference room utilizes moving
dividing walls to create privacy amongst community.
site. It should be noted that extensive above grade construction would impair
efforts to provide natural illumination for below grade spaces. Automobile ramp
access from Grant Road to below grade parking will need to be given further
consideration as well.
LIGHT AND VIEW CONSIDERATIONS

There is little doubt that the facility envisioned for the Northern Pointe site
will largely rely upon adequate introduction of natural light and view to the
underground levels to achieve a comfortable and successful indoor environment. This
could be accomplished through the use of sunken gardens which would adjoin below
grade working areas to provide light as well as important visual orientation and
variety. It can be recognized that sunken gardens or other light-searching
architectural elements will require substantial space to be fully effective. A
recent study of such underground architectural spaces notes that many of the kinds
of space with which we are dealing, would, “because of the dominant modes of
activity within them, require relief by physical or visual connection to adjacent
high activity areas or the external environment, or both. Characteristic occupancy
of such spaces would by relatively secondary and routinized. Characteristic
examples of such spaces would be conference centers, classrooms, and offices”
(superscript 1 here). It is our judgment that the quantity and quality of natural
light and external views deemed adequate for underground spaces in the Northern
Pointe Development cannot be established with certainty, owing to the preliminary
nature of this study and the large
B ELLA C OOLA
The Bella Coola Development Study merges community requirements for the envisioned
facility and the alternative approaches to building on the Bella
Coola Northern Pointe site. Consultants’ reports regarding structural
considerations and tree evaluation are included for their continued application to
the problem. An effort has been made to work with the full extent of space
requirements currently voiced by the Western Division Management Center and the
Bella Coola Village Organization. Other organizations were queried to form the
basis of judgment in determining the overall need. This recognizes that as the
program development progresses, tenant requirements may change, but the essential
square footage and cubic limitations for a below grade structure will re main. In
addition, it has been envisioned that jointly required facilities would be
available for all organizations to use on a shared basis, utilizing movable walls
for privacy. In utilizing the Northern Pointe site, it is initially assumed that
the envisioned facilities would be largely accommodated below grade, and that above
grade structures would be intended to accommodate those functions demanding
particular visibility and identity, such as a community recreation center. It is
very possible that significant heating and cooling economies would be achieved by
virtue of underground construction and the application of appropriate solar
collection techniques. The southern face of proposed structures along Grant Road
offer optimum orientation for collection of solar energy. Additionally, natural
illumination of below grade spaces would significantly improve the quality of the
indoor environment and has been recognized as an important component of the
project.
Project Plan
Skylights, balconies, and sunken gardens provide light to below grade levels.
AVAILABLE SPACE ANALYSIS

On the schematic site plan of the Northern Pointe site, a total area of some 200
feet by 450 feet is indicated as the proposed maximum extent of below grade
development. In addition, we believe that a 345 feet by 475 feet area to the north
of the community center may be considered for future inclusion in Northern Pointe
development plans, although it is not under consideration in this study.
The left margin of the second page displays the rotated display text, page number,
and graphics that appear on each page of this document.
Spectacular solar site: the southern face along Grant Road will provide enough
solar energy for the entire three level structure.
The full view of the first page displays a variety of text and graphic elements,
with a single column of text positioned above two columns of text. The page icons
in the lower left corner of the publication window indicate this document consists
of three pages.
84 LESSON 3
Project proposal
7 Click the page 3 icon to view the third
page.
3
number of unresolved controlling factors. Yet it is evident that space will be
required and must be set aside for natural light. Accordingly, we believe that
space for natural light and view must be initially allocated on the basis of
approximate judgment in lieu of more fixed guidelines. To this end, 15% of the
total gross floor area, or some 42,500 square feet, is allocated for natural light
and view throughout the underground areas. We expect that during further
development of this project, new information may suggest some adjustment of this
allocation. clear limitations of available space, examination of a range of options
has led to a recommendation to accommodate 32,000 square feet of space in two
buildings above grade. In the time frame of Northern Pointe development it is felt
that the Douglas Fir trees alone would merit preservation during construction,
although replacement planting of a number of major trees is envisioned to follow
construction. The current space planning figures reflect these assumptions. The
resulting total 253,850 gross square feet of space estimated to be available for
development exceeds the current requirements of 250,000 square feet by a moderate
amount. We would not necessarily suggest any further increase in the program size
to more closely match the space available for development. There is considerable
leeway for adjustment of the siting and configuration of the above grade buildings
under consideration. At this level of investigation, only schematic studies of this
question can be undertaken. A number of schemes of massing options have been
studied, and the strongest two have been selected for illustration to suggest
alternate ways to approach this unique problem.At this stage, it is suggested that
the recommendations in this study be equally reviewed.
if scanned at 300 dpi. However, to save disk space, all the images in this project
have been scanned at 100 dpi.
Project Plan
Assembling a master page

Every PageMaker publication contains at least one body page and one master page.
While body pages contain the actual text and graphics of the publication, master
pages contain repeating elements, such as margin and column guides, page numbers,
headers, and footers. In PageMaker, the default master page is called Document
Master. You can create and name additional master pages if your publication
contains more than one page design. For example, in a book the table of contents,
chapter divider, first page of a chapter, body of the chapter, and index all may
have separate master pages. To produce a more cohesive design for this multipage
publication, you will establish a master page that will contain a variety of design
elements, such as guides, repeating text, page numbering, and graphic elements that
will be common to all its pages.
CONCLUSIONS
Preceding analysis has delineated the clear limitations of space available for
development below grade on the Northern Pointe site. At this juncture it would
appear reasonable to expect that 166,350 square feet of space could be accommodated
below grade, easily accommodating the three-level design. Further expansion below
grade to the north of the Grant Community Center may constitute valuable space
available for further development, although it has not been studied herein or
included in available space estimates. Although the constraints on above grade
construction do not directly translate into
Above is a detail from the proposed expansion plan to north of the Grant Community
Center.
Again, the left margin displays the graphics and rotated display text.
8 Click the page 1 icon to return to the first page. 9 Choose View > Show Guides to
display
the guides used to assemble this proposal.
Defining printing requirements

This project proposal was designed to be printed on a 300 dpi or 600 dpi desktop
laser printing device. As mentioned in the first lesson, you need to determine the
maximum printable area of the target printing device before assembling a
publication. When printed on a 300 dpi or 600 dpi desktop laser printing device,
grayscale photographic images scanned at a resolution of 100 dpi will meet the
print quality requirements of this publication. Grayscale illustrations, however
will print more clearly

To create a master page, create a new or open an existing publication, and then
display the master page itself.
1 Choose File > New. Make sure Letter is
selected for Page Size. Click Double-sided to deselect it. To set the margin
guides, type 2.5 for Left, .75 for Right, .75 for Top, and .75 for Bottom. Choose
600 dpi for Target
Classroom in a Book
Output Resolution and choose (Windows only) HP LaserJet 5Si for Compose to Printer.
Then click OK. Note: If you do not have the required printer, you can still create
the project as directed and then print it on your own printer by
The publication window displays the untitled publication with the specified page
dimensions and margin guides.
41.
03Work.pmd for the file name, open the 03Lesson folder (if not already open), and
click Save. The page 1 icon is highlighted, indicating page 1 is selected. To
import, create, and modify text and graphic elements on a master page, you must
select the master page.
3 Click the R master-page icon in the lower
left corner of the publication window.

86 LESSON 3
Project proposal
PageMaker displays the master page, and highlights the R icon. The page still
displays the margin guides you specified in the Document Setup dialog box. Note: A
single-sided publication has only one master-page icon. In a double-sided
publication, you would see master-page icons L and R (for the left and right master
pages).
PageMaker automatically creates columns of equal width, filling the entire image
area between margin guides. Any column guides or ruler guides you create on a
master page are automatically displayed on publication pages.
Adding tints to the Colors palette Creating column guides

With the margins already defined using the Document Setup dialog box, you are ready
to specify the column guides. Even though it is possible to vary column guides from
page to page, placing column guides on master pages provides a consistent look
throughout a publication. In addition, specifying column guides on the master page
saves you the effort of specifying column guides on individual pages.
1 Choose Layout > Column Guides. Type 2 for Number of columns, and click OK.
In previous lessons, you used the Colors palette to apply tints (lightened colors)
to text and graphic objects. In this lesson, you will add two tints of black to the
Colors palette, providing a shortcut to applying the same tint to multiple objects.
1 Choose Utilities > Define Colors, and
click the New button.

2 In the Color Options dialog box, type
20% Gray for Name, choose Tint for Type, choose Black for Base Color, type 20 for
Tint, and click OK to close each dialog box.
You need to define another color, but this time you’ll use the Colors palette.
Classroom in a Book
3 In the Colors palette, either click the new
3 In the Control palette, click the Scaling
color button at the bottom of the palette or choose New Color from the palette
menu.
Palette menu
button to toggle it to proportional scaling
( ) so that the circle stays round. Then

type .85 for W, and press Enter or Return.
Proportional-scaling button
Non-proportional New color button
Proportional
4 In the Color Options dialog box, type
10% Gray for Name, choose Tint for Type, choose Black for Base Color, type 10 for
Tint, and click OK. The Colors palette displays the tints 10% Gray and 20% Gray in
its list of colors and adds a % sign to the right of each tint name.
By default, the Scaling button is set to nonproportional scaling, letting you scale
an object’s height and width independently. When set to proportional scaling, you
can enter a single value and PageMaker resizes the object evenly in both
directions.
4 In the Colors palette, click the Both but-
ton ( ), and select 20% Gray to apply the 20% tint of black to the stroke and fill
of the circle.
Using the Control palette to resize an object proportionally

After drawing a circle, you will use the Control palette to resize and position it.
This circle will serve to frame the page numbers.
1 Select the zoom tool ( 2 Select the ellipse tool (
), and magnify ), hold down
the view of the upper left corner of the page. Shift (to constrain the ellipse to a
circle), and drag to draw a circle of any diameter in the upper left corner of the
page.
Specifying automatic page numbering

To automatically number all pages in this publication, you will place a page-number
marker on the master page. Note: With PageMaker, you can number the pages of a
multiple-publication document consecutively from the first publication through the
last, restart the page numbering in each publication, or combine the two
88 LESSON 3
Project proposal
methods. You can also tell PageMaker to begin each successive publication on the
next odd or even page number.
(Macintosh) and click again to select the circle. (Holding down Ctrl or Command
lets you select an object underneath an object.)
), and drag to define
a text block over the gray circle that is wider and taller than the gray circle
(exact dimensions are not important).
RM
5 With both objects selected, choose Ele-
You’ll set the text attributes before you type the page-number marker.
ment > Align Objects (Windows) or Element > Align (Macintosh). Click both the
vertical and horizontal Center-Align buttons, and click OK.
mond Bold for Font. Type 50 for Size ( ) and 70 for Leading ( ). Click the
Paragraph view button ( ), and click the Center-align button ( ).
3 Hold down Ctrl and Alt (Windows) or
Command and Option (Macintosh), and press p. The center-aligned page-number marker
RM (right master) is displayed on the gray circle, indicating where page numbers
will appear. Note: If your publication had facing pages, you would add a page-
number marker on both the right and left master pages.
4 Select the pointer tool, and click the page-
6 With both objects still selected, select the center reference point in the
Control palette Proxy icon. Type 1 for X and .75 for Y, and press Enter or Return
to align the center of the two objects with the specified coordinate position.
Remember: Unless otherwise stated, the reference point in the Control palette Proxy
icon should be a square point, not an arrow.
7 Select the text tool, and double-click the
number marker. Then hold down Shift together with Ctrl (Windows) or Command
page-number marker to select it.

8 In the Colors palette, click [Paper] to
apply the paper color to the page number.

Classroom in a Book
Establishing a publication default stroke style and weight

Before drawing lines (to be printed) over ruler guides and column guides (which
don’t print), you will set a default stroke style and weight for the publication.
If you know ahead of time that several elements in your publication will share
certain characteristics (such as stroke style and weight), selecting default
settings can save you time. For example, once you set a stroke style and weight,
PageMaker will use those default settings each time you draw a line, ellipse,
rectangle, polygon, or frame.
1 Click the pointer tool in the toolbox to
vertical ruler guide, and drag down to the 2.16-inch horizontal ruler guide to draw
a line.
RM
Rather than creating a new vertical ruler guide, you will reposition an existing
guide that is no longer needed.
7 Select the pointer tool, and position the
deselect all objects.

2 Choose Element > Stroke > .5-pt line to
establish a publication default.

3 Choose View > Send Guides to Back. 4 From the horizontal ruler, drag to create a
pointer over the existing 1-inch vertical ruler guide. Hold down the mouse button
until the pointer changes to a double arrow, drag it until it is aligned with the
2.25-inch mark on the horizontal ruler, and release the mouse button to reposition
the guide. The second line segment you will draw is a horizontal line.
8 Select the constrained-line tool, position
horizontal ruler guide at approximately 2.16 inches. Note: Use the Control palette
to help you position ruler guides. It displays the pointer location as you drag.)
the crosshair at the ending point of the line you just drew, and drag right to the
intersection of the 2.16-inch horizontal ruler guide and the 2.25-inch vertical
ruler guide to draw a second line.
vertical ruler guide at 1 inch. The first line segment you will draw is a vertical
line.
6 Select the constrained-line tool (
RM
), position the crosshair on the intersection of the bottom edge of the gray circle
and the 1-inch
9 Choose View > Fit in Window to view the
entire master page.

90 LESSON 3
Project proposal
Creating the rotated display text

You will create, rotate, and align the display text that is positioned in the left
margin of the master page.
a horizontal ruler guide aligned with the bottom margin guide at 10.25 inches. The
10.25-inch horizontal ruler guide extends beyond the bounds of the bottom margin
guide, facilitating precise alignment across the entire page. The final line segment
you will draw is a vertical line.
11 With the constrained-line tool still
), drag to define a text block that spans the width of the image area (between the
left and right margin guides).
RM
selected, position the crosshair at the right ending point of the second line you
just drew, and drag down to the 10.25-inch horizontal ruler guide to draw a third
line.
RM
Before typing the text, you will use the Control palette to format the text.
2 In the Control palette, press the Charac-
ter-view button. Then, choose AGaramond (Regular) for Font, type 130 for Size ( ),
and click the Apply button ( ).
12 Choose File > Save. 3 Type Project. 4 With the text tool selected, double-click
Project to select it. In the Colors palette, click 10% Gray to apply the 10% tint
of black to the text.
Classroom in a Book
to select it as a text block. In the Control palette, make sure the center point of
the Proxy icon is selected, type 90 for Rotation ( ), and click the Apply button
( ).
the 1.57-inch vertical ruler guide, with the bottom edge of the letter P aligned
with the 9.12-inch horizontal ruler guide. Remember: If you drag immediately after
pressing the mouse button, you see the bounding box of the text block. If you pause
before you drag, you see the characters in the text block as you drag, making it
easier to align the baseline to a ruler guide or to align characters to each other.
RM
RM
Project
The text is rotated on the center point of the text block.

horizontal ruler guide at approximately 9.12 inches.

vertical ruler guide at approximately 1.57 inches.

8 Choose View > Snap to Guides to deselect
Replacing selected text

You can save a bit of time if you copy and paste the word Project to create a new
text block, and then replace Project with the word Plan. The new word will already
be rotated and have the correct font applied.
1 With the pointer tool still selected, click the word Project to select it as a
text block, and choose Edit > Copy, and then choose Edit > Paste.
(uncheck) the option.

the text Project to select it as a text block, and drag it until its baseline is
aligned with
Project
92 LESSON 3
Project proposal
The pasted text block is rotated like the copied text block, and the text is
formatted like the copied text.
of the letter P in the word Plan aligned with the stem of the letter t in the word
Project as shown below.
RM
), double-click the pasted text to select it, and type Plan to replace the pasted
text.
and in the Colors palette click 20% Gray. This design calls for the word Plan to
use a smaller font size.
3 Double-click the word Plan to select it,
4 With Plan still selected, in the Control
palette type 100 for Size ( ), and click the Apply button.
RM
Project Plan
7 With the pointer tool selected, drag the top right handle to conform to the word
Plan.
Plan overlaps Project, and the master page is complete.

8 Choose Edit > Select All and then
Element > Lock Position to prevent accidentally modifying the master-page elements.
9
5 Select the pointer tool, and drag the exist-
ing 2.25-inch vertical ruler guide to approximately 2.15 inches.

Displaying and hiding master-page elements

You can display master-page elements on a page-by-page basis, making it possible to
create a publication that makes use of master-page elements on certain pages.
the word Plan to select it as a text block, and drag it until its baseline is
aligned with the 2.15-inch vertical ruler guide, with the stem
Project Plan
Choose File > Save.
Classroom in a Book
1 Click the page 1 icon in the lower left
corner of the publication window to view the first page. Since master-page elements
are automatically displayed on each page of the publication, the first page of the
publication is displayed along with all master-page elements. The master page
elements are at the bottom of the stacking order on the page and cannot be moved.
Notice that this page displays an actual page number instead of the page number
marker.
2 Choose Edit > Select All, and notice how
The first page of the publication is displayed, along with all master-page elements.
Assembling the first page

To assemble the first of three pages of the proposal, you will begin by creating and
modifying text. Once the text is formatted, you will create new styles and edit
existing styles that you will use throughout the rest of this publication.
Creating the title

After establishing the character and paragraph specifications for the title (Bella
Coola) that spans the top of the first page of the proposal, you will type the text
and apply a 75% tint of black using the Colors palette.
none of the master-page elements are selected. Since the first page is displayed, it
is not possible to select text and graphic elements on the master page. You can
easily hide master-page elements on a particular page in your publication, provided
it is the current page.
3 With the first page still displayed, choose View > Display Master Items to
deselect the option.
), and drag to define a text block that spans the width of the two columns (exact
height is not important).
1
The text and graphic elements that you created disappear, and the nonprinting
guides (margin, column, and ruler) are not affected. If you were to print this
page, none of the master-page elements would be printed.
4 Choose View > Display Master Items to
again display the master page items.
Project Plan
94 LESSON 3
Project proposal
2 In the Control palette, choose Birch for
Font, type 100 for Size ( ), and click the All Caps button ( ). Note: By default,
PageMaker automatically sets the leading to 120% of the font size (as indicated in
the Control palette).
3 Type bella coola.
Since leading is a character attribute, you can apply more than one leading amount
within the same paragraph.
5 Drag to select the letter C in the word
COOLA, and, in the Control palette, type 120 for Size, and click the Apply button.
1
BELLA COOLA
Project Plan
Because you had selected the All Caps button in the Control palette, the text is
displayed in uppercase letters.
4 With the text tool still selected, drag to select the letter B in the word BELLA,
and in the Control palette type 120 for Size, and click the Apply button.
6 With the text tool still selected, triple-click the title text to select it. 7 In
the Control palette, click the Para-
graph-view button ( ), and then click the Force-justify button ( ) to force the
title text to spread across the width of the text block (which spans the two
columns).
8 With the text still selected, make sure [Black] is selected in the Colors
palette, and choose 75% for Tint to apply a 75% tint of black.
Note: If different leading amounts occur within a single line, PageMaker uses the
largest leading amount for the entire line.
Project Plan
BELLA COOLA
Classroom in a Book
To make the text easier to work with, you will change the leading method used for
the title. The leading method controls where text sits in the slug. (As mentioned
in Lesson 1, a slug is the vertical space used by each line of type.) PageMaker
lets you choose three different leading methods: proportional (the default method),
top of caps, and baseline. Proportional and baseline leading are the most common
methods.
9 With the text still selected, notice where
the text sits in the highlighted leading slug. Choose Type > Paragraph.
10 In the Paragraph Specifications dialog
Bella Coola Bella Coola Bella Coola

A B C
box, click the Spacing button. The Spacing Attributes dialog box (Windows) and
Paragraph Spacing Attributes dialog box (Mac OS) lets you to control the amount of
space inserted between letters and words, the leading method, and the percentage of
autoleading. In this example you will use the Spacing Attributes dialog box to
override the proportional (default) leading method with the baseline leading
method.
11 In the Spacing Attributes dialog box
A. Proportional leading B. Top of Caps leading C. Baseline leading
The proportional leading method (the method currently applied to the title) aligns
the baseline of the text one-third of the slug height above the bottom of the slug.
The baseline leading method, on the other hand, aligns the baseline of the text
with the bottom of the leading slug. When using baseline leading, the baseline of
the last line of text in a text block aligns with the bottom of the text block.
Because you’ll be placing text underneath this title, it will be easier to work
with other text blocks if the bottom of the title text block is not in the way.
(Windows) or Paragraph Spacing Attributes dialog box (Mac OS), select Baseline for
Leading Method. Hold down Shift (Windows) or Option (Macintosh), and click OK to
close all the dialog boxes at once.
96 LESSON 3
Project proposal
Notice that the slug has shifted in the title so that the baseline touches the
bottom of the slug.
12 Select the pointer tool, click the title text
03TextA.doc file in the 03Lesson folder.

2 Choose Layout > Autoflow.
to select it as a text block, hold down Shift (to constrain the movement to 90º),
and drag the text block to align the top edge of the smaller letters with the top
margin guide.
1
The pointer changes to an automatic text-flow icon. PageMaker has three text flow
modes, each represented by a different text-flow icon:
Manual flow Flows one column or text block at a time. Automatic flow Flows text
column to column until the entire story is placed, adding pages if needed.
Semiautomatic flow Flows text one
B ELLA C OOLA
Project Plan
column or text block at a time, ending with the loaded text icon if more text
remains to be placed. Whenever you have a loaded text icon, you can switch
temporarily between manual and automatic text flow by pressing Ctrl (Windows) or
Command (Macintosh). To switch temporarily to semiautomatic flow, hold down Shift
when the loaded text icon is displayed.
The 120-point letters overlap the top margin.

Placing text using the Autoflow command

Use the Autoflow command when you have a lot of text to place. Flowing text
automatically means PageMaker will create new pages until all text is placed,
eliminating the need for you to add individual pages.
Classroom in a Book
3 Making sure the automatic text-flow icon
does not overlap the margin guides or column guides, click in column 1 below the
title text.
1
text in either column to select it as a text block. Note: Depending upon your
monitor size and the zoom level, the text in both columns may be grayed-out. The
top and bottom windowshade handles of the selected text block display plus signs
( ). As just mentioned, a plus sign in the windowshade handle indicates that text
from the same story is contained in another text block.
2
these parameters in mind, it can be calculated that, for below grade construction
alone, there is cubage available to accommodate 273,650 square feet of space in
three levels. This assumes that recommended measures would be taken to preserve the
present garden environment of the site. It should be noted that extensive above
grade construction would impair efforts to provide natural illumination for below
grade spaces. Automobile ramp access from Grant Road to below grade parking will
need to be given further consideration as well. Light and View Considerations There
is little doubt that the facility envisioned for the Northern Pointe site will
largely rely upon adequate introduction of natural light and view to the
variety. It can be recognized that sunken gardens or other lightsearching
nature of this study and the large number of unresolved controlling factors. Yet it
is evident that space will be required and must be set aside for natural light.
Accordingly, we believe that space for natural light and view must be initially
allocated on the basis of approximate judgment in lieu of more fixed guidelines. To
this end, 15% of the total gross floor area, or some 42,500 square feet, is
allocated for natural light and view throughout the underground areas. We expect
that during further development of this project, new information may suggest some
adjustment of this allocation. Conclusions Preceding analysis has delineated the
clear limitations of space available for development below grade on the Northern
Pointe site. At this juncture it would appear reasonable to expect that 166,350
square feet of space could be accommodated below grade, easily accommodating the
three-level design. Further expansion below grade to the north of the Grant
Community Center may constitute valuable space available for further
B ELLA C OOLA
Project Plan
The last lines of text in the story are displayed on page 3 of your publication,
indicating PageMaker has automatically inserted two pages.
4 With the pointer tool selected, click the text in column 1 to select it as a text
block.
The plus sign in the top windowshade handle indicates that text from the same story
is contained in another text block, and the empty bottom windowshade handle
indicates the end of the story.
5 Click the page 2 icon to view the second
Plus sign
page of the publication.
In previous lessons you placed and created stories that were contained in a single
text block. Since the story in this lesson is contained in five text blocks, the
text in this publication is threaded (through multiple text blocks).
Project Plan
98 LESSON 3
Project proposal
7 Click the page 1 icon to view the first page
Adjusting the tracking

After formatting the text, you will use the Expert Tracking command to adjust the
spacing between letters and words (tracking) in the proposal text. This command is
useful for darkening or lightening a page— type with tight tracking darkens a page,
and type with loose tracking lightens a page. You can also use Expert Tracking to
adjust the spacing of selected lines of very large or very small type (headlines
and captions), or to make text fit in a defined space on a page.
of the publication.
block.
The first line of text in column 1 is positioned where you clicked to place the
text, with the empty top windowshade handle ( ) indicating the beginning of a
story. Do not worry if the tops of the two text blocks are not aligned at this
point. You will be resizing these later to make room for an introductory paragraph
that spans both columns. Note: If no text had been positioned in the top portion of
column 2, the entire right column would have been filled with text.
1
), click the proposal
text to establish an insertion point, and choose Edit > Select All to select the
entire threaded story. Note: Once the entire story is formatted, you can apply
specific styles to a few specific paragraphs (such as headlines, subheads, etc.) to
override the original formatting, saving you the effort of formatting all
paragraphs individually.
B ELLA C OOLA
facility and the alternative approaches to building on the Bella Coola Northern
Pointe site. Consultants’ reports regarding structural considerations and tree
evaluation are included for their continued application to the problem. An effort
has been made to work with the full extent of space requirements currently voiced
by the Western Division Management Center and the Bella Coola Village Organization.
Other organizations were queried to form the basis of judgment in determining the
overall need. This recognizes that as the program development progresses, tenant
requirements may change, but the essential square footage and cubic limitations for
a below grade structure will remain. In addition, it has been envisioned that
jointly required facilities would be available for all organizations to use on a
shared basis, utilizing movable walls for privacy. In utilizing the Northern Pointe
site, it is initially assumed that the envisioned facilities would be largely
accommodated below grade, and that above grade structures would be intended to
accommodate those functions demanding particular visibility and identity, such as a
community recreation center. It is very possible that significant heating and
cooling economies would be achieved by virtue of underground construction and the
application of appropriate solar collection techniques. The southern face of
proposed structures along Grant Road offer optimum orientation for collection of
solar energy. Additionally, natural illumination of below grade spaces would
significantly improve the quality of the indoor environment and has been recognized
as an important component of the project. Available Space Analysis On the schematic
site plan of the Northern Pointe site, a total area of some 200 feet by 450 feet is
indicated as the proposed maximum extent of below grade development. In addition,
we believe that a 345 feet by 475 feet area to the north of the community center
may be considered for future inclusion in Northern Pointe development plans,
although it is not under consideration in this study. Preservation of thirty-one
major trees identified in the northeast corner of the site would significantly
reduce the total space available for development. It is recommended that the soil
should remain undisturbed within 25 feet of the perimeter of the trees’ root
systems. Consequently, an area of some 185 feet by 320 feet would be excluded from
development plans in effort to preserve the grove of Douglas Fir trees. Preliminary
analysis of the site has indicated that it would be feasible to construct three
below grade levels. However, structural considerations of excavation and proximity
to adjoining buildings may be reviewed. With
Project Plan
view button. Choose Myriad Roman for Font, type 8.7 for Size ( ) and 13 for Leading
( ), and click the Apply button ( ).
3 With the text still selected, click the Paragraph-view button ( ) in the Control
palette. Then type .25 for First-line Indent ( ), and click the Justify button ( ).

Classroom in a Book
The first line of each paragraph is indented, with the left and right edges of the
text aligned with the edges of the text block. Now that the text is formatted, you
will use the Expert Tracking command to adjust the spacing between letters and
words (tracking) in the proposal text.
Note: It is also possible to select a tracking option from the Tracking pop-up menu
in the character view of the Control palette.
1
B ELLA C OOLA
site plan of the North-
(Macintosh) together with the spacebar, and drag diagonally across the text in
column 1 to enclose half the text block. In this magnified view, notice how the
spacing between letters and words in the proposal text is fairly tight.
5 With the entire story still selected, choose
Project Plan
ern Pointe site, a total area of some 200 feet by 450 feet is indicated as the
proposed maximum extent of below grade development. In addition, we believe that a
345 feet by 475 feet area to the north of the community center may be considered
for future inclusion in Northern Pointe development plans, although it is not under
consideration in this study. Preservation of thirty-one major trees identified in
the northeast corner of the site would significantly reduce the total space
available for development. It is recommended that the soil should remain
undisturbed within 25 feet of the perimeter of the trees’ root systems.
Consequently, an area of some 185 feet by 320 feet would be excluded from
development plans in an effort to preserve the grove of Douglas Fir trees.
Preliminary analysis of the site has indicated that it would be feasible to
construct three below grade levels. However, structural considerations of
excavation and proximity to adjoining buildings may be reviewed. With these
need to be given further consideration as well. Light and View Considerations There
is little doubt that the facility envisioned for the Northern Pointe site will
largely rely upon adequet introduction of natural
Type > Expert Tracking > Very Loose. The Expert Tracking menu displays six tracking
options. The default tracking option No Track means no tracking has been applied to
the text. Because Very Loose tracking increases letter spacing for this point size
(of this typeface), the loosened tracking makes the page appear lighter.
Varying the number of columns on a page

You can have a different number of columns on different parts of a single page. In
this example, you will create a single column of text below the title text, above
the two existing columns of text. You will begin by reducing the size of the text
blocks in the left and right columns to make room for a text block that spans the
image area (between the left and right margins).
100 LESSON 3
Project proposal
1 Scroll to view the middle portion of
the page.
horizontal ruler guide at approximately 4.17-inches. (Use the Control palette to

verify its location as you drag.) You will drag the top of the text blocks in the
two columns down to this horizontal ruler guide. To help you align the text block,
you’ll first turn the Snap to Guides option back on.
3 Choose View > Snap to Guides to select
the text in column 1 to select it as a text block, and drag the top windowshade
handle until it snaps to the ruler guide.
1
B ELLA C OOLA
excavation and proximity to
(check) the option.

4 Select the pointer tool, click the text in
column 2 to select it as a text block, and drag the top windowshade handle down
until it snaps to the horizontal ruler guide you just created.
1
B ELLA C OOLA
construction to about 25 feet
Project Plan
PageMaker automatically flows the text when you resize the text blocks, displaying
the first line of text in the threaded story at the top of the first text block.
6 If the baseline of the last line of text in col-
umn 2 is not aligned with the bottom margin guide, select the text block and drag
the windowshade handle to expose one more line of text. (You can leave column 1 as
is; you’ll be adding a photograph and caption to it.) With the size of the text
blocks reduced, you have space to create a single column of text below the title
text.
Project Plan
Classroom in a Book
), drag to select the
Creating and applying a style

A style is a set of character and paragraph formatting attributes. Once you define a
style, you can select one or several paragraphs and apply the style. In just one
step, all formatting defined for that style is applied to the text. Styles are
especially useful when you repeat formatting characteristics in several places or
are still experimenting with the layout of a publication. As with other paragraph
attributes, you need only an insertion point in the paragraph to apply a style. A
style affects the entire paragraph, regardless of how much text is selected.
However, you can override a style by selecting text within the paragraph and
applying other attributes to the selected text. PageMaker lists the styles of a
publication in three different places: in the Styles palette, in the Control
palette, and on the Styles submenu of the Type menu. You can apply a style to text
from any of these style lists. Earlier you specified the first line of each paragraph
in the proposal text to be indented .25 inch. You’ll now create a style that has no
indent, so you can quickly change the formatting of select paragraphs.
1 Make sure the insertion point is still in the
first three and a half lines in column 1 (up to and including the word Bella), and
choose Edit > Cut.
8 Position the insertion point at the beginning of the remaining text in column 1
(before the word Coola), and if necessary press the Backspace key to delete the
letter space. 9 With the text tool selected, drag to define a text block above the
text in the left and right columns, spanning the width of the two columns (exact
height is not important), and choose Edit > Paste.
B ELLA C OOLA
square footage and cubic limitations for a below grade structure will remain. In
project. Available Space Analysis On the schematic site plan of the Northern Pointe
site, a total area of some 200 feet by 450 feet is indicated as the proposed
maximum extent of below grade development. In addition, we believe that a 345 feet
by 475 feet area to the north of the community center may be considered for future
inclusion in Northern Pointe development plans, although it is not under
consideration in this study. Preservation of thirty-one major trees identified in
the northeast corner of the site would significantly reduce the total space
available for development. It is recommended that the soil should remain
undisturbed within 25 feet of the perimeter of the trees’ root systems.
Consequently, an area of some 185 feet by 320 feet would be excluded from
levels. This as-
No longer part of the threaded story, the pasted text is a separate story and will
serve as an introductory paragraph. Once formatted with a larger font, this
introductory text will serve to draw the reader’s eye from the larger text into the
smaller text of the proposal.
Project Plan
pasted introductory text.

2 In the paragraph view of the Control
palette, type 0 for First-line Indent ( press Enter or Return.
), and
102 LESSON 3
Project proposal
The introductory paragraph is no longer indented. To make it easier to remove the

first-line indent from a few other paragraphs in this publication, you will create a
style where the first line of text in a paragraph is aligned to the left edge of the
text block. Once created, you will apply this style to selected paragraphs in the
proposal text.
Collectively, a publication’s styles are called a style sheet, and are listed in
the Styles palette. In addition to displaying numerous default styles, the Styles
palette displays the No Indent style. You don’t have to re-create styles each time
you create a publication. You can copy styles from other PageMaker publications or
from other word-processing applications. For more information, see the Adobe
PageMaker 7.0 User Guide. Now that you have created the No Indent style, you can
apply it to the first paragraph in column 1 below the introductory text.
6 With the text tool selected, click the first paragraph in column 1 (below the
introductory text) to establish an insertion point.
introductory text, choose Type > Define Styles, and then click the New button.
4 In the Style Options dialog box, type No
Indent for Name. Hold down Shift (Windows) or Option (Macintosh), and click OK to
close the dialog boxes.
The No Indent style has the type and paragraph specifications assigned to the
introductory text.
5 Click the Styles palette tab to display the
Note: When applying a style to a single paragraph, you must establish an insertion
point in that paragraph. When applying a style to multiple, contiguous paragraphs,
you must select some text in all target paragraphs.
7 In the Styles palette, click No Indent to
apply the style to the paragraph. Since the introductory text is meant to draw the
reader’s eye into the proposal text, the first paragraph of proposal text looks best
without an indentation in the first line of text.
Styles palette.
Classroom in a Book
Formatting the introductory text

After formatting the introductory text, you place it in its final position on page
1.
1 With the text tool selected, triple-click the
5 Select the pointer tool, click the introduc-
introductory text below the title text to select it.

2 In the Control palette, click the Force-
tory text to select it as a text block, hold down Shift (to constrain the
movement), and drag the text block until its bottom edge snaps to the 4.17-inch
horizontal ruler guide.
B ELLA C OOLA
considerations and t l ti i l d d f th i ti gy. Additionally, natural illumination
of below grade spaces would significantly improve th lit f th i d i t d
justify button ( ) to align the left and right edges of the text with the edges of
the text block, including the last line of text.
3 In the Control palette, click the Characterview button ( ). Choose AGaramond Bold
for Font, type 22 for Size ( ) and 39 for Leading ( ), and click the Italic button
( ).
Placing a graphic
After placing and aligning a photograph in column 1, you will reduce the size of
the text block in column 1.
1 Scroll to view the bottom of the page. 2 In column 2, locate the fourth line of
text
Note: Because of the way fonts are defined, when you apply italic to AGaramond Bold,
PageMaker actually uses AGaramond Bold Italic. On the Macintosh, you can get the
same result if you select AGaramond Bold Italic directly.
4 With the introductory text still selected, click the Colors palette tab to
display the Colors palette. Make sure [Black] is selected in the Colors palette,
and choose 65% for Tint to apply a 65% tint of black to the introductory text.
above the bottom margin guide. From the horizontal ruler, drag down to create a
horizontal ruler guide aligned with the baseline of this line of text.
Pr
ect Plan
B ELLA C OOLA
considerations and t l ti i l d d f th i ti gy. Additionally, natural illumination
of below grade spaces would significantly improve th lit f th i d i t d
would be largely accommodated below grade, and that above grade structures would be
intended to accommodate those functions demanding particular visibility and
identity, such as a community recreation center. It is very possible that
significant heating and cooling economies would be achieved by virtue of
underground construction and the application of appropriate solar collection
techniques. The southern face of pro orientation for collection of solar energy.
Additionally, natural illumination of below grade
in 25 feet of the perimeter of the trees root sys tems. Consequently, an area of
some 185 feet by 320 feet would be excluded from development plans in an effort to
preserve the grove of Douglas Fir trees. Preliminary analysis of the site has
indicated that it would be feasible to construct three below grade levels. However,
structural considerations of excavation and proximity to adjoining buildings may be
reviewed. With these parameters in mind, it can be calculated that, for below grade
construction alone, there is cubage available to accommodate 273,650 square feet of
space in three levels. This as-
The formatted text is ready to be aligned.
ect Plan
104 LESSON 3
Project proposal
To allow for a 3-line caption, you will use this horizontal ruler guide to align
the bottom edge of the photograph with the baseline of text in column 2. Note:
Unless you want to place an inline graphic (a graphic attached to text), it’s a
good idea to make sure the text does not contain an insertion point when importing
a graphic.
3 Select the pointer tool to ensure that the
The photograph extends into the left margin. With the photograph aligned, you are
ready to resize the text block in column 1.
text doesn’t contain an insertion point.

4 Choose File > Place. Double-click the
text above the photograph in column 1 to select it as a text block, and drag the
bottom windowshade handle to display the last line of text to be approximately one
line space above the photograph.
1
03ArtA.tif file in the 03Lesson folder.

5 With the loaded graphic icon displayed,
B ELLA C OOLA
considerations and tree evaluation are included for their contintinued application
to the problem. An effort has been made to work with the full extent of space
project. Available Space Analysis On the schematic site plan of the Northern Pointe
site, a total area of some 200 feet by 450 feet is indicated as the proposed
maximum extent of below grade development. In addition, we believe that a 345 feet
by 475 feet area to the north of the community center may be considered for future
in-
click in column 1 to place the photograph. Depending on where you clicked, the
photograph overlaps the text in one or both columns.
6 With the photograph still selected, drag it until its bottom edge snaps to the
horizontal ruler guide you just created, with its right edge snapped to the right
edge of column 1.
B ELLA C OOLA
collection techniques. The southern face of pro orientation for collection of solar
energy. Additionally, natural illumination of below grade spaces would
levels. This as-
Column 1 displays 14 lines of proposal text.

Project Plan
Editing the default Caption style

Once the caption text is placed below the photograph, you will edit the default
Caption style and apply it to the text.
1 Choose Layout > Autoflow to deselect it. 2 Choose File > Place, double-click the
03TextB.doc file in the 03Lesson folder.
Project Plan
Classroom in a Book
7 In the Character Specifications dialog
in column 1 below the photograph to place the text.
gy y, spaces would significantly improve the quality of the indoor environment and
has been recognized as an important component of the project. Available Space
Analysis On the schematic site plan of the Northern Pointe site, a total area of
some 200 feet by 450 feet is indicated as the proposed maximum extent of below
grade development. In addition, we believe that a 345 feet by 475 feet area to the
north of the community center may be considered for future inclusion in Northern
box, choose AGaramond Bold for Font, type 10 for Size and 13 for Leading, and then
make sure Italic is selected for Type style. Hold down Shift (Windows) or Option
(Macintosh), and click OK to close the dialog boxes.
If a red triangle appears in the bottom windowshade handle, some of the caption
remains to be placed. You will fix this later. Since all captions in this
publication will be formatted identically, you will save time by editing the
existing Caption style to create a custom style. Once created, this style can be
applied to each caption in your publication.
4 Choose Type > Define Styles.
Pr
), click the caption text under the photograph to establish an insertion point.
The Define Styles dialog box displays the default styles that you can apply to text.
In addition to creating new styles as you have already done, you can use this
dialog box to edit an existing style, creating a custom style.
5 In the Define Styles dialog box, click Cap-
9 In the Styles palette, click Caption to
apply a style to the selected paragraph.

10 Select the pointer tool, click the caption text to select it as a text block,
and drag the bottom windowshade handle until the entire story is displayed. Then
hold down Shift (to constrain the movement), and drag the text block until the
baseline of the last line of text is aligned with the bottom margin guide.
tion for Style, and click the Edit button.

6 In the Style Options dialog box, click the
Char button. Even though you can use the character view of the Control palette to
format text, the Character Specifications dialog box provides the most complete set
of characterformatting options in PageMaker.
Pr
gy y, spaces would significantly improve the quality of the indoor environment and
has been recognized as an important component of the project. Available Space
Analysis On the schematic site plan of the Northern Pointe site, a total area of
some 200 feet by 450 feet is indicated as the proposed maximum extent of below
grade development. In addition, we believe that a 345 feet by 475 feet area to the
north of the community center may be considered for future inclusion in Northern

106 LESSON 3
Project proposal
Editing the default Subhead style

After editing the existing Subhead style to create a custom style for the subheads
in this publication, you will apply it to the subhead on the first page.
1 Choose Type > Define Styles, select
5 With the text tool still selected, click the
first paragraph below the subhead text you just formatted to establish an insertion
point in the paragraph.
6 In the Styles palette click No Indent
Subhead 1 for Style, and click Edit.

2 In the Style Options dialog box, click
to apply the custom style to the selected paragraph. The paragraph following the
subhead is no longer indented.
7 If necessary, select the pointer tool, click
Char. Choose Myriad Roman for Font, type 11 for Size and 13 for Leading, choose
Small Caps for Case, and select Bold for Type Style. To close the dialog boxes,
hold down Shift (Windows) or Option (Macintosh), and click OK.
the text in column 2 to select it as a text block, and drag its bottom windowshade
handle down just below the margin guide so the last line of text is aligned with
the bottom margin guide.
1
B ELLA C OOLA
considerations and tree evaluation are included for their contintinued application
to the problem. An effort has been made to work with the full extent of space
project.
3 Select the text tool, and click the subhead
Available Space Analysis in column 2 of the first page to establish an insertion

point.
4 In the Styles palette click Subhead 1 to
Project Plan

of the community center may be considered for future inclusion in Northern Pointe
development plans, although it is not under consideration in this study.
apply the style to the subhead text.
Pr
gy y spaces would significantly improve the quality of the indoor environment and
has been recognized as an important component of the project.
The first page is complete.


of the community center may be considered for future inclusion in Northern
Classroom in a Book
Assembling the second page

After applying character specifications to the text on the second page, you will
place two graphics with captions.
6 In the Styles palette, click No Indent to
apply the style to the selected paragraph.

2
need to be given further consideration as well. them, require relief by physical or
visual connection to adjacent high activity areas or the external environment, or
both. Characteristic occupancy of such spaces would by relatively secondary and
routinized. Characteristic examples of such spaces would be conference centers,
classrooms, and offices” (superscript 1 here). It is our judgment that the quantity
and quality of natural light and external views deemed adequate for underground
spaces in the Northern Pointe Development cannot be established with certainty,
owing to the preliminary nature of this study and the large number of unresolved
controlling factors. Yet it is evident that space will be required and must be set
aside for natural light. Accordingly, we believe that space for natural light and
view must be initially allocated on the basis of approximate judgment in lieu of
more fixed guidelines. To this end, 15% of the total gross floor area, or some
42,500 square feet, is allocated for natural light and view throughout the
underground areas. We expect that during further development of this project, new
information may suggest some adjustment of this allocation. Conclusions Preceding
analysis has delineated the clear limitations of space available for development
below grade on the Northern Pointe site. At this juncture it would appear
reasonable to expect that 166,350 square feet of space could be accommodated below
grade, easily accommodating the three-level design. Further expansion below grade
to the north of the Grant Community Center may constitute valuable space available
for further development, although it has not been studied herein or included in
available space estimates. Although the constraints on above grade construction do
not directly translate into clear limitations of available space, examination of a
range of options has led to a recommendation to accommodate 32,000 square feet of
space in two buildings above grade. In the time frame of Northern Pointe
development it is felt that the Douglas Fir trees alone would merit preservation
during construction, although replacement planting of a number of major trees is
envisioned to follow construc-
Applying styles
The styles you created earlier will simplify your work on the second page.
Project Plan

activity within
page of the publication. All master-page elements display on the second page.
2 Magnify the view of the text in the lower
half portion of column 1.

), click the subhead
Light and View Considerations in column 1 to establish an insertion point

4 In the Styles palette, click Subhead 1. 5 With the text tool still selected,
click the
Placing a drawing
You will place and position a drawing in the lower portion of column 1. This
drawing was scanned, then resized in Adobe Photoshop and saved in TIFF format with
a resolution of 100 dpi.
first paragraph below the subhead text you just formatted to establish an insertion
point in the paragraph.
horizontal ruler guide aligned with the baseline of the third line of text above
the bottom margin guide.
108 LESSON 3
Project proposal
To allow for a 2-line caption, you will use this horizontal ruler guide to align
the bottom edge of the drawing with the baseline of text in column 2.
2 Choose View > Fit in Window. 3 Choose File > Place, click (do not double
text in column 1 to select it as a text block, and drag the bottom windowshade
handle to display the last line of text to be one line space above the drawing.
2
need to be given further consideration as well.
click in column 1 to place the drawing.

5 With the drawing still selected, drag it
until its bottom edge snaps to the horizontal ruler guide you just created, and its
left edge snaps to the left column guide.
2
need to be given further consideration as well. them, require relief by physical or
visual connection to adjacent high activity areas or the external environment, or
both. Characteristic occupancy of such spaces would by relatively secondary and
routinized. Characteristic examples of such spaces would be conference centers,
classrooms, and offices” (superscript 1 here). It is our judgment that the quantity
and quality of natural light and external views deemed adequate for underground
spaces in the Northern Pointe Development cannot be established with certainty,
owing to the preliminary nature of this study and the large number of unresolved
controlling factors. Yet it is evident that space will be required and must be set
aside for natural light. Accordingly, we believe that space for natural light and
view must be initially allocated on the basis of approximate judgment in lieu of
more fixed guidelines. To this end, 15% of the total gross floor area, or some
42,500 square feet, is allocated for natural light and view throughout the
underground areas. We expect that during further development of this project, new
information may suggest some adjustment of this allocation. Conclusions Preceding
analysis has delineated the clear limitations of space available for development
not directly translate into clear limitations of available space, examination of a
range of options has led to a recommendation to accommodate 32,000 square feet of
space in two buildings above grade. In the time frame of Northern Pointe
development it is felt that the Douglas Fir trees alone would merit preservation
during construction, although replacement planting of a number of major trees is
envisioned to follow construc-
Project Plan
Now that the drawing and text are aligned, you are ready to place the caption text.
03TextC.doc file in the 03Lesson folder.


activity within
in column 1 below the drawing to place the text.

), and click the caption to establish an insertion point.

apply a style to the text.
10 In the Styles palette, click Caption to
With the drawing aligned, you are ready to resize the text block in column 1.
11 Magnify the view of the caption text. 12 Select the pointer tool, click the
caption text to select it as a text block, drag the bottom windowshade handle until
the entire story is displayed.
Project Plan
click) the 03ArtB.tif file in the 03Lesson folder to select it. Make sure As
Independent Graphic is selected, and click Open (Windows) or OK (Macintosh).

nature of this study and the large number of unresolved controlling factors. Yet it
is evident that space will be required and must be set aside for natural light.
Accordingly, we believe that space for natural light and view must be initially
allocated on the basis of approximate judgment in lieu of more fixed guidelines. To
this end, 15% of the total gross floor area, or some 42,500 square feet, is
allocated for natural light and view throughout the underground areas. We expect
that during further development of this project, new information may suggest some
adjustment of this allocation.
Classroom in a Book
13 Hold down Shift (to constrain the move-
4 With the illustration still selected, select
ment), and drag the text block until the baseline of the last line of text is
aligned with the bottom margin guide.
the top left reference point in the Control palette Proxy icon. Type 4.316 for X
and .417 for Y, and press Enter or Return. The top left corner of the illustration
is aligned with the specified coordinate position (4.316, .417). In addition to
overlapping the text in column 2, the illustration overlaps text in column 1.
Pr

development of this project, new information may suggest
Using the Control palette to position a graphic

After placing a second illustration on the second page, you will enter precise
values in the Control palette to move it. The illustration you are about to place
and position was created in Adobe Dimensions®, sized in Adobe Photoshop, and saved
in TIFF file format with a resolution of 100 dpi. Note: Adobe Dimensions is a design
tool that lets you create and edit 2D Bézier paths and text directly within the
program and then extrude, revolve, bevel, and manipulate them for a 3D look.
1 Scroll to view the upper right portion of
Creating a custom text wrap

Since this nonrectangular illustration extends into column 1, you will create a
custom text wrap that makes the text flow around the edges of the illustration.
1 With the pointer tool selected, click the illustration to select it, and choose
Element > Text Wrap.
the page.
The Text Wrap dialog box lets you specify how you want the text to flow around the
graphic boundary of the selected object.
2 In the Text Wrap dialog box, click the
03ArtC.tif file in the 03Lesson folder.

second icon (rectangular wrap) for Wrap option. For Text Flow, make sure the third
click in column 2 to place the illustration.
t lan

feasible to construct three below grade levels. However, structural
need to be given further consideration as well.

could be accomplished
110 LESSON 3
Project proposal
icon (wrap all sides) is selected. Type 0 for Bottom (leave the other Standoff
values at their default setting), and click OK.
and drag the corner graphic handle up until it is aligned with the baseline of the
fourth line of text in column 1.
rvation of thirty-one es identified in the corner of the site ignificantly reduce
space available for ent. It is recomhat the soil should disturbed within 25 e
perimeter of the t systems. Consen area of some 185 feet by 320 feet excluded from
development plans rt to preserve the grove of Douglas of thirty-one ified in the of
the site ntly reduce available for recommended uld remain undisfeet of the
perimeter systems. Consequently, 85 feet by 320 feet would development plans in an
e the grove of Douglas Fir
height of new construction to a to 28 feet above grade, and to serve the present
garden environ
to 28 feet above grade, and to largely serve the present garden environment o site.
It should be noted that extensive ab
A rectangular graphic boundary (dotted line) frames the illustration, with the text
flowing around the edges of the graphic boundary within both columns. You will
customize the shape of this graphic boundary to allow the text to flow around the
illustration with greater precision.
3 Position the cursor at the bottom edge of the graphic boundary (dotted line) and
the right edge of column 1, and click.
The custom text wrap allows the text to flow around the text wrap boundary. However,
although the text is wrapping to the boundary, a portion of the graphic (its white
background) is on top of the text, obscuring it. You will send the graphic to the
back of the stacking order.
5 Choose Element > Arrange > Send to
Back to stack the illustration behind the text and graphic elements.
t lan

Douglas Fir trees.
to 28 feet above grade, and to largely preserve the present garden environment of
the site. It should be noted that extensive above
t lan

basis of judgment in de-

tity, such as a community recreation center. It is very possible that significant
heating and cooling economies would be achieved by
Placing, formatting, and aligning a caption

You will place, format, and align a caption to be displayed below the illustration
at the top of column 2. Before placing the caption text, you will reduce the size
of the text block in column 2 to make some space for the 3-line caption.
An additional handle is displayed on the graphic boundary. (If you do not see a new
handle, click again more quickly.)
4 Position the pointer on the bottom left corner handle of the graphic boundary,
hold down Shift (to constrain the movement),
Classroom in a Book
1 In column 1, locate the third line of the
), and click the
second paragraph. Then, from the horizontal ruler, drag to create a horizontal
ruler guide that is aligned with the baseline of that third line (Y equals
approximately 3.4 inches in the Control palette). To make room for the caption,
you’ll align the first line of proposal text in column 2 with this baseline. You’ll
start by dragging its top windowshade handle down, below the text wrap boundary, so
the text block is easier to position.
2 With the pointer tool selected, select the
caption text to establish an insertion point.

6 In the Styles palette, click Caption to apply a style to the text. 7 From the
horizontal ruler, drag to create a
horizontal ruler guide aligned with the baseline of text closest to the 3.02 inch
mark in column 1. You will use this horizontal ruler guide to align the caption
text with the text in column 1.
8 Select the pointer tool, and click the cap-
ect Plan
proposal text in column 2 as a text block, and drag the top windowshade handle down
until one line of text displays above the horizontal ruler guide you just created.
Then, holding down Shift (to constrain the movement), drag the text block so the
baseline of the first line of text aligns with the ruler guide.
would significantly reduce the total space available for development. It is
there is cubage available to accommodate 273 650 f f i h l l
tion to select it as a text block. Then drag the text block until the baseline of
the last line of text is aligned with the horizontal ruler guide you just created.
would significantly reduce the total space available for development. It is
there is cubage available to accommodate 273 650 f f i h l l
ect Plan

), position the tool
You are ready to place the caption text.

over the page at the bottom of the publication window, and drag the page up.
Keeping dragging until you see the bottom of the page.
10 If the last line of text in column 2 does
03TextD.doc file in the 03Lesson folder.

in column 2 (below the illustration) to place the text. Before aligning the caption
text, you will apply the Caption style.
not rest on the baseline, select the pointer tool, and click the text in column 2
to select it as a text block. Then drag the bottom windowshade handle so it snaps
to the margin guide and the last line of text rests on the margin guide. The second
page of this publication is completely assembled.
112 LESSON 3
Project proposal
2 If there is no text in column 1 on page 3,
Project Plan

present garden environment of the

nature of this study and the large
click the page 2 icon to view the second page, click the text in column 2 with the
pointer tool to select it as a text block, and click the red triangle at the bottom
of the text block to load the remaining text. Then click the page 3 icon to view
the third page. Let the loaded text icon snap to the margin guides in the top left
corner of column 1, and then click to place the text.
block.
The red triangle in the bottom windowshade handle indicates there is more text to
be placed. Before manually flowing the remaining text into column 2, you will format
the text in column 1.
Assembling the third page

After formatting and aligning the text on the third page, you will draw a box that
will serve to frame an illustration. This boxed illustration and its corresponding
caption will span the width of both columns.
), and click the subhead Conclusions to establish an insertion point. (Zoom in first
if necessary.) In the Styles palette, click Subhead 1.
Applying styles
You will apply the same styles to the text on the third page as you did on the
previous pages.
1 Click the page 3 icon to view the third
5 With the text tool still selected, click the first paragraph below the subhead
text you just formatted to establish an insertion point in the paragraph. In the
Styles palette click, No Indent.
ject Plan
ed on the basis of approximate judgment in lieu of more fixed guidelines. To this

end, 15% of the total gross floor area, or some 42,500 square feet, is allocated
for natural light and view throughout the underground areas. We expect that during
further development of this project, new information may suggest some adjustment of
this allocation.
CONCLUSIONS
grade to the north of
page of the publication. As before, all master-page elements are displayed within
the bounds of the third page.
With the type and paragraph specifications applied to the text, you are ready to
align the text.
Classroom in a Book
Manually flowing text into a column

Because the illustration and caption will extend across the bottom portion of both
columns, you will resize the text block in column 1, and manually flow the remaining
text into column 2. Before reducing the size of the text block in column 1, you
will create a horizontal ruler guide aligned with text in column 1. You will
eventually use this horizontal ruler guide to align the bottom edge of the box that
contains an illustration, allowing enough space for a single-line caption.
As before, the red triangle in the bottom windowshade handle indicates all text is
not displayed.
4 Click the red triangle in the bottom win-
dowshade handle to load the remaining text in the story.

5 With the loaded text icon displayed, position the icon in the top left corner of
column 2, letting it snap to the column and margin guides. Click to place the text.
horizontal ruler guide aligned with the baseline of the second line of text above
the bottom margin guide. After drawing the box that will frame the illustration,
you will use this horizontal ruler guide to align the box.
The empty bottom windowshade handle of the text block in column 2 indicates the end
of the story. Depending upon how precise you were when you placed the graphics and
text throughout this project, the lines may not end in exactly the same spot. Make
sure the first line of each text block on this page aligns. Do not worry if one text
block is a few lines longer than the other.
horizontal ruler guide aligned with the baseline of text nearest to the 5.9-inch
mark on the vertical ruler.
roject Pl
column 1 to select it as a text block, and drag the bottom windowshade handle just
below the line of text aligned with the horizontal ruler guide you just created.
t lan

allocation.
not directly translate into
match the space available for development. There is considerable leeway for
adjustment of the siting and configuration of the above grade buildings under
consideration. At this level of investigation, only schematic studies of this
roject Pl
not directly translate into

114 LESSON 3
Project proposal
Drawing a box
After creating a box that will frame the final illustration, you will align it with
an existing horizontal ruler guide.
horizontal ruler guide you created, with the left and right edges of the box still
aligned with the margin guides.
3
), and drag to
Project Plan
draw a box below the proposal text, spanning the width of the two columns (exact
height is not important).
3
CONCLUSIONS
Project Plan
CONCLUSIONS
Since the bottom of the box is aligned with what was the baseline of the second
line of text above the bottom margin guide, you have provided enough space for the
singleline caption.
2 In the Control palette, type 3.87 for H,
and press Enter or Return to establish the height for the box.
3 With the box still selected, choose
Placing a graphic and caption

After placing the final illustration, you will place, format, and align its
corresponding caption. This illustration was resized in Adobe Photoshop, and saved
in TIFF file format with a resolution of 100 dpi.
Element > Stroke > Hairline to assign a stroke style and weight to the line of the
box.
4 Select the pointer tool, position the
pointer on the edge of the box, hold down Shift (to constrain the movement), and
drag the box until its bottom edge snaps to the
03ArtD.tif file in the 03Lesson folder.

2 With the loaded graphic icon displayed, click within the hairline box to place
the illustration.
Classroom in a Book
3 With the illustration still selected, drag
7 Select the pointer tool, click the caption
it until it is visually centered in the hairline box.

3
Project Plan
text to select it as a text block, and drag the bottom windowshade handle until the
entire story is displayed. Then hold down Shift (to constrain the movement), and
drag the text block until the baseline of the text is aligned with the bottom
margin guide.
CONCLUSIONS
Pr
Center.
You have completed assembling the entire proposal.


03TextE.doc file in the 03Lesson folder. To make the caption text span the image
area, you will drag to define a text block that spans both columns.
5 With the loaded text icon displayed, drag to define a text block under the boxed
illustration that spans both columns to place the caption (exact height is not
important).
column, ruler, and margin guides used to assemble this proposal.

3
Project Plan
CONCLUSIONS
Pr
Center.
), and click the cap10 Choose File > Save to save the
tion text to establish an insertion point. In the Styles palette, click Caption.
03Work.pmd publication.
116 LESSON 3
Project proposal
Producing the proposal

As mentioned at the beginning of this lesson, you can print this publication
successfully on any 300 dpi or 600 dpi desktop laser printing device, and then
photocopy it as needed. Or you can Export to Adobe PDF as described in Creating an
Adobe PDF version of the flyer on page 41.
1 Choose File > Print to open the Print
Answers
1 Styles let you do the following:
•
Maintain a consistent look throughout the publication. Ensure accuracy so that

different paragraphs all have exactly the same specifications. Simplify and speed up
formatting.
Document printing box for the type of printer you selected.

2 In the Print Document dialog box, click
2 Click the pointer tool to deselect all
Color. Make sure the Composite and Grayscale options are selected.
3 Click Print to print the proposal. 4 Close all open publications, and choose
objects, and then set the stroke and fill options you want using the Element menu
and/or the Colors palette. These settings affect all objects you draw in that
publication from this point forward but do not affect existing objects.
3 Slug. 4 Hold down Shift (Windows) or Option
File > Exit (Windows) or File > Quit (Macintosh) to exit the PageMaker application.
(Macintosh) and click OK or Cancel.

5 With Autoflow on, PageMaker fills all columns and creates new pages as needed
without manual intervention.
Review questions
1 List two advantages to using styles. 2 How do you make every object you will
draw in a PageMaker publication have the same stroke width, color, and fill?
3 What is the term that refers to the vertical space used by each line of type? 4
What is a quick way to close multiple dialog boxes with a single click? 5 What is
an advantage of placing text with
Autoflow on?
Lesson 4
Jewelcase booklet
In this lesson you will create the eight-page booklet titled Architectural
Treasures of Italy, featuring eight color photographs of historic Italy. For best
results, this booklet needs to be printed on a printing press. To print color art
on a commercial printing press, your service provider will separate each page
containing composite art into its component colors by creating a film separation on
an imagesetter for each ink–cyan, magenta, yellow, black (CMYK), and any spot
colors. A commercial printer uses these film separations to create the printing
plates used on the press.
118 LESSON 4
Jewelcase booklet
Designed to accompany a CD-ROM, this publication fits in the front cover of a CD-
ROM jewelcase. It’s easy to get the right dimensions, because the PageMaker
application includes a page size already established for this exact purpose. Before
printing this booklet on a commercial printing press, you must specify a custom
paper size larger than the page size to accommodate the printer’s marks (cropping
marks) and page information.
This lesson covers:
• • • • • • •

Let’s take a look at the final version of the booklet you will create in this
lesson.
settings to their defaults, deleting the PageMaker 7.0 preferences file. See
2 In addition to the commonly-used fonts
listed in the Getting Stated chapter, make sure AGaramond, AGaramond Bold,
AGaramond Semibold Italic, and Birch are installed. Windows only: Because of the
way Windows handles fonts, AGaramond Semibold Italic appears in the ATM Fonts list
as AGaramond, Bold Italic (notice the comma). However, neither AGaramond Semibold
Italic nor AGaramond, Bold Italic appear in font menus in Windows applications. You
must apply bold and italic to AGaramond to use AGaramond Semibold Italic.
3 Launch PageMaker. 4 Choose File > Open, and double-click the
Specifying columns of unequal width Working with layers Creating a bordered frame
Reversing text out of a frame Adding rules to a paragraph Flowing text
semiautomatically
Modifying an image using the Image Control command
It should take you approximately 2 hours to complete this lesson.
04Final.pmd file in the 04Lesson folder.
Before you begin

All files and fonts needed to assemble this booklet are found on the Adobe PageMaker
Classroom in a Book CD-ROM in the folders 04Lesson and Fonts, respectively.
Architectural Treasures of Italy
A Photographic Reference of Palaces, Churches, and Ruins

Classroom in a Book
The full view of the first page displays a variety of text and graphic elements. The
page icons indicate the booklet consists of eight pages.
you the optimum bleed size for this job. So that you can better visualize the
printed piece, the images in 04Final.pmd do not bleed, nor will they bleed in the
version you create. As discussed in lesson 2, adjacent colored objects in a design
require trapping. After verifying the trapping specification, the size of the bleed,
and the line screen frequency with your printer, talk with your service provider to
determine who will perform the prepress tasks and how you should deliver this
publication to your service provider.
6 Click the page icons to page through the
booklet, and then click the page 1 icon to display the first page.
7 Choose View > Show Guides to display
the guides used to assemble this booklet.
Talk with your printer

Designed to be printed on a commercial printing press, this booklet features images
that were saved as CMYK TIFF files, making it easier to create the film separations.
To reduce the demand for disk space on your system, these images were scanned at a
resolution of 100 dpi. Since it is likely that your printer would recommend
printing this sort of publication at a line screen frequency of 150 lpi, in a real
environment these images would have to be scanned at 300 dpi (double the selected
line screen frequency) to meet the printing requirements of this publication. To
successfully print a design like this one, which has images that touch the edge of
the page, you must allow the images to extend or bleed beyond the trim marks of the
page. A bleed allows for inaccuracies of the press and trimming equipment. Your
printer can tell
Assembling the master page

For these left and right master pages, you will specify column guides, create
graphic elements, and specify automatic page numbering.

After setting the options in the Document Setup dialog box, you will save and name
your publication.
1 Choose File > New, and choose Compact
Disc for Page Size. Type 8 for Number of Pages, type .25 for Inside, .25 for
Outside, .329 for Top, and .329 for Bottom to set the margin guides. Set the Target
Output Resolution to 2400 dpi, and choose (Windows only) the AGFA-ProSet9800 for
Compose to Printer. Then click OK. Note: If you do not have the required printer,
you can still create the project as directed and then print it on your own printer
by
120 LESSON 4
Jewelcase booklet
41.
single-sided publications, where the zero point is aligned with the top left corner
of the page.)
4 3 2 1 0 1 2
Zero point
0
Establishing preferences
Because you use the rulers to set up guides, it’s a good idea to choose a
measurement system before you begin laying out your pages.You’ll also reduce the
size below which PageMaker displays text as gray lines in layout view.
The publication window displays the first page of the untitled publication with the
specified page dimensions and margin guides. Unless you specify otherwise, page
number 1 of a double-sided publication is assigned to the first right page in the
publication.
To open the Preferences dialog box, double-click the pointer tool.

2 In the Preferences dialog box, choose
04Work.pmd for Name, open the 04Lesson folder if necessary, and click Save.
Picas for both Measurements In and Vertical Ruler, and then click More. Remember:
22p9 means 22 picas and 9 points.
and third facing pages. The zero point is aligned with the intersection of the top,
inside edges of the facing pages. (In previous lessons, you assembled
1
Classroom in a Book
3 In the More Preferences dialog box, set
Greek Text Below to 3. Leave all other settings at their default values. Hold down
Shift (Windows) or Option (Macintosh), and click OK to close the dialog boxes.
that you can specify different numbers of columns on the left and right pages), and
click OK.
PageMaker automatically creates columns of equal widths, filling the entire image
area between the margin guides. You’ll now move the column guides. To maintain the
specified space between columns, the guides of adjacent columns move together. It is
important that you drag and position the correct guide. The locations specified are
for the right guide in column 1, not the left guide of column 2.
3 Select the pointer tool (if necessary). On
Specifying columns of unequal width

PageMaker automatically creates columns of equal width when you specify multiple
columns. In this project you will create unequal columns, using the pointer tool to
drag the column guides to the positions you want.
1 Click the master-page icon ( ) in the lower left corner of the publication
window.
the right master page, position the pointer on the right column guide of column 1.
(See the illustration.) Then drag the column guide until it is aligned
approximately with the 15p mark on the horizontal ruler.
6 12 18 24
PageMaker displays the facing master pages and highlights the master-page icon.
These pages display the margin guides you specified in the Document Setup dialog
box, with the zero point aligned with the intersection of the top, inside edges of
the facing pages.
2 Choose Layout > Column Guides, and
12
18
type 2 for Number of Columns, select Set Left and Right Pages Separately (just to
see
24
122 LESSON 4
Jewelcase booklet
4 On the left master page, drag the right col-
Setting automatic page numbering

To number all pages in a publication automatically, you can place page-number
markers on the master pages. After you place the page number marker in a black
circle on the left page, you will copy and paste them to the right page, and
reverse the colors.
umn guide of column 1 until it is aligned approximately with the -13p6 mark on the
horizontal ruler. Note: Since the left page is positioned to the left of the zero
point, all X coordinate values for the left page are less than or equal to zero.
Drawing a circle
After drawing a small circle, you will use the Control palette to resize it, and
the Colors palette to fill it with the color black.
1 Magnify the lower left portion of the left
), and drag to define a text block on top of the black circle, making it
approximately the width of the circle (exact height is not important).
If your cursor jumps to the column guide, drag again over the circle. You need to
reverse the text so it will stand out on the black circle. You’ll set the text
attributes before you type the page-number marker so you can see what you type.
master page.
2 Select the ellipse tool ( ) in the toolbox, hold down Shift (to constrain the
ellipse to a circle), and drag to draw a small circle of any dimension. 3 In the
Control palette, make sure the Scal-
mond (Regular) for Font. Type 9 for Size ( ), click the Bold ( ), and Reverse
buttons ( ). Remember that when you click a button in the Control palette,
PageMaker applies any values you’ve typed as well as the action for the button.
Note: Because of the way fonts are defined, when you apply bold to AGaramond,
PageMaker actually uses AGaramond Semibold. On the Macintosh, you can get the same
result if you select AGaramond Semibold directly.
3 Hold down Ctrl and Alt (Windows) or
ing button is toggled to proportional scaling
( ). Type 1p2 for W (width) and press Tab.

(Because you selected proportional scaling, PageMaker automatically enters 1p2 for
H.) Press Enter or Return to resize the circle.
4 In the Colors palette click the Both button
), and click [Black] to apply the color black to the stroke and fill of the circle.
Placed on the master pages, the circle will serve to frame the page numbers.
Command and Option (Macintosh), and press p.

Classroom in a Book
The page-number marker LM (left master) is displayed over the black circle,
indicating where the page numbers will appear. You will use the align objects
feature in PageMaker to center the text over the circle, but first you need to
center the text within the text block. You will both increase the leading, to
center the page number within the leading slug, and then change the paragraph
alignment from left justified to center.
4 With the cursor still in the text, choose
7 With the two objects still selected, select
the center reference point in the Proxy icon in the Control palette. Type -26p3 for
X and 26p11 for Y, and press the Apply button ( ) to align the center of the
objects with the specified coordinate position. Remember: Unless otherwise stated,
the reference point in the Control palette Proxy icon should be a square point, not
an arrow.
Edit > Select All. In the Control palette, type 15 for Leading ( ). Click the
Paragraphview button ( ) and then click the Centeralign button ( ).
5 Select the pointer tool, drag to select both
LM
the black circle and the page-number marker. If you selected only one of the
objects, drag again, but start dragging further away so you enclose the bounding
boxes of both objects.
6 Choose Element > Align Objects
Copying the page-number marker

Since your publication has facing pages, you will copy the left page-number marker,
and paste the copy on the right master page.
1 With the pointer tool selected, drag to select both the black circle and the
pagenumber marker. Choose Edit > Copy. 2 Hold down Alt (Windows) or Option
(Windows) or Element > Align (Macintosh). Click both the vertical and horizontal
Center-Align buttons, and click OK.
(Macintosh) and double-click the zoom tool ( ) to switch to the fit-in-window view.
Now that both pages are visible, you can zoom in to the area on the right page
where you’ll paste the page number marker.
3 With the zoom tool still selected, drag across the bottom right quadrant of the
right master page. 4 Choose Edit > Paste.
124 LESSON 4
Jewelcase booklet
PageMaker pastes the circle and page-number marker on the right master page. Notice
that the page-number marker automatically changes to RM (right master). Note: Page-
number markers positioned on the pasteboard display as PB (pasteboard).
5 With the black circle and the page-num-
7 Select the pointer tool, hold down Ctrl
(Windows) or Command (Macintosh) and click twice to select the black circle. (The
first click selects the text block; the second click selects the circle.) In the
Colors palette, make sure the Both button ( ) is selected, and select the color
[Paper].
ber marker still selected, in the Control palette make sure the center reference
point in the Proxy icon is selected, type 26p3 for X and 26p11 for Y, and press
Enter or Return.
Drawing a box
After creating the box that fills the right side of the right master page, you will
fill it with the color black and adjust the stacking order to stack the black box
behind the circle and the page-number marker.
1 Double-click the hand tool ( 2 Select the rectangle tool (
). (This is
another shortcut to the fit-in-window view.)
), and draw a
box of any dimension on the right master page.

RM
Since the circle and the page-number marker will be positioned on a black box, you
will reverse the colors of both objects.
), and double-click
the page-number marker RM to select it. In the Control palette, click the
Character-view button ( ). Then click the Reverse button ( ) to deselect it (and
thus change the color back to black). The Reverse button toggles text between the
paper color and black. Until you reverse the circle, the page-number marker will
not be visible.
RM
You’ll now use the Control palette to both move it to the right edge of the page
and to resize it.
Classroom in a Book
3 In the Control palette, select the top right
Looking at layers in the final version

Before you create layers in this booklet, take a look at how layers were used in
the final version.
1 Choose Window > 04Final.pmd to switch
corner reference point in the Proxy icon. Click the Scaling button to toggle it to
nonproportional scaling ( ). Type 28p4 for X, 0 for Y, 9p6 for W, and 28p6 for H,
and then press the Apply button ( ).
4 In the Colors palette, select the Both
button ( ), and then select [Black] to apply the color black to the stroke and fill
of the box. The black box covers the white circle and page-number marker.
5 With the box still selected, choose Ele-
to the final version of the publication. (In Windows, the path to the file is
displayed with the file name on the Window menu.)
2 If necessary, click the page 1 icon to view
the front cover of the booklet.

3 Choose Window > Show Layers.
Show/hide Lock/unlock Palette menu Target layer Visible and Locked layer
ment > Arrange > Send to Back to stack the black box behind the circle and the
pagenumber marker. The master-page design is complete, and you are ready to
assemble the booklet cover.
New layer button
LM
RM
Assembling the booklet cover

After hiding the display of the master-page elements on the first page (booklet
cover), you will create two layers to separate the art and text. You’ll then divide
the page into quadrants, place four photographs, and create the boxed title and
subtitle.
Layers let you separate like elements and treat them like a unit without grouping
them. When elements are on a layer, you can display them, hide them, lock them, or
even change their stacking order in relation to the rest of the publication. You’ll
use layers in this booklet to speed up screen redraw and make layout easier. After
placing the photographic images on the Art layer, you’ll hide that layer as you
work on the text layer. When you want to display both layers, you can quickly lock
one layer so you don’t have to worry about inadvertently moving an object.
4 Click the eye icon (
) of the Art layer.

126 LESSON 4
Jewelcase booklet
PageMaker hides the Art layer throughout the publication, not just on the displayed
page. A hidden layer also does not print.
5 Click the page 2 icon, and then click to
7 Drag the Layers tab to the Colors and
Styles palette, and then click the Close box of the Master Pages palette.
display the eye icon of the Art layer to again view the images. You can determine
which layer an element is on by selecting the element.
6 Select the image behind the table of
contents on page 2.
Target layer
Creating layers
You are now ready to create two new layers in your booklet.
Selection box
1 Choose File > Close to close
04Final.pmd and to return to your publication. If prompted to save before closing,

click No. The layer containing the selected element becomes the target layer. (It
is highlighted and contains the pencil icon.) The small selection box next to the
pencil icon indicates that something on that layer is selected. Notice that the
color of the graphic handles of the selected image match the color swatch of the
layer. The three palettes you’ll use most often in creating this booklet are the
Layers, Styles, and Colors palettes. You can combine the three to leave more room
to view your page. Your publication already contains a default layer (called
Default). Because that was the only layer when you created the master pages, all
the master page elements automatically were placed on the Default layer. You can
place master page elements on any layer, and with the exception of stacking order,
they will behave like any other element on the layer. However, master page elements
always display at the bottom of the stacking order, regardless of the layer they
are on. You will leave the Master Page elements on the Default layer.
2 Click the New Layer button ( ) at the bottom of the Layers palette, type Art for
Name, and click OK.
Create the next layer using the Layers palette menu.

Classroom in a Book
3 Choose New Layer from the Layers palette
Placing and cropping a graphic

After dividing the front cover into quadrants, you will place a photograph into
each quadrant. The photographs were prepared in Adobe Photoshop by applying a
single color to a grayscale TIFF image, and then sizing and saving each image in
TIFF file format at a resolution of 100 dpi.
menu, type Text for Name, and click OK. The stacking order of layers reflects their
order in the palette: the bottom layer in the palette is the bottom layer in the
publication. Because the text in the booklet appears on top of the images, you
created the text layer as the top layer.
Hiding the display of master-page elements

You can display master-page elements on a page-by-page basis. Because the design
doesn’t use master-page elements on the cover, you will deselect the display of the
master-page elements for the cover.
1 Click the page 1 icon to view the front
horizontal ruler guide at 14p3. From the vertical ruler, drag to create a vertical
ruler guide at 14p2, dividing the booklet cover into quadrants. As you learned in
Lesson 1, you can move the zero point (the intersection of the horizontal and
vertical rulers) to any location on the page. To make it a little easier to align
the four photographs on the cover, you will move the zero point from the top-left
corner of the page until it is aligned with the center of the page. Each image will
have a corner touching the zero point, making it easy to enter their precise
location in the Control palette.
cover of the booklet. Since master-page elements are automatically displayed on

each page of the publication, the first page of the publication is displayed with
all master-page elements found on the right master page. You can easily hide
master-page elements on a page.
2 Choose View > Display Master Items to
deselect the option. The text and graphic elements that you created are not
displayed, but the nonprinting guides (margin, column, and ruler) are not affected.
If you were to print this page, none of the master-page elements would be printed.
128 LESSON 4
Jewelcase booklet
the pointer on the crosshair of the zero point, and drag it until the zero point is
aligned with the intersection of the ruler guides you just created. Watch the
position in the Control palette; X should be 14p2, and Y should be 14p3.
6 12 18 24
be aligned with the edges of the page. When the booklet is complete, one of the
prepress tasks will be to pull the crop rectangles out again, to reestablish the
bleeds. Before you crop, you’ll position the images.
6 In the Control palette, select the bottom
right reference point in the Proxy icon, type 0 for both X and Y, and press Enter
or Return to align the bottom right corner of the photograph with the zero point.
Precision will be important when cropping these images for two reasons. You will
copy all the images on the cover and paste them onto the back cover. If cropped
precisely to fit the page, they will be easier to position on the back cover. In
addition, in the final printing of this booklet, the binding edges of the pages will
abut each other, rather than bleed. If not cropped carefully, an image could
overlap the adjacent page in the signature or not print all the way to the page
fold. This is another example of the importance of talking to your service provider
before you begin layout.
7 If necessary, reselect the photograph.
12
18
24
3 Make sure the Art layer is the target layer. If not, click to select it. 4 Choose
File > Place, and double-click the
04ArtA.tif file in the 04Lesson folder.

click in the upper left quadrant of the page to place the photograph. Since the
photographs extend to the edges of the page, each photograph was sized to allow for
a bleed to overlap the edges of the page. For the sake of viewing the actual design
of the cover, you will crop each photograph to
Select the cropping tool ( ), and position the tool over the top left graphic
handle of the photograph, making sure the graphic handle shows through the center
of the cropping tool. Hold down the mouse button until the tool changes to a
double-headed arrow.
Classroom in a Book
4 Select the cropping tool (
), and posi-
drag down and right to the top left corner of the page, and release the mouse
button when W in the Control palette is 14p2, and H is 14p3. PageMaker crops the
view of the photograph.
tion the tool over the top right graphic handle of the photograph, and drag down
and left to the top right corner of the page. Watch the values in the Control
palette; W should be 14p2, and H should be 14p3.
Placing and cropping the three remaining graphics

As you place the three remaining photographs on the cover, crop each one to be
aligned with the edges of the page.
04ArtC.tif file in the 04Lesson folder.

6 With the loaded graphic icon displayed, click in the lower left quadrant of the
page to place the photograph. 7 In the Control palette, select the top right
04ArtB.tif file in the 04Lesson folder.

reference point in the Proxy icon, type 0 for both X and Y, and press Enter or
Return. You will use the cropping tool in the Control palette to crop the next two
images.
8 Click the Cropping button ( ) in the Control palette. With the top right
reference point still selected, type 14p2 for W, and 14p3 for H, and click the
Apply button ( ). 9 Choose File > Place, and double-click the
click in the upper right quadrant of the page to place the photograph.
3 In the Control palette, select the bottom
left reference point in the Proxy icon, type 0 for both X and Y, and press Enter or
Return.
04ArtD.tif file in the 04Lesson folder.

130 LESSON 4
Jewelcase booklet
10 Position the loaded graphic icon in the
lower right quadrant of the page and let it snap to the zero point. Then click to
place the photograph.
11 In the Control palette, select the top left
You will create the title for this booklet in a bordered frame on the text layer.
1 In the Layers palette, select the Text layer.
Then click the eye icon ( ) of the Art layer to temporarily hide the images.
2 Select the rectangle frame tool (
reference point in the Proxy icon, type 0 for both X and Y. Click the Cropping
button, and type 14p2 for W, and 14p3 for H. Then click the Apply button.
), and drag to draw a box of any dimension in the center of the page.
3 In the Control palette, select the center
reference point in the Proxy icon. Type 0 for both X and Y (to center the frame on
the page), type 9p7 for both W and H (to resize the frame), and press Enter or
Return.
4 Click the Colors palette tab, make sure the
Both button ( ) is highlighted. Then select [Black] to apply the color black to the
stroke and fill of the box.
5 Choose Element > Stroke > 6-pt triple
line to create a triple-line border.

Creating a bordered frame for the title

Next to the rectangle, ellipse, and polygon tools in the toolbox, is a
corresponding frame tool. Like standard PageMaker-drawn shapes, frames can have a
stroke and fill. Unlike standard shapes, however, frames can also have content,
either text or graphics. Frames make it easy for you to position objects and text
within another shape and can serve as placeholders in templates or during the
design phase of a publication.
You now need to set the frame options. The frame options control the position of
the content within the frame. You can center a text block vertically within a
frame, or align its top or bottom with the top or bottom of the frame. You can also
specify insets to offset text from the edges of the frame.
Classroom in a Book
6 With the frame still selected, choose
Element > Frame > Frame Options. Choose Center for Vertical Alignment, set the Top,
Bottom, Left, and Right Insets to 0, and click OK. Note: Vertical Alignment and
Offsets are the only frame options that affect text. The other options apply to
graphics in a frame.
(You can press the Tab key to jump from one edit box to the next. (In Windows,
press Tab twice.) After entering the Black value, press Tab again if you want to
see the final color displayed in the color swatch.
3 Click OK, and then click New again. 4 Type Dark Blue for Name, and enter the
CMYK values shown below.
Defining process colors

This booklet calls for two custom colors. Before you define these process colors,
you’ll remove any unused colors from the palette.
1 Choose Utilities > Define Colors, and
click the Remove Unused button. When prompted, click Yes to All to remove all
unused colors, then click OK when PageMaker lists the number of colors and inks
removed. (Do not close the Define Colors dialog box.)
2 In the Define Colors dialog box, click
5 Hold down either Shift (Windows) or
Option (Macintosh) and click OK to close the dialog boxes.

6 Click the Maximize button in the top of
New. Type Sand for Name, and choose Process for Type and CMYK for Model. Then enter
the CMYK values shown below.
the Colors palette to display the entire palette. (Click again if PageMaker
minimizes the palette.)
132 LESSON 4
Jewelcase booklet
PageMaker added the new colors Dark Blue and Sand to the palette.
graph Space After settings. You can either calculate a top offset to push the text
down or change the leading method, which changes where the text sits in the leading
slug. Of the three leading methods, the Top of Caps leading option provides the
best spacing for centering text vertically in a frame.
5 With the text still selected, choose Type >
Creating the title

After creating the title, you will center it in the bordered box.
Paragraph. Click Spacing, and select Top of Caps for Leading Method. Hold down
Shift (Windows) or Option (Macintosh), and click OK to close the dialog boxes.
), and click inside the bordered frame to establish an insertion point. In the
Character view of the Control palette, choose Birch for Font, type 24 for Size ( ),
and click the Apply button ( ).
color for the text you are about to type.
2 In the Colors palette, select Sand to set the 3 Type the following text, breaking
the lines
as shown with Enter or Return: Architectural Treasures of Italy

4 Choose Edit > Select All. In the Control 6 Choose File > Save.
Placing the subtitle in a frame

After creating another frame, you will place the subtitle within it.
palette, type .05 for Kerning ( ). Click the Paragraph-view button ( ), and then
click the Center-align button ( ) to center the text horizontally in the frame. The
text is now nicely centered horizontally in the frame, but vertically it is still a
bit offcenter. The frame option centers the entire block of text, including leading
and Para-
), and
drag to draw a box of any dimension below the existing black frame.
2 In the Control palette, make sure the
center reference point in the Proxy icon is selected. Type 0 for X, 11p8 for Y,
23p8 for
Classroom in a Book
W, and 1p4 for H, and press Enter or Return to resize the box and center it
horizontally on the page.
3 In the Colors palette, click the Stroke
), triple-click the
subtitle to select it, and choose Type > Paragraph.

7 Choose Center for Alignment. Click Spac-
button (
). Make sure [Black] is selected.
Element > Frame > Frame Options. Choose Center for Vertical Alignment, and set the
Top, Bottom, Left, and Right Insets to 0. Then click OK.
ing, and then select Top of Caps for Leading Method. Hold down Shift (Windows) or
Option (Macintosh), and click OK to close the dialog boxes.
view button ( ), and type 10 for Size ( ), 10 for Leading ( ), and .06 for Kerning
( ). Click the Bold ( ) and Italic ( ) buttons. To better set off the subtitle, you
will change the frame to a solid black box and apply the paper color to the text.
(As mentioned in the beginning of this lesson, clicking the Reverse button in the
Control palette is the same as selecting the color [Paper] for text.)
9 With the text still selected, select [Paper]
5 With the frame still selected, choose File > Place. Double-click 04TextA.doc in
the 04Lesson folder.
in the Colors palette to apply the paper color to the subtitle. (The text
disappears until you change the frame to black.)
10 Select the pointer tool, select the subtitle frame, click the Fill button ( ) in
the Colors palette, and select [Black].
The subtitle appears in the frame.

134 LESSON 4
Jewelcase booklet
11 Click the Layers palette tab, click to dis-
2 Double-click the hairline of the zero point
play the eye icon ( ) of the Art layer to redisplay the photographic images.
(in the top left corner of the publication window) to return it to its default
position at the top, intersecting edges of the facing pages.
Hairline of the zero point
4 3 2 1 0 1 2
The front cover is completely assembled.

3 In the Layers palette, select the Art layer,
choose File > Place and double-click 04ArtE.tif in the 04Lesson folder.
Assembling the first double-page spread

In addition to placing the text and graphic elements, you will create rules above
and below paragraphs, and create and apply styles.
click the upper left quadrant of the left page (page 2) to place the illustration.
5 With the pointer tool selected, position the pointer on the illustration, hold
down the mouse button, and quickly drag the illustration to display its bounding
box. With the mouse button still held down, drag the bounding box until its top
edge is aligned with the top margin guide, visually centering it between the left
and right edges of the page.
Placing a graphic
After placing and positioning a graphic on the left page of the first double-page
spread, you will apply a color to an illustration.
1 Click the page 2 icon to view the first
double-page spread. The zero point is still aligned with the center of the right
page.
0
Classroom in a Book
6 Click the Colors palette tab to activate
3 Choose Element > Stroke > 5-pt double
it. Select Sand to apply the color to the illustration. Note: You can apply color
to monochrome (1-bit) and grayscale bitmap images, but not color bitmap images.
line (heavy over light) to specify a border for the box.

4 In the Colors palette, make sure the Both
button ( ) is selected, and select Dark Blue to apply the color to the stroke and
fill of the box.
5 Click the Layers tab to activate it.
Note that the frame appears on the Art layer, the layer that was the target layer
when you created it. You can easily move an object from one layer to another using
the Layers palette. When an object is selected, a small selection box appears in
the palette. To move the object to another layer, you simply drag the selection box
to the appropriate layer.
6 With the box still the only selected ele-
Creating a bordered frame for the table of contents

After creating the bordered frame for the table of contents, you will use the
Control palette to size and position it, applying Dark Blue to the stroke and fill
of the box. To see how easy it is to move elements to another layer, you will
create the frame on the Art layer and move it to the Text layer.
ment on the page, drag the small selection box (next to the pencil icon in the
palette) up to the Text layer.
PageMaker moves the box to the Text layer.
), and drag to draw a box of any dimension on the left page (page 2).
2 In the Control palette, make sure the cen-
ter point of the Proxy icon is selected, type -14p2 for X, 14p3 for Y, 12p6 for
both W and H, and press Enter or Return to resize and center the box.
2
136 LESSON 4
Jewelcase booklet
Placing the table of contents

After placing the table of contents, you will format the text and then attach it to
the frame.
1 Choose File > Place, and double-click
Depending upon how big you made the text block (or how far you dragged the bottom
windowshade handle), some of the text may have disappeared from sight. Leave it as
it is. The entire story is still selected even though it may not be displayed.
6 Choose Type > Paragraph. Choose Center for Alignment, and click the Spacing
button. Then select Top of Caps for Leading Method. Hold down Shift (Windows) or
Option (Macintosh) and click OK to close the dialog boxes. 7 Triple-click the first
line of the table of
04TextB.doc in the 04Lesson folder.

2 With the loaded text icon displayed, drag
below the blue box to define a text block that spans the width of the blue box
(exact height is not important) to place the text.
contents to select it. In the Control palette, type 23 for Size, and click the All
Caps button ( ). Don’t worry if WHAT’S INSIDE seems too close to the second line.
You’ll be adding a rule between the two in the next procedure.
8 Choose Edit > Select All. In the Colors
2
palette, select [Paper] to apply the paper color to the table of contents.
9 Select the pointer tool, and click the table
3 If the bottom windowshade handle con-
tains a down arrow, drag the arrow down until the entire story is displayed.
of contents (which is no longer visible) to select it as a text block. Hold down

Shift, and select the bordered box as well. Sometimes the only way to locate paper-
colored text is to select all items on the page. (With the pointer tool selected,
choose Edit > Select All.) In this way, you can see exactly where the text block is
located.
10 Choose Element > Frame > Attach
), click an insertion point in the text, and choose Edit > Select All.
5 In the Control palette choose Birch for
Font, type 15 for Size ( ), 20 for Leading ( ), and .1 for Kerning ( ), and click
the Apply button ( ).
Content.
Classroom in a Book
PageMaker inserts the text into the frame. Using the frame options, you can center
the text vertically in the frame.
11 Choose Element > Frame > Frame
2 Select Rule Below Paragraph, choose the
Options. Choose Center for Vertical Alignment, type 0 for Top, Bottom, Left, and
Right indents, and click OK.
5-point double line (heavy over light) for Stroke Style, choose Sand for Stroke
Color, select the Width of Text option, and click the Options button.
W H A T ’S I N SI D E
P art 1 - Churc hes P art 2 - Anc i ent Rui ns P art 3 - P al ac es P art 4 - Cas
tl es
3 Type 1 for Bottom to override the default

2
vertical position, hold down either Shift (Windows) or Option (Macintosh) to close
the dialog boxes, and click OK.
Creating a rule below a paragraph

You will create the double-line rule that is positioned below the table of contents
title. Even though a rule looks like a graphic object, it can be a paragraph
attribute that is part of the text, moving whenever the text moves.
Note: The default (Auto) position of a rule below a paragraph places the bottom
edge of the rule along the bottom of the slug of the last line of text. Depending
upon the leading
), and click WHAT’S INSIDE to establish an insertion point. Choose Type >
Paragraph, type 0p8 for After, and then click the Rules button.
138 LESSON 4
Jewelcase booklet
applied to the text, a large value for Picas Below Baseline can increase the size
of the slug of the last line.
3 Position the loaded text icon in the top left
corner of column 1, letting it snap to the margin guides. Hold down Shift (to
specify semiautomatic flow), and click to place the text. Then release the Shift
key.
W H AT’S I N SI D E
Par t 1 - C hurc he s Par t 2 - Anc i e nt Rui ns Par t 3 - P al ac e s Par t 4 - C
as t l e s
Flowing text semiautomatically

Since the text is meant to be positioned in specific columns in the publication, you
will flow the text semiautomatically, one column at a time. Flowing text
semiautomatically is very much like flowing text manually, but the text icon is
automatically reloaded after the text flows into the column. You may recall that the
Autoflow option flows text automatically, column to column.
1 If necessary, magnify the view of the
Once the text has filled the column, the loaded text icon reappears automatically.
double-page spread.
5 On the right page (page 5), position the
loaded text icon in the top left corner of column 1, letting it snap to the margin
guides. Hold down Shift (to specify semiautomatic flow), and click to place the
text. Then release the Shift key.
6 Click the page 6 icon to switch to the final
right page (page 3) so that you can see the entire page.
spread of the booklet.

7 Using the same technique, place the next
04TextC.doc in the 04Lesson folder.
portion of the story on page 7. Remember to let the loaded text icon snap to the
margin guides.
Classroom in a Book
Once placed, PageMaker again displays the loaded text icon, indicating there is
more story to place. At this point, you don’t need to place the remainder of the
story. After you reformat the text in the next procedure, most of the text will flow
back onto pages 3 and 5. Once there is room, the unplaced portion will
automatically flow onto the page.
8 With the loaded text icon displayed, click the pointer tool to stop placing text.
(The unplaced text remains part of the story.) 9 Choose File > Save.
Notice how the text tool is still selected. This magnification shortcut lets you
quickly zoom in to an area without changing tools.
5 With the text tool still selected, triple-click the first paragraph of the text to
select it. (The paragraph spans most of the page.) 6 In the Control palette, type .
05 for
Kerning ( ), then click the Bold ( ) and Italic ( ) buttons.

graph-view button ( ), and type 2 for First-line Indent ( ), and click the Apply
button.
Formatting the story

After using the Control palette to format the entire story you just placed, you
will roughly align the text block in the left column on page 3.
1 Click the page 2 icon to view the first
Wrapping text around a graphic

After placing a photograph, you will use the Text Wrap command to flow text around a
rectangular graphic boundary that surrounds the photograph.
1 Click the pointer tool, and then choose
double-page spread.
), and click the text
on page 3 to establish an insertion point. Choose Edit > Select All to select the
entire story that spans multiple pages.
3 In the Control palette, type 8 for Size (
View > Fit in Window. Click the Layers palette tab to activate it, and select the
Art layer.
and 13 for Leading ( ), and click the Apply button ( ). You’ll now zoom into column
1.
04ArtF.tif file in the 04Lesson folder.
(Macintosh) together with the spacebar (the pointer changes to the zoom tool), and
drag the mouse diagonally across column 1 to enclose the top half of the text on
page 3.
140 LESSON 4
Jewelcase booklet
click anywhere on page 3 to place the photograph. Then drag the photograph until it
aligns to the bottom left corner of column 1.
Preserving an extensive body of work assembled by a team of photographers from 1991
to 1995, The Architecture of Italy CDROM disc is a compilation of more than three
hundred sumptuous photographs. With crossreferenced text provided for each
photograph, this collection can be used as a resource for many endeavors. Much more
than a “digital coffee-table book,” you are free to modify, rent, lease,
distribute, or create derivative works based upon the original images found in this
collection. Included in this collection are St. Mark’s Cathedral in Venice; the
Tower and Baptistry at Pisa; the Colliseum, the Forum, the Vatican, and highlights
from the Vatican Museum in Rome; the Duomo, the Medici Palace, the Ponte Vecchio,
and the Gates of Heaven in Florence. More than 75 superb architectural examples,
which have received little recognition, have also been included.
The Photographers Gina Antonelli is known for her works on Italian
text to select it as a text block, and drag the bottom windowshade handle down to
display the last line of the paragraph.
The text overlaps the photograph. You will use the Text Wrap command to define how
the text will wrap around the photograph.
4 With the photograph still selected, choose Element > Text Wrap. For Wrap Option,
click the second icon (rectangular wrap). For Text Flow, make sure the third icon
(wrap-all-sides) is selected. For Standoff in Picas, type 0 for Left, p9 for Right,
and 0 for both Top and Bottom. Then click OK.
Placing a graphic
You will place and position another photograph in the upper portion of page 3.
04ArtG.tif file in the 04Lesson folder.

2 With the loaded graphic icon displayed, select the Art layer in the Layers
palette, and click the upper portion of page 3 to place the photograph.
The text stands 9 points from the right edge of the photograph.
Classroom in a Book
3 With the image still selected, drag the
3 Position the loaded text icon on page 3,
photograph until it snaps to the top left corner of column 2.

column 2, underneath the photograph you just placed, and click to place the text.
Above: The Pantheon of Rome (est. 118 and 128 C.E.) still endures as one of the
finest masterpieces of architecture.
Placing the caption

After placing and aligning the caption below the pantheon photograph, you will
reduce the size of the caption text block.
1 Select the Text layer in the Layers palette. 2 Choose File > Place, and double-
click
), click the caption to establish an insertion point, and choose Edit > Select All.
view button ( ), and type 10 for Size ( ) and 13 for Leading ( ). Then click the
Bold button ( ). You’ll now zoom in to the area you are working, so you can align
the caption with the adjacent text.
04TextD.doc in the 04Lesson folder.
(Macintosh) together with the spacebar, and drag the mouse diagonally across the
bottom right quadrant of the page, stopping just above the page number. Be sure to
include a small portion of the text in column 1.
142 LESSON 4
Jewelcase booklet
horizontal ruler guide at approximately 15p8, aligning it with the baseline of the
text in column 1. From the vertical ruler, drag to create a vertical ruler guide at
approximately 19p8. You are ready to align the caption with the adjacent text. To
toggle between the pointer tool and the currently selected tool, hold down Ctrl
(Windows) or Command (Macintosh) and press spacebar.
8 Select the pointer tool, position the
You now need to resize the text block to fit in its new location.
12 With the text block still selected, in the
Control palette, select the top left reference point in the Proxy icon. Then type
6p5 for W and 7p7 for H, and press Enter or Return.
Above: The Pantheon of Rome ( est. 118 and 128 C.E.) still endures as one of the
pointer over the caption and hold down the mouse button until the pointer changes
to an arrowhead. Then drag the text block until the baseline of the first line of
text is aligned with the horizontal ruler guide.
Creating a caption style

All captions in this publication will be formatted identically. You’ll save time by
creating a style that you can apply to each caption.
You’ll now reverse the text to the paper color and then move the text block onto
the black box.
), click the caption
to establish an insertion point, and choose Edit > Select All. In the Character-
view of the Control palette, click the Reverse button ( ).
11 Select the pointer tool, and then select
), and click the

caption you just formatted to establish an insertion point. Then choose Type >
Define Styles. Notice that [Selection] is highlighted, and that the attributes of
the caption are displayed under the style list. You’ll create a new Caption style,
replacing the default style of the same name.
the text block. Hold down Shift (to constrain the movement) and drag the text block
to the right until it snaps to the 19p8 vertical ruler guide, maintaining its
baseline alignment with the adjacent text.
Classroom in a Book
2 Click New. Type Caption for Name, and
click OK. When asked if you want to replace the existing style, click OK, and then
click OK to close the dialog box. PageMaker creates the new style using the
attributes of the caption. The Styles palette displays the style Caption.
Assembling the second double-page spread

In addition to placing and formatting more text and graphic elements on the second
double-page spread, you will create a rule above a paragraph. You will also use the
Image Control command to modify an image.
Creating a rule aligned with a single-line paragraph

You will apply the style Caption to the caption. In this way, if you ever modify
the Caption style, all captions will change uniformly.
3 With the insertion point still established
To frame each subhead visually, you will add a thick paragraph rule to the
subheads. As in earlier steps in this lesson, you open a series of dialog boxes to
set the stroke style and weight, color, horizontal width, and vertical positioning
of the paragraph rules. Remember: Rules are paragraph attributes and not
independent graphic objects; they cannot be selected or edited with the pointer
tool.
in the caption, click Caption in the Styles palette. You have completed assembling
the first double-page spread.
double-page spread.
2 Magnify the view of the top portion of
Above: The Pantheon of Rome ( est. 118 and 128 C.E.) still endures as one of the
Wha t ’s I n sid e
Par t 1 - C hur c he s Part 2 - Anc ie nt R uins Par t 3 - P alac e s Par t 4 - C
as tle s
column 1 on page 5.
3 If necessary, select the text tool (
3
), and
triple-click the subhead Photographers to select it.

4 In the Control palette, type 7 for Size (
and 13 for Leading ( ). Choose Very Loose from the Tracking ( ) pop-up menu. Then
click the Bold ( ), Reverse ( ), and All Caps buttons ( ).
144 LESSON 4
Jewelcase booklet
5 With the subhead still selected, choose
8 Click the Options button. Type p8 for Top
Type > Paragraph, and type 2 for Left (to specify size of the indent). Make sure
Left is selected for Alignment, and click the Rules button.
(to specify where the top of the rule starts above the baseline), hold down Shift
(Windows) or Option (Macintosh) and click OK to close all the dialog boxes.
PHOTOGRAPHERS
Gina Antonelli is known for her works on Italian fine art, as well as several
previous photographic publications: “Italy’s Best Loved Gardens,” the series
“Italian Tradition in Color and Form” (Dress; Cuisine; Architecture; Pastimes), and
two editions of the book “Italian Traditional Patterns.” In addition to completing
the Rome and Naples photography assignment, photographer and art historian Tomas
Panini assembled and edited the explanatory notes for the 300 photographs.
Photographer Anton Harris, having apprenticed at Maria Guerra Atelier in Paris for
seven years, contributed his own unique insights to the Venice and Rome
assignments. In 1984 Mr. Anton Harris won the Paris Exhibition Prize for his Design
Study photographic series, consisting of three books. System Requirements A
Macintosh with a minimum of 1 megabyte of
6 Select Rule Above Paragraph, and choose
RAM (2 megabytes is preferred) to run the Master Index. Or an Apple II with a SCSI
interface card. Apple CD SC or other compatible CD-ROM drive. For more information
about our products write to:
Custom for Stroke Style. In the Custom Stroke dialog box, choose the solid line,
type 11 for Stroke Weight, leave Transparent Background selected, and click OK.
7 In the Paragraph Rules dialog box, choose
Creating and applying a subhead style

Since one more subhead must be formatted, you will save time by creating a style
using the subhead you have already formatted.
1 With the subhead still selected, choose
Dark Blue for Stroke Color, and leave the Width of Column option selected. For
Indent, type 4 for Right (to specify a 4-pica indentation).
Type > Define Styles, and click New.

2 Type Subhead for Name, hold down Shift
(Windows) or Option (Macintosh), and click OK.

3 With the subhead still selected, click
Subhead in the Styles palette. You will apply the Subhead style to another subhead.
To center the subhead within the rule, you will change the indent of the second
subhead. Note: The indent option indents the rule from the right or left edge of
the column (for Width of Column) or text (for Width of Text).
Classroom in a Book
4 Scroll to the bottom half of the page. With
Placing and cropping a graphic

After placing a photograph on the left page of the second double-page spread,
you’ll crop the edges of the photograph to align it with the edges of the page.
1 Choose View > Fit in Window. In the
the text tool selected, click in the next subhead, System Requirements, to
establish an insertion point. In the Styles palette, click Subhead.
5 With the insertion point still established in the second subhead, choose Type >
Paragraph, and type 1 for Left, and click OK.
Layers palette, select the Art layer.

2 Choose File > Place and double-click
You will roll up the windowshade handle of this text block to push the system
requirements subhead and paragraph to page 7 (where the remainder of the story is
placed).
04ArtH.tif in the 04Lesson folder.

3 When prompted to include a copy of the graphic in the publication, click No. 4
With the loaded graphic icon displayed, click the upper portion of the left page
(page 4).
column 1 to select it as a text block. Drag the bottom windowshade up just above
the subhead System Requirements.
PHOTOGRAPHERS
Study photographic series, consisting of three books.
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
Using the control palette, you’ll align the right edge of the photograph precisely
with the inside edge of the page, letting its other edges overlap the outside edges
of the page.
5 In the Control palette Proxy icon, select
the top right reference point. Type 0 for X, and –0p9 for Y. Press Enter or Return.
A Macintosh with a minimum of 1 megabyte of RAM (2 megabytes is preferred) to run

the Master Index. Or an Apple II with a SCSI interface card. Apple CD SC or other
compatible CD-ROM drive.

4
146 LESSON 4
Jewelcase booklet
As with all images in this project that extend to the edge of the page, this
photograph was sized to allow for a bleed. Once again, you’ll crop the photograph
to the page edges.
6 Select the cropping tool ( ), position the tool over the top left graphic handle
of the photograph, and drag down and right to the corner of the page. 7 With the
cropping tool still selected,
horizontal ruler guide at approximately 25p6.

04ArtI.tif in the 04Lesson folder.

click anywhere in the lower right corner of the right page to place the photograph.
5 Once placed, drag the photograph until its
position the cursor over the bottom-center graphics handle, and drag up to the
bottom edge of the page.
bottom edge snaps to the 25p6 horizontal ruler guide and the right margin guide.
PHOTOGRAPHERS
5 4
Placing a graphic
You will place a photograph in the lower right corner of page 5. You’ll align it to
a ruler guide just above the page-number and the right margin.
1 Magnify the view of the lower half portion
Placing and modifying an image

The Image Control command makes it possible to alter the appearance of line art or
bitmap or grayscale images, adjusting the lightness or darkness of an entire image
and adjusting the screen pattern (where you specify whether the image is composed
of dots or lines).
of page 5.
Classroom in a Book
You will place a grayscale image and use the Image Control command to reverse the
light and dark areas within the image. Note: You cannot use the Image Control
command to alter a color image. Also, images adjusted with the Image Control
command must be printed to a PostScript printing device.
1 Choose View > Fit in Window. 2 Choose File > Place, and double-click
5 With the illustration still selected, choose
Element > Image > Image Control. Refer to the Adobe PageMaker 7.0 User Guide for
more information about the Image Control command.
6 Depending upon your system, do one of
the following: Windows: Set the Contrast option to -50, and click OK.
• •
04ArtJ.tif in the 04Lesson folder.

3 With the loaded graphic icon displayed, click in the upper right corner of the
right page (in the black box) to place the illustration. 4 With the illustration
still selected, in the
Macintosh: Click the Reverse Grey Levels button ( ), and click OK.
PHOTOGRAPHERS
Control palette make sure the top left reference point in the Proxy icon is
selected. Type 20p4 for X and p7 for Y, and press Enter or Return to position the
illustration.
PHOTOGRAPHERS
The black portions of the image reverse to white, and vice versa. Note:: Unlike
text, you cannot reverse an imported bitmap image by applying the paper color to
it. PageMaker applies a color to only the black and gray portions of the image. The
white would remain white.
5
148 LESSON 4
Jewelcase booklet
Placing the captions

After placing the captions that accompany the illustration and photograph on the
right page, you will apply the style Caption and position the captions above the
photograph.
), click in the area
where you just placed the captions to establish an insertion point, choose Edit >
Select All, and select Caption in the Style palette. (Windows only) If the captions
remain invisible, press Ctrl together with the Shift and F12 keys to redraw the
screen.
PHOTOGRAPHERS
vertical ruler guide at approximately 19p8.

2 Magnify the view of the portion of the
black box between the two images, then click the Text layer in the Layers palette.
04TextE.doc in the 04Lesson folder.

4 With the loaded text icon displayed, drag
Above: Plan for the Pisa Museum of Art.
to define a text block that extends from the 19p8 vertical ruler guide to the right
margin guide on the right page (exact height is not important), taking note of its
approximate position to be able to select it with the text tool.
PHOTOGRAPHERS
horizontal ruler guide at approximately 12p5, aligning it with the baseline of the
text in column 1. (You may need to scroll the page.)
7 Select the pointer tool, and click the cap-
tion text to select the text block. Use the arrow keys or Control palette nudge
buttons to move the text block until the baseline of the first line of the caption
is aligned with the 12p5 horizontal ruler guide.
5
8 With the captions still selected as a text
Since the placed text is colored black, it cannot be viewed on the black rectangle.
block, drag the bottom windowshade handle down to display the entire story. You
need to separate the two captions. You’ll edit the Caption style to include space
after each paragraph.
Classroom in a Book
9 Hold down Control (Windows) or Com-
mand (Macintosh), and click the Caption style. Click the Para button, and type p26
for After. Then hold down Shift (Windows) or Option (Macintosh), and click OK to
close the dialog boxes. PageMaker inserts 26 points between the captions. Because
26 points is twice the leading value, the captions remain aligned with the adjacent
text. The second double-page spread is complete.
PHOTOGRAPHERS
from page 4, and then replace it with the new image. PageMaker will replace the
image, using the existing cropping rectangle.
1 With the pointer tool selected, click the image on page 4 to select it. Choose
Edit > Copy.
You’ll now paste it on page 6 using the power paste option, which pastes a copy in
the exact same position on the page.
2 Click the page 6 icon. Hold down Alt
(Windows) or Option (Macintosh), and choose Edit > Paste.

3 With the pasted image still selected,
Above: Plan for the Pisa Museum of Art.
Below: Detail from The Roman Forum.
choose File > Place. Click 04ArtK.tif in the 04Lesson folder (do not double-click
it). Select Replacing Entire Graphic, and make sure Retain Cropping Data is
selected, then click Open (Windows) or OK (Macintosh). PageMaker replaces the
image. In addition to cropping the image using the existing cropping rectangle,
PageMaker also scales the image, if necessary, to fit within the bounding box of the
original image.
Assembling the last spread

The design of the last spread closely follows the design of the previous spread.
Placing the large graphic on page 6

As with page 4, you’ll place a full-page version of one of the photographs from the
cover onto page 6. Rather than repeat the steps of placing, positioning, and
cropping the image, you can copy and paste the image

150 LESSON 4
Jewelcase booklet
Finishing the last spread

After placing and positioning a photograph on page 7, you’ll move the address and
copyright information to the bottom of the page and reformat it.
Before you move the address and copyright information to the bottom of the page,
you’ll first change the text to a smaller point size and reduce the leading.
a horizontal ruler guide at approximately 25p6.

2 Choose File > Place and double-click the
04ArtL.tif file in the 04Lesson folder.

), position the tool over the sentence that begins “For more information,” and
triple-click to select the entire paragraph. Hold down Shift, and click the last
line (containing the words “All rights reserved.”).
PageMaker extends the selection to the end of the text block.
make sure the Art layer is still selected, and click in the lower portion of page 7
to place the photograph. Then drag the photograph until its bottom right corner
snaps to the intersection of the 25p6 ruler guide and the right margin guide.
You’ll now zoom in to the area you’ll be working on.
6 In the control palette, type 7 for Size (
and 9 for Leading ( ), and click the Apply button ( ).

7 Select the pointer tool, click the text to
select it as a text block. Drag the bottom windowshade handle up, just below the
last line of the paragraph listing the system requirements.
8 Click the down arrow in the bottom win-
(Macintosh) together with the spacebar, and drag across the top two-thirds of
column 1, page 7 (as shown below), enclosing the entire text block and a small
portion of the image in column 2.
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
dowshade handle. The pointer changes to the loaded text icon. Position the icon in
the lower portion of column 1, and click. (You’ll reposition the text block once it
is placed.)

compatible CD-ROM drive. For more information about our products write to: Express
Electronic Publishing, Inc. 900 High Street, Dublin, WY8 N45, Ireland. © Copyright
1996 Express Electronic Publishing, Inc. All rights reserved.(email:
[email protected])
). Position the tool in the middle of the page and drag the page up to display the
bottom half of the page.
10 Select the pointer tool. Drag the text
block to align the baseline of the last line of text with the 25p6 ruler guide. You
have finished this spread.
7
Classroom in a Book
11 Double-click the hand tool to switch to
the fit-in-window view.

SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

compatible CD-ROM drive.
Because the images were on a right page and the back cover is a left page,
PageMaker pastes the images on the pasteboard to the right of page 8 (where a right
page would be). You’ll now use the control palette to position the images on the
page. The top right corner of the page is the zero point and therefore is the
easiest point to use for alignment.
6 With the images still selected, click the top
For more information about our products write to: Express Electronic Publishing,
Inc. 900 High Street, Dublin, WY8 N45, Ireland. © Copyright 1996 Express Electronic
Publishing, Inc. All rights reserved.(email: [email protected])
Assembling the back cover

The back cover uses the same four images as found on the front cover. As with the
front cover, you will deselect the display of the master-page elements.
1 Click the page 8 icon to switch to the back
right reference point in the Proxy icon. Type 0 for both X and Y, and click Enter
or Return. PageMaker positions the images on the page.
cover. Then, choose View > Display Master Items to deselect the option. PageMaker
turns off the display of the master page elements. You are now ready to copy the
four images from the cover.
2 Click the page 1 icon. 3 In the Layers palette, click the lock col-
You have finished assembling the booklet.

7 Choose View > Hide Guides to hide the guides. 8 Choose File > Save to save the
umn (next to the eye icon) in the Text layer to lock the layer. The Lock icon
appears. Click the Art layer to activate it.
4 Select the pointer tool, and choose Edit >
04Work.pmd publication. If you have determined that your service provider will
perform all the prepress tasks (including resetting the bleeds), you are
Select All. Then, choose Edit > Copy.

5 Click the page 8 icon. Then Choose Edit > Paste.
152 LESSON 4
Jewelcase booklet
ready to deliver the 04Work.pmd file to your service provider. Be sure to include
all image files that are linked to the publication.
9 If you would like to Print the Jewelcase
PageMaker’s page sorting option lets you view thumbnails of your publication pages
so you can see the entire publication at once.
2 Choose Layout > Sort Pages. On the Mac-
booklet, choose File > Print. Select the printer you want to print to (Windows) and
select the appropriate PPD. Click Print. You can also Export Adobe PDF, as
described in Creating an Adobe PDF version of the flyer on page 41.
intosh, click the Options button, select Show Detailed Thumbnails, and click OK.
Resize the window if necessary to see all the pages at once.
3 Click Cancel when you have finished
viewing the pages.
Building a booklet
The Build Booklet plug-in lets you create a copy of your current publication in
which pages are arranged for printing multipage spreads or signatures. This
publishing technique is known as page imposition. For this project, two pages are
printed on each sheet of paper. When the paper is folded, the book pages are in the
correct order. In your booklet, the first and last pages will be printed on one
page, the second page on the same sheet as the second-to-last page, and so on.
4 Choose File > Open, and double-click
04FnlBkt.pmd in the 04Lesson folder.

5 Choose Layout > Sort Pages. Resize the
window if necessary to see all the pages at once. To increase the size of the
thumbnails, click the Build Booklet zoom tool. The eight pages of the booklet have
been distributed between four larger pages. Page 1 of the booklet contains the
original page 1 and page 8. Booklet page 2 contains the original pages 2 and 7;
booklet page 3 contains original pages 3 and 6; and booklet page 4 contains
original pages 4 and 5.
6 Click Cancel when you have finished
Previewing the pages

Before building the booklet, you want to make sure that your text and layout are
finished. Major changes may change the pagination and require that you rebuild your
booklet. To help you understand the results of using Build Booklet, you’ll also
open a finished version of the booklet with the pages already rearranged by Build
Booklet.
1 Browse through your publication, making
viewing the pages.

7 Choose File > Close to close
04FnlBkt.pmd and return to your publication. If prompted to save before closing,

click No.
Using Build Booklet

You are now ready to use Build Booklet.
1 With 04Work.pmd open, choose
Utilities > Plug-ins > Build Booklet.
sure that everything is in order.

Classroom in a Book
2 Choose 2-up Saddle Stitch for Layout.
This option is for standard booklet printing, where double-sided pages are folded
once and fastened along the fold.
Page 1 of the booklet is a 56p7 by 28p6 page that contains the original page 1 and
page 8.
After you choose a layout, PageMaker calculates the spread size for you. The Build
Booklet plug-in gives you several additional options for arranging your booklet.
You can adjust the spread size, delete extra pages, insert blank pages, rearrange
pages, and adjust for creep. For more information, refer to the Adobe PageMaker 7.0
User Guide.
3 Leave the Place Guides in Gutter option selected. Click OK to create the booklet.
4 When prompted, choose to save your original document.
Notice that the left edge of page 1 and the right edge of page 8 abut each other
and will not need to bleed. Because this is a saddlestitch booklet, the binding
edge of each page always abuts another page in the printed signature. Therefore any
cropping you applied to images on the binding edge will be left in place during the
prepress preparations. Continue to page through your document.
6 When you have finished browsing through the booklet, close all open files and quit
the Adobe PageMaker application.
Printing the booklet

In addition to trapping and resetting the bleeds, the prepress tasks will include
specifying a custom page size and including printer’s marks and page information.
For more information on these prepress tasks, refer to the Adobe PageMaker 7.0 User
Guide. Designed to be printed on a commercial printing press, this publication
requires a total of four process color (CMYK) film separations. Knowing your printer
plans to print this publication using a line screen fre-
The Build Booklet plug-in saves and closes the current document, and then opens a
new, untitled version that has the expanded spread size and new page sequence.
5 Save the new file as 04Booklt.pmd in the
04Lesson folder.
154 LESSON 4
Jewelcase booklet
quency of 150 lpi, your service provider will create the four film separations on a
imagesetter at a resolution of 2400 dpi. Once the film separations are prepared, you
can deliver them to your printer.
PageMaker selects the third (wrap-all-sides) icon. Type the degree of offset you
want and click OK. For irregular wraps, you can click on the text-wrap border to
add new handles, and drag edges or handles to modify the area that keeps text away.
Review questions
1 What is meant by the term bleed? 2 What are some advantages to using layers? 3
How do you adjust the position of text
within a frame?
4 How do you make text flow around a
graphic?
Answers
1 Printed areas that extend beyond the trim
marks of the page.

2 Layers let you do the following:
•
Work with objects without accidentally moving or modifying objects on other layers
Treat similar objects together without grouping Hide or display objects
• •
Lock a layer to prevent modification of its objects
Quickly change the stacking order of objects

3 Choose Element > Frame > Frame
Options. Select options and click OK.

4 Select the graphic, and choose Element >
Text Wrap. For Wrap Option, click the second (rectangular wrap) icon. For Text
Flow,
Lesson 5
Cycling guidebook
In this eight-page guidebook to the Tour de France, one of the world’s great
cycling events, you get a chance to go beyond the basics of using PageMaker. As you
assemble and change this dramatic and playful piece, you will learn the power of
PageMaker’s automatic layout adjustment options, see how multiple master pages and
paragraph styles can streamline the production of a publication, and become adept
at manipulating text blocks and frames.
156 LESSON 5
Cycling guidebook
To create this guidebook, you begin by opening an Adobe PageMaker publication that
has been partially completed. First you will finish the cover, then resize the page
and margins to see how PageMaker can automatically adjust the layout for you. Next,
you will edit the other master pages to match the Document Master. Then you will
revise the paragraph styles and refine the layout on several spreads. This project
covers:
• • •
Before you begin

1 Before launching PageMaker, return
all settings to their defaults by deleting the PageMaker 7.0 preferences file. See
2 In addition to the commonly used fonts
Creating a polygon frame Placing text or graphics within frames
Converting an existing rectangle into a frame Editing styles Basing one style on an
existing style Using the Bullets and Numbers plug-in Using the Drop Cap plug-in
listed in the Getting Started chapter, make sure that the following fonts are
installed: AGaramond, AGaramond Bold, Myriad Bold, Myriad Roman, and Zapf Dingbats.
Windows only: Because of the way Windows handles fonts, you must apply bold to
Myriad Roman to use Myriad Bold. For this lesson, you need the French hyphenation
and spelling dictionary.
3 If you did not install the French dictionary
• • • • •
Using the adjust layout options when changing page size, margins, and master pages
Editing and applying master pages
At the end of this lesson, you’ll have an eight-page, six-color booklet. It should
take you about 2 hours to complete this project.
when you installed PageMaker, drag the Français folder from the 05Lesson folder
into either PageMaker 7.0\rsrc\linguist\prx (Windows) or Adobe PageMaker 7.0:RSRC:
Linguist:Proximity (Macintosh).
Classroom in a Book
4 Start PageMaker, and then open the
Setting up the document

Start by opening a document that has been partially completed for you.
1 Choose File > Open, and then open
05Final.pmd file in the 05Lesson folder.
05Begin.pmt in the 05Lesson folder. Since the focus of this project is automatic
layout adjustment and working with paragraph styles, much of the placing and
positioning of text and graphic elements has been done for you. Some colors,
styles, and master pages have already been defined in the Colors, Styles, and Master
Pages palettes as well. This booklet starts out as an eight-page document, 6 inches
by 9 inches in size. Once you finish the cover, you will change its page size and
margins to see how PageMaker can automatically adjust a publication for you.
This publication is an eight-page booklet containing photographs, maps, and text.

The text was entered and formatted in a word-processing application, and then
placed into the Adobe PageMaker document.
5 If the publication window does not fill
the screen, click the Maximize button in the title bar to expand the window.
6 Leave this file open so you can use it as a visual reference during the lesson.
Click the page icons in the bottom left corner to examine each spread in the
document. Zoom in where you want to take a closer look.
Choose Picas for both Measurements In and Vertical Ruler. In order to speed up
screen redraw, keep Standard selected for Graphics display. Leave all other
settings at their default values as well. Click OK. The three palettes you’ll use
most often in creating this booklet are the Styles, Colors and Master Pages
palettes. You can combine the three, and leave more room to view your page.
158 LESSON 5
Cycling guidebook
4 Choose Window > Show Master Pages.
Drag the Master Pages tab to the Colors and Styles palette, and then click the
Close box of the Layers palette.
The prepositioned guides and the Control palette will help you position the points
of the polygon.
4 Select the polygon frame tool (
). Starting at the center of the wheel, position the tool at each location shown in
the illustration and click to create the points of the polygon. Keep in mind the
following tips:
Create the polygon in a clockwise direction. Let the tool snap to the guides.
5 Choose File > Save As, type 05Work.pmd
for the name, and save the publication in the 05Lesson folder.
Finishing the cover

The cover of the booklet is complete except for a photographic image, which you’ll
place in a polygon frame.
Click only once for each point. (If you double-click before you complete the
polygon, PageMaker closes the polygon, but does not draw a stroke between the start
and end points. If you double-click over the starting point, PageMaker closes the
polygon, and begins another polygon at the same point.) Use the Control palette to
determine the tool location.
Creating the polygon frame

You’ll first create the polygon frame on the cover and set the frame options.
1 If necessary, click the page 1 icon in the
bottom left corner to go to the cover page.

2 Drag the Control palette over the paste-
Hold down shift as you create the horizontal or vertical edges of the polygon, that
is, as you move between B and C, C and D, and D and E. Press Backspace or Delete to
erase the last point you clicked.
board just right of the page so you can view the entire page. You need to see only
the X and Y values of the Control palette to draw the polygon frame. Minimize and
move the palettes as well if they are blocking your view of the page.
3 Choose View > Show Guides.
Classroom in a Book
To close the polygon, position the tool over the center of the wheel (the pointer
changes to a square), and click.
B C
Element > Frame > Frame Options.
The frame options control the position of the content within the frame, as well as
reconciling the difference in size between the frame and the content. You can
choose whether PageMaker should clip the content to fit the frame, resize the frame
to fit the content, or scale the content to fit the frame. For this cover, you’ll
clip the content (a photograph) to match the frame. By clipping (rather than
scaling) the photograph, the image maintains its original dimensions, even when you
increase the page size later.
7 Click Open or OK to accept the default
A. Start and end here: x=15p, y=36p B. x=22p, y=0p C. x=36p, y=0p D. x=36p, y=54p
E. x=22p, y=54p
It is important that the polygon touch the edges of the page. If it doesn’t,
PageMaker may not resize it correctly. You can reposition the points of a polygon
after you have drawn it.
5 If you need to reposition some points of
setting.
8 Choose File > Save to save the publication.
Placing the image in the frame

You’ll place the photographic image directly into the frame and then apply a color
to it. Once you’ve placed a graphic inside a frame, you cannot rotate, skew, or flip
it independent of its frame. However, depending upon the type of image, you can
apply a color,
the polygon, double-click the polygon to display its points. Drag the points to the
correct locations. (Remember to pause before you drag so PageMaker will display the
mouse position in the Control palette.)
160 LESSON 5
Cycling guidebook
manipulate the image using image control or Photoshop effects, or pan the image
within the frame.
1 Select the pointer tool and select the
3 With the frame still selected, click the Col-
ors tab to display the Colors palette. Then, click the Stroke button ( ) in the
Colors palette and select None. You may notice a gray outline around the polygon
frame. Unlike a regular polygon, a polygon frame displays a non-printing gray
outline, even when it has no stroke, to help you distinguish between the two types.
You will apply a green spot color to the image. It is important to note that if you
select only the frame and apply a color, you change the color of its stroke or fill
or both (depending upon which button is selected in the Colors palette). If you
select the content and apply a color, you apply the color to the image.
4 To select the content, hold down Ctrl (Windows) or Command (Macintosh) and click
the image until four special handles
frame.
2 Choose File > Place and select 05ArtA.tif
(in the 05Lesson folder). Click Open (Windows) or OK (Macintosh) to accept the
default place options.
Default option inserts content into selected frame
PageMaker inserts the photograph into the frame, clipping the portion that doesn’t
fit within its boundaries. Just like any other PageMaker drawn object, a frame can
have both a stroke and fill. Because the photograph fills the entire frame, the fill
of this frame is not visible. However, if the image was small, you could apply a
fill as well. For this project, you’ll remove the stroke from the frame.
Classroom in a Book
appear as shown below. If you click on top of other objects, you may have to click
several times to select the frame content.
frame (currently the content is selected, not the frame). Choose Element > Arrange
> Send to Back. (The polygon disappears behind the orange background.) Choose
Element > Arrange > Bring Forward. The cover is complete.
Special selection handles mark frame content 5 With the content still selected,
select
Pantone 802 2x CVC in the Colors palette. Note: You can apply color to 1-bit
(monochrome) and grayscale bitmap images, but not color bitmap images. The polygon
is covering other objects on the page and needs to move back in the stacking order.
It should be behind all the objects except the orange background. Rather than use
the Send Backward command repeatedly to send it back object by object in the
stacking order, you’ll send it all the way to the back, and then bring it up one
level.
Changing the page size and margins

You’ll now change the page size and margins of the Document Master and watch
PageMaker adjust the layout automatically. When you change the page settings of a
publication, PageMaker can move and scale text and graphics automatically, based on
their relationships to the page edges, margins, and guides.
162 LESSON 5
Cycling guidebook
1 Choose File > Preferences > Layout
Adjustment and select “OK to Resize Groups and Imported Graphics.” Leave all other
settings at their default values. Click OK.
frame option “Clip content to fit frame” maintains the original size of the content,
regardless of how you change the frame.
2 Choose File > Document Setup. Set the
Before
After
page dimensions to 36 by 57 picas. Select Adjust Layout. For Margins, type 2p6 for
Inside, Outside, and Top, and type 2p10 for Bottom. Then click OK. PageMaker
changes the page size and margins. It adjusts the column width, and because the
yellow frame spanned the column, it stretches it to the new width. The polygon
frame and the orange background, which are aligned precisely to the edges of the
page, also stretch to match the page size. However, the image within the polygon
frame does not change size because the
3 Choose File > Save to save the publication. 4 Click the page 2 icon to switch to
the
next spread.
1903
Une course cycliste de classe mondiale La victoire en équipe
Gagner le Tour de France requiert habituellement la participation d’une équipe. La
personne qui semble avoir
le plus de chances de mener une équipe vers la victoire est désignée comme le
coureur et est soutenue par d’autres coureurs cyclistes appelés les domestiques.
L’équipe peut également inclure un directeur technique qui est en général un ancien
coureur cycliste connaissant les trucs du métier et servant d’entraîneur des
coureurs domestiques. de victoires cyclistes, octroya autant d’importance à la
tactique et la stratégie qu’à l’entraînement physique. Les stratèges actuels
mettent généralement les coureurs en tête du peloton, suivis des domestiques.
Quelques minutes suffisent pour obtenir la victoire après plusieurs journées de
course; c’est pour cette raison que les domestiques s’efforcent pour que leur
coureur ait le dessus. Roulant dans un ou deux groupes principaux suivis de
quelques traînards, les domestiques déterminent
L’astuce publicitaire lancée il y a environ 100 ans pour éviter la

faillite s’est développée de façon à être aujourd’hui la plus grande course
cycliste annuelle au monde : le Tour de France. En 1903, des courses cyclistes
d’une durée d’un jour entre Paris et Bordeaux avaient beaucoup de succès. Ce qui
fit réfléchir le contrôleur des finances de L’Auto, un journal français connaissant
des difficultés financières : une compétition qui dure plusieurs jours et couvre
des centaines de kilomètres attirerait sans aucun doute un plus grand public, avide
de lire les compterendus journaliers d’un grand tour de la France. Henri Desgrange,
le directeur du journal, suivit cette suggestion ambitieuse et lança le Tour de
France. Sous la direction de Desgrange, le Tour de France se développa en une
course sur route traditionnelle. C’est ainsi que, aujourd’hui, 20 équipes de neuf
coureurs prennent chaque année la route
La stratégie
Fausto Coppi, l’Italien qui ajouta le Tour de France de 1949 et de 1952 à son
impressionnant palmarès
Survivre la cadence
n moins d’un mois, cette exténuante course de route couvre environ 4 000 kilomètres
en étapes journalières pouvant atteindre 260 kilomètres. Le maillot jaune passe
d’un gagnant d’étape à l’autre. Mais le coureur finissant la course en le moins de
temps gagne le grand prix. ✬ Les participants à la course de 1992 parcoururent sept
pays —l’Allemagne, la Belgique, l’Espagne, la France, l’Italie, le Luxembourg et
les
Pays-Bas — couvrant 3 800 kilomètres en 22 jours. ✬ La course de 1993 ne quitta la

France que pour faire un bref détour par l’Andorre, le pays minuscule situé entre
la France et l’Espagne — accumulant 3 734 kilomètres en 21 jours. ✬ En 1994, les
coureurs pédalèrent à travers le tunnel récemment ouvert sous la manche, de Calais,
en France, jusqu’à Folkestone, en Angle
Notice that PageMaker changed the page size throughout the document, but did not
change the margins on this spread. When you change margins using the Document Setup
dialog box, PageMaker changes the margins of only the Document Master (master page)
and any pages that have the
Classroom in a Book
Document Master applied to them. To change the margins of pages that have other
master pages applied to them, you must modify each master page individually.
5 Click the Master Pages palette tab to
PageMaker changes the margins and column guides, but leaves any existing text or
graphics untouched.
1903
coureurs domestiques. de victoires cyclistes, octroya autant d’importance à la
tactique et la stratégie qu’à l’entraînement physique. Les stratèges actuels
quelques traînards, les domestiques déterminent
display the Master Pages palette. Notice that the 2-Col / 3-Col master is selected
for pages 2 and 3. So that you can see the power of the Adjust Layout option, you
will first change the margins without selecting Adjust Layout.
6 Choose Master Page Options from the
L’astuce publicitaire lancée il y a environ 100 ans pour éviter la

faillite s’est développée de façon à être aujourd’hui la plus grande course
cycliste annuelle au monde : le Tour de France. En 1903, des courses cyclistes
d’une durée d’un jour entre Paris et Bordeaux avaient beaucoup de succès. Ce qui
fit réfléchir le contrôleur des finances de L’Auto, un journal français connaissant
des difficultés financières : une compétition qui dure plusieurs jours et couvre
des centaines de kilomètres attirerait sans aucun doute un plus grand public, avide
de lire les compterendus journaliers d’un grand tour de la France. Henri Desgrange,
le directeur du journal, suivit cette suggestion ambitieuse et lança le Tour de
coureurs prennent chaque année la route
La stratégie
impressionnant palmarès
Survivre la cadence
les
Pays-Bas — couvrant 3 800 kilomètres en 22 jours. ✬ La course de 1993 ne quitta la

France que pour faire un bref détour par l’Andorre, le pays minuscule situé entre
la France et l’Espagne — accumulant 3 734 kilomètres en 21 jours. ✬ En 1994, les
en France, jusqu’à Folkestone, en Angle
Master Page palette menu. Change the Inside, Outside, and Top margins to 2p6 and
change the Bottom margin to 2p10. Click OK. You can copy a value in an edit box,
and paste it in another edit box. First select the value, hold down Ctrl (Windows)
or Command (Macintosh) and press C. Move the cursor to the next edit box by
pressing tab. Then hold down Ctrl (Windows) or Command (Macintosh) and press V.
After margin change without Adjust Layout 7 Choose Edit > Undo Change Master.
The spread returns to the previous margin settings. Now change the margins again
using the Adjust Layout option.
8 Choose Master Page Options from the
Master Page palette menu. Once again, change the Inside, Outside, and Top margins
to 2p6 and change the Bottom margin to 2p10. Select Adjust Layout, and click OK.
164 LESSON 5
Cycling guidebook
PageMaker changes the margins and column guides, adjusting the text and graphics
that were aligned to the guides to the new layout.
1903
quelques traînards, les domestiques déterminent la cadence des autres coureurs
cyclistes, observent la tactique de la concurrence et bloquent les concurrents qui
essaient de se détacher d’un groupe de coureurs.
9 Select the pointer tool, hold down Shift
(to constrain the movement), and then drag the black frame on page 2 up until its
top edge touches the bottom edge of the yellow frame.
1903
Une course cycliste de classe mondiale
L’astuce publicitaire lancée il y a environ 100 ans pour éviter la faillite s’est
développée de façon à être aujourd’hui la plus grande course cycliste annuelle au
monde : le Tour de France. En 1903, des courses cyclistes d’une durée d’un jour
entre Paris et Bordeaux avaient beaucoup de succès. Ce qui fit réfléchir le
contrôleur des finances de L’Auto, un journal français connaissant des difficultés
financières : une compétition qui dure plusieurs jours et couvre des centaines de
kilomètres attirerait sans aucun doute un plus grand public, avide de lire les
compte-rendus journaliers d’un grand tour de la France. Henri Desgrange, le
directeur du journal, suivit cette suggestion ambitieuse et lança le Tour de
coureurs prennent chaque année la route à la recherche de la gloire et de la
fortune instantanées, et de ce fameux « maillot jaune », le maillot qui, depuis la
reprise des courses après la première guerre mondiale, honore le participant qui
mène la course dans l’ensemble.

coureurs domestiques. 1949 et de 1952 à son impressionnant palmarès de victoires
cyclistes, octroya autant d’importance à la tactique et la stratégie qu’à
l’entraînement physique. Les stratèges actuels mettent généralement les coureurs en
tête du peloton, suivis des domestiques.
La récompense
La récompense des coureurs cyclistes dévoués est l’inestimable prestige de gagner
le Tour. Mais il y a également un prix en argent liquide pouvant
La stratégie
Fausto Coppi, l’Italien qui ajouta le Tour de France de
Survivre la cadence
les Pays-Bas — couvrant 3 800 kilomètres en 22 jours. ✬ La course de 1993 ne quitta
la France que pour faire un bref détour par l’Andorre, le pays minuscule situé
entre la
France et l’Espagne — accumulant 3 734 kilomètres en 21 jours. ✬ En 1994, les

en France, jusqu’à Folkestone, en Angleterre, pour être rapatriés via ferry vers
Cherbourg — parcourant 3 955 kilomètres en 23 jours. ✬ La course de 1995 vit les
participants prendre l’avion entre la Bretagne en France et la Belgique, ensuite
des Alpes aux Pyrénées avant de terminer la course à Paris — un parcours de 3 515
kilomètres en 23 jours.
After margin change with Adjust Layout
The sidebar on page 2 was originally touching the yellow frame containing 1903.
Because the sidebar was not aligned to any horizontal guides, PageMaker did not
move it as it did the yellow frame.
This guidebook includes one more master page, 3-Col / 3-Col. You need to change the
margins on this master as well.
10 Double-click 3-Col / 3-Col in the Master Pages palette.
Note: This shortcut opens the Master Page Options dialog box but does not apply the
master page to the currently displayed pages.
Classroom in a Book
11 Type 2p6 for Inside, Outside, and Top
1 With pages 2 and 3 still displayed, select
margins and 2p10 for Bottom margin. Because no page currently uses this master
page, you do not need to select the Adjust Layout option. Click OK.
the zoom tool ( ) and click the upper middle portion of page 3. Click again if
necessary so that you can clearly see the text in all three columns.
La victoire en équipe
quelques traînards, les domestiques déterminent la cadence des autres coureurs
publication.
Gagner le Tour de France requiert
Working with styles

Before you fix the layout on page 3, you’ll first work with the paragraph styles. As
you learned in Lesson 3, a style is a set of formatting attributes that you can
name and apply to paragraphs. Even in this guidebook, which does not have a rigidly
consistent style, styles make formatting the text much easier. Styles are
especially useful when you repeat formatting characteristics in several places or
are still experimenting with the layout of a publication. You’ll change several
styles in this guidebook.
habituellement la participation d’une équipe. La personne qui semble avoir

coureur 1949 et de 1952 à son impressionnant palmarès de victoires cyclistes,
octroya autant d’importance à la
La récompense
La récompense des coureurs
2 Click the Styles palette tab to display the
Styles palette (or choose Window > Show Styles palette).

), and in the middle
of column 2, click an insertion point in the paragraph below the yellow box. Body
Text is highlighted in the Styles palette. Notice that the paragraphs in this story
have no hyphenation and are left-justified with a ragged right edge.
4 Double-click Body Text in the Styles
Editing the Body Text style

The first style change you’ll make is to the Body Text style. You’ll change its
alignment and dictionary settings. Body text is the style applied to the body of
the story La victoire en équipe.
palette. Click the Para button, choose Justify for Alignment and Français for
Dictionary
166 LESSON 5
Cycling guidebook
menu. Press Shift (Windows) or Option (Macintosh) and click OK to accept your
changes and close the dialog boxes.
Next you’ll examine the current styles, then change the font and color of the
Headline style and see how the Subhead 1 and Subhead 2 styles also change. You’ll
use several different techniques to edit the styles.
1 Select Type > Define Styles. Select the
Subhead 1 style, and then click Edit to display the Style Options dialog box.
Notice that the body of the article changes to full justification and several words
are now hyphenated. Now that the spelling and hyphenation dictionary matches the
language of the text, PageMaker can use it to hyphenate words when necessary.
Notice that the Subhead 1 style is based on the Headline style.

2 Click Cancel, and then double-click the
Basing styles on other styles

Styles in PageMaker can be based on other styles. For example, the Subhead 1 style
is based on the Headline style, and Subhead 2 is based on Subhead 1. The subheads
contain all the characteristics of the Headline style, except the point size and
leading are smaller, and they use a different leading method. Basing one style on
another saves time when creating and editing styles. If you change the font of the
Headline style, the font of each style that is based on the Headline style changes
as well.
Headline style. The Headline style is based on No Style because it is the top style
in the hierarchy. Note: The Next Style pop-up menu lets you specify the style to
apply to the next paragraph you create when you press Enter or Return. This feature
works only on text that is typed directly into PageMaker and does not change
existing text in the publication. Next, you’ll look at three examples of paragraphs
using Headline, Subhead 1, and Subhead 2.
3 Hold down Shift (Windows) or Option
(Macintosh) and click Cancel to close the dialog boxes.

Classroom in a Book
4 Hold down Alt (Windows) or Option
7 Click the Char button. Change the font to
(Macintosh) and double-click the zoom tool
( ) in the tool palette to return to the Fit in

Window view.
Myriad Roman, choose Purple for Color, and select Bold for Type Style. Click OK.
Note: Because of the way fonts are defined, when you apply bold to Myriad Roman,
PageMaker actually uses Myriad Bold. On the Macintosh, you can get the same result
if you select Myriad Bold directly.
8 Click the Para button. Select Center for
), click an insertion point in 1903 at the top of page 2. Notice that Headline is
highlighted in the Styles palette and that the Control palette shows the selected
font is AGaramond. Now click an insertion point in the head La victoire en équipe
at the top of page 3. Notice that Subhead 1 is the selected style and that the font
is still set to AGaramond. Finally, click the small subhead La stratégie a little
farther down column 1. (Zoom in if necessary.) This paragraph uses the Subhead 2
style and AGaramond is still the selected font.
You are now ready to redefine the Headline style.
Alignment and Français for Dictionary. Hold down Shift (Windows) or Option
(Macintosh), and then click OK to close the dialog boxes. The font changes in all
text tagged with the Headline, Subhead 1, or Subhead 2 style. This is an excellent
way of ensuring that elements in a document remain consistent.
9 Click an insertion point in the Subhead 1
(Macintosh) and click Headline in the Styles palette. Note: This shortcut to the
Style Options dialog box does not apply the style to the paragraph containing the
cursor (or to selected paragraphs if any are selected). However, when you double-
click a style in the palette (as you did when you edited the Body Text style),
PageMaker applies the style and then displays the Style Options dialog box. You can
also open the Style Options dialog box from the Styles palette menu or by choosing
Type > Define Styles.
(La victoire en équipe) and then in the Subhead 2 (La stratégie), that you checked
before, and notice that they have all changed to purple Myriad. Now you fine-tune
the Subhead 1 and Subhead 2 styles.
10 Choose Type > Define Styles. Then
double-click the Subhead 1 style.

11 Click the Char button, type 26 for Size and 26 for Leading, and then click OK.
12 Click the Para button. Choose Left for Alignment. Click OK twice to return to
the Define Styles dialog box.
168 LESSON 5
Cycling guidebook
You’ll now change the point size of Subhead 2. To keep the text aligned in adjacent
columns, you’ll change the leading for Subhead 2 to the same value as used in the
Body Text style.
13 Double-click the Subhead 2 style. Click
Creating a style based on another style

Now you’ll create a second body text style that incorporates an indent. You’ll base
it on the Body Text style. While you’ll apply Body Text Indent to only one
paragraph in this story, you’ll need both these styles for text you place later in
this lesson.
1 Zoom in to the middle of column 2 on page 3. 2 With the text tool selected, click
an insertion point in the paragraph that starts “Quelques minutes….”
p p équipe. La personne qui semble avoir
coureurs domestiques. le Tour de France de 1949 et de 1952 à son impressionnant
palmarès de victoires cyclistes, octroya autant d’importance à la tactique et la
stratégie qu’à l’entraînement physique. Les stratèges actuels mettent généralement
les coureurs en tête du peloton, suivis des domestiques. Quelques minutes suffisent
pour autres coureurs cyclistes, observent la tactique de la concurrence et bloquent
les concurrents qui essaient de se détacher d’un groupe de coureurs.
the Char button, and type 13 for both Size and Leading. Then click OK. So the
Subhead 2 stands out more from the body text, you’ll add space before each subhead.
You’ll set the space to the same value as the leading, again to maintain alignment
between columns.
14 Click the Para button and type p13 for
Before. Press Shift (Windows) or Option (Macintosh) and click OK to close dialog
boxes. Note: Although 12 points make a pica, you can enter higher values entirely
in points (preceded by p, such as p13 or 0p13) and let PageMaker convert the number
into picas and points for you.
1903
La récompense
le Tour. Mais il y a également un prix en argent liquide pouvant s’élever à
plusieurs millions de francs pour le participant arrivant en première
La stratégie
Fausto Coppi, l’Italien qui ajouta
Survivre la cadence
3 Click the New button (
) in the Styles
pour
obtenir la victoire après plusieurs journées de course; c’est pour cette raison que
les domestiques s’efforcent pour que leur coureur ait le dessus. Roulant dans un ou
deux groupes principaux suivis de quelques traînards, les domestiques déterminent
la cadence des autres coureurs cyclistes, observent la tactique de la concurrence
et bloquent les concurrents qui essaient de se détacher d’un groupe de coureurs.
palette. The Style Options dialog box appears with Body Text selected for Based On.
4 Type Body Text Indent for Name. 5 Click the Para button, and then type 1p2 for
First line indent. Press Shift (Windows) or Option (Macintosh) and click OK to
La récompense
La stratégie
Survivre la cadence
entre la

15 Save 05Work.pmd.
PageMaker creates the new style but does not change the paragraph containing the
cursor.
Classroom in a Book
6 Click the new Body Text Indent style
3 Drag the box until its top edge rests on the
in the Styles palette to apply it to the paragraph.

7 Save 05Work.pmd.
baseline of the headline La victoire en équipe.

Finishing the first spread

With the new page size, margins, and style definitions, the La victoire en équipe
story no longer fits the three columns. You’ll need to adjust the yellow box and
each of the text blocks. To make it easier to work, you’ll first magnify the top
half of page 3.
1 Adjust the view of the page if necessary
on a character in the text on top of the yellow box to select the text block. Drag
the text block up so that the top of its bounding box rests on the baseline of the
headline La victoire en équipe.
coureur et est soutenue par d’autres coureurs cyclistes ap-
pour obtenir la victoire après plusieurs journées de course; c’est pour cette
raison que les domestiques s’efforcent pour que leur coureur ait le dessus. Roulant
dans un ou deux groupes principaux suivis de quelques traînards, les domestiques
déterminent la cadence des autres coureurs cyclistes, observent la tactique de la
concurrence et bloquent les concurrents qui essaient de se détacher d’un groupe de
coureurs.
so you can see all three columns in the top half of the page.
pelés les domestiques. L’équipe peut également inclure un directeur technique qui
est en général un ancien coureur cycliste connaissant les trucs du métier et
servant d’entraîneur des coureurs
le Tour de France de 1949 et de 1952 à son impressionnant palmarès de victoires

cyclistes, octroya autant d’importance à la tactique et la stratégie qu’à
l’entraînement physique. Les stratè-
La récompense
le Tour. Mais il y a également un prix en argent liquide pouvant s’élever à plu-
pour obtenir la victoire après plusieurs journées de course; c’est pour cette
raison que les domestiques s’efforcent pour que leur coureur ait le dessus. Roulant
dans un ou deux groupes principaux suivis de quelques traînards, les domestiques
déterminent la cadence des autres coureurs cyclistes, observent la tactique de la
coureurs.
5 Drag the bottom windowshade handle up
so that only three lines of text are displayed. Instead of pulling down a ruler
guide, you’ll keep the text block selected and use its bounding box as a guide.
6 Hold down Shift and select the yellow box.
La récompense
La stratégie
Release the Shift key, and then drag the bottom center handle of the box up flush
with
2 Select the pointer tool, and then select the
yellow box. Depending upon where you click, you may need to hold down Ctrl
(Windows) or Command (Macintosh) and click again to select the box and not the text
block.
170 LESSON 5
Cycling guidebook
the bottom edge of the text block. (The Y location in the Control palette should be
approximately 11p11.)
8 Select the text block in column 1, and then
L’équipe peut également inclure
coureurs domestiques.
La stratégie
impressionnant pal-
ges actuels mettent généralement les coureurs en tête du peloton, suivis des
domestiques. Quelques minutes suffisent pour obtenir la victoire après plusieurs
journées de course; c’est pour cette raison que les domestiques s’efforcent pour
que leur coureur ait le dessus. Roulant dans un ou deux groupes principaux suivis
de quelques traînards, les domestiques déterminent la cadence des autres coureurs
hold down Shift and select the text block in column 2. Drag both text blocks up
until the baseline of the first line of text in each aligns with the newly moved
ruler guide.
La stratégie
impressionnant palmarès de victoires cyclistes, octroya autant d’importance à la
tactique et la stratégie qu’à l’entraînement physique. Les stratè-
La récompense
La récompense des coureurs cy-
Now you will move the two smaller text blocks up. To help you align these text
blocks with the text in column 3, you’ll first reposition a ruler guide.
7 Position the pointer tool in the margin or between columns 1 and 2, over the
ruler guide that currently sits at the top of the small text blocks in columns 1
and 2. Drag the guide until it’s flush with the first baseline below the yellow box
in column 3 (as shown below; a Y location of approximately 12p11 in the Control
palette). Zoom in if necessary.
La récompense
9 Drag the bottom windowshade handle of
the text block in column 1 down until the subhead La stratégie and three more lines
of text move to column 1 (approximately 29p8 for Y in the Control palette).
Remember: If you pause before you begin dragging, the Control palette displays the
mouse position as you drag.
10 Drag a new ruler guide from the horizontal ruler so that it is flush with the
bottom edge of the text block in column 1. 11 Drag the bottom windowshade handle of
the text block in column 2 down until it is aligned with the new ruler guide. 12
Select the text block in column 3 and
L’équipe peut également inclure
La stratégie
impressionnant pal-
drag its bottom windowshade handle down until it’s aligned with the new ruler
guide.
La récompense
Classroom in a Book
13 Hold down Alt (Windows) or Option
2 Choose Element > Text Wrap. For Wrap
(Macintosh) and double-click the zoom tool
( ) to return to the Fit in Window view.

1903
éviter la faillite s’est développée de façon à être aujourd’hui la plus grande
course cycliste annuelle au monde : le Tour de France. En 1903, des courses
cyclistes d’une durée d’un jour entre Paris et Bordeaux avaient beaucoup de succès.
Ce qui fit réfléchir le contrôleur des finances de L’Auto, un journal français
connaissant des difficultés financières : une compétition qui dure plusieurs jours
et couvre des centaines de kilomètres attirerait sans aucun doute un plus grand
public, avide de lire les compte-rendus journaliers d’un grand tour de la France.
Henri Desgrange, le directeur du journal, suivit cette suggestion ambitieuse et
lança le Tour de France. Sous la direction de Desgrange, le Tour de France se
développa en une course sur route traditionnelle. C’est ainsi que, aujourd’hui, 20
équipes de neuf coureurs prennent chaque année la route à la recherche de la gloire
et de la fortune instantanées, et de ce fameux « maillot jaune », le maillot qui,
depuis la reprise des courses après la première guerre mondiale, honore le
participant qui mène la course dans l’ensemble. L’astuce publicitaire lancée il y a
environ 100 ans pour
Gagner le Tour de France requiert habituellement la participation d’une
minent la cadence des autres coureurs cyclistes, observent la tactique de la

coureurs.
équipe. La personne qui semble avoir La récompense

coureurs domestiques. marès de victoires cyclistes, octroya autant d’importance à
la tactique et la stratégie qu’à l’entraînement physique. Les stratèges actuels
quelques traînards, les domestiques déter-
La stratégie
impressionnant pal-

plusieurs millions de francs pour le participant arrivant en première place — et
que le coureur partage avec son équipe. Pas assez pour prendre sa retraite, mais
suffisant pour que les domestiques fêtent l’occasion et reprennent la route, le
coeur à l’ouvrage. Et le coureur? Célébrité instantanée, il est sûr d’être connu de
tous et de toutes grâce aux éloges de la presse et la promotion lucrative de
produits.
Option, select the second icon (rectangular wrap). For Text Flow, make sure the
third icon (wrap all sides) is selected. Then for Standoff in Picas, type 0 for
Left, Right, Top, and Bottom, and then click OK.
Survivre la cadence
entre la

14 Save 05Work.pmd. Then click the
page 4 icon.
Laying out the next spread

Now you will complete the layout for the spread on pages 4 and 5. As you work, pan
the page as necessary and use the zoom tool to magnify the area you are editing.
PageMaker displays the text wrap boundary (the dotted line with the diamond-shaped
handles). You’ll now customize this text wrap boundary. Be careful in the next step
to drag the boundary, not click it. (Clicking a text wrap boundary inserts a new
handle, which you’ll do in step 4.)
3 With the map still selected, hold down Shift (to constrain the movement) and drag
the top text wrap boundary straight down until it is flush with the top of the A of
Après.
Setting text wrap

Before you place the text for this spread, you’ll first apply text wrap to the
graphic. As you learned in previous lessons, text wrap forces text to move around
or jump over a graphic, rather than flow on top of it. PageMaker provides a default
rectangular text wrap boundary, but you can customize the boundary by adding and
moving points as needed to create the shape you want.
1 Select the pointer tool, and then click the
map to select it.

172 LESSON 5
Cycling guidebook
4 Click on the top wrap boundary at the
6 Hold down Shift and drag the newest
margin guide of page 5 to create a new text wrap handle. Create another new handle
to the left of the first (its location is not important).
handle to the right, below the other handle you created.
7 Save 05Work.pmd.
The top boundary now consists of three segments.

5 Drag the left segment of the top wrap
Flowing the story

You’ll now place the text for this spread. As with the other text used in this
project, the text was prepared in Microsoft Word. The text has been formatted with
styles whose names are the same as style names in the PageMaker publication. When
you place text with a style name that matches an existing PageMaker style,
PageMaker applies the PageMaker version of the style to the text.
1 Choose File > Place, select 05TextA.doc in
boundary down to the top edge of the map. (Be careful to keep the handles aligned
with the column guides.)
the 05Lesson folder, make sure the Retain Format option is selected, and click Open
or OK. When a style name doesn’t match an existing PageMaker style, the Retain
Format option retains the style definition used in the word-processing program.
2 Choose Layout > Autoflow to turn on the
Autoflow option.
Classroom in a Book
3 Position the loaded text icon at the top of
column 1 on page 4 (the icon should snap to the margins) and click.
With each move, PageMaker reflows the text to fill the columns.You’ll next return it
to the bottom right corner.
5 With the map still selected, select the bottom right corner reference point in
the Control palette Proxy icon. Change X to 33p6 and Y to 54p2. Press Enter or
Return.
Remember: Unless otherwise stated, the reference point in the Control palette Proxy
icon should be a square point, not an arrow. The text flows from column to column
across the spread, wrapping around the graphic boundary. When you autoflow text,
PageMaker flows each text block the full length of the column. Even if a graphic
with text wrap applied forces the text to wrap, the text block definition spans the
full length and width of the column. PageMaker remembers these boundaries. If you
resize or move a graphic, the text reflows into any remaining space in the column.
To see for yourself how the text reflows, you’ll temporarily move the map. You’ll
then return it to its current location. Be careful when you drag the map that you
keep the pointer in the middle of the map. You don’t want to resize it or reshape
the text wrap boundary.
Exténuant, même pour les plus grands champions du monde, chaque parcours du Tour de
France — y compris la partie nord de la course de 1991 qu’illustre la carte ici-bas
— regroupe les mêmes éléments : des chemins de montagne accidentés avec des montées
éreintantes et des plaines brûlantes sous le soleil. Des altitudes atteignant
facilement 2 000 mètres, avec des sommets pouvant s’élever à 3 000 mètres. Voilà
les endroits où excellent les coureurs connus sous le nom de “grimpeurs”. D’autres
coureurs s’échappent du peloton pour une course de vitesse à travers les plaines.
Chaque terrain exige une compétence différente et seul un coureur exceptionnel est
donc capable de tenir le coup dans les montées et durant les courses de vitesse.
D’autres bruits pincent le coeur du spectateur. Les sanglots étranglés d’un coureur
exténué abandonnant ce parcours trop brutal. Le son du gravier qui se disperse et
du métal qui se déchire lorsqu’un participant tombe et est projeté sur la route. Et
dans les cas rares où un coureur se blesse ou trouve la mort, les cris de douleur,
la sirène stridente de l’ambulance, puis... le silence. Le Tour de France. Plus
qu’une course cycliste — la course d’une vie. 7-11, Panasonic, Motorola, Toshiba,
Carrera, Gatorade et Renault. Le reste du soutien financier provient de diverses
sources. Par exemple, les multiples agglomérations incluses dans le parcours annuel
contribuent des fonds pour cet honneur et les stations de télévision achètent les
droits de diffusion.
Les promoteurs
Cette compétition française, commencée pour éviter la faillite, s’avère être une
aubaine pour les promoteurs commerciaux dont la liste des noms évoque le monde du
commerce international : Coca Cola, Fiat, le Crédit Lyonnais, etc. Ces promoteurs
couvrent environ deux tiers du coût escaladant de la course. Quinze pour cent
environ proviennent de promoteurs internationaux d’une équipe, y compris
...et l’abandon
Chaque Tour de France inclut quelques jours de repos. Cela n’empêche pourtant pas
que presque la moitié des participants risque d’abandonner la course avant la fin
du parcours. Certains ne sont simplement pas capables de maintenir la cadence jour
après jour. Même un concurrent plus fort peut voir s’échapper sa chance de gagner
s’il connaît un jour sans, c’est-à-dire, ce que les Français appellent un jour sans
force ou ressources. Il suffit d’un seul mauvais jour pour perdre. Les coureurs
cyclistes et leurs supporters viennent de France, d’autres pays de l’Europe, des
États-Unis, du Canada, de l’Australie, de l’Amérique latine et de plus loin encore
— de même que leurs promoteurs. Le Tour n’est donc pas seulement un événement
international, mais aussi un événement commercial important.
Les supporters
Chaque année, des millions de supporters du monde entier se tassent le long des
routes pour voir passer les coureurs. L’adrénaline fait battre les coeurs des
spectateurs au rythme des jambes pompant comme des pistons. Le bruit des roues
vrombissantes accompagne les halètements des participants respirant la poussière de
leurs concurrents plus rapides. Visages, bras et jambes luisent, alors que les
coureurs poursuivent leur course vers la victoire.
6 Save 05Work.pmd.
Creating the headline

The article you just placed requires a headline within a yellow frame.
1 Zoom in to the top third of page 4. 2 Drag a guide from the horizontal ruler
the pointer in the middle of the map and drag the map half-way up the page. Watch
the text reflow. Then drag it to the top of the page.
down to the baseline of the fourth line of text in columns 1 and 2.

174 LESSON 5
Cycling guidebook
). Posi-
6 With the frame still selected, choose Ele-
tion the tool on page 4 at the top left corner of column 1 (allow the tool to snap
to the guides). Drag across both columns until the tool snaps to the right edge of
column 2 and to the ruler guide you just placed. You’ll use the Control palette to
adjust the height of the frame so it extends above the margin.
4 With the bottom left corner reference point in the Proxy icon selected in the
Control palette, adjust the values so W is 31p and H is 5p. Press the Apply button.
ment > Frame > Frame Options. Choose Center for Vertical Alignment, and type 0 for
Top, Bottom, Left, and Right Insets, and click OK. Just as you did with the map,
you’ll define a text wrap boundary for the frame to force the text to jump below the
frame.
Option, select the second icon (rectangular wrap). For Text Flow, make sure the
third icon (wrap all sides) is selected. Then, for Standoff in Picas, type 0 for
Left, Right, Top, and Bottom, and click OK.
Chaque terrain exige une compétence différente et seul un coureur exceptionl d bl d
i l d l
Les sanglots étranglés d’un coureur exténué abandonnant ce parcours trop brutal. Le
son du gravier qui se disperse et du métal qui se déchire lorsqu’un participant
tombe et est projeté sur la route. Et dans les cas rares où un coureur se blesse ou
trouve la mort, les cris de douleur, la sirène stridente de l’ambulance, puis... le
silence. Le Tour de France. Plus qu’une course cycliste — la course d’une vie.
Les promoteurs
aubaine pour les promoteurs commerciaux dont la liste des noms évol d d i i l
5 Choose Element > Fill and Stroke. In the
fill portion of the Fill and Stroke dialog box, choose Solid for Fill and Pantone
810 2X CVC for Color. In the stroke portion of the dialog box, choose 4pt solid
line for Stroke and Black for Color, and then click OK.
), click an insertion
point in the frame. Click the Paragraph button in the Control palette and choose
Headline for Style to set the style before typing the text.
9 Type L’échappée. To enter an accented e (é), type one of the following key
sequences:
Windows: Make sure the Num Lock key is down. Then, while holding down Alt, type
0233 on the numeric keypad. (No text appears until you release the Alt key.)
•
Classroom in a Book
Macintosh: While holding down Option, type e (nothing appears on the screen), and
then type e again. PageMaker includes a file in the Utilities folder called
Character Set that lists the numeric code for most special characters.
10 Double-click the hand tool ( ) to return to the Fit in Window view.
L’échappée
pagne les halètements des participants respirant la poussière de leurs concurrents
plus rapides. Visages, bras et jambes luisent, alors que les coureurs poursuivent
leur course vers la victoire. D’autres bruits pincent le coeur du spectateur. Les
sanglots étranglés d’un coureur exténué abandonnant ce parcours trop brutal. Le son
du gravier qui se disperse et du métal qui se déchire lorsqu’un participant tombe
et est projeté sur la route. Et dans les cas rares où un coureur se blesse ou
trouve la mort, les cris de douleur, la sirène stridente de l’ambulance, puis... le
silence. Le Tour de France. Plus qu’une course cycliste — la course d’une vie.
environ proviennent de promoteurs internationaux d’une équipe, y compris 7-11,
Panasonic, Motorola, Toshiba, Carrera, Gatorade et Renault. Le reste du soutien
financier provient de diverses sources. Par exemple, les multiples agglomérations
incluses dans le parcours annuel contribuent des fonds pour cet honneur et les
stations de télévision achètent les droits de diffusion.
Notice that the Document Master is selected for pages 4 and 5.

2 Choose Adjust Layout from the Master
Page palette menu to turn this option on. When Adjust Layout is on, PageMaker
automatically adjusts the layout of a page when you apply a new master to it. (This
option also changes the default state of the Adjust Layout option in the Master
Page options dialog box.)
3 Select 3-Col / 3-Col in the Master Pages
palette. PageMaker applies the new master page and reflows the text automatically.
L’échappée
d’autres pays de l’Europe, des États-Unis, du Canada, de l’Australie, de l’Amérique
latine et de plus loin encore — de même que leurs promoteurs. Le Tour n’est donc
pas seulement un événement international, mais aussi un événement commercial
important. supporters du monde entier se tassent le long des routes pour voir
passer les coureurs. L’adrénaline fait battre les coeurs des spectateurs au rythme
des jambes pompant comme des pistons. Le bruit des roues vrombissantes accompagne
les halètements des participants respirant la poussière de leurs concurrents plus
rapides. Visages, bras et jambes luisent, alors que les coureurs poursuivent leur
course vers la victoire. D’autres bruits pincent le coeur du spectateur. Les
sanglots étranglés d’un coureur exténué abandonnant ce parcours trop brutal. Le son
du gravier qui se disperse et du métal qui se déchire lorsqu’un participant tombe
et est projeté sur la route. Et dans les cas rares où un coureur se blesse ou
trouve la mort, les cris de douleur,
Les promoteurs
...et l’abandon
international, mais aussi un événement commercial important.
Les supporters
Chaque année, des millions de
Les supporters
Chaque année, des millions de supporters du monde entier se tassent le long des
vrombissantes accom-
...et l’abandon
cyclistes et leurs supporters viennent de France,
11 Save 05Work.pmd.
Changing to the 3-Col master page

The two-column layout is not working well for this spread. The text does not fill
the columns. You will now change it to a three-column layout. Because the graphics
have text wrap applied and the text is autoflowed into the columns, PageMaker easily
adjusts the layout for you when you apply the three-column master page.
1 If the Master Pages palette is not currently
displayed, choose Window > Show Master Pages or click the Master Pages palette tab.
Because you had turned on “OK to Resize Groups and Imported Graphics” in the Layout
Adjustment Preferences dialog box (at the beginning of the lesson), PageMaker has
resized the map and framed headline. When resizing, PageMaker maintained the map’s
alignment with the left edge of column 2 (page 4) and the right margin guide (page
5), and kept the headline aligned with the left and right margin guides of page 4.
176 LESSON 5
Cycling guidebook
The larger size map has helped fill the layout, but the headline frame needs to be
smaller. You’ll resize the headline frame so that it spans two, instead of three,
columns.
4 Select the pointer tool, and then select the
You now need to finish flowing the text on page 5.

9 Select the text block in column 1 on
page 5. Notice that the bottom windowshade handle contains a down arrow, indicating
that there is more text in the story that hasn’t been placed.
10 Click the bottom windowshade handle. Position the loaded text icon in column 2
on page 5, snapping it to the top left corner of the column. Click to flow the text.
headline frame. Because the text wrap boundary precisely overlaps the bounding box
on the top and sides of the frame, you must hold down the Ctrl or Command key to
resize the frame, otherwise you’ll resize only the text wrap boundary.
5 Hold down Control (Windows) or Com-
PageMaker flows the remainder of the story into columns 2 and 3. You have finished
this spread.
L’échappée
international, mais aussi un événement commercial important. tassent le long des
vrombissantes accompagne les halètements des participants respirant la poussière de
leurs concurrents plus rapides. Visages, bras et jambes luisent, alors que les
coureurs poursuivent leur course vers la victoire. D’autres bruits pincent le coeur
du spectateur. Les sanglots étranglés d’un coureur exténué abandonnant ce parcours
trop brutal. Le son du gravier qui se disperse et du métal qui se déchire lorsqu’un
participant tombe et est projeté sur la route. Et dans les cas rares où un coureur
se blesse ou trouve la mort, les cris de douleur, la sirène stridente de
l’ambulance, puis... le silence. Le Tour de France. Plus qu’une course cycliste —
la course d’une vie.
mand (Macintosh), and drag the middle handle on the right edge of the frame until
it snaps to the right edge of column 2. The text wrap boundary resizes with the
frame, and the text adjusts to fill column 3.
Les promoteurs
environ proviennent de
promoteurs internationaux d’une équipe, y compris 7-11, Panasonic, Motorola,

Toshiba, Carrera, Gatorade et Renault. Le reste du soutien financier provient de
diverses sources. Par exemple, les multiples agglomérations incluses dans le
parcours annuel contribuent des fonds pour cet honneur et les stations de
télévision achètent les droits de diffusion.
Les supporters
Chaque année, des millions de supporters du monde entier se
text block in column 1 on page 4. Drag the bottom windowshade handle just below the
bottom margin guide to pull one more line of text into the column. (The windowshade
handle will tend to snap to the margin guide. Drag it just below the snap point.)
7 If the text in column 1 no longer aligns
...et l’abandon
with the text in column 2, pull the top windowshade handle back to the top of the
column.
8 If the bottom windowshade slips up again,
11 Save 05Work.pmd, and then turn to
page 6.
repeat steps 6 and 7 until the text runs to the bottom of the column and aligns
with the text in column 2.
Classroom in a Book
Finishing pages 6 and 7

Page 6 contains all the art for the spread. You only need to finish the sidebars.
You next need to thread the two frames together so when you place the sidebar text
it flows from the yellow frame to the green frame.
5 Click the bottom windowshade in the yel-
Converting the rectangles to frames

Before you place the sidebar text, you first need to convert the rectangles to
frames, set the frame options, and thread them together. You’ll use frames for this
portion of the layout because it makes positioning the text so easy. The frame
options control the placement of the text in the frames. You center the headline
automatically, and offset the body text below the headline. Before you begin,
you’ll take a look at the final version to see what the completed sidebar looks
like.
1 Choose Window > 05Final.pmd (to
low frame (the pointer changes to the thread icon ( )), and then click anywhere in
the green frame to thread the frames together. Notice that a plus sign appears in
the bottom windowshade handle of the yellow frame and in the top windowshade handle
of the green frame.
6 Hold down Shift and click the green frame
to deselect it.
7 With the yellow frame still selected, choose Element > Frame > Frame Options.
Choose Center for Vertical Alignment, type 0 for Top, Left, Bottom, and Right, and
click OK. 8 Choose File > Place, select the
switch to the final version of the guidebook), click the page 6 icon, and then
select the yellow frame with the pointer tool. The windowshade handle at the bottom
of the yellow frame contains a plus sign, indicating that the text continues in
another frame.
2 Choose Window > 05Work.pmd.
05TextB.doc file, make sure both Within Frame’s Thread and Retain Format are
selected, and click Open (Windows) or OK (Macintosh).
que Tour toujours Gagner... encoreleet de France a plu à un public plus
international, la liste des gagnants légendaires pour leur vitesse et endurance en
a fait de même. Ces champions ont prouvé leurs compétences en gagnant le Tour, non
pas une fois, mais jusqu’à cinq fois : Le français Jacques Anquetil devint la
première personne à gagner quatre fois la compétition (en 1957 et de 1961 à 1963),
pour ensuite capter le titre une cinquième fois. Le belge Eddy Merck amassa ensuite
cinq victoires, de 1969 à 1972 et encore en 1974. Le français Bernard Hineault mit
cinq victoires à son palmarès entre 1978 et 1985. Outre le stratège Coppi, les
héros des premiers tours de France incluent les coureurs français Eugène Christophe
et Louison Bobet. À mesure
You are now ready to convert the frames.

L’americain Greg LeMond devint le premier gagnant non européen en 1986, et plus
tard parvint encore à gagner deux fois la compétition. En 1991, l’espagnol Miguel
Indurain emporta la première d’une série de victoires consécutives.
yellow rectangle, hold down Shift, and select the green rectangle. (Release Shift.)
4 Choose Element > Frame > Change
to Frame.
178 LESSON 5
Cycling guidebook
The text flows from the yellow frame to the green frame, but the yellow frame
obscures some of the text. You will use the frame options to reposition the text
within the green frame. You need the text in the green frame offset from the top of
the frame so the text starts below the headline. The body text also needs to be
offset from the edges of the green frame.
9 Use the pointer tool to select the green
Removing an unused style

You’ll now remove Normal from the Styles palette. (Normal is a style imported with
Word documents.) While removing unused styles is not necessary, it ensures that you
won’t apply them by accident and keeps your Style palette more compact.
1 If necessary, click the Styles tab in the
palette group to view the Styles palette.

2 Drag Normal in the Styles palette to the
frame and choose Element > Frame > Frame Options. Then, choose Top for Vertical
Alignment, type 6p11 for Top, 1p6 for Left, 0 for Bottom, and 2p6 for Right. Click
OK.
Gagner... encore et toujours
Outre le stratège Coppi, les héros des premiers tours de France incluent les
coureurs français Eugène Christophe et Louison Bobet. À mesure que le Tour de
France a plu à un public plus international, la liste des gagnants légendaires pour
leur vitesse et endurance en a fait de même. Ces champions ont prouvé leurs
compétences en gagnant le Tour, non pas une fois, mais jusqu’à cinq fois : Le
français Jacques Anquetil devint la première personne à gagner quatre fois la
compétition (en 1957 et de 1961 à 1963), pour ensuite capter le titre une cinquième
fois. Le belge Eddy Merck amassa ensuite cinq victoires, de 1969 à 1972 et encore
en 1974. Le français Bernard Hineault mit cinq victoires à son palmarès entre 1978
et 1985. L’americain Greg LeMond devint le premier gagnant non européen en 1986, et
plus tard parvint encore à gagner deux fois la compétition. En 1991, l’espagnol
Miguel Indurain emporta la première d’une série de victoires consécutives.
trash icon at the bottom of the palette.

3 When prompted to delete the style, click
OK (Windows) or Delete (Macintosh).
Adding special bullets to the list

The sidebar text that you just placed on page 7 has several paragraphs that need
stars inserted as was done on page 3. You use the Bullets and Numbering plug-in to
create these. Adobe PageMaker comes with a variety of plug-ins that help you to
perform complex procedures easily, or to perform special tasks. You can also
acquire additional plugins created by independent developers. If you have access to
the Internet, see Adobe’s Web page at http://www.adobe.com.
1 Zoom in on the text you just placed onto
10 Save 05Work.pmd.
page 7.
), and click an insertion point in the second paragraph (it begins Le français
Jacques Anquetil).
Classroom in a Book
3 Choose Utilities > Plug-ins > Bullets and
6 Choose Zapf Dingbats for Font, choose 10
Numbering.
for Size, and choose any star character.
The Bullets and Numbering plug-in inserts consecutive numbers (autonumbering) or a

bullet character of your choice, along with a tab, at the beginning of each
designated paragraph. You can specify that they should be added to selected
paragraphs, to paragraphs that have a specific style, to a specific number of
paragraphs based on the location of your cursor, or to every paragraph in the
story. In this example, you begin by editing the bullet style.
4 Select the All Those with Style option, and choose Hanging Indent for the
paragraph style. 5 Click the Edit button.
Note: To see a character more clearly, temporarily set the size to something large,
like 36 points, and click the character. It displays in the sample box at the
chosen size. When you have identified the character you want, return the size to 10
points.
7 Click OK, and then click OK again to exit
the Bullets and Numbering dialog box. PageMaker adds the character that you chose
and a tab to each paragraph in the story that has the Hanging indent style.
✪ Le français Jacques Anquetil devint la première personne à gagner quatre fois la
fois. ✪ Le belge Eddy Merck amassa ensuite cinq victoires, de 1969 à 1972 et encore
180 LESSON 5
Cycling guidebook
Inserting a drop cap

As a design element for this page, you will increase the size of the initial
character of the main paragraph, creating a drop cap.
1 With the text tool selected, click an
Review questions
1 How do you close an irregular polygon so that the start and end points are
joined? 2 How do you select a graphic inside a frame without merely selecting the
frame? 3 What objects are most likely to be adjusted correctly when using
PageMaker’s automatic layout adjustment? 4 How do you apply a special bullet style
to a series of paragraphs?
insertion point in the first paragraph of the body text in the sidebar. Choose
Utilities > Plug-ins > Drop Cap.
2 Click OK to accept the default drop cap
size of three lines.

Gagner... encore et toujours
utre le stratège Coppi, les héros des premiers tours de France in cluent les
coureurs français Eugène Christophe et Louison Bobet. À mesure que le Tour de
France a plu à un public plus international, la liste des gagnants légendaires pour
leur vitesse et endurance en a fait de même. Ces champions ont prouvé leurs
compétences en gagnant le Tour, non pas une fois, mais jusqu’à cinq fois : ✪ Le
français Jacques Anquetil devint la première personne à gagner quatre fois la
fois. ✪ Le belge Eddy Merck amassa ensuite cinq victoires, de 1969 à 1972 et encore
en 1974. ✪ Le français Bernard Hineault mit cinq victoires à son palmarès entre
1978 et 1985. ✪ L’americain Greg LeMond devint le premier gagnant non européen en
1986, et plus tard parvint encore à gagner deux fois la compétition. ✪ En 1991,
l’espagnol Miguel Indurain emporta la première d’une série de victoires
consécutives.
Answers
1 When drawing the polygon, position the cursor over the starting point (the
pointer changes to a square), and click once. 2 Hold down Ctrl (Windows) or Command
(Macintosh) and click in the frame.

3 PageMaker will be most successful adjust-
ing objects that are aligned with page edges, margins, and ruler guides.
4 Select some text in all the paragraphs to
You have completed the layout of this guidebook.

3 Save 05Work.pmd. 4 Close all open files, and quit PageMaker.
which you want to apply special bullets. Choose Utilities > Plug-ins > Bullets and
Numbering. Select a bullet style or click Edit to select a different bullet. Select
other options as desired and click OK.
Lesson 6
This project is a newsletter published by a consortium of companies that provide

travelrelated services. Although it is short enough to be called a newsletter, the
variety and complexity of its layout are comparable to a magazine. This project
focuses on creating professional-level typography and layout. Many page elements
are stored in a library, so you can streamline importing and concentrate on
mastering professional layout skills.
182 LESSON 6
To maintain the professional appearance of this highly designed publication, you

will create a leading grid to ensure that the pieces align in an ordered way so
that the complex page retains a unified and harmonious overall appearance. You will
also employ a number of PageMaker’s typographic controls and use the story editor
for tasks such as spell-checking and replacing certain characters. In this project
you learn how to:
• • •
Before you begin

settings to their defaults. See “Restoring default settings” in Lesson 1.
2 Make sure that the AGaramond, AGaramond Semibold, Birch, and Myriad Roman and
Myriad Condensed families of fonts are installed.
Use semiautomatic text flow. Apply Expert Kerning.
Create a page that has different column layouts on different parts of the page. Use
paragraph settings to control column breaks. Use the Add Cont’d Line plug-in.
• •
Use the story editor to find and replace characters. Perform a spell check. Use
PageMaker’s image-control features. Force-justify a line. Control hyphenation and
widows.
• • • •
Windows only: Because of the way Windows handles fonts, AGaramond Semibold appears
in the ATM Fonts list as AGaramond, Bold (notice the comma). However, neither
AGaramond Semibold nor AGaramond, Bold appear in font menus in Windows
applications. You must apply bold to AGaramond to use AGaramond Semibold.
Similarly, you must apply bold to Myriad Condensed to use Myriad Condensed Bold
(Myriad CN Bold on Mac OS).
This project should take you about 2 hours to complete.

Classroom in a Book
3 Start Adobe PageMaker 7.0. Open the
06Final.pmd file in 06Lesson to see how the completed newsletter will look.
SUMMER 1998
type .75 inches for all four margins. Choose 2400 dpi for Target Output Resolution
and, in Windows only, choose AGFA-ProSet9800 for Compose to Printer. Click OK.
Note: If you do not have the required printer, you can still create the project as
Volume 23
Adventure
Special Issue
F r e n e t i c Fun for the Physically F i t
Travel
Bungee Jumping in Mexico
For a honeymoon it was a bit of a stretch, but for travel and adventure, bungee
jumping is the way to go
et me say first thing that I’ve never been suicidal, that I get vertigo if I look
down while waiting on the curb to cross the street, and that my idea of adventure
is eating two scoops of ice cream instead of one scoop of fat-free frozen yogurt.
But then I got married and went to Mexico with my new husband. In Mexico, we
thought, there would be romantic nights in resort rooms reeking of vanilla. Yes,
vanilla. More of an amateur chef than a wild woman, I find my thrills in cooking
concoctions that make people drool. In some of my culinary research, I’d read how
vanilla originated in El Tajin, an area in the northern state of Vera Cruz in
Mexico along the Gulf. Better yet, the Totonacs—the dominant native tribe there—
regard vanilla as an aphrodisiac. My husband-to-be had okayed this destination
because he was interested in the spectacular archaeological ruins in the area.
Settled at least 2,000 years ago, El Tajin boasts the Pyramid of the Niches
EDITOR’S NOTE
How was my vacation? I thought you’d never ask. Frankly, it was fantastic— and
sometimes frightening. That means it was thrilling, too, and I crave adrenaline
rushes the way most people need chocolate. So would I do it again? You betcha. When
world-class rafting expert Jon Benson invited me on his whitewater rafting trip
down the Yangtze River in China, I blurted yes even before he’d finished wrapping
his lips around the question. The chance to raft with someone of Jon’s daredevil
attitude on one of the world’s wildest rivers promised too many exciting chills and
spills to miss. Reluctantly, I’m back behind my desk, feeling the same kind of
letdown that action addicts feel when the intensity ends. You know what I mean, I’m
glad to be back—sort of. This issue of Adventure Travel features real-life stories
by me and other outdoor maniacs who’ve forsaken luxury resorts for the thrill of
rugged challenges in remote locations. Keep your eyes open for our next issue and
as we like to say…happy trails to you! Britta Munstead, Editor, Adventure Travel
among its many excavations. Also, being a chocoholic, he asked that our route
include a few days in Tabasco, the adjacent southern Mexican state that made
chocolate a survival food around the world. We flew into Mexico City, then on to
Poza Rica, where we caught a local taxi to our hotel in Papantla. The scent of
vanilla perfumed the air, wafting from the dried seed pods and bottles of extract
being sold by Totonacs wandering the streets. In our own wanderings through the
museums and cultural center, we learned that Totonac men are renown polygamists,
lusty men who usually die before reaching age fifty. Inhaling the ubiquitous
vanilla, I could understand why. The vanilla affected me, too, but my impulses took
a different turn. One day, near the entrance of the archaeological zone, we watched
a traditional Totonac ceremony now performed for tourists: what’s called Indian
flying
Continued on page 2
41. The newsletter layout was designed using picas as a unit of measure. Now that
you have set up the page size, you can switch the unit of measure to picas.
screen, click the Maximize button in the right corner of the title bar to expand
the window.
Choose Picas for Measurements In and also for Vertical Ruler. Click OK.
4 Choose File > Save, and go to the
06Lesson folder. Enter 06Work.pmd as the publication name, and then click Save.
Starting the publication

The newsletter uses an unusual tall and narrow shape to reinforce the exotic nature
of its stories. You will begin building the publication by setting up the page
size.
1 Choose File > New to open the Document
Setting up the master pages

The majority of pages in this newsletter have three columns, so you begin by
specifying a three-column layout on the master pages. While you’re on the master
pages, you also create the title header that appears at the top of the inside
pages.
Setup dialog box.

2 Enter 9 by 16 inches for Dimensions, and
select Tall orientation. Make sure that the Double-sided and Facing Pages options
are selected. Enter 2 for Number of Pages, and
184 LESSON 6
Setting up columns
When you set columns on a master page, they appear on all publication pages that
use that master page.
1 Click the master page icon (
) at the bottom of the document window to display the left and right master pages.
PageMaker shows you both master pages because you chose Facing Pages in the
Document Setup dialog box.
on the master pages. Because the publication uses double-sided facing pages, you’ll
put the running head on both the left and right master pages. First you will zoom
in to the specific area where you want to work.
) and drag to
draw a marquee starting near the top of the left master page and extending across
the full width of the page. Make it only a couple of inches high.
2 Drag a guide from the horizontal ruler
2 Choose Layout > Column Guides and
specify three columns with 1 pica 6 points (1p6) of space between columns. Click
OK.
down to 3p1. Select the text tool ( ) and drag a text column across the entire
width of the page above the columns. Type in the words Adventure—Travel, putting an
em dash (with no spaces) between the two words. Note: To type an em dash hold down
Alt+Shift as you type a hyphen (Windows), or hold down Option+Shift as you type a
hyphen (Macintosh).
3 With the text tool still selected, select the text. In the Control palette, make
sure the Character view button ( ) is selected. Choose Myriad CN Bold for the font,
and 10 point for the size. (In Windows, you must apply bold to Myriad Condensed to
use Myriad CN Bold.) Click the All Caps button ( ) to make the text uppercase.
Click the Paragraph-view icon ( ), and apply a left indent ( ) of 18 picas and a
right indent ( ) of 18 picas.
Character view
Your settings apply to both right and left document pages because the Set Left and
Right Pages Separately option was not selected when you specified options in the
Document Setup dialog box.
Creating the running head

The title of the newsletter appears at the top of every page. You can easily make
this happen by setting up the title as a running head
Paragraph view
Classroom in a Book
Next, you want to add letterspacing.

4 With the text still selected, click the Force
6 With the pointer tool, select the header
Justify Alignment button ( trol palette.
) in the Con-
A DV EN T U R E — T R AV EL
text block and copy it. Use the scroll bars or the hand tool ( ) to pan to the
right master page. Zoom in on the top, just as you did for the left master page,
and paste. Then use the pointer tool to drag the text block so that it sits against
the left side of the page (filling the page width) and so that the bottom of the
windowshade snaps to the 3p1 guide.
A D V E N T U R E — T R A V E L A D V E N T U R E — T R A V E L
PageMaker adds equal amounts of space between each character to make the text fill
the measure. The degree of space is limited by the right and left indents you set.
Note: PageMaker justifies a line by increasing space between words before increasing
the space between letters. If a regular word space was used on either side of the
em dash, there may be too much space between words and not enough between letters.
If you want additional space around the em dash while maintaining more balanced
spacing, you can use nonbreaking spaces instead, by typing Ctrl+Alt+spacebar
(Windows) or Option+spacebar (Macintosh).
5 Select the pointer tool and size and
You’ve completed the master pages.

7 Save 06Work.pmd.
Beginning page 1
You don’t want the header to appear on page 1, the title page.
1 Click the page icon 1. 2 Choose View > Display Master Items to
position the text block so it extends the full width of the page. Position the
bottom of the windowshade on the guide at 3p1. The bottom of the windowshade snaps
easily to the guide because you have Snap to Guides turned on. So far so good:
you’ve created a page header for the left pages. Now you need to duplicate it on
the right master page.
deselect it. The header that you created on the master page is no longer visible on
page 1. It will still be visible on all pages that have Display Master Items
enabled.
186 LESSON 6
Adding guides
Next, you’ll create a series of guides to help you position material on the page.
1 Drag a ruler guide down from the hori-
round off to the nearest pixel. If you zoom in on the page and the Control palette,
the rulers will display finer increments.
zontal ruler. Watch the Control palette as you drag, so that you can accurately
position the ruler guide so that Y reads 25p6. When you create guides, you can
monitor the guide position on the Control palette or on the ruler opposite the one
from which you dragged the guide.
2 Drag to create three more ruler guides
from the horizontal ruler. Position the additional horizontal guides at 49, 53p3,
and 58p8 picas. Note: If the Control palette isn’t displaying the ruler increment
you want, the current magnification may be causing ruler increments to
You created these guides on page 1 because it is the only page that uses this
layout. If you wanted to create the same set of guides on all pages, you would have
created them on the master pages.
3 Now is a good time to save your work.
Remember to save often, even though this book reminds you only once in a while. If
you’re creating a visible grid of regularly-spaced guides, you can also use the
Grid Manager plug-in. Choose Utilities > Plug-ins > Grid Manager.
Classroom in a Book
Placing art on page 1

For this project, we have provided all of the art that you need, including the drop
caps. Some—but not all—of the elements have been saved in a library. Several of the
elements in the library were created in PageMaker itself and do not exist as
separate files. The largest graphics are not included in the library, in order to
conserve disk space.
1 On page 1, choose Window > Plug-in
Note: Items stored in the Library palette don’t snap to guides or the grid as you
drag them from the Library palette to the layout, nor do they display a preview
until you release the mouse. Therefore, throughout this lesson you will move
Library palette items onto the layout, let go, and then drag them precisely to
their final positions.
2 If necessary, scroll the Library palette until
Palettes > Show Library. In the Library palette, choose Open Library from the
palette menu. Navigate to the 06Lesson folder, and double-click 06Lib.pml. You
should see one or two thumbnails, each with a title underneath. If you don’t see
both images and titles, choose Display Both from the palette menu. The masthead
items at the top of page 1 were created in PageMaker and added to the library as AT
Logo-Heading.
you see ATLogo-Heading. Drag AT LogoHeading out of the Library palette, but don’t
let go yet. As you drag, the loaded graphic icon indicates where the top left
corner of the graphic will be when you release the mouse button. Position the top
left of the loaded graphic icon near the top left corner of the page margin, and
then release the mouse button.
3 Press and hold the mouse button on the masthead until you see the preview image
for the masthead, then drag it into its final position so that the left edge snaps
to the left page margin and the top of the Volume 23 text characters are aligned
with the top page margin, as shown below.
SUMMER 1998
Volume 23
Adventure
Special Issue
Travel
188 LESSON 6
The next element is the large duotone photograph intended for the top half of page
1.
4 Drag LeapDuo from the Library palette to
the layout, position the loaded graphic icon along the left page margin and under
the masthead, and then release the mouse button. Then drag the photograph so that
the left side snaps to the left margin and the top snaps to the guide at 25p6 picas
(you can check the Control palette for the location of the top edge as you drag, if
you make sure any of the top reference points are selected in the Proxy icon).
SUMMER 1998
reload the cursor after each column. PageMaker’s semiautomatic flow is the perfect
way to place this story, because you can choose which columns to fill and the text
cursor stays loaded.
1 Begin by displaying the page at Actual Size
if it isn’t already, and use the scroll bars or hand tool ( ) to pan so that the
two left columns below the large photograph are visible.
2 Choose File > Place, open the 06Lesson
folder, and double-click 06TextA.doc. PageMaker imports the text and gives you the
automatic text-flow icon or the manual text-flow icon, depending on whether Autoflow
is enabled in the Layout menu. Autoflow is turned off by default, so you probably
see the manual text-flow icon.
Automatic text flow
Volume 23
Adventure
Special Issue
Travel
Semiautomatic text flow
Placing the text

The 06TextA.doc file contains the text of several articles for the current issue,
including the bungee-jumping story. You can save time by using the most appropriate
textflow method. If you use the fully automatic text-flow option (the Autoflow
command), the text will fill all three columns immediately. You don’t want that,
because the right column is reserved for another story. Manual flow would work, but
you’d have to
Manual text flow
3 Hold down Shift to change to the
semiautomatic text-flow icon.

4 Continue to hold down Shift and click inside the left column, starting several
picas below the photograph. You’ll position the text more precisely later.
The text fills the column and stops. Your cursor is still a loaded text icon, ready
to place more text.
Classroom in a Book
5 Holding down Shift, click inside the sec-
Formatting the Bungee article

Other lessons in this book teach you how to format paragraphs and create paragraph
styles, so for this project, you will simply use paragraph styles to quickly format
different parts of the publication.
ond column at the same position to fill the second column.

SUMMER 1998
Volume 23
Adventure
Special Issue
Travel
Importing styles
Whenever the styles you want to use exist in another publication, save time by
importing them instead of creating them from scratch.
Bungee Jumping in Mexico For a honeymoon it was a bit of a stretch, but for travel
and adventure, bungee jumping is the way to go Let me say first thing that I’ve
never been suicidal, that I get vertigo if I look down while waiting on the curb to
cross the street, and that my idea of adventure is eating two scoops of ice cream
instead of one scoop of fat-free frozen yogurt. But then I got married and went to
Mexico with my new husband. In Mexico, we thought, there would be romantic nights
in resort rooms reeking of vanilla. Yes, vanilla. More of an amatuer chef than a
wild woman, I find my thrills in cooking concoctions that make people drool. In
some of my culinary research, I’d read how vanilla originated in El Tajin, an area
in the northern state of Veracruz in Mexico along the Gulf. Better yet, the
Totonacsóthe dominant native tribe thereóregard vanilla as an aphrodisiac. My
husband-to-be had okayed this destination because he was interested in the
spectacular archaeological ruins in the area. Settled at least 2,000 years ago, El
Tajin boasts the Pyramid of the Niches among its many excavations. Also, being a
chocoholic, he asked that our route
1 Choose Type > Define Styles, and click
Import in the Define Styles dialog box.

2 Navigate to the 06Lesson folder if you’re
not there already, and double-click to open 06Styles.pmd. When you’re asked if you
want to copy over existing styles, click OK. Click OK again to close the Define
Styles dialog box. Your document now contains a complete and up-to-date set of
paragraph styles that you will use to format the newsletter text.
There’s more to the story, but you’ll place that later.

6 Click the pointer tool in the toolbox to
deselect the loaded text icon. Note: When you click with a loaded text icon to
place text, the text fills the width of the column if the icon is inside the column
when you click. If you click outside the column margin, PageMaker spreads the text
the full width of the page margins. If that happens, drag the bottom windowshade
handle up to roll the column completely up, and click the red triangle to reload
the text icon. Then place it again, being careful to position the pointer within
the column.
Adding heads, graphics, and styles

The next step is to apply paragraph styles to all the paragraphs of the bungee-
jumping story. You first apply the Body Text style to all of the text. After that,
all you have to do is apply headline styles where needed.
190 LESSON 6
) and click an inser-
4 Drag the top windowshade handles of the
tion point anywhere in the article you just placed. Now choose Edit > Select All,
and apply the Body Text style. Note: You can use the Styles palette or the Control
palette to do this, or you can choose Type > Style > Body Text. Because you chose
the Select All command, the Body Text paragraph style is now applied to the entire
file that you just imported, not just the portion that’s visible. Now you will lay
out the headline of this story in a way that keeps it threaded to the rest of the
story.
2 Select the pointer tool, and then click the
two columns of body text so that each snaps to the 58p8 guide. Then click the
headline you just pasted, and make sure that the text block fills the two-column
width completely.
Bungee Jumping in Mexico For a honeymoon it was a bit of a stretch, but for travel
and adventure, bungee jumping is the way to go
Let me say first thing that I’ve never been suicidal, that I get vertigo if I look
But then I got married and went to
5 Select the text tool, click in the first head
(the one that says Bungee Jumping in Mexico) and apply the Head 1 paragraph style.
top windowshade handle of the first column. The loaded text cursor appears so that
you can create a new first text block for this story, threaded to the rest of the
story.
3 Drag the loaded text cursor to create a
new text block across the top of the two columns under the photograph.
Let me say first thing that I’ve never been suicidal, that I get vertigo if I look
But then I got married and went to Mexico with my new husband. In
being sold by Totonacs wandering the
Classroom in a Book
Tracking and kerning

Compare the current headline with 06Final.pmd, and notice that in the final version,
the headline fits on one line and there is not so much space between the characters.

Default letter spacing for headline
Tracking adjusts the space between characters evenly, adding or removing space
between each pair of characters. As type gets larger, characters should be closer
together for proper texture. Type that is smaller than 14 points rarely needs
tightening and sometimes requires a looser texture, whereas most type larger than
30 points needs tightening. Tracking automatically adjusts letter spacing as you
change the type size. The amount of tracking applied to a certain size depends on
font- and size-specific tracking tables which you can edit if you are
typographically experienced. If you don’t have a proper tracking table for a font,
the result may not be optimal. The second technique for controlling texture in type
is called kerning. Kerning is an adjustment of letter space between individual
pairs of characters. If you select a range of text and then apply kerning, this is
known as range kerning, which is similar to tracking. However, unlike tracking,
applying a kerning value does not automatically compensate for different type
sizes. For example, if you select a paragraph containing several sizes of type, the
kerning value you enter is applied whether or not it is appropriate for all the
sizes of type you selected. Display type, or type larger than approximately 36
points, is more of a challenge to kern manually. To help you, PageMaker provides
the Expert Kerning feature. Expert Kerning examines each selected character shape
to determine optimal letter spacing, which in display type is quite likely to be
different between each pair of characters.

After kerning
Typographers would say that the headline in 06Final.pmd has a firmer texture. The
perception of type texture affects the design of the page. Texture is affected by
the visual arrangement of the shapes of and spaces between type characters. Your
goal is to create a texture that is even and feels pleasant to look at—neither
crowded nor loose. There are two ways to control typographic texture: tracking and
kerning.
192 LESSON 6
Expert Kerning is intended to be applied only to several words of larger type

sizes, typically 36 points or over. The level of precision at which Expert Kerning
calculates kerning is not visible at smaller sizes. In the next step, you use
PageMaker’s Expert Kerning feature to reduce space selectively between characters
of a headline.
2 Locate the paragraph that begins For a
honeymoon… and apply the Head 2 paragraph style.
), select the entire
Note: If any part of the For a honeymoon… paragraph moves down to the main story,
select the pointer tool, select the headline text block and pull down its bottom
windowshade until that second paragraph is completely visible under the headline
again.
3 Drag the Bungee Jumping headline so that the first baseline rests on the 53p3
guide. This may not happen easily if the bottom of the text block snaps to the next
guide down. You can move the headline baseline close to the 53p3 guide, and then
press the vertical arrow keys to nudge the headline into position. Make sure that
the left side of the block is flush with the left margin and that it fills the two-
column width completely.
Bungee Jumping headline, and then choose Type > Expert Kerning. Set Kern Strength
to 1.20, and set the Design Class to Display. Click OK.
PageMaker’s Expert Kerning reduces the space between each pair of characters. The
headline should now fit on one line and match the one in 06Final.pmd.
Adding a graphical drop cap

The decorative drop cap for the bungeejumping article has been provided for you in
the library. It was created in PageMaker and is a combination of the letter L, a
rectangle, and a text wrap.

jumping is the way to go Let me say first thing that I’ve never been suicidal, that
I get vertigo if I look down while waiting on the curb to cross the street, and
that my idea of adventure is eating two scoops of ice cream instead of one scoop of
fat-free frozen yogurt. But then I got married and went to Mexico with my new
husband. In Mexico, we thought, there would be romantic nights in resort rooms
reeking of vanilla. Yes, vanilla. More of an amateur chef than a wild woman, I find
my thrills i ki i h k l chocolate a survival food around the world. We flew into
Mexico City, then on to Poza Rica, where we caught a local taxi to our hotel in
Papantla. The scent of vanilla perfumed the air, wafting from the dried seed pods
and bottles of extract being sold by Totonacs wandering the streets. In our own
wanderings through the museums and cultural center, we learned that Totonac men are
renown polygamists, lusty men who usually die b f hi fif I h li h
) and delete the L
from the phrase “Let me say…” at the beginning of the body text for the article.
2 If necessary, scroll the Library palette so
that you can see the LCap drop cap.
Classroom in a Book
3 Select the pointer tool, drag LCap out of
Fixing a widow
The last line of the first paragraph ends with a very short line—a widow. A widow is
generally considered to be typographically undesirable, so there’s an easy way to
fix it.
1 Display the Character view of the Control
the library, position it near the beginning of the bungee-jumping article, and
release the mouse button. Now fine-tune its position by lining up the bottom of the
drop cap graphic with the baseline of the fifth line of the first paragraph of the
article, and then release the mouse button. Because the piece already has a wrap
applied to it, the surrounding text positions itself nicely around the drop cap.
4 Select the text tool, click three times in the
palette.
2 With the first paragraph still selected, click the Decrease Kerning button in the
Control palette once or twice until the single word moves up one line.
Decrease kerning
first paragraph of body text to select the entire paragraph, and then switch to the
paragraph view of the Control palette. Change the first line indent ( ) from 1 pica
to 0.
Make sure that the bottom of the text block in each of the two columns is even with
the bottom page margin.
curb to cross the street, and that my idea of adventure is eating two scoops of ice
cream instead of one scoop of fat-free frozen yogurt. But then I got married and
went to Mexico with my new husband. In Mexico, we thought, there would be romantic
nights in resort rooms reeking of vanilla. Yes, vanilla. More of an amateur chef
than a wild woman, I find my thrills in cooking concoctions that make people drool.
In some of my culinary research, I’d read how vanilla originated in El Tajin, an
area in the northern state of Vera Cruz in Mexico along the Gulf. Better yet, the
Totonacs—the dominant native tribe there—regard vanilla as an aphrodisiac. My
Tajin boasts the Pyramid of the Niches among its many excavations. Also, being a
chocoholic, he asked that our route include a few days in Tabasco, the adja-

thought, there would be romantic nights in resort rooms reeking of ill Y ill M f
museums and cultural center, we l d h T
We flew into Mexico City, then on to Poza Rica, where we caught a local taxi to our
hotel in Papantla. The scent of vanilla perfumed the air, wafting from the dried
seed pods and bottles of extract being sold by Totonacs wandering the streets. In
our own wanderings through the museums and cultural center, we learned that Totonac
men are renown polygamists, lusty men who usually die before reaching age fifty.
Inhaling the ubiquitous vanilla, I could understand why. The vanilla affected me,
too, but my impulses took a different turn. One day, near the entrance of the
archaeological zone, we watched a traditional Totonac ceremony now performed for
tourists: what’s called Indian flying and looked to me like the original bungee
jumping. Four men climbed 100 feet up a pole to a small platform where a fifth man
already was playing a primitive drum and flute. At the top, they tied long ropes,
already wrapped around the
The drop cap procedures in this lesson are useful for adding a graphical drop cap,
but if you simply want to convert the first letter of a paragraph into a drop cap,
you would select the first letter and choose Utilities > Plug-ins > Drop Cap.
Placing the circle graphic

Now it’s time to place the circular graphic that goes between the two columns of
the bungee-jumping article. It’s called Circle Photo in the Library palette. This
graphic has text wrap already applied to it. It’s also a mask, which allows the
photograph to be
194 LESSON 6
cropped using a circle drawn in PageMaker. The circle and the photo it masks are
grouped to make them easier to position.
1 If necessary, scroll the Library palette to
because it contains other articles as well, so you are going to flow the remainder
of the 06TextA.doc file into the document so you can see what you’re working with.
1 With the pointer tool still selected, select
locate Circle Photo. Drag Circle Photo from the library onto the pasteboard or a
white area of the page. This time you will use the Control palette to position the
graphic precisely.
2 In the Control palette, select the top left
the text block in the second column, and load the text icon by clicking the bottom
windowshade handle.
2 Go to the second page, and hold down
corner of the Proxy icon, type 15p for X, type 69p9 for Y, and then click the Apply
button or press Return or Enter.
Tajin boasts the Pyramid of the Niches
Ctrl (Windows) or Command (Macintosh) to toggle from manual flow to automatic text
flow. Click in the top of the left column to place the text.
3 PageMaker flows all the unplaced text into
cent southern Mexican state that made chocolate a survival food around the world.
tourists: what’s called Indian flying and looked to me like the original bun-
the publication.
4 Return to the first page, and select the text
block in the second column by clicking it with the pointer tool.

5 Choose Utilities > Plug-ins > Add Cont’d
Line. In the dialog box that appears, select Bottom of Textblock and click OK. By
choosing Bottom of Textblock, you tell PageMaker that you want the jump line to say
“Continued on page…” If you choose Top of Textblock, PageMaker adds a line at the
top that says “Continued from page…” PageMaker knows where you placed the next text
block of the article, and it inserts a line of text that contains the correct page
number. It also creates a paragraph style called Cont. On, which has the default
formatting
3 Save 06Work.pmd.
You may want to check 06Final.pmd again to see if your work matches it.
Adding the continuation line

The bungee-jumping article continues on a later page, so you will add a
continuation line where it ends on page 1 to tell the reader where the article
continues, or jumps. To do this, you must first place the rest of the article. The
file containing this article is large
Classroom in a Book
for the continuation line. You can edit this style exactly as you would edit any
other paragraph style.
6 If necessary, choose Window > Show
the text block containing the jump line. Drag it up until its baseline sits on the
bottom margin.
Tajin boasts the Pyramid of the Niches
Styles to display the Styles palette. To change the look of the continuation line,
display the Edit Style dialog box by holding down Ctrl (Windows) or Command
(Macintosh) as you click the Cont. On style in the Styles palette.
7 Click Char, and choose AGaramond for
cent southern Mexican state that made chocolate a survival food around the world.
tourists: what’s called Indian flying
Continued on page 2
Font, and choose both Bold and Italic for Type Style. Choose 9 for size and 14 for
leading. Click OK, and then click Para. To remove the ruling lines from the style
definition, click Rules, and then deselect Rule Above Paragraph and Rule Below
Paragraph. Hold down Shift (Windows) or Option (Macintosh) as you click OK, to
close all dialog boxes. Note: Because of the way fonts are defined, when you apply
bold to AGaramond, PageMaker actually uses AGaramond Semibold. On the Macintosh,
you can get the same result if you select AGaramond Semibold directly. The final
step is to position the continuation line more precisely. It’s in a separate text
block, so all you have to do is drag it.
Adding the Editor’s Note

The Editor’s Note is a sidebar and rests on top of a screened blue rectangle that
forms one of the major design elements on the front page. The rectangle serves as a
focal point and visually unifies the top and bottom of the page.
Creating the blue background

Take another look at 06Final.pmd and note the blue background on the right side of
page 1.
1 Return to 06Work.pmd on page 1, and
select the rectangle tool ( ). Drag a tall narrow rectangle on the pasteboard to
the right of page 1. The size and position are not important. You will adjust them
soon.
2 With the rectangle still selected, be sure the top left reference point of the
Proxy icon in the Control palette is selected. In the Control palette type 19p6 for
W, and 77p6 for H, and then press Enter or Return.
196 LESSON 6
6 Choose Element > Lock Position. This
Colors to display the Colors palette. With the rectangle still selected, click the
Both button ( ), click PANTONE Blue 072 CV and then choose 20% for Tint. The
rectangle is now a lighter version of the blue color you selected. Tinting a color
is also known as screening back when you apply a halftone screen to lighten it.
4 Zoom out and use the scroll bars or hand tool ( ) to pan the page so that you can
see the bottom right corner of the page. Select the pointer tool and drag the
rectangle so that its bottom right corner lines up with the bottom right corner of
page 1. 5 With the rectangle still selected, choose Element > Arrange > Send to
Back so that the blue background is behind the photograph and the title art is at
the top of the page.
SUMMER 1998
locks the rectangle so that it will not accidentally be moved as you work on the
page.
7 Save 06Work.pmd.
Placing and formatting the text

In the next steps, you will place and format the text for the Editor’s Note. Take a
look at the Editor’s Note in 06Final.pmd to see where you’re headed. Notice that
the title is white type against a dark blue box.
06TextB.doc. Click the loaded text icon in the right column about a pica below the
big photograph.
), click in the Editor’s Note, and choose Edit > Select All. Apply the Sidebar Text
paragraph style.
3 Select the pointer tool and select the text
Volume 23
Adventure
Special Issue
Travel
block. In the Control palette, select the top left reference point of the Proxy
icon, type 35p6 for X and 50p4 for Y, and then press Enter or Return. In the next
steps, you will apply a paragraph style to the header, create a dark blue
rectangle, place it behind the header, and group the rectangle and text block
together.

4 Zoom in on the top of the Editor’s Note
flying
Continued on page 2
article. Select the rectangle tool ( ) and draw a rectangle over the “Editor’s
Note” title; draw it as wide as the column. Select the pointer tool, select the
rectangle, and in the Control palette, type 14 picas (the width of the column) for
W, and 2p4 for H. Press Enter or Return.
Classroom in a Book
5 With the rectangle still selected, display
the Colors palette, click the Both button ( ), and apply PANTONE Blue 072 CV.
6 Choose Element > Arrange > Send Back-
ward. If necessary, repeat this step until the dark blue rectangle is behind the
text.
7 Select the text tool and click in the title of
At this point, the dark blue rectangle and the text block should both be as wide as
the column. The dark blue rectangle should stay with the reversed headline text, so
you’ll group them to keep them together.
10 With the rectangle still selected, hold
the sidebar (“Editor’s Note”), and apply the SideHead paragraph style. The title is
now easier to read over the dark rectangle because Reverse is applied to the type
as part of the paragraph style definition. If you don’t see distinct characters, the
text may be greeking—zoom in to see it better.
down Shift as you click on the text block to add it to the selection, and choose
Element > Group.
11 Select the text tool and click an insertion point in the first text paragraph of
the Editor’s Note. Display the Paragraph view of the Control palette, and change
the first line indent from 1 pica to 0.

vanilla More of an amateur
EDITOR’S NOTE
How was my vacation? I thought you’d never ask. Frankly, it was fantasticó and
attitude on one of the world’s wildest rivers promised too many exciting h ll d ll
SUMMER 1998
being sold by Totonacs wandering the
The last paragraph of the Editor’s Note may end with a widow—a word or fragment of
a word that looks awkward alone on a line. If you see one, you can correct it by
applying range kerning, as you did to the first paragraph in the Bungee Jumping
article.
Volume 23
Adventure
Special Issue
8 Select the pointer tool and select the blue
Travel
rectangle. If you accidentally select the text block which is now in front of the
rectangle, hold down Ctrl (Windows) or Command (Macintosh) and click again to
select through the text block.
9 Use the Up and Down arrow keys on the

EDITOR’S NOTE
How was my vacation? I thought you’d never ask. Frankly, it was fantasticó and
attitude on one of the world’s wildest rivers promised too many exciting chills and
spills to miss. Reluctently, I’m back behind my desk, feeling the same kind of
letdown that action addicts feel when the intensity ends. You know what I mean, I’m
glad to be backósort of. This issue of Adventure Travel features real-life stories
by me and other outdoor maniacs who’ve forsaken luxury resorts for the thrill of
rugged challenges in remote locations. Keep your eyes open for our next issue and
as we like to say…happy trails to you! Britta Munstead, Editor, Adventure Travel
keyboard or the vertical nudge buttons on the Control palette to move the blue
rectangle in small increments until it is centered vertically behind the Editor’s
Note text. Using the nudge technique works especially well for this kind of precise
positioning.
flying
Continued on page 2
12 Save 06Work.pmd.
198 LESSON 6
Finishing the Bungee article

Next, you will go to page 2 and position the remainder of the bungee-jumping
article.
1 Click the page 2 icon and zoom in on the
text block does not already touch the top margin, drag the top windowshade up until
it snaps to the margin.
A D V E N T U R E — T R A V E L
top of the page. Make sure that the top of each of the two text blocks aligns
exactly with the top margin. Now you will add guides to make it easier to size the
story for this layout. You may refer to 06Final.pmd to review how this story fits
into the rest of the page.
2 Pan down and, if necessary, zoom out so
and looked to me like the original bungee jumping. Four men climbed 100 feet up a
pole to a small platform where a fifth man already was playing a primitive drum and
flute. At the top, they tied long ropes, already wrapped around the pole, to their
ankles and their waists. Moving to the rhythm of the drum and flute, the four men
jumped in unison from the platform. Thump, thump, thump. My heart pounded with the
drum still sounding from the platform. The ropes slowly unwound, circling the
flyers around the pole again and again in a slow spiral until they delicately
landed on the dry dusty ground below. A resounding thump, thump, thump. Adrenaline
and awe swept over me. Something about the atmosphere, the ceremony, the tradition
in Mexico kind of put a spell on me. I wanted to fly. The traditional jump was
reserved for the Totonac flyers, the tourist center told me, but they suggested
going to a nearby bungee-jumping operator. I had never before thought about bungee
jumping except to think that anyone who did it must be crazy. I dragged my husband
there. As I handed over my pesos to the bungee operator, my wry husband’s only
comment was, “At least I have life insurance on you. See you at the bottom.” So
much for having faith. Like the real Indian flyers, I would be jumping from a
platform high above the ground. Determined to do it, I looked anywhere but down as
I climbed a series of ladder-like rungs up to a large platform. At the top, a
couple of fellows strapped me into something like a parachute harness. Two cords
out the back of the harness linked me to what looked like the arm of a big crane
that stretched high beyond the edge of the platform. With a large, nervous gulp, I
strapped on the dented helmet offered to me. The fellows mimed directions to me.
Basically, I was supposed to walk to the
end of what looked like a diving board extending off one edge of the platform,
close my eyes, and jump off. I cautiously assessed the cords and crane. I scanned
the tree tops of the surrounding forest glistening below in this often rainy
region. I looked for my husband in the crowd below, but couldn’t distinguish him
from the other specks. Feeling fear creeping into my stomach and up my back, I ran
toward the diving board. “Tawanda! I shouted, thinking of Kathy Bates in Fried
Green Tomatoes crashing her big car to prove her newly realized fearlessness. My
toes dug into the welcome turf. My pounding heart swelled with an incredible love:
for my husband, the dirt, the sky, the world, the universe, everything. “Better
than ever,” I said. And I meant it. Say, how about if I celebrate my flying by
taking some vanilla ice cream back to our room to see if vanilla really is an
aphrodisiac? Well, he agreed, and that day remains the high point of our honeymoon.
That was several months ago. Since returning home to the States, I’ve found myself
addicted to adventure. I may not bungee-jump again, but I’m more likely now to try
some other sports which before had simply terrified me. —Bev Eddington, Boulder,
Colorado Kayaking with Crocs A short tale about a thrilling Zambezi outing I could
sink my teeth into I hooked up with two British expatriates named Bill Zeman, and
Ralph Christie, to go kayaking in Africa. The three of us slipped our kayaks into
the Zambezi. Although the river moved fast, its surface was deceptively smooth, yet
high and fast. Bill said, as we paddled, to steer clear
of the hippo. Crocodiles are another matter, he continued. See that log in that
still water over there, that’s really a crocodile. We’re lucky to see that much of
it— sometimes the only thing you’ll see above the water is its snout. A couple of
hours later, my kayak started rising in the air and sliding backwards. A strap
around my neck kept my camera from falling into the river, as the kayak rocked on
its rising perch. “Croc!” Bill yelled from his kayak about 200 feet behind me.
“Paddle to the right where it’s deeper!” I didn’t hesitate.
that you can see the bottom half of the two columns.
3 Drag a ruler guide out from the horizontal
ruler and position it at 57p. Drag to create two more horizontal ruler guides and
position them at 61p8 and 70p4.
4 With the pointer tool still selected, select the left text block and drag the
bottom handle up until the bottom is on the 61p8 guide (the second one from the
bottom). Then select the second column and drag its bottom windowshade handle up to
the guide at 57p. 5 Click the windowshade handle at the bot-
Formatting the Kayaking article

Next, you will apply formatting to the Kayaking with Crocs article, which begins
near the bottom of the second column in 06Final.pmd.
tom of the text block in the second column to load the text icon, and flow the
remaining text into the third column. If the top of the
Classroom in a Book
1 Zoom in on the middle of the second
5 With the text tool still selected, click an
column, and apply the Head 1 style to the words Kayaking with Crocs.
the Totonac flyers, the tourist center told me, but they suggested going to a
nearby bungee-jumping operator. I had never before thought about bungee jumping
except to think that anyone who did it must be crazy. I dragged my husband there.
As I handed over my pesos to the bungee operator, my wry husband’s only comment
was, “At least I have life insurance on you. See you at the bottom.” So much for
having faith. Like the real Indian flyers, I would be jumping from a platform high
above the ground. Determined to do it, I looked anywhere but down as I climbed a
series of ladder-like rungs up to a large platform. At the top, a couple of fellows
strapped me into something like a parachute harness. Two cords out the back of the
harness linked me to what looked like the arm of a big crane that stretched high
beyond the edge of the platform. With a large, nervous gulp, I strapped on the
dented helmet offered to me. The fellows mimed directions to me. Basically, I was
supposed to walk to the my flying by taking some vanilla ice cream back to our room
to see if vanilla really is an aphrodisiac? Well, he agreed, and that day remains
the high point of our honeymoon. That was several months ago. Since returning home
to the States, I’ve found myself addicted to adventure. I may not bungee-jump
again, but I’m more likely now to try some other sports which before had simply
terrified me. —Bev Eddington, Boulder, Colorado
insertion point in the paragraph which begins A short tale, and apply the Head 2
style.
6 Select the pointer tool. Drag the Kayaking
Kayaking with Crocs
A short tale about a thrilling Zambezi outing I could sink my teeth into I hooked
up with two British expatriates named Bill Zeman, and Ralph
Photo out of the Library palette, position it close to the top of the third column,
and then release the mouse button. Drag the photograph again to fine-tune its
position, snapping it to the left column guide of the third column and the top page
margin.
2 Select the same words with the text tool so
that you can apply Expert Kerning just as you did for the headline of the
bungeejumping article.
3 Choose Type > Expert Kerning. Set Kern
Strength to 1.20, and set the Design Class to Display. Click OK. Now you will use
the Column Break option to move the headline to the top of the third column.
4 Click anywhere in the Kayaking with
going to a nearby bungee-jumping operator I had never
end of what looked like a diving board extending off one edge of the platform,
close my eyes, and jump off. I cautiously assessed the cords and crane. I scanned
the tree tops of the surrounding forest glistening below in this often rainy
region. I looked for my husband in the crowd below, but couldn’t distinguish him
from the other specks. Feeling fear creeping into my stomach and up my back, I ran
toward the diving board. “Tawanda! I shouted, thinking of Kathy Bates in Fried
Green Tomatoes crashing her big car to prove her newly realized fearlessness. My
toes dug into the welcome turf. My pounding heart swelled with an incredible love:
for my husband, the dirt, the sky, the world, the universe, everything. “Better
than ever,” I said. And I meant it. Say, how about if I celebrate my flying by
taking some vanilla ice cream back to our room to see if vanilla really is an
aphrodisiac?
Kayaking with Crocs

A short tale about a thrill-
Crocs headline, and choose Type > Paragraph. In the Options section, select Column
Break Before, and click OK. The head promptly moves to the top of the next column
because you added the column break option to it.
The photo already has a wrap applied to it, so it pushes the text down and out of
the way. Since Snap to Guides is on, the picture snaps easily into the column when
you move it close to the column guides.
7 With the pointer tool still selected, drag
the bottom windowshade of the Kayaking article down to reveal the entire story.
8 Save 06Work.pmd.
200 LESSON 6
Positioning the pull quote

The pull quote for this page includes a photograph. By putting the pull quote and
the photograph inside a frame, you’ll be able to set text wrap once for the entire
pull quote, and still be able to edit the text and photo.
1 Select the rectangle-frame tool (
4 Be sure the top left reference point of the
Control palette Proxy icon is selected. Type –39p9.5 for X, 24p5.5 for Y, 10p2 for
W, 14p3 for H, and then press Enter or Return.
) from the toolbox. Draw a frame on the pasteboard, and leave it selected.
Option, select the second icon (rectangular wrap). Type 0p9 for all Standoff
Values, and then click OK.
going to a nearby bungee-jumping operator. I had never before thought about bungee
jumping except to think that anyone who did it must be crazy. I dragged my husband
there. As I handed over my pesos to the bungee operator, my wry husband’s only
comment was, “At least I have life insurance on you. See you at the bottom.” So
much for having faith. Like the real Indian flyers, I would be jumping from a
platform high above the ground. Determined to do it, I looked anywhere but down as
I climbed a series of ladder-like rungs up to a large platform. At the top, a
couple of fellows strapped me into something like a parachute harness. Two cords
out the back of the harness linked me to what looked like the arm of a big crane
that stretched high
beyond the edge of the platform. With a large, nervous gulp, I strapped on the
dented helmet offered to me. The fellows mimed directions to me. Basically, I was
supposed to walk to the end of what looked like a diving board extending off one
edge of the platform, close my eyes, and jump off. I cautiously assessed the cords
and crane. I scanned the tree tops of the surrounding forest glistening below in
this often rainy region. I looked for my husband in the crowd below, but couldn’t
distinguish him from the other specks. Feeling fear creeping into my stomach and up
my back, I ran toward the diving board. “Tawanda! I shouted, thinking of Kathy
Bates in Fried Green Tomatoes crashing her big car to prove her newly realized
fearlessness. My toes dug into the welcome turf. My pounding heart swelled with an
incredible love: for my husband, the dirt, the sky, the world, the universe,
everything. “Better than ever,” I said. And I meant it. Say, how about if I
celebrate my flying by taking some vanilla ice cream back to our room to see if
vanilla really is an aphrodisiac? Well, he agreed, and that day remains the high
point of our honeymoon. That was several months ago. Since returning home to the
States, I’ve found myself addicted to adventure. I may not bungee-jump again, but
I’m more likely now to try some other sports which before had simply terrified me.
—Bev Eddington, Boulder, Colorado
Kayaking with Crocs

A short tale about a thrilling Zambezi outing I could sink my teeth into
I hooked up with two British expatriates named Bill Zeman, and Ralph Christie, to
go kayaking in Africa. The three of us slipped our kayaks into the Zambezi.
Although the river moved fast, its surface was deceptively smooth, yet high and
fast. Bill said, as we paddled, to steer clear of the hippo. Crocodiles are another
matter, he continued. See that log in that still water over there, that’s really a
crocodile. We’re lucky to see that much of it— sometimes the only thing you’ll see
above the water is its snout. A couple of hours later, my kayak started rising in
the air and sliding backwards. A strap around my neck kept my camera from falling
into the river, as the kayak rocked on its rising perch. “Croc!” Bill yelled from
his kayak about 200 feet behind me. “Paddle to the right where it’s deeper!” I
didn’t hesitate.
5 With the frame still selected, choose File > 3 With the frame still selected,
display the
Colors palette, click the Fill button ( ), and then select PANTONE Blue 072 CV.
Choose Element > Stroke > 6 pt.
Place. Select the file 06TextC.doc in the 06Lesson folder, make sure the Within
Frame option is selected, the Show Filter Preferences option is deselected, the
Retain Format option is selected, and then click Open (Windows) or OK (Macintosh).
The text is placed within the frame. The text may be difficult to read because it is
black on a dark blue background. You will apply a style that will make it easy to
read.
), click an insertion point in the pull quote text, and choose Edit > Select All.
Display the Styles palette and click the Pull Quote style.
Classroom in a Book
Now you will add a duotone image to the pull quote. First you will add a paragraph
return so that the image will be in its own paragraph.
7 With the text tool still selected, click at the beginning of the text you just
placed and press Enter or Return. Then press the Left Arrow key to move the
insertion point back to the top of the text block. 8 Choose File > Place, select
the 06Art1.eps
10 Select the text tool and triple-click the
photograph in the pull quote to select the paragraph containing the photograph. In
the Character view of the Control palette, type 38 points for leading ( ), and then
press Enter or Return.
son from the platform. Thump, thump, crane. I scanned the tree tops of the
surthump. My heart pounded with the rounding forest glistening below in this drum
still sounding from the platform. often rainy region. I looked for my husThe ropes
slowly unwound, circling the band in the crowd below, but couldn’t flyers around
the pole again and again in distinguish him from the other specks. a slow spiral
until they delicately landed Feeling fear creeping into my stomon the dry dusty
ground below. ach and up my back, I ran toward the A resounding thump, diving
board. “Tawanda! thump, thump. AdrenaI shouted, thinking of line and awe swept over
Kathy Bates in Fried me. Something about the Green Tomatoes crashing Something
about atmosphere, the cerher big car to prove her emony, the tradition in newly
realized fearlessMexico put a Mexico kind of put a spell ness. on me. I wanted to
fly. My toes dug into the spell on me. The traditional jump welcome turf. My
poundwas reserved for the ing heart swelled with an I wanted to fly Totonac flyers,
the tourist incredible love: for my center told me, but they husband, the dirt, the
sky, suggested going to a the world, the universe, nearby bungee-jumping
everything. “Better than ever,” I said. And I operator. I had never before thought
meant it. Say, how about if I celebrate about bungee jumping except to think my
flying by taking some vanilla ice that anyone who did it must be crazy. cream back
to our room to see if vanilla I dragged my husband there. As I really is an
aphrodisiac? handed over my pesos to the bungee opWell, he agreed, and that day
remains erator, my wry husband’s only comment was, “At least I have life insurance
on the high point of our honeymoon. That you. See you at the bottom.” So much was
several months ago. Since returning
Kayaking with Crocs

file from the 06Lesson folder, make sure the As Inline Graphic option is selected,
and then click Open or OK.
until they delicately landed Feeling fear creeping into my stomon the dry dusty
ground below. ach and up my back, I ran toward the A resounding thump, diving
board. “Tawanda! thump, thump. AdrenaI shouted, thinking of line and awe swept over
Kathy Bates in Fried me. Something about the Green Tomatoes crashing atmosphere,
the cerher big car to prove her Something emony, the tradition in newly realized
fearlessMexico kind of put a spell ness. about Mexico on me. I wanted to fly. My
toes dug into the The traditional jump welcome turf. My poundput a was reserved for
the ing heart swelled with an spell on me. Totonac flyers, the tourist incredible
love: for my husband, the dirt, the sky, center told me, but they the world, the
universe, suggested going to a everything. nearby bungee-jumping “Better than
ever,” I said. And I operator. I had never before thought meant it. Say, how about
if I celebrate about bungee jumping except to think my flying by taking some
vanilla ice that anyone who did it must be crazy. I dragged my husband there. As I
cream back to our room to see if vanilla handed over my pesos to the bungee
opreally is an aphrodisiac? erator, my wry husband’s only comment Well, he agreed,
and that day remains was, “At least I have life insurance on the high point of our
honeymoon. That you. See you at the bottom.” So much was several months ago. Since
returning
Kayaking with Crocs

11 Click the text tool within the first line after the photo, and in the paragraph
view of the Control palette, type 1 pica for space before the paragraph ( ), and
then press Return or Enter.
until they delicately landed Feeling fear creeping into my stomach and up my back,
I ran toward the on the dry dusty ground below. diving board. “Tawanda! A
resounding thump, I shouted, thinking of thump, thump. AdrenaKathy Bates in Fried
line and awe swept over Green Tomatoes crashing me. Something about the her big car
to prove her atmosphere, the cernewly realized fearlessemony, the tradition in
Something about ness. Mexico kind of put a spell My toes dug into the on me. I
wanted to fly. Mexico put a welcome turf. My poundThe traditional jump ing heart
swelled with an was reserved for the spell on me. incredible love: for my Totonac
flyers, the tourist I wanted to fly husband, the dirt, the sky, center told me, but
they the world, the universe, suggested going to a everything. nearby bungee-
jumping operator. I had never before thought “Better than ever,” I said. And I
about bungee jumping except to think meant it. Say, how about if I celebrate that
anyone who did it must be crazy. my flying by taking some vanilla ice I dragged my
husband there. As I cream back to our room to see if vanilla handed over my pesos
to the bungee opreally is an aphrodisiac? erator, my wry husband’s only comment
Well, he agreed, and that day remains was, “At least I have life insurance on the
high point of our honeymoon. That was several months ago. Since returning you. See
you at the bottom.” So much
The text and photograph don’t appear properly aligned right now, but you will fix
that in the following steps. Select the pointer tool, select the frame (do not
select any of the frame contents), and choose Element > Frame > Frame Options. Type
0 for each Frame Inset, and then click OK. Not enough of the top of the photograph
is visible, so you’ll add leading to the line that contains it.
9
Kayaking with Crocs

202 LESSON 6
Laying out the Tibetan Treks sidebar

To finish page 2, you will place the prepared title graphic for the Tibetan Treks
sidebar and then place a graphic at the bottom of the page. You will then modify
the graphic in several ways: you will enlarge it, color it blue, and alter it with
PageMaker’s Image Controls. Finally, you will change the layout to two columns,
place the sidebar text, and add the drop cap.
edge snaps to the left margin and the top edge aligns with the guide at 57, and
then release the mouse button.
Placing the sidebar title

You will fill out the bottom of page 2 by adding another sidebar. In this section
you add the title of the sidebar, which is stored as a graphic in the Library
palette.
1 Take another look at 06Final.pmd to see what this part of the page looks like. 2
Select the pointer tool. Locate Side Head
and looked to me like the original bunbeyond the edge of the platform. With a gee
jumping. Four men climbed 100 feet large, nervous gulp, I strapped on the up a pole
to a small platform where a dented helmet offered to me. fifth man already was
playing a primiThe fellows mimed directions to me. tive drum and flute. At the top,
they tied Basically, I was supposed to walk to the long ropes, already wrapped
around the end of what looked like a diving board pole, to their ankles and their
waists. extending off one edge of the platform, Moving to the rhythm of the drum
close my eyes, and jump off. and flute, the four men jumped in uniI cautiously
assessed the cords and son from the platform. Thump, thump, crane. I scanned the
tree tops of the surthump. My heart pounded with the rounding forest glistening
below in this drum still sounding from the platform. often rainy region. I looked
for my husThe ropes slowly unwound, circling the band in the crowd below, but
couldn’t flyers around the pole again and again in distinguish him from the other
specks. a slow spiral until they delicately landed Feeling fear creeping into my
stomon the dry dusty ground below. ach and up my back, I ran toward the A
resounding thump, diving board. “Tawanda! thump, thump. AdrenaI shouted, thinking
of line and awe swept over Kathy Bates in Fried me. Something about the Green
Tomatoes crashing atmosphere, the cerher big car to prove her emony, the tradition
in newly realized fearlessSomething about Mexico kind of put a spell ness. on me. I
wanted to fly. My toes dug into the Mexico put a The traditional jump welcome turf.
My poundwas reserved for the ing heart swelled with an spell on me. Totonac flyers,
the tourist incredible love: for my I wanted to fly center told me, but they
husband, the dirt, the sky, suggested going to a the world, the universe, nearby
bungee-jumping everything. operator. I had never before thought “Better than ever,”
I said. And I about bungee jumping except to think meant it. Say, how about if I
celebrate that anyone who did it must be crazy. my flying by taking some vanilla
ice I dragged my husband there. As I cream back to our room to see if vanilla
handed over my pesos to the bungee opreally is an aphrodisiac? erator, my wry
husband’s only comment Well, he agreed, and that day remains was, “At least I have
life insurance on the high point of our honeymoon. That you. See you at the
bottom.” So much was several months ago. Since returning for having faith. home to
the States, I’ve found myself Like the real Indian flyers, I would be addicted to
adventure. I may not bunjumping from a platform high above the gee-jump again, but
I’m more likely now ground. Determined to do it, I looked to try some other sports
which before had anywhere but down as I climbed a series simply terrified me. of
ladder-like rungs up to a large plat—Bev Eddington, Boulder, Colorado form. At the
top, a couple of fellows strapped me into something like a parachute harness. Two
cords out the back of the harness linked me to what looked like the arm of a big
crane that stretched high
Kayaking with Crocs

didn’t hesitate.
Tibetan Treks:
Beckoning the Intrepid
Placing the background graphic

The sidebar text will appear on top of a background photograph, so you will add the
photograph next.
1 Select the pointer tool. Locate Tibetan
in the Library palette and drag it onto the page, positioning the loaded graphic
icon approximately at the top left of the empty area at the bottom of the page, and
then release the mouse button. Drag the graphic to fine-tune its positioning, so
that the left
Treks in the Library palette, drag it to the empty area at the bottom of the page,
and release the mouse button. Drag the photo again to fine-tune its position, so
that the left and right edges are against the left and right edges of the page, and
the top edge aligns with the bottom of the blue rectangle containing the text
Tibetan Treks. The photograph may hang below the page edge slightly.
Classroom in a Book
2 Select the sidebar title graphic that you
just dragged from the library, and choose Element > Arrange > Bring to Front so
that it is in front of the enlarged background photograph.
3 Select the Tibetan Treks photo. Display
When you’re done exploring, use the pointer to draw a line across the graph. The
line should begin at the middle of the left side and go to the top right corner of
the graph. Click Apply, and then click OK.
Buttons
the Colors palette and apply PANTONE Blue 072 CV.

Tibetan Treks:
about 200 feet behind me. Paddle to the right where it’s deeper!” I didn’t
hesitate.
Windows: With the photo selected, choose Element > Image > Image Control. Set the
Lightness to 90% and the Contrast to 24%. Click OK.
Applying special effects to a photo

For the type to be readable over the photo, the photo should be lighter. You will
use the Image Control feature to screen back the photo and create special effects.
Macintosh: With the photo selected, choose Element > Image > Image Control.
Experiment by clicking different buttons above the graph and with clicking the
Lightness and Contrast controls. The buttons produce an immediate effect, but for
the other controls, you have to click Apply. On a Macintosh, you can adjust each
bar in the graph individually, or drag across the graph to shape the bars together.
Click Apply to see the effect.
Placing the text in two columns

Now you’ve prepared the background graphic for the Tibetan Treks article. The next
step is to place the text. This article is laid out in two columns rather than
three, so you will change the column guides.
1 Choose Layout > Column Guides. This
time, enter 2 for the number of columns. Keep 1p6 as the Space Between Columns, and
click OK. Notice that changing the number of columns does not affect text that is
already placed on the page.
06TextD.doc in the 06Lesson folder. As you position the loaded text icon, turn on
semiautomatic text flow again by holding down
204 LESSON 6
Shift as you click in the top of each column below the head Beckoning the Intrepid.
If you still have a loaded text icon after flowing the second column, click the
pointer tool to cancel placing text. You will make adjustments later that will make
all the text fit.
cap again to fine-tune it, so that the left edge is against the left margin and the
bottom edge aligns with the fifth baseline of the story, and then let go of the
mouse button.
8 Delete the first letter of the story—the T—
since it is now redundant with the drop cap. The library you opened for this
project will stay open until you close it. You won’t be using this particular
library any further in this project or for any other projects in this book, so you
will close it now. Simply closing the palette window won’t close the library file
itself, so you will use a palette menu command to close the library file.
9 In the Library palette, choose Close
), click in the new
story, and choose Edit > Select All. Display the Styles palette, and apply the
Sidebar Text paragraph style.
4 If the top of either column does not
already touch the guide at 70p4, select the pointer tool and drag the top
windowshade of each text block as necessary.
5 If the bottom of the left column does not
already touch the bottom margin, select the pointer tool (if necessary) and drag
its windowshade so that it snaps to the bottom margin.
Tibetan Treks:
The very name of Tibet has long intrigued me with hints of a rich spiritual
culture, a destination truly isolated and remote. Maybe it was, but today,
thousands of tourists pass through the Khumbu region of the Himalaya mountains each
year on their way to Mt. Everest in Sagarmatha National Park or to the Buddhist
monasteries dotting the rugged Tibetan mountain terrain. But I had yet to get to
Lhasa or anywhere else in Tibet. So when work and life complications made my inner
self scream to truly get away from it all, I signed up for a 14-day guided tour of
Tibet, including 9 days of camping on a trek. I liked the idea of stretching my
legs and my spirit simultaneously far away from New York City. Trekking sounds
rougher than it is. If your legs can hike 6 to 10 miles a day, they’re good enough.
You eventually reach elevations near 13,000 feet, so you want healthy lungs, too.
Because temperatures can get pretty nippy, you should feel okay about eating,
sleeping, and generally doabout 200 feet behind me. Paddle to the right where it’s
deeper!” I didn’t hesitate.
Library from the palette menu. Then close the Library palette. For the next step,
you want to select all of the Tibet article except the first paragraph. This can be
difficult to do precisely, but there is a quick way.
10 Select the text tool. Triple-click the second paragraph in the article, and then
hold down Shift as you click the last paragraph in the article.

ing everything in what might turn into near-freezing weather. As an aerobics
instructor who has lived in communes on and off for years, I felt ready for those
challenges. But I didn’t want anything too complicated or too tiring—after all, I
was already feeling pretty stressed out, and I liked the idea of restful solitude.
I wanted something more like a cross between a meditation retreat and Club Med. The
brochure said all I had to bring was a sleeping bag and my clothes. The tour
company would provide tents, sleeping pads, food, utensils. Better yet, they
promised porters to carry all gear, prepare camp, cook, and clean up. Talk about
roughing it! It turned out to be wonderful. The food wasn’t gourmet, but it was
filling. We ate meat more often than the locals, and a sanitizing bath in a purple
solution of potassium permanganate made fresh fruits and vegetables simpatico with
our digestive tracts. I relaxed, and explored a solitude found only in Tibet.
6 Select the text tool, and click an insertion
point in the first paragraph of the text you just placed. In the paragraph view of
the Control palette, change the first line indent from 1 pica to 0. Press Enter or
Return.
7 Select the pointer tool. Locate TCap in the
The selection technique in step 10 also works for whole words. Just start dragging
by double-clicking a word at either end of the desired range.
Library palette and drag it approximately to the beginning of the story. Drag the
drop
Classroom in a Book
11 In the character view of the Control pal-
ette, change the track from Normal to Tight.

and looked to me like the original bunbeyond the edge of the platform. With a gee
jumping. Four men climbed 100 feet large, nervous gulp, I strapped on the up a pole
to a small platform where a dented helmet offered to me. fifth man already was
playing a primiThe fellows mimed directions to me. tive drum and flute. At the top,
they tied Basically, I was supposed to walk to the long ropes, already wrapped
around the end of what looked like a diving board pole, to their ankles and their
waists. extending off one edge of the platform, Moving to the rhythm of the drum
close my eyes, and jump off. and flute, the four men jumped in uniI cautiously
assessed the cords and son from the platform. Thump, thump, crane. I scanned the
tree tops of the surthump. My heart pounded with the rounding forest glistening
below in this drum still sounding from the platform. often rainy region. I looked
for my husThe ropes slowly unwound, circling the band in the crowd below, but
couldn’t flyers around the pole again and again in distinguish him from the other
specks. a slow spiral until they delicately landed Feeling fear creeping into my
stomon the dry dusty ground below. ach and up my back, I ran toward the A
resounding thump, diving board. “Tawanda! thump, thump. AdrenaI shouted, thinking
of line and awe swept over Kathy Bates in Fried me. Something about the Green
Tomatoes crashing atmosphere, the cerher big car to prove her emony, the tradition
in newly realized fearlessSomething about Mexico kind of put a spell ness. on me. I
wanted to fly. My toes dug into the Mexico put a The traditional jump welcome turf.
My poundwas reserved for the ing heart swelled with an spell on me. Totonac flyers,
the tourist incredible love: for my I wanted to fly center told me, but they
husband, the dirt, the sky, suggested going to a the world, the universe, nearby
bungee-jumping everything. operator. I had never before thought “Better than ever,”
I said. And I about bungee jumping except to think meant it. Say, how about if I
celebrate that anyone who did it must be crazy. my flying by taking some vanilla
ice I dragged my husband there. As I cream back to our room to see if vanilla
handed over my pesos to the bungee opreally is an aphrodisiac? erator, my wry
husband’s only comment Well, he agreed, and that day remains was, “At least I have
life insurance on the high point of our honeymoon. That you. See you at the
bottom.” So much was several months ago. Since returning for having faith. home to
the States, I’ve found myself Like the real Indian flyers, I would be addicted to
adventure. I may not bunjumping from a platform high above the gee-jump again, but
I’m more likely now ground. Determined to do it, I looked to try some other sports
which before had anywhere but down as I climbed a series simply terrified me. of
ladder-like rungs up to a large plat—Bev Eddington, Boulder, Colorado form. At the
top, a couple of fellows strapped me into something like a parachute harness. Two
cords out the back of the harness linked me to what looked like the arm of a big
crane that stretched high
You can also display the Preferences dialog box by double-clicking the pointer
tool.
2 In the story editor section of the More
Kayaking with Crocs

didn’t hesitate.
Preferences dialog box, choose a Font and Size that you’d like to use in the story
editor. For this project, choose 12-point Helvetica. These settings are provided to
make it easier to read and edit text in the story editor, and they do not affect
the text on the layout.
3 Make sure Display Style Names is selected.
Tibetan Treks:
he very name of Tibet has long intrigued me with hints of a rich spiritual culture,
a destination truly isolated and remote. Maybe it was, but today, thousands of
tourists pass through the Khumbu region of the Himalaya mountains each year on
their way to Mt. Everest in Sagarmatha National Park or to the Buddhist monasteries
dotting the rugged Tibetan mountain terrain. But I had yet to get to Lhasa or
anywhere else in Tibet. So when work and life complications made my inner self
scream to truly get away from it all, I signed up for a 14-day guided tour of
Tibet, including 9 days of camping on a trek. I liked the idea of stretching my
legs and my spirit simultaneously far away from New York City. Trekking sounds
rougher than it is. If your legs can hike 6 to 10 miles a day, they’re good
enough.You eventually reach elevations near 13,000 feet, so you want healthy lungs,
too. Because temperatures can get pretty nippy, you should feel
okay about eating, sleeping, and generally doing everything in what might turn into
near-freezing weather. As an aerobics instructor who has lived in communes on and
off for years, I felt ready for those challenges. But I didn’t want anything too
complicated or too tiring— after all, I was already feeling pretty stressed out,
and I liked the idea of restful solitude. I wanted something more like a cross
between a meditation retreat and Club Med. The brochure said all I had to bring was
a sleeping bag and my clothes. The tour company would provide tents, sleeping pads,
food, utensils. Better yet, they promised porters to carry all gear, prepare camp,
cook, and clean up. Talk about roughing it! It turned out to be wonderful. The food
wasn’t gourmet, but it was filling. We ate meat more often than the locals, and a
sanitizing bath in a purple solution of potassium permanganate made fresh fruits
and vegetables simpatico with our digestive tracts. I relaxed, and explored a
solitude found only in Tibet.
This shows the style name of each paragraph in a column to the left of the text.
When you’re working in story editor, this option quickly identifies the paragraph
style applied to each paragraph.
12 Save 06Work.pmd.
Using the story editor

PageMaker’s story editor is a text-only view where you can edit text quickly and
easily because PageMaker does not have to display graphics or sophisticated
formatting, and stories are all together in one place instead of being spread out
over various pages. Some tasks can be performed only in story editor view, such as
finding, changing, and checking the spelling of text. By setting some preferences,
you can control the appearance of text in the story editor.
1 Choose File > Preferences > General, and 4 Hold down Shift (Windows) or Option
(Macintosh) as you click OK to close both Preferences dialog boxes.

then click More.
206 LESSON 6
Finding and changing text

If you carefully examine the text you imported for the various articles, you will
find that there is an unusual character—ó— in places where there should be em
dashes. Similar characters may appear when text is moved between applications or
computer platforms. PageMaker’s Find and Change feature makes it easy to fix these
instances. To use find and change, you must work in story editor view.
1 Go to page 1. To display the story editor,
4 Choose Utilities > Change. Paste the
copied character into Find What. Note: You can also type the character directly
into Find What. In Windows, hold down Alt and type 0243 on the numeric keypad. On a
Macintosh, hold down Option as you type e and then let go of Option and type o.
5 Type an em dash in Change To by typing ^_ (Windows) or pressing the keyboard
shortcut Option+Shift+- (Macintosh). Leave Match Case and Whole Word deselected,
leave Current Publication selected for Search Document, and select All Stories for
Search Story.
select the text tool ( ) and click an insertion point in the first paragraph of the
body text in the bungee-jumping article. Don’t click next to the drop cap (L),
because the drop cap is a graphic separate from the story.
2 Choose Edit > Edit Story.
The story editor opens to the position in the story where you clicked an insertion
point. You can also open the story editor by triple-clicking on the story with the
pointer tool.
3 In story editor, examine the last sentence
The case (uppercase or lowercase) doesn’t matter, and the character you’re looking
for is not a whole word, because in this publication it is always typed without a
space next to it.
in the fourth paragraph. There are two instances of the ó character in the sentence
óthe dominant native tribe thereó. Select one and copy it.
You can click Change All to change all instances of the character to an em dash.
However, Change All should be used with great caution to avoid unintended results.
For instance, if the character is present as a legitimate character in a word,
Change All will replace it anyway. It’s far safer to check each occurrence as it is
found.
6 Click Find. Look at the found character
highlighted in the story window. It’s one you want to change, click Change & Find.
Classroom in a Book
PageMaker makes the change and automatically searches for the next occurrence of
the character.
7 Change each occurrence of the character
Spellings, deselect Show Duplicates, leave Current Publication selected, select All
Stories, and then click Start. The Alternate Spellings option makes PageMaker
suggest alternate spellings for questionable words. Normally, you’d also select
Show Duplicates, but in this text the writer uses phrases like thump, thump, thump.
Finally, selecting the All Stories option lets you check all editable text in the
publication using a single spell-checking session.
to an em dash. There should be seven in all. PageMaker will open a separate story
editor window for each story where it finds an occurrence. To skip over an
occurrence without changing it, click Find Next.
8 Close the Change dialog box. 9 Save 06Work.pmd. (You should be saving
at regular intervals.)
Checking spelling
Spell checking is another task that you can perform only in story editor view. You
should still be in story editor, but because PageMaker creates a separate window
for each story, you are in the window for the “Tibetan Treks” story. You want to
begin checking spelling in the bungee jumping story. If you have not closed the
window for that story, you can quickly return to it by choosing it from the Window
menu. The story is listed in a menu under the name of the publication that contains
it. PageMaker identifies each story window in the menu by the first few characters in
the story.
1 Choose Window > 06Work.pmd >
PageMaker looks for both misspelled words and unexpected capitalization, such as a
sentence beginning with a lowercase letter. The first word that the spell checker
questions is bungee. You want to add it to the dictionary so that PageMaker will
recognize it in the future.
2 Click Add.
PageMaker presents the word with suggested hyphenation, indicated by tilde

characters (~), and proposes to add it as all lowercase (not a proper noun).
3 Make sure As All Lowercase selected, and
Bungee Jumping in M, and click an insertion point at the beginning of the story.
Choose Utilities > Spelling. Select Alternate
click OK. Click Continue.

208 LESSON 6
If the word must always have the capital letters that you’ve typed in the Word
option, you would select Exactly as Typed. If the word should be lowercase except
at the beginning of a sentence, you would select As All Lowercase. PageMaker will
capitalize it as necessary; for example, at the beginning of a sentence. The next
questioned word is amatuer. This word is wrong, but the correct spelling appears in
the list of possible replacements.
4 Select amateur in the replacement list to make it appear in Change To, and then
click Replace. At the word Tajin, click Ignore.
This project contains many proper and place names that should be ignored. Others,
like hippo, are odd or rare and don’t need to be added to the dictionary. Click
Ignore for all of the following words: Totonacs Tabasco Rica Totonac chocoholic
Poza Papantla
6 When you get to ubquitous, choose the
correct spelling, ubiquitous, from the list, and click Replace. When you reach the
word dented, click Add to add the word to the dictionary, because it is spelled
correctly. PageMaker displays the Add to User Dictionary dialog box, which shows
how it would hyphenate the word. You don’t want it to hyphenate before the ed, so
remove the three tildes from the word.
7 Be sure that As All Lowercase is selected,
PageMaker continues the spelling check without adding Tajin to the dictionary. The
next word is Veracruz. You want to use a different form of the name.
5 Type Vera Cruz for Change To and click
Replace. The change appears in the text. Cruz is not in the dictionary either, but
you don’t want to add it to the dictionary, so click Ignore to continue spell
checking. Note: Sometimes when you type in a change and click Replace, PageMaker
continues the search without waiting for you to click Ignore or Add. That means
that PageMaker found the substitution in its dictionary.
and click OK.
You use the tilde characters to specify which hyphenation points have priority.
Typing a single tilde in a word indicates the most desirable hyphenation points.
Typing two tildes indicates acceptable but not ideal hyphenation points, and typing
three tildes indicates the least preferable hyphenation points. When you don’t want
the word to be hyphenated at all, remove all tildes from it.
Classroom in a Book
8 Click Continue. Click Ignore for the
following words: Tawanda Bev Kathy Eddington
When you get to kayaking, click Add and change the hyphenation to kayak~ing. Click
OK and then click Continue.
9 Click Ignore for the following words:
The next word that the spell checker questions is the h at the beginning of the
Tibetan Treks sidebar story. The word begins with a lowercase letter because you
removed the capital T and replaced it with a drop cap. Under these circumstances
the word is OK but should not be added to the dictionary.
14 Click Ignore, and then click Ignore for the following words:
Crocs
Zambesi
10 When you get to expatriats, choose expatriates from the list, make sure it
appears as
shown, and click Replace.
Khumbu Everest 14-day simpatico
Himalaya Sagarmatha Med
The next word that the spell checker questions is the T in the drop cap at the
beginning of the Tibetan Treks sidebar story. Under these circumstances the word is
OK but should not be added to the dictionary.
15 Click Ignore. When the spell checking is complete, click the top left corner
(Macintosh) or top right corner (Windows) to close it.
11 Click Ignore for the following words:
Zeman Christie Croc Jon
Ralph hippo betcha Benson
Closing story editor

There is one story editor window open for each of the three stories in the project
that were opened by the spelling checker. You can close all of them at once.
1 Hold down Shift (Windows) or Option
12 When the spell checker questions
whitewater, click Add and change the hyphenation to white~water. Be sure As All
Lowercase is selected and click OK.

13 Click Continue, then click Ignore for
Yangtze. Replace reluctently with reluctantly
(Macintosh) as you choose Story > Close All Stories. Congratulations! You have
completed this project. If you have a printer available, you may print your
completed version of the publication.
2 Close all open files, and close PageMaker.
from the list, and then click Ignore for the following words: who’ve Britta say…
happy Munstead
Lesson 7
You complete the annual “Best Of ” catalog for Utah Gear, a fictional company
specializing in recreational equipment. Type, colors, and graphics are designed
both to draw customers to the products and to print successfully on press. Adobe
Systems extends its thanks to Recreational Equipment Inc., which supplied all text
and props for this project. Some product information has been modified slightly for
these training materials.
212 LESSON 7
In this project you will complete a catalog that will be printed by a commercial
printer. You work with a variety of imported graphics, including scanned
photographs, and Kodak Photo CD® images, as well as colors, links, inline graphics,
and various file formats. You also learn how to set up color separations to print to
an imagesetter, and explore issues that affect color reproduction. In this project
you learn how to do the following:
• • • •
Before you begin

As before, you delete the existing PageMaker preferences or configuration file to
return all settings to their defaults and make sure that the fonts for this project
are installed. Then you open and inspect a final version of the document that you
create in this project.
Insert inline graphics. Create custom rules. Edit a spot color.
information, see “Copying the Classroom in a Book files” on page 4.

2 Make sure that the fonts are installed on your system: AGaramond, AGaramond
Italic, AGaramond Semibold, AGaramond Semibold Italic, Myriad Bold, and Myriad
Roman.
Work with color in the context of commercial color printing. Manage linked
graphics. Import a Kodak Photo CD image.
• • •
Prepare files for a prepress service provider. This project should take you about 2
hours to complete.
Windows only: Because of the way Windows handles fonts, AGaramond Semibold appears
in the ATM Fonts list as AGaramond, Bold (notice the comma) and AGaramond Semibold
Italic appears in the ATM Fonts list as AGaramond, Bold Italic (notice the position
of the comma). However, none of these font names appears in font menus in Windows
applications. You must apply bold to AGaramond to use AGaramond Semibold; you must
apply bold and italic to AGaramond to use AGaramond Semibold Italic; and you must
apply italic to AGaramond to use AGaramond Italic. You must apply bold to Myriad
Roman to use Myriad Bold.
Classroom in a Book
3 Start the Adobe PageMaker application,
then open the 07Final.pmd file in the 07Lesson folder. If the publication window
does not already fill the screen, click the Maximize button.
4 To see a self-running “slide show” presen-
You will now open and save the copy of the publication in which you will work.
1 Open the 07Begin.pmt file in the
07Lesson folder. Next you will make sure that a certain printer description file
(PPD) is installed. You will choose it later in the lesson.
2 Choose File > Print and make sure Agfa
tation of the catalog, hold down the Shift key and choose Layout > Go to Page. When
you use the slide show features, PageMaker automatically hides the palettes, and
each page in the publication displays in sequence.
5 Click the mouse button to stop turning
the pages.
6 Leave the final file open so you can use it as a visual reference as you work
through the project.
9800 appears in the PPD pop-up menu, and then click Cancel. If it is not present,
you must install it from the Classroom in a Book CD, as described in “Installing
PPDs (Windows only)” on page 3. Note: If you do not have the required printer, you
can still create the project as directed and then print it on your own printer by
This publication contains the first five pages of the catalog, including the cover,
contents page, and several partially completed pages where you will add product
photographs.
OUR ANNUAL BEST BUYS
Export Adobe PDF command to create an Adobe PDF version of the project as described
later in this lesson.
3 Save the untitled document in the
Gear
Utah
Top Gear for Tough Travel
The Best from Utah Gear
07Lesson folder as 07Work.pmd. If the publication window does not already fill the
screen, click the Maximize button.
The document master consists of a simple three-column grid with a one-half-inch

gutter. The partially empty pages have the major graphic elements already in place.
The template has text styles defined in the Styles palette, and custom colors defined
in the Colors palette.
214 LESSON 7
Placing a Kodak Photo CD image

You start working on the catalog by placing a Kodak Photo CD photograph on the
cover. A Photo CD stores an image in several standard resolutions for popular uses,
such as computer display or reproduction on a printing press. PageMaker chooses a
highresolution version by default, but you can specify a new size and resolution as
you import the image into PageMaker. You can apply your changes to the original
Kodak Photo CD file, or you can save the settings with the image in CIE Lab TIFF
format. The CIE Lab color model contains device-independent color information that
can reproduce color accurately on a PostScript Level 2 or later printer.
1 On page 1, the cover of the catalog, choose
Selecting this option will save a TIFF version of the image with your settings on
your hard disk, letting you use the image the same way as other imported graphics.
If you don’t select this option, the original Photo CD must be in the CD-ROM drive
for the image to stay linked with the publication.
3 In the Image Enhancement section, select
Medium for Sharpen Output, and then select Auto-Color Balance. Click OK when a
warning message appears. Note: Auto-Color Balance is useful only when the lightest
point in a picture should be pure white. Otherwise, Auto-Color Balance may
introduce an unwanted color cast. Although the default resolution would be adequate
for a commercially printed publication, a file at that resolution would be
unnecessarily large for this lesson, so you’ll specify a lower resolution.
4 For Size, select Constrain Proportions,
File > Place, open the 07Lesson folder, and double-click 07Img14.PCD. (In Windows,
if the file doesn’t appear in the list, choose All Files for Files of Type.) Note:
If necessary, Choose File > Preferences > General. In the Preferences dialog box,
click CMS Setup. For Color Management, choose On. Click OK. Because you selected a
Kodak Photo CD image, PageMaker displays the Kodak Photo CD Import Filter dialog
box, which contains a preview of the selected image. Photo CD images are scanned
directly from slide or negative film, so they always appear in landscape (wide)
orientation before you import them.
2 Select Save to CIELAB TIFF File.
and make sure Units is set to Inches for Width and Height.
5 Enter 7 for the width. Set the Image Reso-
lution to 100 pixels per inch.

Classroom in a Book
6 Click OK.
Because you selected the Save to CIELAB TIFF file option, a dialog box appears where
you can name the file.
7 Name the file 07Photo.tif in the 07Lesson folder, and click Save. When a window
appears asking if you want to include the graphic inside the publication, click No.
This creates a link to the external file instead of copying the file into the
publication.
Utah
10 While the image is still selected, choose Element > Arrange > Send to Back.
Note (Macintosh only): If PageMaker displays an alert telling you that there is not
enough memory to place the image, increase the memory size for PageMaker. For more
information, see the documentation that came with your Macintosh. PageMaker creates
the new TIFF file and displays the loaded graphic icon. As you move the icon, the
horizontal and vertical rulers display indicator lines to show the position of the
top left corner of the graphic. You can also check the position using the X and Y
values in the Control palette. On the rulers and in the Control palette, negative
values are to the left of or below the zero point of the rulers. To place the TIFF
image, position the loaded icon so that X is -1p6 (left of the page) and Y is -4p6
(above the top of the page).
8
If the image draws too slowly on your screen, you can speed redraw by reducing the
amount of detail PageMaker displays for placed images. This does not change the
resolution at which images will print.
Select Standard for Graphics Display, and then click OK. When positioning elements
precisely over images or when checking the publication closely before printing,
remember to select High Resolution for Graphics Display.
12 Save 07Work.pmd.
If high-resolution graphics display is off, you can temporarily view graphics at

high resolution without turning it on in the Preferences dialog box. Hold down
Ctrl+Shift (Windows) or Control (Macintosh) as you redraw the screen (for example,
when changing the view).
Gear
For real-world production, a general guideline is to specify a resolution of twice

the screen ruling—lines per inch (lpi)—that will be used to print the image. For
this project, a resolution of 100 is sufficient and uses less disk space and memory.
Click to place the image.

216 LESSON 7
Cropping an image
The part of the image that hangs out over the edge is called a bleed and is
necessary for printing images that come all the way to the edge of the paper. To
evaluate the composition of the page, however, you will want to crop the bleed
temporarily. Before you print separations, you’ll pull the bleed back out again.
Note: If this publication was really going to press, elements currently touching
the page edges would extend past them so that they can bleed properly. For
simplicity of viewing, bleeding elements have been cropped to the edge in this
publication.
1 If needed, select the image you just placed. 2 To crop the bleed, select the
cropping tool
Working with color

Many print jobs are printed using either spot or process color printing methods.
Spot color uses a separate ink to print each color in the publication, which can
allow accurate color reproduction. However, spot color cannot easily reproduce the
thousands of colors in a photograph, because it would require too many separate
inks. Process color reproduces a wide range of colors using just four standard
inks, by combining the inks in varying proportions on a page. When you want to
reproduce photographs or other art with many colors, process color is more
economically feasible than spot color, but not all colors can be reproduced
accurately.
Printing overlapping colors on press

Most color printing inks are partially transparent, so printing one ink on top of
another usually alters the color of both inks. For spot colors, PageMaker attempts
to avoid this effect by using the standard printing industry practice of knocking
out, or removing, inks where they print below the topmost ink, keeping the color
pure. In the following example, the spot ink of the shape knocks out the background
ink. On the black separation, the shape appears as negative space in a black
background.
) from the toolbox. Position it over the upper left corner handle of the image, and
drag inward until the edges of the image are even with the edges of the page.
Remember that you can use the rulers or the Control Palette to help you position
elements on the page; the top left corner of this page is 0,0 on the rulers.
Utah
Save 07Work.pmd.
Gear
Classroom in a Book
If the spot ink were to overprint the black, the two inks would mix and the result
would be darkened by the black. To produce the results you expect, PageMaker
creates knockouts by default when you specify color, though you can choose to
overprint.
each ink. This publication will use five inks—cyan, magenta, yellow, black, and
PANTONE 5405 CVC. When a file is printed by a commercial printer using printing
plates, the paper passes between rollers for each ink used in the publication. Each
time the paper passes a roller, there is the possibility of misalignment or
misregistration, if the paper is stretched or compressed by the printing press.
Misregistration can cause thin gaps of white (often called light leaks) or color
shifts between adjacent objects on the page.
Shape overprints
Shape knocks out
Note: In general, process inks do not knock each other out because they reproduce a
color by being combined. However, process inks can be knocked out by a spot color.
A
Registration
A
Misregistration
Misregistration and trapping

When you prepare a publication for commercial printing, you must take printing
requirements into account in advance of printing. Failure to do so often results in
unexpected costs and delays. As you work through this publication, you will specify
and adjust colors with press requirements in mind. When you print separations, you
create a separate set of paper or film images for each ink used in the publication.
A commercial printer uses these separations to create the plates used to print the
job—one plate for
To compensate for this misregistration, you can use a technique called trapping,
which overlaps adjoining color areas slightly, preventing gaps between colors.
A A
A B C
A. Character overprinted B. Circle trapped by spreading its edges C. Circle knocked

out of underlying object
218 LESSON 7
The trapping process has many variables. Light objects on dark backgrounds are
trapped differently from dark objects on light backgrounds. There are special
considerations for text, black objects, and imported files. The amount of trap
varies, depending on the paper, print quality, and printing press. Trapping can be
daunting for even the most experienced designer. It is essential that you work
closely with your printer or prepress service provider to avoid costly
complications when you print. Trapping cannot make a publication completely perfect
—the way trapping affects the edges of type and graphics can actually make them
look less polished. When you use trapping, your goal is to minimize the negative
effects of misregistration while keeping the detrimental effects of trapping under
control. In some cases it is actually better not to trap. Your commercial printer
can help you decide. This full-color catalog is currently designed to be printed
using the four process ink plates: cyan, magenta, yellow, and black. Discussions
with the commercial printer revealed several potential problems with the current
design. For example, on pages 3 through 5, product price text is currently specified
as a red process color, which is likely to lose legibility if misregistered.
To solve this problem, the printer has recommended converting one of the process
colors to a spot ink. This will create a fifth plate which will use a dark blue-
green spot color from the PANTONE color library. In this project you will replace
the current blue process color with a PANTONE spot color. For this catalog
publication, you will set up the Colors palette by deleting unused colors and then
redefining the blue process color as a PANTONE spot color.
Redefining a color
In the next steps, you redefine the blue process color as the PANTONE 5405 spot
color. You can edit colors from either the Define Colors command or the Colors
palette menu. For this project, you’ll use the Colors palette menu.
1 In the Colors palette, double-click the
color Blue.
2 Select Spot for Type, then choose
PANTONE® Coated for Libraries. The pop-up menu contains a selection of electronic
color swatch books that are included with PageMaker 7.0. Most of the choices are
electronic versions of standard swatch books traditionally used by commercial
printers.
3 Enter 5405 to select PANTONE 5405 CVC. 4 Click OK to close the Color Picker.
Select
Overprint.
Classroom in a Book
You selected Overprint because the PANTONE 5405 spot color will often be printed on
top of process colors. If PANTONE 5405 is set to knock out the colors underneath
it, normal misregistration may introduce undesirable registration gaps between the
PANTONE 5405 ink and the underlying process inks when the catalog is printed on
press. If you are not sure whether a color should be set to overprint, consult your
printer or prepress service provider.
5 Click OK to close the Color Options
will make it unnecessary to trap their common edge. You will find the process
equivalent of PANTONE 5405 and apply it.
A possible effect of spot ink misregistration
Uta
dialog box. The icon to the far right of the color name
1 In the Colors palette, select PANTONE
( ) indicates that the color you just added is a spot color.

In the publication, all objects that used the original process color now use the
PANTONE 5405 spot color.
6 Save 07Work.pmd.
5405 CVC. Choose New Color from the Colors palette menu.
2 In the Color Options dialog box, choose
PANTONE® ProSim from the Libraries pop-up menu. Make sure PANTONE 5405 CVP is
selected by default. Click OK. Note: The PANTONE® ProSim library is specifically
designed to provide approximations of PANTONE spot inks. However, the process
equivalent may not be exact in all cases.
3 Choose Process for Type, make sure
Using a process version of a spot color

On page 1, the solid rectangle behind the Utah text currently uses the PANTONE®
spot color. However, there is too much potential for the spot plate to cause a
visible break in the type where it straddles the photograph and the rectangle. It’s
been decided that it would be slightly better to use the process color equivalent
of the PANTONE spot color. For example, the common process inks used by the photo
and the rectangle
CMYK is chosen for Model, and click OK.

4 Save 07Work.pmd.
Applying a color
Now you will apply the new process color to the rectangle.
220 LESSON 7
1 With the pointer tool, select the solid
1 In the Colors palette, choose New Color
rectangle under the word Utah.

2 In the Colors palette, click the Fill button
from the Colors palette menu.

2 Type Rich Black for the name. 3 Select Process for Type, and make sure
and then click PANTONE 5405 CVP.
Creating rich black rules

Pages 2 through 5 use wide black rules that abut photographs and areas of solid
color. Misregistration on press may cause gaps between the rules and the other
areas of the page that they touch. To avoid trapping problems, the thick rules have
been drawn as thin rectangles. As rectangles, the colors of their fills and strokes
can be specified independently. Also, process black is designed to be partially
transparent so that it mixes well with other process inks. However, this makes
process black appear “thin” or weak when it covers an area wider than a narrow
rule. Therefore, you will fill the rectangles with a deeper black color called a
rich black, which includes cyan to make it look more solid.
CMYK is selected for Model. Type 10 for Cyan, 0 for Magenta, 0 for Yellow, and 100
for Black. Click OK.
4 Go to page 2. With the pointer tool, select
the two black rectangles on the page.
ummer’s just around the corner which means it’s time again for Utah Gear. We stock
a full range of tents,
sleeping bags, back packs, rugged
clothing, and accessories for outdoor folks like you. This sampler catalog
features some of the Utah Gear products that our own hard-playing staff have tested
and considered invaluable in their adventures. This sampler shows just a cross-
section of the hundreds of products available from Utah Gear—all the high-quality
gear you need for camping, hiking,
climbing, rafting, and biking. If you don’t see some-
thing you want, check out our complete catalog. For a free copy, call (999) 555-
5555. Only the toughest quality materials go in our gear so it is weatherproof, and
will never come apart at the seams. As usual, you have our guarantee you can always
return any item for a full refund. Summer is almost here, so what are you waiting
for?
5 Choose Element > Fill and Stroke. In the

Fill section, choose Rich Black for Color. In the Stroke section, make sure [Black]
is selected for Color, select Overprint, and click OK. The stroke is a custom width
of .3 points to manually trap the edge of the rectangle. Now apply the rich black
color to the same objects on the other pages.
6 Go to page 3. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for
Process black rules set to overprint
Rich black rules
page 3. Go to pages 4 and 5 and repeat steps 4 and 5 for those pages as well.
Gear
Utah
Classroom in a Book
Making an overprinting version of a color

Now finish making changes to page 2. By default, PageMaker overprints black type
smaller than 24 points, but the S drop cap is 78 points. You will trap it by
overprinting. An Overprint option is not available for selected text, but you can
create and apply a version of the default black that overprints.
1 Choose Edit > Deselect All to make sure
Working with inline graphics

The introductory paragraph on page 2 of the catalog will contain several inline
graphics that break up the monotony of the large text block. Inline graphics are
images that are inserted into a text block so that they stay with the text as it is
moved or edited. In the following steps, you will learn how to add inline graphics.
no objects are selected. In the Colors palette, select New Color from the Colors
palette menu. Type Black Overprint for Name, choose Tint for Type, choose Black for
Base Color, and select Overprint. Make sure 100 is the Tint %, and click OK. In
this case it is possible to duplicate the color and overprint it but, with a spot
color, that would generate an unwanted additional color separation. The black ink
functions as both a spot and process ink, so using a 100% tint ensures that Black
Overprint objects print on the same default black separation.
2 Go to page 2. Select the text tool ( ), select the S drop cap by highlighting the
top of the S in the first line of the paragraph, and in the Colors palette, select
Black Overprint.
Placing an inline graphic When you want to add an inline graphic that isn’t in the
publication yet, you can import it directly into the story.
1 Zoom in so that the text in the bottom left corner of page 2 fills the publication
window. Select the text tool ( ), and click an insertion point right after the
comma after the word tents in the second line.
ummer’s just around the corner which means it We stock a full range of tents,
sleeping b clothing, and accessories for outdoor folks like
features some of the Utah Gear products that our own har and considered invaluable
in their adventures. This sample
Note: If you highlight the middle or bottom of the S, you will only be selecting a
tab space that exists to make room for the S drop cap.
3 Save 07Work.pmd.
2 Choose File > Place and select 07TentIc.tif
in the 07Lesson folder. Because you have an insertion point, the As Inline Graphic
option is selected. This is what you want, so leave the option selected.
222 LESSON 7
3 Click Open (Windows) or OK
(Macintosh).
ummer’s just around the corner which means it We stock a full range of tents,
sleeping
clothing, and accessories for outdoor folks like
features some of the Utah Gear products that our own har and considered invaluable
in their adventures. This sample
PageMaker places the image at the insertion point. The graphic is now attached to
the text. If you move or edit the text, the inline graphic will follow along with
the text. The spacing may not look right, but you will fix it later.
4 With the text tool still selected, click an insertion point after the comma after
the word hiking in the seventh line. Choose File > Place once more and double-click
07Boot.tif.
and considered invaluable in their adventures. This sampler shows just a cro of the
hundreds of products available from Utah Gear—all the high-qualit need for camping,
hiking, climbing, rafting, and biking. If you don’t
Adding fixed spaces You now want to add some space around each inline graphic. You
placed each graphic immediately after a phrase, so each one currently has a word
space after it, but not before it. One option is to make sure that a regular space
character exists before and after the graphic, but if you try this, you may find
that there is not enough space around the graphic. High-end publishing programs
like PageMaker can vary the width of a regular space character in the course of
maintaining the letter spacing, word spacing, and hyphenation settings specified for
the publication. When you want to specify an exact amount of space between
characters, you can use fixed spaces, which cannot be made wider or narrower. Two
commonly used fixed spaces are the em and en spaces. An em space is generally equal
to the point size of the font, and an en space is usually 3/4 the point size of the
font. On this page, you want to have an en space before and after each inline
graphic.
thing you want, check out our complete catalog. For a free copy, call (999) Only
the toughest quality materials go in our gear so it is weatherproof, and come apart
at the seams. As usual, you have our guarantee you
return any item for a full refund. Summer is almost here, so what are you w
When the graphic is already in the publication, you can make it an inline graphic
using the Clipboard. Select the graphic with the pointer tool, choose Edit > Copy
(or Edit > Cut), click an insertion point in the text with the text tool, and then
choose Edit > Paste.
1 With the text tool selected, click to the left of the first inline graphic, and
type Ctrl+Shift+N (Windows) or Command+Shift+N (Macintosh) to insert an en space.
Click to the right of the graphic, delete the existing space character, and type
another en space.
Classroom in a Book
2 Add an en space before and after each of
2 Select the pointer tool, and then choose
the other inline graphics as needed, being sure to remove or replace any existing
word space that follows each one.
File > Place. Select 07TextA.doc in the 07Lesson folder, be sure that As New Story
is selected, and deselect Retain Format. Then click Open (Windows) or OK
(Macintosh). You make sure As New Story is selected because you want this story to
be separate from any other story in the publication, unlike the inline graphics you
just placed, which you intended to be part of the story on the left side of the
page.
3 Position the loaded text icon so that the X
for?
Gear
Utah
3 Save 07Work.pmd.
Attaching rules to text

In addition to attaching graphic images to text, you can attach lines or rules to
text to create a variety of effects. Take a look at page 2 of the final file. The
table of contents is in front of a striped background. The orange stripes are not
graphic elements, but rules, defined as part of the paragraph styles applied to the
table of contents text. To format the table of contents, you will first place the
contents text. Then you define a paragraph style that positions wide rules behind
alternate lines of text.
1 Pan the window so that you can see all of the empty space in the lower right
corner of the page.
value in the Control palette is approximately 34p and the Y value is approximately
15p. Place the text on the lower right quarter of page 2 by dragging between the
black vertical line and the right edge of the page, then down about 2 inches, as
shown below.
for?
), and select all of the newly placed text. In character view in the Control
palette, set the font to Myriad Bold (Mac OS) and Myriad Roman (Windows), the font
size ( ) to 17 points, and the leading ( ) to 36 points. In Windows, click the Bold
button ( ) to apply boldface.
Gear
Utah
224 LESSON 7
Click the Paragraph-view button ( ) in the Control palette. Enter 1p6 for the left
indent
9 Select Orange for Stroke Color, make sure
( ), and click the Apply button (
).
Tint is set to 100%, and make sure Width of Column is selected.
Colors to display the Colors palette, and with the text still selected, apply the
color PANTONE 5405 CVC.
6 Double-click the word Introduction.
Notice that the selection highlight extends above and below the word. The highlight
indicates the height of the leading slug, which is 36 points, as you entered in the
Control palette.
Gear
Utah
S
a full range of tents, sleeping bags, back packs, rugged clothing, and accessories
for outdoor folks like you. This sampler catalog features some of the Utah Gear
products that our own hard-playing staff have tested and considered invaluable in
their adventures. This sampler shows just a cross-section of the hundreds of
products available from Utah Gear—all the high-quality gear you need for camping,
hiking, climbing, rafting, and biking. If you don’t see something you want, check
out our complete catalog. For a free copy, call (999) 555-5555. Only the toughest
quality materials go in our gear so it is weatherproof, and will never come apart
at the seams. As usual, you have our guarantee you can always return any item for a
full refund. Summer is almost here, so what are you waiting for?
2 Introduction 3 Camping Gear 4 Apparel 5 Gizmos 6 Climbing Gear 7 Packs n’ Racks
In the next step you will set the vertical placement of the rule. Rules can be
positioned relative to either the top or the bottom of the leading slug. The
thickness (Stroke Weight) of the rule always starts at the top of the rule and
grows downward.
10 Click Options. Type 2 for Top. To close
7 Choose Type > Paragraph, and then click
Rules.
8 Select Rule Above Paragraph. Choose
Custom for Stroke Style and enter 36 points (the size of the leading slug) for
Stroke Weight. Click OK.
all dialog boxes, hold down Shift (Windows), or Option (Macintosh) as you click OK.
Classroom in a Book
An orange 36-point rule is now attached to the text. The rule starts 2 picas above
the baseline and hangs down, allowing the text to appear in the middle of the rule.
Now you will define a style based on the text that you just formatted.
2 Name the new style TOC Rule. For Based
On, make sure No Style is selected. For Next Style, choose Same Style. Click OK.
When entering text, you can automatically apply rules to alternating paragraphs as
you type by taking advantage of the Next Style option. Define a style named No Rule
without the rule attributes. In TOC Style, specify No Rule as the Next Style. In No
Rule, specify TOC Rule as the Next Style.
3 Use the Styles palette to apply the TOC
Gear
you can always
Utah
sleeping bags, back packs, rugged clothing, and accessories for outdoor folks like
you. This sampler catalog features some of the Utah Gear products that our own
hard-playing staff have tested and considered invaluable in their adventures. This
sampler shows just a cross-section of the hundreds of products available from Utah
Gear—all the high-quality gear you need for camping, hiking, climbing, rafting, and
biking. If you don’t see something you want, check out our complete catalog. For a
free copy, call (999) 555-5555. Only the toughest quality materials go in our gear
so it is weatherproof, and will never come apart at the seams. As usual, you have
our guarantee return any item for a full refund. Summer is almost here, so what are
you waiting for?
Rule style to every other line, creating a set of stripes.

4 Select the pointer tool, click the text block,
One advantage to using paragraph rules is that you can quickly make all rules bleed
just by extending the right side of the text block past the edge of the page.
Creating a style based on formatted text Because you want to apply the rule to
several lines of text, it will be more efficient to define a style that includes the
rule attributes so you can apply a rule with just one click. You will define a style
by example, using text already formatted the way you want it.
1 Make sure the word Introduction is still selected. In the Styles palette, press
Ctrl (Windows) or Command (Macintosh) as you click [No Style].
and make sure that the bottom of the text block windowshade is dragged all the way
down to the bottom margin of the page. Select the text tool ( ) and click in the
empty line below Packs n’ Racks, and apply the TOC Rule style to this blank
paragraph. (If necessary, click an insertion point at the end of the Packs n’ Racks
line and press Enter or Return to create a new line.)
5 Select the pointer tool, select the table of
contents text block and examine it. If necessary, adjust the position of the text
block so that it exactly fills the width between the
226 LESSON 7
heavy vertical line and the edge of the page. Position the text block so that the
last orange rule touches the bottom of the page.
2 Click the Styles palette tab. In the Styles
palette, you see that prices in this catalog use the Price style.
3 Double-click the Price style. Click Char,
Gear
Utah
S
a full range of tents, sleeping bags, back packs, rugged clothing, and accessories
for outdoor folks like you. This sampler catalog features some of the Utah Gear
products that our own hard-playing staff have tested and considered invaluable in
their adventures. This sampler shows just a cross-section of the hundreds of
products available from Utah Gear—all the high-quality gear you need for camping,
hiking, climbing, rafting, and biking. If you don’t see something you want, check
out our complete catalog. For a free copy, call (999) 555-5555. Only the toughest
quality materials go in our gear so it is weatherproof, and will never come apart
at the seams. As usual, you have our guarantee you can always return any item for a
full refund. Summer is almost here, so what are you waiting for?
and choose PANTONE 5405 CVC for Color. To close all dialog boxes, hold down Shift
(Windows) or Option (Macintosh) as you click OK. All of the price text in the
publication updates to use the spot color, and the price text will overprint.
4 Save 07Work.pmd.
6 With the text block still selected, choose Element > Arrange > Send to Back. 7
Save 07Work.pmd.
Making a version of a color that knocks out

At the top of page 4, you find a white heading inside a long shape with round ends.
The fill is currently PANTONE 5405, which is set to overprint. However, on the
colored background, this heading will print better if its fill knocks out. You will
create and apply a version of the color that knocks out.
Editing the color of a style

On pages 3 through 5, product prices currently appear in serif type colored in
process red. However, on most printing presses, combining serifs, process color
type, and process color backgrounds causes legibility problems whenever
misregistration occurs on press, and the type is too small to trap as a process
color. The type will hold together much more nicely if it is printed using a spot
color. You will edit the style used for prices, replacing the red process color
with the PANTONE 5405 spot color you created earlier.
no objects are selected. In the Colors palette, select New Color from the Colors
palette menu. Type Spot Knockout for Name, choose Tint for Type, choose PANTONE
5405 CVC for Base Color, and select Overprint. Make sure 100 is the Tint %. Click
OK.
), and select any of the red prices in the text. In the Colors palette, you see
that the applied color is Red.
1 Go to page 3, select the text tool (

Classroom in a Book
2 Go to page 3. With the pointer tool, select
the heading graphic and, in the Colors palette, select Spot Knockout.
Camping Gear
by image-editing and painting programs such as Adobe Photoshop. Although you can
change the size and orientation of a TIFF or other bitmap image in PageMaker, the
image will display and print faster if you save it at its final size and orientation
from your image-editing application. Most EPS graphics are vector-based files
created in drawing programs such as Adobe Illustrator. This kind of EPS file always
prints at full resolution and quality even if you resize or rotate it. The high-
quality printing of EPS graphics is made possible using methods which can’t be
displayed on screen on most systems, so an EPS file must include a preview image to
display. These low-resolution preview images may not be viewable on all platforms.
If a readable preview image does not exist, PageMaker can generate one
automatically. An EPS file can contain a mix of bitmap images and vector graphics,
such as an Adobe Illustrator file that includes a TIFF image, or Photoshop EPS file
that contains a clipping path. When any kind of file contains a bitmap graphic, you
will get best results if you prepare a bitmap image at its optimum size and
orientation for your publication before you import it. Other popular graphics
formats, such as GIF and JPEG, are less capable of handling the color information
required for high-quality commercial printing.
If you select the text block by mistake, hold down Ctrl (Windows) or Command
(Macintosh) as you click with the pointer tool to bypass the text and select the
shape under it.
3 Save 07Work.pmd.
About graphic file formats

In the next set of topics you will place more graphics into the catalog. PageMaker
supports many graphic file formats. The two graphic file formats most often used for
high-end color work are EPS (Encapsulated PostScript) and TIFF. TIFF is the best
file format for scanned images or digital paintings because it preserves image
quality and reproduces color accurately. TIFF files are bitmap images that consist
of a grid of pixels with a specific resolution (in pixels per inch). TIFF and other
bitmap formats are created by scanners and
228 LESSON 7
Using clipping paths for transparent backgrounds

Many images in this publication are photographs that were scanned and then saved
from Adobe Photoshop as TIFF files. Notice that most of the product images are
obviously not rectangular, but if you select them, their handles indicate that they
are actually rectangular images with transparent backgrounds. This is because each
image includes a clipping path that was applied in Photoshop. A clipping path masks
out a portion of an image, usually a background. Without a clipping path, a TIFF
image would appear on a colored area with an undesirable white rectangular
background. Using Adobe Photoshop 3.0 or later, you can include a clipping path
with an image saved as an EPS or TIFF file. On Windows 95, a clipping path displays
more accurately if it is saved with a file in the TIFF format.
PageMaker also creates a link that associates the graphic inside the publication
with its original version on disk, so that you can track updates to the original.
PageMaker creates links for text files as well, but text files are always included in
the publication so that you can edit the text. When placing a graphic, you have the
option of copying the graphic completely into the publication, or including only a
screen-resolution preview of it. As a rule, it’s better to leave a large graphic
outside the publication, particularly if you use the large graphic more than once.
Copying entire graphics into a publication means you duplicate them each time you
place them, consuming disk space unnecessarily. When you place just a screen
preview of a graphic and its link, PageMaker can still print it at high resolution
by following the link to the original graphics file. In the following steps, you
place several graphic images and explore linking options. As you place the
following images, refer to 07Final.pmd or to the illustrations in this chapter as a
guide.
1 Choose Edit > Deselect All, and go to
Placing and linking a graphic

When you place a graphic, PageMaker creates a screen-resolution preview image so
that you can position, resize, rotate, and crop the graphic quickly. The changes
you make to the low-resolution preview are applied to the full-resolution original
when you print the publication.
page 3. Choose File > Place, and doubleclick 07Tent1.tif to place it as an

independent graphic. If a dialog box appears asking you if you want to include a
complete copy of the graphic in the publication, click No.
Classroom in a Book
2 Click the loaded graphic icon under the
Setting link option defaults

When you placed the tent image, PageMaker interrupted the place procedure to ask
whether you wanted to import the fullresolution version or not. This can become
tedious if you will be importing many images. If you always want PageMaker to
import just the link to the original and create a screen-resolution preview for the
layout, you can change the link option defaults.
1 Choose Edit > Deselect All to be sure no
Camping Gear heading. Click the top left reference point of the Proxy icon in the
Control palette, and drag or nudge the tent graphic, or type values in the Control
palette, so that the X value is approximately 33 and the Y value is approximately
4p5. There is extra space to the left of the graphic because you will be placing
another graphic next to it later.
Blue Kazoo
The backpacker’s choice, Blue Kazoo has continuous channel construction to let you
shift the 550-fill goose down where it’s needed. Cotton storage sack. Royal.
Imported. Specify right or left zipper.
UG 4981 C71B
REI Trail Dome

Our best-selling tent, the Trail Dome is freestanding, easy to set up and offers a
generous 52" of headroom. High quality features include 700 aluminum alloy poles,
2.35-oz. nylon taffeta with double urethane coatings and seam-welded floors for
unbeatable waterproofing protection.
2-person tent UG 3483 C11A
Camping Gear
graphic is selected. If a graphic is selected, the next step will set the option
for only that one graphic, rather than set a new default.
2 Choose Element > Link Options. In the
$150.00
4-person tent UG 3583 C11B
$199.99
$200.00
Z-Rest and Therm-a-Rest®

These sleeping pads offer a soft, supportive sleep. Come in Regular or Long sizes.
Therm-a-Rest® UG 5228
Kelty Trekker
The Kelty Trekker is a backpacking classic available from Utah Gear in comfortable
models for both men and women. A nearly indestructible H-frame and plenty of gear
pockets make this a great pack for short to intermediate treks. Side stabilizer
straps help balance your load, and an adjustable suspension system, curved shoulder
straps and a full-wrap waistbelt add comfort. Available in regular, medium and
large sizes for men; small size only for women.
UG 6931 C44E
$65.00
Z-Rest UG 5229
$110.00
$25.00
Graphics section, deselect the option for Store Copy in Publication, then click OK.
Managing links
As you work on a PageMaker file, you may occasionally move, rename, or update a file
you have placed. When this happens, the link to that file is no longer current. You
can use the Links dialog box to see the status of all the linked files in a document
and to update the links. The Link Options: Defaults dialog box controls how placed
objects are stored and updated. The Store Copy in Publication option to store a file
outside the publication is only available for graphics. Text files are always copied
into a publication so that you can edit the text in PageMaker.
230 LESSON 7
Now all placed images will automatically remain outside the PageMaker document. If
you are taking your file to a service provider, you need to bring all the linked
graphic files with you. Without them, the file will be printed using the screen-
resolution preview images, which do not include enough information for high-quality
printing. When you take your publication to a service provider, you can use the
Save for Service Provider plug-in (included with PageMaker 7.0) to automate the
process of gathering all the files your publication needs to print properly, such as
fonts and linked graphics. For more information, see “Verifying and packaging a
publication for commercial printing” on page 235.
left reference point in the Proxy icon and making sure that 24 picas is entered for
X and 12 is entered for Y.
Blue Kazoo
The backpacker’s choice, Blue Kazoo has continuous channel construction to let you
shift the 550-fill goose down where it’s needed. Cotton storage sack. Royal.
Imported. Specify right or left zipper.
UG 4981 C71B
REI Trail Dome

Our best-selling tent, the Trail Dome is freestanding, easy to set up and offers a
generous 52" of headroom. High quality features include 700 aluminum alloy poles,
2.35-oz. nylon taffeta with double urethane coatings and seam-welded floors for
unbeatable waterproofing protection.
2-person tent UG 3483 C11A
Camping Gear
$150.00
4-person tent UG 3583 C11B
$199.99
$200.00
Z-Rest and Therm-a-Rest®

These sleeping pads offer a soft, supportive sleep. Come in Regular or Long sizes.
Therm-a-Rest® UG 5228
Kelty Trekker
The Kelty Trekker is a backpacking classic available from Utah Gear in comfortable
models for both men and women. A nearly indestructible H-frame and plenty of gear
pockets make this a great pack for short to intermediate treks. Side stabilizer
straps help balance your load, and an adjustable suspension system, curved shoulder
straps and a full-wrap waistbelt add comfort. Available in regular, medium and
large sizes for men; small size only for women.
UG 6931 C44E
$65.00
Z-Rest UG 5229
$110.00
$25.00
4 Save 07Work.pmd.
Viewing the status of publication links The Links Manager dialog box is specifically
designed to help you monitor link status and resolve linking problems.
1 Switch to the 07Final.pmd publication,
07Tent2.tif in the 07Lesson folder. The filesize alert doesn’t appear because you
changed the link option default. Click to place the image to the left of and below
the first tent. In the Control palette, fine-tune the position of the tent by
clicking the top
and choose File > Links Manager.
The Links Manager dialog box displays a list of imported text and graphic files in
your publication, along with file format information and page locations. When files
are not up to date, a symbol appears to the left of the filename. If no symbol
appears next to the
Classroom in a Book
document name, the document is up to date. As you select each item, a message below
the list indicates its current status.
2 Click OK.
By moving 07Pants.tif into the Save folder instead of in the Recycle Bin (Windows)
or Trash (Macintosh), you can easily return the project to its original state when
you have finished. Because the copy you moved into 07Lesson has a more recent date
than the one that you moved from 07Lesson, you have simulated updating the
07Pants.tif file in another application, such as Adobe Photoshop.
4 Return to 07Final.pmd in Adobe
Simulating link status changes In the following steps, you will move one graphic
file and simulate updating another file by replacing it with a copy that has a newer
date. Then you will look at the Links Manager dialog box to see the results.
1 Do one of the following:
Macintosh Go to the Application menu in the top right corner of your screen and
choose Finder. Open the 07Lesson folder, and display the Save folder and the Links
folder in separate windows. This makes it easier to move files around. Windows
Choose Start > Programs > Windows Explorer. Navigate to the 07Lesson folder.
2 Drag 07Tent2.tif from 07Lesson into
PageMaker and choose File > Links Manager. Notice that there is a diamond symbol
(Macintosh) or an x (Windows) next to 07Pants.tif. The diamond or x indicates that
the file is stored outside the publication and that the external copy has been
modified. This is because you replaced the file with a file with a different
modification date. In a production setting, this would happen if you updated the
image and then saved it. There is also a question mark next to 07Tent2.tif. This
indicates that the file is no longer being stored at the location recorded when the
file was placed. In a production setting, this would happen if the original image
was moved or renamed. To the far right of both files is an upsidedown question mark.
This lets you know that the file won’t print in high resolution, either because the
graphic is no longer
the Links folder. You have moved the file, so the file location recorded in PageMaker
is no longer true. In the following simulation, the file does not change location,
but you replace it with a more recent version, to simulate a file that is updated.
3 Drag 07Pants.tif from the 07Lesson folder
into the Save folder. Then drag the copy of 07Pants.tif from the Links folder to
the 07Lesson folder. Be sure to begin by dragging the copy in the 07Lesson folder,
not the one in the Links folder.
232 LESSON 7
stored where the link says it is, or it has been updated and no longer matches the
low-resolution preview you currently see in the publication. There are many other
symbols that can appear in this Links Manager dialog box. If you aren’t sure what
symbols mean, select an item and read the Status area at the bottom of the dialog
box, or see the Adobe PageMaker 7.0 User Guide. If you tried to print the
publication now, the graphics with broken links would not print properly. To
resolve this, you’ll update the links.
Updating a link The pants graphic still has the same name and location, but you
have simulated editing the file in another application. If the graphic were stored
outside PageMaker, you wouldn’t have to do anything; PageMaker would automatically
read the current version of the file. This graphic is stored inside the publication,
however, so you need to tell PageMaker to update its internal copy of the file so
that it is storing the latest version.
1 In the Links Manager dialog box, select
07Pants.tif.
2 Click Update to update the link to the file
and the preview image in the publication. Click OK. You simulated file linking
changes by moving files around and checking links from the 07Final.pmd publication.
Now you’ll put the files back in their original places so that you can continue to
work from 07Work.pmd.
3 In Explorer (Windows) or the Finder
Relinking a file The tent graphic was moved, so you need to create a link to the file
in its new location.
1 In the Links Manager dialog box, select
07Tent2.tif. A message appears at the bottom of the dialog box, indicating that the
file is missing; moving the file broke the link.
2 To create a link to the file in its new location, click Info. Then open the Links
folder, select 07Tent2.tif, and click Open (Windows) or Link (Macintosh).
(Macintosh), drag 07Pants.tif from the Lesson folder to the Links folder, then drag
the other copy of 07Pants.tif from the Save folder to the Lessons folder.
4 Drag 07Tent2.tif from the Links folder to
the 07Lesson folder.
PageMaker updates the link to the new location of the file. The question mark
disappears from the item in the link list.
Classroom in a Book
Preparing for commercial printing

In this section, you will prepare the publication and its associated files for the
stage of publishing known as prepress. At the beginning of the prepress stage,
publication pages are completely designed and laid out, but are not yet prepared
for the combination of imagesetter, press, paper, and inks that will be used. The
success of your print job depends on communication with your commercial printer.
3 To save your change without printing,
hold down Shift as you click Done. You must choose a PPD that is appropriate for
the imagesetter you will use. The printer for that PPD does not have to be attached
to your system.
Turning on color management

At the beginning of this project, you placed a Photo CD image into the catalog.
Before you can separate it and the other Photo CD images in the catalog, you must
check that the color-management system is turned on so that the CIE Lab colors can
be converted accurately to the CMYK color model in which the images will be
printed.
1 In 07Work.pmd, choose File > Prefer-
Specifying a PPD
PageMaker creates separations based on the characteristics of the selected printer,
so in a real-world situation, you would select and install a PPD (PostScript
Printer Description) that is appropriate for the printer on which the separations
will be output. The PPD that you choose determines the default settings in the
Print dialog box. You can install additional PPDs at any time. Separations from
this publication will be printed on an Agfa 9800 imagesetter, so that is the PPD
you will choose. For PPDs to be available, the publication must be composed for the
printer (Windows) or a PostScript printer must be selected in the Chooser
(Macintosh).
1 In 07Work.pmd, choose File > Print. 2 Choose the Agfa 9800 PPD from the PPD
ences > General, and click CMS Setup.

2 If needed, choose On for Color Manage-
ment, click the Kodak ICC icon on the left, and choose Kodak ICC from the New Items
Use pop-up menu. Note: For color management to provide optimal viewing and printing
results, you must set the Kodak ICC settings to match the RGB source, monitor, and
proof printer you use for the project. For more information about color management,
see Chapter 8 in the Adobe PageMaker 7.0 User Guide.
3 Click OK to close the Color Management
System preferences dialog box, and then click OK.
pop-up menu.
234 LESSON 7
Specifying automatic trapping values

You can specify trapping values for objects created in PageMaker. Always consult
with your commercial printer to determine the correct values for your project.
Trapping values depend directly upon many factors, such as kind of paper and inks
being used and the kind of press. In the following steps, you set trapping values
for the catalog.
1 Choose File > Preferences > Trapping. 2 Click to select Enable Trapping for
The Black Width option specifies trap for colors next to or under black. Usually,
black width is 1.5 to 2 times the default trap. Again, get this number from your
printer or prepress service provider.
5 Leave the three Trapping Thresholds
options set to their default values. The Step Limit sets the threshold at which a
trap will be applied. The higher the number, the more extreme the color difference
needs to be before PageMaker applies an automatic trap. Centerline trapping, where
a trap grows outward from the center of an edge, is used when colors have similar
neutral densities, meaning neither color is much darker or lighter than the other.
The Centerline Threshold value determines when PageMaker uses centerline trapping
placement. Higher numbers use centerline trapping only for very similar colors.
Lower numbers use it for a greater relative range of colors. PageMaker traps only
text above the point size indicated in the Trap Text Above option. Smaller point
sizes typically overprint if specified to do so in the Black Attributes options.
6 Select Traps Over Imported Objects.
Publication.
3 In the Trap Width area, leave the Default
set to 0p0.25 (¼ point). This is a common trapping value. The Default option
specifies the trap (amount of overlap) for all colors except black. PageMaker
applies traps based on a set of internal rules. Usually, lighter colors will expand
or spread into adjacent darker colors. Trapping isn’t visible on the screen, nor
accurately represented by color composite proofs.
4 Leave Black Width set to 0p0.5 (½ point).
This option enables one or more objects drawn in PageMaker to trap to one another
when an imported graphic is between them in the stacking order.
7 Leave Black Limit set to 100%.
Classroom in a Book
The 100% value for Black Limit tells PageMaker that only colors containing 100%
black should be counted as black. The Black Limit option is useful when
compensating for extreme dot gain, in which the porous surface of the paper causes
the halftone ink dots to spread. This most often occurs when printing on newsprint
or other low-grade paper stock.
8 In Black Attributes, select the Strokes and
Again, for more information on any of these options, see the Adobe PageMaker 7.0
User Guide.
11 Click OK, and save 07Work.pmd.
Fills options.
Trapping Options affect only elements created in Adobe PageMaker—strokes, fills,

rules, and text. You cannot specify traps within imported photographs or
illustrations. Any trapping for imported files must be applied within the
application that created the image. Your commercial printer may be taking advantage
of other trapping methods that work with PageMaker, such as the fast inRIP trapping
available through PostScript® 3™ imagesetters, or a specialized and comprehensive
trapping program such as Luminous TrapWise. If your printer is using another
trapping solution, you should not use PageMaker’s trapping options. Talk with your
printer or prepress service provider to determine who will be responsible for
applying traps to your publication.
This causes the lines and fills of objects that you draw with the PageMaker tools to
overprint if they are black. Black objects are usually overprinted.
9 Click Ink Setup.
The Ink Setup button lets you change the neutral density of specific inks. The
default values are based on industry standards. A commercial printer would use a
densitometer to measure a particular ink’s density percentage, and then change the
number in this dialog box to reflect the findings. Changing this number will change
the way PageMaker traps colors.
10 Click Cancel.
Verifying and packaging a publication for commercial printing

The success of a remote print job (a job where you must transport the publication
files to another location) depends on the presence of elements used in the file, such
as fonts, colors, imported graphics, and the tracking values file. Many of these
elements are stored outside the publication in various folders or even across a
network. You must provide those external elements along with the publication, but
tracking them down
236 LESSON 7
can be time-consuming. To automate this task, PageMaker includes the Save for
Service Provider plug-in. This plug-in can determine whether all necessary elements
are present, gather the files in one place, and create a detailed report of
verification results and publication information. This plug-in is a valuable tool
even if you print the final separations at your own location.
1 Choose Utilities > Plug-ins > Save for
3 When PageMaker has completed checking
the publication, click each of the report tabs. If there are any problems that
would prevent a successful print job, PageMaker will indicate them here. If there
aren’t any missing fonts or files, you are ready to package the publication and all
its elements.
4 Click Package at the bottom of the win-
Service Provider.
dow. If prompted, click Continue or Yes. In the Save As dialog box, specify the
Package folder in the 07Lesson folder. When you are preparing a removable cartridge
drive to bring to a prepress service provider, the most reliable way is to create
the package in a folder on a hard disk first, and then copy the contents of the
folder to the cartridge. Note: You cannot specify a filename here, as you usually
can in a Save As dialog box, because PageMaker is saving all the publication files
under their original names.
2 Make sure the Summary tab is selected,
and click Preflight Pub. If an alert appears telling you that the publication has
not been saved, click Continue or Yes to save the publication. Preflight, a term
used by many prepress service providers, means avoiding costly mistakes by
verifying that all required elements are present for high-resolution output. The
term is taken from the preflight checklists used by airplane pilots. Some service
providers prefer to receive PostScript files from clients, so the Preflight PS button
lets you check PostScript files that have already been created by PageMaker.
5 In the Include section, select Copy Fonts.
This ensures that your prepress service provider will have the fonts you used in
the publication.
6 Click Notes, and type your name, contact information, and output information. At
the bottom, you can type additional instructions or notes for the printer. Click
OK.
The next set of options let you open the report automatically in PageMaker, check
the links one last time, and specify the report format.
Classroom in a Book
7 Select Auto Open Package Report, Update
Links in Source Pub Before Packaging, and make sure Formatted (.pmd) is selected
for the Report Type. Note: For the next step, you will need approximately 12MB of
free disk space.
8 Click Save. Processing may take a few
you will not normally be performing the following tasks. If you are a prepress
service provider, this topic is recommended.
1 Choose File > Print, and make sure the
Agfa 9800 PPD is selected in the PPD pop-up menu.
minutes. When PageMaker finishes processing, click Close. You can examine the
report. When you finish, close Report.pmd. (In Windows, the Report may be saved with
a .p65 extension.)
9 Open the folder Package and take a look at
the package you just created. (In Windows, the report is saved in the same
directory as the Package folder.) The folder Package now contains all the files
required for prepress output. If you want to gather all the necessary files for
remote printing (such as at a prepress service provider) but you don’t need the
level of detail provided by the Save for Service Provider plug-in, you can use
Files Required for Remote Printing option in the Save As dialog box.
2 Click Paper. Select Letter for Size, and
then select Printer’s Marks and Page Information.
Printing color separations

Before you create color separations, you must tell PageMaker which colors to print,
and select other options such as crop marks and registration marks. If you are
taking the publication to a prepress service provider,
These options place crop marks, registration marks, density control bars, and color
control bars on the output. All of these help your commercial printer and prepress
service provider align separations and check color accuracy. The Printer’s Marks
option adds ¾ -inch to the size of the paper that is required. The Page Information
option prints the filename, page number, current date, and color separation name in
the lower left corner of each separation.
238 LESSON 7
3 Examine the Fit section of the dialog box.
5 Scroll through the list to examine the inks
It shows the relationship between the page size of your document and the paper size
you selected. Use this dialog box to check whether crop marks, registration marks,
and other page information such as color and density, will fit on the paper. These
items are all printed outside of the document page, so the physical paper must be
larger than the document size to allow for these. If the publication and selected
marks are too large for the printable area of the paper, the values appear in red
in the Fit area.
4 Click Color, and then select Separations.
that are available. Notice that the four process inks have a check mark next to
them, indicating that they will be output as separations. Notice that the PANTONE
spot color is currently not set up to be printed. You will turn on this ink.
6 Select PANTONE 5405 CVC in the list,
and select Print This Ink. At this point in a real-world scenario, you would click
Print to output the five sets of pages—one set for each ink that you have specified
to print.
7 If you have a printer attached to your sys-
If the imagesetter is a PostScript Level 2 device, you may be able to print faster
by selecting the Perform on Printer option; ask your prepress service provider if
you are not familiar with the equipment.
tem, and you’d like to see the separations, choose a PPD appropriate for your local
printer, specify settings, and click Print. If you are not going to print, but you
want to save the settings you made, hold down Shift as you click Done. If you want
to close without printing or saving print settings, click Cancel. If you are
proofing separations to a desktop printer, the page size plus printer marks may be
larger than the paper in your desktop printer. You can scale the page to your paper
size by clicking Options in the Print dialog box and then selecting Reduce to Fit
for Size.
8 Save 07Work.pmd.
The Ink column lists the names of each spot and process color ink needed to print
the colors in your publication. These inks are the spot and process colors that
have been defined in the Colors palette or imported with your placed EPS files.
Classroom in a Book
Creating separations using Adobe PDF

You can use the Export Adobe PDF command and a custom-defined printer style to
create Adobe PDF separations in much the same way as you created paper separations
on a color printer in the previous section. (All the components you need to create
an Adobe PDF file are included on your PageMaker application CD.) You first define a
printer style in PageMaker for creating separations. Then you use this newly defined
printer style with the Export Adobe PDF command to create Adobe PDF versions of the
color separations. Creating and saving a printer style is a useful way of saving
printer settings that you use often, and it ensures consistent output in subsequent
print jobs. Any printer style you create can be selected from the Printer Style
pop-up menu.
1 Choose File > Printer Styles > Define.
2 In the Define Printer Styles dialog box,
click New. Name the printer style PDF Separations, and click OK to close the Define
Printer Styles dialog box. The new style, PDF Separations, is now listed in the
Define Printer Styles dialog box.
3 With the name PDF Separations highlighted, click Edit.
You will now set the PostScript printer and its PPD, depending on the platform you
are working on, and set color options and paper size.
•
Windows: In the Print Document dialog box, for Printer, choose Acrobat Distiller
from the pop-up menu. For PPD, choose the Acrobat Distiller PPD installed with
PageMaker.
Mac OS: In the Print Paper dialog box, verify that Acrobat Distiller is selected
for PPD. If you have an odd-sized paper, you must define it in this dialog box.
Note: In Mac OS, you must first select a PostScript driver in the Chooser.
240 LESSON 7
4 Click Paper. For Paper Size, select Cus-
8 Save the PageMaker file. Choose File >
tom. Click OK.
Export > Adobe PDF.

9 In the PDF Options dialog box, for Printer
Style, choose PDF Separations, the printer style you just defined. For Distiller
Settings Job Name, choose Press. Notice that the PDF Style box is now empty.
If you want to add registration marks, select the Printer’s Marks option. If you do
this, however, you must use a larger page size to accommodate these marks or you
can select the Reduce to Fit option for Scale. Now you are ready to make sure that
all the colors in the job are output as separations.
5 Click Color. In the Print Color dialog box,
select Separations. Scroll through the list of inks that are available. Notice that
the four process inks have a check mark next to them, indicating that they will be
output as separations. Notice that the PANTONE spot color is currently not set up
to be printed. You will turn on this ink as you did in the previous section.
6 Select PANTONE 5405 CVC in the list,
10Click Save Style, and name the style PDF Separations. Click Save. By saving the
PDF Style, it is available for reuse at any time with any other PageMaker file.
and select Print This Ink.

7 Click OK and OK again to close the dialog
boxes. Now you are ready to create the PDF versions of the separations.
Classroom in a Book
11Click Export. Close any alert boxes that
Answers
1 An inline graphic is inserted into the flow of text so that it moves whenever the
surrounding text moves. An independent graphic is not connected to any other
objects on the page (unless you use the Group command). 2 Create one or more styles
in which a paragraph has a rule as part of its formatting. To format a paragraph
with a rule, click in the paragraph, choose Type > Paragraph, and then click Rules.
Select the desired settings and click OK for each dialog box. Then apply this style
to as many paragraphs as need rules behind them. 3 You must create a clipping path
for the graphic in an application like Adobe Photoshop. The clipping path can be
any (even irregular) shape. After you place the graphic in PageMaker, the area
outside the clipping path does not print. 4 Spot color uses a separate ink to print
each color in the publication. Process color reproduces a wide range of colors by
combining varying proportions of four standard inks (cyan, magenta, yellow, and
black) on the page. 5 With overprinting, a second ink is applied on top of the first
ink on the page. With knocking out, the first ink is not applied to the area (called
the knockout) where the second ink will appear.
may appear. In the Export as PDF dialog box, save the file in the 07Lesson folder.
Note: On Mac OS, a window opens showing the progress of Distiller. The setting
displayed in this window may not match those you selected in the PDF Options dialog
box. Your PDF files will be created using the correct settings you specified,
however.
12PDF versions of the color separations are created and displayed automatically in
Acrobat or Acrobat Reader. This may take a few minutes. Page through the file to see
how the plates for the different inks will look. Close the PDF file and Acrobat or
Acrobat Reader when you are finished, and then exit PageMaker without saving any
changes to the open file.
You’ve completed this lesson. Congratulations!
Review questions
1 How is an inline graphic different from an
independent graphic?
2 What is a quick way to draw rules behind many lines of text? 3 How do you import
a graphic with a
shape other than a rectangle?

4 What is the difference between spot and
process color?
5 What is the difference between knocking out and overprinting?
Lesson 8
Sailing publication
In this project, you’ll learn how to manage a document divided into several chapter
files. First you’ll assemble three chapters into a book. Then you’ll learn several
ways to create index entries. You will generate and format an index and a table of
contents for all the publication files that make up the book.
244 LESSON 8
Sailing publication
This project is a multichapter book about sailing. You are provided with three
chapters that have already been completed. To the existing chapters you will add
index markers, create an index and a table of contents in separate publications,
and integrate all of the publications into a completed book. In this project you
learn how to do the following:
• • • •
2 Make sure that AGaramond, Birch,
Myriad Bold, Myriad Condensed Bold, and Myriad Roman fonts are installed on your
system. Windows only: Because of the way Windows handles fonts, you must apply bold
to Myriad Roman and Myriad Condensed to use Myriad Bold and Myriad Condensed Bold,
respectively.
3 Start Adobe PageMaker 7.0 and open the 08Chap1.pmd, 08Chap2.pmd, and 08Chap3.pmd
files in the 08Lesson folder. Turn the pages in each publication to see how the book
is designed. Later, you will look at the example files for the table of contents and
index.
C H A P T E R
Create a book list. Insert index markers. Create and format an index. Create a
table of contents.
This project should take you about 2 hours to complete.
Before you begin

Before beginning to assemble the publication for this lesson, you will use the
Preferences dialog box to establish application defaults, and then you will open
the final version of the publication you will create.
SAILING & RACING THE WIND TODAY

Sailboat design has changed only
slightly from ancient times to the 1800s. If a sailor from the 19th century could
travel back in time to an ancient Roman ship, for example, he would recognize
enough of the rigging and gear to pitch in and pass as part of the crew. With the
number of people sailing for pleasure burgeoning, boat designers changed their
focus from building on tradition to developing better designs, methods, and
materials. Even so, the early pleasure boats remained heavy because the primary
construction material still was teak and other wood. Only in the last 50 years have
modern materials produced lighter boats that require less maintenance. That means
more time spent sailing, which has increased the sport’s appeal to both leisure
sailors and racers. Today, sailboats are fast and sleek, built primarily of
fiberglass, polyethylene, aluminum alloy, polyurethane, and other durable, yet
lightweight materials. Contradictory though it seems, a few sailboats are made of
concrete. Most recreational sailboats are sloops or cutters. Although some experts
use the terms interchangeably, a 19
1 Before starting PageMaker, return all
AN OPTIONAL ”PULPIT” ACTS AS A GUARDRAIL FOR ADDED SAFETY AT THE BOW OF THE
SAILBOAT
4 Close 08Chap1.pmd and 08Chap2.pmd.
If you are asked if you want to save changes, click No. In 08Chap3.pmd, click the
Maximize button to make the publication window fill the screen.
Classroom in a Book
5 Set up the palettes you will need for this
project. If the Control and Styles palettes are not visible, choose Window > Show
Control Palette and Window > Show Styles. Close any other open palettes.
To create a complete book list that includes the index and table of contents, begin
by using templates to create the empty files from which you will build these two
publications.
1 Open 08TocTpl.pmt, the template for the
Creating a book list

The heart of this project is to assemble all the chapters into a book list that
associates a number of separate publications as a unit. A book list makes it
possible to generate page numbers, an index, and a table of contents across a set
of publications you specify. In PageMaker, you create a book by generating a book
list in any publication. You add each publication to the book list, and if you want
the index and table of contents to be in separate publications, you add them to the
book list as well. The index and table of contents don’t have to be in separate
publications. You can generate the information and place it in one of the existing
publications. For this book project, however, the graphic designer has designed and
created a template file for the table of contents and another for the index. When
you create the book list, you’ll include those two (currently empty) publications.
You can create the book list in any of the publications that will be in the book.
However, the book list must also be present in any publications from which you are
generating a table of contents or index, so once the book list is created, you’ll
copy it to the table of contents and index publications for this book.
table of contents. Because it is a template, it opens as an untitled document. Save

this in the 08Lesson folder as 08Toc.pmd, and then close the publication. Next,
open 08IdxTpl.pmt, the template for the index. Save it in the 08Lesson folder as
08Index.pmd, and then close the publication.
2 You can create the initial book list in any
of the publications that will be part of the book. Therefore, it’s OK to create it
in the remaining open publication, 08Chap3.pmd.
3 Choose Utilities > Book.
PageMaker displays the Book Publication List dialog box. In the next steps, you
will add the publications that are to be parts of the book and then arrange them in
the correct order.
4 By default, the Book List on the right
should include the current publication. If it isn’t there, select 08Chap3.pmd in

the left list, and then click Insert. Next you’ll add the
246 LESSON 8
Sailing publication
table of contents publication. In the left list, navigate to the 08Lesson folder if
necessary, select 08Toc.pmd, and then click Insert to add it to the book list on
the right. Now you will insert the index publication into the book list using a
shortcut. In the list on the left, double-click 08Index.pmd.
5 In the left list, add 08Chap1.pmd and
select other publications in the book list and click either Move Up or Move Down
until the list matches the one shown below.
08Chap2.pmd to the book list, so that the list includes the publications as shown
below. You will arrange them in the correct order in the next step.
The order that the publications appear in the book list is important, because this
is the order in which PageMaker numbers the pages. The publications should appear
in the list with the table of contents first, the three chapters in order, and the
index last.
6 In the book list, select 08Toc.pmd. If it is
Before you close the Book Publication List dialog box, you need to tell PageMaker
that the publications should be numbered consecutively and that each new chapter
should begin on a right (odd-numbered) page. PageMaker will then add a blank page,
if necessary, to the end of a chapter so that the next chapter begins on a right
page. If you choose None as the Auto Renumbering option, PageMaker just uses
whatever numbering you specified as the Starting Page # in the Document Setup dialog
box for each publication.
7 Select Next Odd Page, and then click OK.
PageMaker asks you if you want to renumber the publication now. Choose No. You do
not need to renumber the publication until you generate the table of contents,
because the table of contents will add pages, and therefore will change the page
numbers.
not the first publication in the list, click Move Up as necessary until 08Toc.pmd
becomes the first publication. As necessary,
Classroom in a Book
You’ll need a copy of the book list in the table of contents and index files in
order to generate their contents, so the easiest thing to do is to copy the book
list to all the files in the book.
8 In 08Chap3.pmd, where you created the
To add index entries, you should work in story editor so that you can see the index
markers. The following steps take you through several different techniques for
adding index entries to a publication.
original book list, hold down Ctrl (Windows) or Command (Macintosh) and choose
Utilities > Book. That’s all there is to it. PageMaker places a copy of the book
list in every publication in the book list.
9 Save 08Chap3.pmd.
Adding a simple page reference

When an index entry is spelled exactly the same as the text it refers to in the
publication, creating an entry can be as easy as pressing a keyboard shortcut. When
you want to customize an entry, PageMaker provides the Index Entry dialog box.
Adding index entries

Creating an index has four stages: inserting index entries into each publication in
the book, looking the entries over and editing them if necessary, generating the
index, and placing the index in the publication where you want it to be. Wait until
you have finished editing your publication before you add the index markers. If you
make changes after you have added the markers, you run the risk of moving or
deleting a marker as you edit, or of making an index entry inappropriate. The
mechanics of creating the index are relatively simple, but choosing the words and
determining the structure of an index is a distinct discipline outside the scope of
this book. In this lesson, we teach you how to add an entry and generate an index.
), click an insertion point in any paragraph on the first page of 08Chap3.pmd, and
choose Edit > Edit Story.
In addition to using the Ctrl+E (Windows) or Command+E (Macintosh) keyboard

shortcut while the text is selected, another way to open story editor is to triple-
click the story with the pointer tool.
2 Choose Story > Display ¶ so that you can see the invisible characters in the
story, including the symbols that mark index entries. The index marker symbol is a
black rectangle with a white diamond inside ( ).
A quick way to insert an index entry is to select the text that should appear in
the index, choose Utilities > Index Entry, and if the words in the Index Entry
dialog box are correct, click OK. You begin by using Find to locate the phrase
International Yacht Racing Union and then add it to the index.
248 LESSON 8
Sailing publication
3 Display the Find dialog box by choosing
Utilities > Find or pressing Ctrl+F (Windows) or Command+F (Macintosh). To find the
first phrase that you want to add to the index, type International in the Find What
box, and click Find.
You have just created an index entry for the selected phrase. In story editor, a
marker symbol ( ) shows up to the left of the text you selected for the entry. This
marker contains the indexing information that you entered in the Index Entry dialog
box. As you create more index entries, you may find it faster to open the Index
Entry dialog box by using the keyboard shortcut: Ctrl+Y (Windows) or Command+Y
(Macintosh). Choosing the Page Reference option in the Index Entry dialog box adds
to the index entry the page number on which the index marker appears. Later in this
project, you use the Cross-Reference option to create entries that begin with
“See…” and “See also…”
4 When PageMaker finds the word International, close the Find window, and in story
editor, select the rest of the phrase International Yacht Racing Union. To display
the Index Entry dialog box, choose Utilities > Index Entry. The selected text
appears as a first-level topic. Be sure that Page Reference is selected, rather than
Cross-Reference, and click OK.
Customizing an index entry

In some cases, the words in the text aren’t in the right form or in the right order
for the index entry, so you need to take additional steps to create the entry you
want. You will create the next entry by typing text directly in the Index Entry
dialog box, rather than by selecting text. If you will be using the Find command
often, you don’t have to close the Find window. You can keep it open while you work
in story editor.
1 Go back three paragraphs to the one that
begins By the 1720s. Click an insertion point anywhere in the paragraph, and open
the Index Entry dialog box without selecting
Classroom in a Book
any text first. All the topic boxes are blank. Create a first-level topic by typing
racing boat to boat in the top Topic box.
3 Open the 08IdxFin.pmd publication in
the Final folder, and find the yacht racing entry.

Yacht racing is a first-level topic, and racing boat to boat and the other two
indented
entries under it are the second-level topics. PageMaker lets you create three
levels of topic entries. For basic first-level entries that don’t need any editing,
there’s a good keyboard shortcut. If you clicked OK now, you’d create a firstlevel
topic entry with that text. But you decide that it should be a second-level topic
entry instead.
2 Click the Promote/Demote button ( ) to move the entry down one level, and then
type yacht racing as a first-level topic. Click OK. 4 If necessary, use the Window
menu to
return to the story editor view of 08Chap3.pmd. In the paragraph just before the
one you’re in, which begins Yacht racing began, select the words Charles II. Press
Ctrl+Shift+Y (Windows) or Command+Shift+Y (Macintosh). That’s all you have to do.
PageMaker creates the index entry.
Indexing a range of pages

Now you will index a topic that is discussed in two sequential paragraphs. In
PageMaker you can set up an index marker to refer to a range of paragraphs so that
proper page numbers are generated even if the topic spans more than one page.
You’ve created a main (first-level) index entry that says yacht racing and a
secondlevel subentry that says racing boat to boat. If you are unfamiliar with the
concept of firstlevel and second-level entries, you can examine the final index.
1 Choose Utilities > Find, type Thames
Tonnage rule, select Current Story, and click Find. Notice that there are two
paragraphs (the first one found and the subsequent paragraph) that discuss this
topic.
2 Open the Index Entry dialog box. The selected phrase appears as a first-level
entry, but it should be a second-level topic. Click
250 LESSON 8
Sailing publication
the Promote/Demote button ( ) to change it to a second-level entry. Then type

Rating systems above it as a first-level entry. Select For Next __ Paragraphs and
type 2. Click OK.
2 If the Find dialog box is still open, close it,
and choose Utilities > Change. Type the word clubs for Find What, type the
characters ^; for Change To, and then select All Stories. Click Find.
The For Next __ Paragraphs option is one way to index a topic across a page break.
All pages where the specified paragraphs appear will appear in the index.
Note: The All Stories option will find matching text in any text block on any page,
including the master pages. The first occurrence is in the paragraph that begins By
the 1720s. It’s about the first racing clubs, which is relevant enough to index.
3 Click Change & Find to add an index
Indexing with the Find and Change commands

For the next indexing technique, you will use Find and Change to find a phrase and
create an index entry for it. PageMaker doesn’t really change the word, it only
adds an index entry. You want to find all occurrences of the word clubs and create
an index entry for each one. You can use the Change dialog box to do this quickly
and easily.
1 In story editor, scroll to the beginning of
marker and find the next occurrence of the word. The second occurrence is also
relevant.
4 Click Change & Find.
The third occurrence is in a paragraph that doesn’t really say anything substantial
about racing clubs.
5 Click Find Next to find the next occur-
the story, and click an insertion point in the title. You want to use the Change
option now, but you won’t be able to open it if the Find dialog box is open.
rence of the word without adding an index marker to the current occurrence. There
are no more instances of the word clubs in the remaining text, so the Search
Complete dialog box appears.
6 Click OK.
Classroom in a Book
Next you want to find occurrences of the word club (rather than clubs) and index the
occurrences as clubs where appropriate. The technique that you used in the last
step— typing ^; for Change To—won’t work here, because you want the index entry
(clubs) to be slightly different from the word you’re searching for. In the next
steps, you will use two different techniques: You will type the entry, and you will
choose the entry from a list of topics.
7 Click an insertion point at the beginning
Instead of clicking Find Next, you can use the keyboard shortcut: Ctrl+G (Windows)
or Command+G (Macintosh).
10 The next occurrence of club is not one for which you want to create an index
marker, so click Find Next. 11 The third occurrence needs to be
of the story. In the Change dialog box, type club for Find What, select the Whole
Word and All Stories options. Click Find. Note: You can use the Change dialog box
to find text without changing it, so that you don’t have to switch to the Find
dialog box.
8 The first occurrence is one you want to
indexed. Open the Index Entry dialog box and click Topic. Choose the letter C for
the Topic Section to display entries beginning with the letter C. Select clubs, and
hold down Shift (Windows) or Option (Macintosh) as you click OK to close the dialog
boxes.
12 In story editor, select the index marker
and choose Edit > Copy. You know you will be creating additional entries exactly
like the one in the previous procedure. Because an index marker includes complete
information for a single index entry, copying the index marker to the Clipboard
lets you paste an entire copy of the same entry wherever you need it.
13 Find club again. When you find the next
index, so open the Index Entry dialog box. (The quickest way is the keyboard
shortcut.) Click in the first-level topic box, and type clubs. Click OK to insert
the index marker.
9 To find the next occurrence of club, click
occurrence, click an insertion point before the word and paste the index marker you
copied. Click Find, and paste another marker right before the next occurrence.
After the fifth occurrence, you see the Search Complete dialog box. Click OK.
Find Next in the Find dialog box.

252 LESSON 8
Sailing publication
Indexing a proper name

In English, proper names appear in publication text with the first name first.
However, they are indexed by last name. PageMaker can automatically change the
order of a proper name so that it appears in the index by the last name.
1 Click an insertion point at the beginning
a title. The automatic name indexing you just used works with two-word names only,
so you will use a technique that will let PageMaker index three word names by last
name.
4 Click an insertion point in the first para-
of the story. Choose Utilities > Find to find the name Dixon Kemp. You want to index
this as Kemp, Dixon, but you don’t have to reverse the name manually. PageMaker
does it for you.
2 Press Ctrl+Alt+Y (Windows) or
graph of the story. Choose Utilities > Find and locate the name Sir William Perry.
In story editor, select the space between the words Sir and William, and replace it
with a non-breaking space by typing Ctrl+Alt+spacebar (Windows) or Option+spacebar
(Macintosh). A non-breaking space will make the title and the first name index as
one name, so that the automatic name indexing will work. You can use this technique
with any three-word name, such as a name including a title or a middle name.
5 Select the name Sir William Perry and
Command+Option+Y (Macintosh). PageMaker adds the index marker.

3 To see how the index entry will look, select the marker that PageMaker just added
to the left of Dixon Kemp (without selecting the name) and choose Utilities > Index
Entry. The dialog box shows the index entry for the selected marker. Notice that
the index entry reads Kemp, Dixon even though the text that you originally selected
read Dixon Kemp. Click OK.
then press Ctrl+Alt+Y (Windows) or Command+Option+Y (Macintosh).

6 Select the index marker that you just cre-
ated (without selecting the name), and open the Index Entry dialog box, either by
using the keyboard shortcut or by choosing Utilities > Index Entry. The dialog box
shows the correctly indexed name—Perry, Sir William. You see a ^s in between the
words Sir and William. This is the symbol for a non-breaking space that PageMaker
displays in dialog boxes, so that you can distinguish it from a normal space.
7 Click OK.
For the next index entry, you will find a name and then edit it in the Index Entry
dialog box. This name is different—it includes
Classroom in a Book
Adding a cross-reference A cross-reference is a kind of index entry that refers to

another index entry instead of to a page number. In the following steps, you will
create a cross-reference index entry that says associations, see Clubs.
1 Click anywhere in the text in story editor
to deselect the index marker you just edited. The location of the insertion point
doesn’t matter when you create a cross-reference, because a cross-reference does
not refer to a page.
2 Choose Utilities > Index Entry and select
To browse through existing topics, you can either click the Next Section button to
see the entries for the next letter of the alphabet, or choose another letter for
Topic Section to go directly to the desired section of the alphabet. You can use
these techniques to browse through existing index entries for this project.
4 Choose C for Topic Section to see a list of
entries in the current chapter that begin with the letter C. To see all the index
entries in all the publications in the book list, click the Import button.
5 Click clubs in the list of C entries, and then click OK.
Cross-Reference. Type associations as a first-level entry.
The options displayed in the bottom half of the dialog box change to those relevant
to cross-references.
3 Select See. To make the word see appear in
6 Click OK. Save 08Chap3.pmd.
italics, select Italic for X-Ref Override. Click the X-Ref button. In the Select
Cross-Reference Topic dialog box you can choose from any existing topic in the
index. This helps keep your topic list consistent. The list displays all entries
beginning with the chosen letter of the alphabet.
Previewing and editing the index You can edit any entry by selecting its marker
symbol in story editor and then opening the Index Entry dialog box. The information
for the selected marker will appear. You can then make whatever changes you want.
PageMaker offers you an
254 LESSON 8
Sailing publication
even more convenient way to edit entries, however. You can create a preview of the
index by using the Show Index feature and then edit any entry from within that
listing.
1 In story editor, choose Utilities > Show
OK to close the Add Index Entry dialog box. The new entry is visible in the list.
Click OK to close the Show Index dialog box. You’ll open the Show Index dialog box
again to edit another entry. Normally you would open Show Index just once to make
many changes, but for this project you will open Show Index again to learn how to
view only the index entries in the current publication, not throughout the entire
book list.
Index. PageMaker goes through all the publications in the book list for the
currently active publication. When the search is complete, it displays the Show
Index dialog box. The Index Section is set to A.
(Macintosh) as you choose Utilities > Show Index. Holding down Ctrl or Command
opens Show Index with the entries in the current publication only. The A section
appears by default. The words artificial materials are selected, because they are
the first entry for this letter.
4 Select associations, and then click Edit. In
In the Show Index dialog box, you can see the cross-reference associations, see
clubs that you just created. Earlier, you added a cross-reference using the Index
Entry command from the layout. You can also add a cross-reference from the Show
Index dialog box, because a cross-reference isn’t tied to a specific page. In the
following steps you will add an entry that cross-references the topic artificial
materials to the topic synthetic materials.
2 Click Add X-Ref. Type artificial materials for Level 1. Click X-Ref. Choose S for
Topic Section, scroll to the bottom of the list, select synthetic materials, and
then click OK. Click
the Edit Index Entry dialog box, change associations to organizations, and then
click OK. The Show Index dialog box automatically switches to the O section, where
the edited cross-reference is visible. Click Accept, and then click OK to exit.
Note: The Accept button lets you apply index changes you have made so far without
having to click OK. However, you still have to click OK and choose File > Save to
save the index changes to disk. Double-clicking an index entry is the same as
selecting it and clicking Edit.
5 Close 08Chap3.pmd. When you are asked
if you want to save changes, click Yes.

Classroom in a Book
Generating an index
You will quickly create a fully formatted index using the index entries you have
entered in this project. The sailing publication consists of more than one file, so
you will use the Book command to index all of the publications together.
1 Switch to 08IdxFin.pmd to see how the
3 Choose Utilities > Book to confirm that
this file contains an up-to-date book list, and then click Cancel to close the
dialog box. Note: You can create an index for a booked publication only from a file
that contains a book list. This file has a book list because earlier in this lesson
you created a book list in 08Chap3.pmd and then copied it to all the other files on
the list, including this one.
4 Choose Utilities > Create Index. In the
finished index will look. If the publication window does not fill the screen, click
the Maximize button in the right corner of the title bar to expand the window.
Create Index dialog box, be sure that Include Book Publications is selected. If
this option is not selected, PageMaker indexes only the current publication, not
the whole book.
INDEX
A
artificial materials. See synthetic materials
H
Hudson, William 15
rowing 5, 8
Q
Queen Elizabeth I 12 Queen Victoria 14
I
International Yacht Racing Union 25 formation of 15
B
boats early designs 5 propulsion of 5 British as shipbuilders 12 British royalty as
early sailors 12, 12–18 Buckley, John C. 15 buoyancy 5 importance of 4 in raft
construction 6
5 The Title option contains the text that will
R
rafts 6–9 advantages of 6 catamarans 5, 6 construction of 6 design of 6
disadvantages of 6 origins of 5 propulsion of 6 uses of 7 rating system Thames
Tonnage rule 25 Robinson, William Albert 16 Royal Cork Yacht Club 13 Royal Yacht
Club 14
J
Johnson, Alfred 15 Johnson, Dr. Samuel 11
K
Kemp, Dixon 25
L
logs as boats disadvantages 4 early improvements 5 origins of 4
C
canoes 7–9 advantages of 7 construction of 7 dugout canoes 7 evolution of 8 origins
of 5 outrigger canoes 5, 7 propulsion of 7–8 Charles I 12 Charles II 12, 24 clubs
24, 25, 26, 27, 28 Clyde Cruising Club 16 Creamer, Marvin 18 Crowninshield, George
13 Cruising Association 15 Cruising Club of America 16 Cumberland Sailing Society
14
M
Macgregor, John 15 Marin-Marie 16 McMullen, Richard Turrell 15 Middleton, Edward
Empsom 15 Morris, Lewis 13 Mulhauser, George 16
S
sailboats, small appeal of 15, 16 circumnavigation 16 cruising 16 early trips 13,
15 solo circumnavigation 15, 18 solo "firsts" 16–18, 17 trans-Atlantic crossings 15
sailing appeal of 3 as Olympic sport 15 dependence on wind 9 modern popularity 17–
18 reasons for 12 sailing books Down Channel 15 Sailing Alone Around the World 15
Yacht Cruising 16 sailing, commercial 9, 13 decline of 14 popularity of 11 sailing,
leisure 16 growth of 14 in Britain 12–18, 13 in Netherlands 12–18
appear as the title of the index. For this project, you can accept the default of
Index. If necessary, select Remove Unreferenced Topics.
N
navigation need for 4 North, Roger 13 Nutting, William Washburn “Typhoon Bill” 16
D
Dumas, Vita 16, 17 Dutch as early sailors 12 as shipbuilders 12
O
O’Brien, Conor 16 Olympic Games 15 organizations. See clubs
F
Fitch, Frank 15
P
planked boats 8–9 design of 8 propulsion of 8 Primoraz, Nicolas 15 propulsion
paddling 5, 7 planked boats 8 poling 5, 6
G
George III 13 George IV 14 Gerbault, Alain 16 Graham, R. D. 16 Graham, Robin Lee 18
29
2 In the 08Lesson folder, open
08Index.pmd, the publication you created from the index template. If the
publication window does not fill the screen, click the Maximize button in the right
corner of the title bar to expand the window.
In PageMaker, you can build a list of topics and reassign existing entries to
different topics. As topic assignments change during a project, some topics may end
up without references from any entries. Remove Unreferenced Topics ensures that
topics without entries aren’t included in the index.
256 LESSON 8
Sailing publication
In the next step, you will change the space that occurs between the entry and the
first page number. The default is two spaces, but you change it to a nonbreaking en
space. This prevents entries in which the number is on a line by itself.
6 Click Format. You will edit the Following
7 Hold down Shift to change the loaded text
icon to indicate semi-automatic text flow. Click at the intersection of the left
edge of the first column and the guide at 3 inches. The index text flows into the
first column from the guide to the bottom of the column.
8 Continue holding Shift as you click at the
Topic option. It is selected by default, so type a caret followed by a greater-than

symbol (^>). In this dialog box, this is the code for an en space. Click OK to exit
the Index Format dialog box, and then click OK again to generate the index.
intersection of the left edge of the second column and the horizontal guide at 3
inches. Continue to flow index text into the third column the same way you did in
the first two columns.
INDEX
A
D
“Typhoon Bill” 16
O
F
Fitch, Frank 15
P
paddling 5, 7 planked boats 8 poling 5, 6 rowing 5, 8
G
H
Hudson, William 15
B
construction 6
Q
I
R
Club 14
J
K
Kemp, Dixon 25
L
Note: To see what the other codes mean, look in the online Help. PageMaker compiles
the information from all the index markers you created, and then displays a loaded
text icon. You want to place the index in all three columns while leaving room for
the index title, so you will use semi-automatic text flow to start each column part
of the way down on the page.

14
M
S
sailing appeal of 3
N
navigation need for 4 North, Roger 13 Nutting, William Washburn
29
You want the index title to be above the three columns, so you’ll simply reflow the
title while keeping it threaded to the rest of the index.
block in the first column. Click the top windowshade of the first column to load the
text icon. Starting where the left edge of the first
Classroom in a Book
column meets the guide at 1.375 inches, drag the loaded text icon across and down
so that it spans the three columns and extends down past the guide at 2 inches.
place the remaining text. If you don’t have enough text left to do this, reduce the
size of the first two columns.
INDEX
A
in the U.S.A. 13 in U.S.A. 13 sailors 28 sails introduction of 5 on canoes 7 on

planked boats 8 on rafts 6 origins of 4–9 rigging of 9 Sanders, Jonathan W. 18 Sir
William Perry 24 Slocum, Captain Joshua 15 steam power 14–18 introduction of 3
success of 9 Stock, Ralph 16 synthetic materials 20
W
water earth coverage 4 Water Club of Cork 13 Webb, C. R. 15 Worth, Claude 16
Y
yacht clubs Cumberland Sailing Society 14 first 13 first in England 14
proliferation of 14 Royal Cork Yacht Club 13 Royal Yacht Club 14 The Yacht Club at
Cowes 14 Water Club of Cork 13 yacht racing early races 13–14 first recorded 12
racing boat to boat 24 yachting as sport of wealthy 13 yachts early designs 12, 13
first American 13 large 13 last royal yacht 14 steam-powered 14
H
Hudson, William 15
rowing 5, 8
Q
I
B
construction 6
T
tacking 9 The Yacht Club at Cowes 14
R
Club 14
J
K
Kemp, Dixon 25
L
C
14
M
S
sailing appeal of 3 as Olympic sport 15 dependence on wind 9 modern popularity 17–
18 reasons for 12 sailing books Down Channel 15 Sailing Alone Around the World 15
Yacht Cruising 16 sailing, commercial 9, 13 decline of 14 popularity of 11 sailing,
leisure 16 growth of 14 in Britain 12–18, 13 in Netherlands 12–18
N
navigation need for 4 North, Roger 13 Nutting, William Washburn “Typhoon Bill” 16
D
O
F
Fitch, Frank 15
P
paddling 5, 7 planked boats 8 poling 5, 6
G
30
29
Next, you will thread the remaining index text into three columns on the second
page of the index.
10 With the pointer tool still selected, click the text block in the third column,
and click the bottom windowshade handle of the third column. 11 On page 30 (the
second page of this publication), starting in the first column at the horizontal
guide at 1.375, drag to create a text block that fills roughly 13of the column /
down from the top. 12 Click the bottom windowshade handle, and starting at the
horizontal guide at 1.375, drag another text block roughly 13the size / of the
column. Then, starting in the third column at the guide at 1.375 inches, click to
Depending on how carefully you placed the columns on page 2, they may be uneven, so
you will use the Balance Columns plug-in to line up their bottom edges.
13 Select the pointer tool and select all three columns on this page. 14 Choose
Utilities > Plug-ins > Balance
Columns. Be sure the left icon is chosen for both Alignment and Add Leftover Lines.
Click OK.
258 LESSON 8
Sailing publication
These two choices tell PageMaker that you want to adjust the bottoms of the columns
rather than the tops and that if they can’t be exactly the same length, the extra
text should go on the left.
1 Open 08TocFin.pmd in 08Lesson/Final to
see what you’re about to create. If the publication window does not fill the screen,
click the Maximize button in the right corner of the title bar to expand the
window.
in the U.S.A. 13 in U.S.A. 13 sailors 28 sails introduction of 5 on canoes 7 on

planked boats 8 on rafts 6 origins of 4–9 rigging of 9 Sanders, Jonathan W. 18 Sir
William Perry 24 Slocum, Captain Joshua 15 steam power 14–18 introduction of 3
success of 9 Stock, Ralph 16 synthetic materials 20
T
tacking 9 The Yacht Club at Cowes 14
Royal Cork Yacht Club 13 Royal Yacht Club 14 The Yacht Club at Cowes 14 Water Club
of Cork 13 yacht racing early races 13–14 first recorded 12 racing boat to boat 24
yachting as sport of wealthy 13 yachts early designs 12, 13 first American 13 large
13 last royal yacht 14 steam-powered 14
W
water earth coverage 4 Water Club of Cork 13 Webb, C. R. 15 Worth, Claude 16
CONTENTS
LEAVING THE LAND TO SET
SAIL ................................................................ 3 Taking to
the water ........................................................................
4 Adding
sails .............................................................................
....... 4 Building better
boats ...................................................................... 5
Rafts .............................................................................
.................. 6
Canoes ............................................................................
............... 7 Planked
boats .............................................................................
.... 8 Rigging the
sails .............................................................................
9 THE EVOLUTION OF
SAILING .................................................................... 11 A
Dutch
treat .............................................................................
.. 12 Royal
yachting ..........................................................................
.... 12 A genteel
sport .............................................................................
13 Getting
organized .........................................................................
13 Getting steamed
up ...................................................................... 14 Still
cruising
along ........................................................................ 15
Sailing past
1900 .......................................................................... 15
The
1920s .............................................................................
....... 16 The
1930s .............................................................................
....... 16 The
1940s .............................................................................
....... 17 Modern
sailing ...........................................................................
.. 17
Masts and sails 22
Y
yacht clubs Cumberland Sailing Society 14 first 13 first in England 14
proliferation of 14
The Sloop Elia
11
SAILING & RACING THE WIND

TODAY ........................................................ 19 Boat
basics ............................................................................
........ 20 The
hull ..............................................................................
......... 20 The centerboard or
keel ................................................................ 21 Steering
mechanisms .................................................................... 21
The mast and
sails ........................................................................ 21
Sailing
basics ............................................................................
.... 23 Continuing
tradition .................................................................... 24
The rules of the
sea....................................................................... 25 The
great
races .............................................................................
26
INDEX .............................................................................
..................... 29
Key West Race Week 27
30
15 Save 08Index.pmd.
2 Open 08Chap3.pmd in the 08Lesson
Generating the table of contents

PageMaker creates a table of contents by assembling the text from paragraphs that
you designate. An easy and common technique is to set up a paragraph style that
includes heading paragraphs in the table of contents. Using this method it is
possible to build a table of contents without any manual intervention. In this
project, you will include the text of the first-, second-, and third-level heads in
the table of contents.
folder. Choose Type > Define Styles. Select Heading 1, click Edit, and click Para.
Select the Include in Table of Contents option. Click OK twice to get back to the
main Define Styles dialog box.
Classroom in a Book
3 Select Heading 2, and repeat the pro-
cess— click Edit, click Para, select Include in Table of Contents, click OK twice.
Do the same thing for Heading 3, and then click OK to accept all the style changes.
Save the chapter. You have just specified that the text of all three heading levels
in Chapter 3 should automatically be included in the table of contents. In the real
world, you’d have to do the same thing for each of the other chapters, or better
still, you would copy the Chapter 3 styles into the other chapters. In this
project, however, this step has already been done for you in the other two
chapters.
4 In the 08Lesson folder, open 08Toc.pmd,
PageMaker goes through all the publications in the book, updating the page
numbering and adding blank pages where necessary to ensure that each publication
begins on a right (odd-number) page. Now it’s time to generate the actual table of
contents.
6 Choose Utilities > Create TOC.
In the Create Table of Contents dialog box, the text in the Title box will appear
as the title of the table of contents.
7 For this project, leave the default title of
Contents. Be sure that Include Book Publi-
cations is selected. You would deselect this only if you wanted to create a table
of contents or paragraph list for just the current publication—not a common
situation.
8 For Format, leave the default of Page
the empty file that you created earlier from the table of contents template. Take a
quick look at the list of styles, and notice that they are the same ones that
appear in your chapter publications. Later on, you’ll see that PageMaker creates
some new paragraph styles for the generated table of contents text. Now that the
pages for this publication are final, you want to renumber the pages, making sure
that each publication (chapters, TOC, and index) still begins on a right page.
5 In 08Toc.pmd, choose Utilities > Book,
Number After Entry.

9 For Between Entry and Page number, the
^t designates a tab between the entry and page number. You can use regular spaces
instead, if you like, or you could use ^m to put in an em space. For now, leave the
tab. Click OK.
and in the Auto Renumbering section, click Next Odd Page (even if it is already
selected—otherwise you won’t be able to click OK). Click OK. Choose Yes when asked
if you want to renumber the pages now.
260 LESSON 8
Sailing publication
PageMaker informs you of its progress as it goes through the publications looking
for designated paragraphs. When it has completed the task, it presents you with an
icon loaded with the newly generated text.
10 Click the loaded text icon in 08Toc.pmd
1 Go to the first page of 08Toc.pmd, and
look in the Styles palette. Notice that PageMaker has added several new styles to
the list. Each one begins with the letters TOC.
near the top left corner of the page margins to place the generated text.
Contents
LEAVING THE LAND TO SET SAIL ......................3

Taking to the
water .............................................................................
........... 4 Adding
sails..............................................................................
...................... 4 Building better
boats .............................................................................
......... 5
Rafts .............................................................................
.................................................. 6
Canoes ............................................................................
................................................ 7 Planked
boats .............................................................................
..................................... 8
The Sloop Elia 11
You begin by editing the paragraph style for the title.

2 In the Styles palette, hold down Ctrl
Rigging the
sails .............................................................................
................ 9
THE EVOLUTION OF SAILING ......11

A Dutch
treat .............................................................................
.................. 12 Royal
yachting ..........................................................................
................... 12 A genteel
sport .............................................................................
................ 13 Getting
organized .........................................................................
............... 13 Getting steamed
up ................................................................................
...... 14 Still cruising
along .............................................................................
.......... 15 Sailing past
1900...............................................................................
........... 15
The
1920s .............................................................................
........................................ 16 The
1930s .............................................................................
........................................ 16 The
1940s .............................................................................
........................................ 17
Key West sailing 27 ModernRace
Week ..............................................................................
............... 17 Masts and sails 22
11 Save 08Toc.pmd.
(Windows) or Command (Macintosh) as you click the style TOC title. Click Char, and
choose Birch as the font. Type 64 for Size, and set Case to All Caps. Deselect
Bold, set the Track to Very Loose, and Horizontal scale to 105%. Click OK. Next,
click Para in the Style Options dialog box. Set the Alignment to Left, Left Indent
to 2.25, the First Indent to 0, and the Space After to .65 inch. Hold down Shift
(Windows) or Option (Macintosh) as you click OK to close all dialog boxes. In the
next steps, you define the other four styles that begin with TOC. The type
specifications are expressed using the notation x/x, which is a shorthand method by
which typographers and graphics designers describe type size and leading. For
example, 12/15 means 12 point type on 15 points of leading.
Formatting the table of contents

Your table of contents text is in place, but the appearance isn’t right. PageMaker
created a new paragraph tag for each requested paragraph style, but it used the
formatting of the source paragraphs as a default style definition. You will
customize the look of the table of contents by editing the paragraph styles
PageMaker automatically creates for a TOC.
(Windows) or Command (Macintosh) as you click TOC Heading 1. Click Char and
Classroom in a Book
specify 12/15 Myriad Condensed Bold. The Case is already set to All Caps, because
PageMaker picked up the attribute from the Heading 1 style in the chapters. Click
OK, click Para, and specify 2.25 for Left Indent, 0 for First Indent, and .2 for
Paragraph Space Before. Click OK. Click Tabs, click the rightaligned tab icon ( ),
and then choose the dotted line for Leader. Type 6.74 for Position. Click the
Position pop-up menu and choose Add Tab. Click OK twice to close both dialog boxes.
You will modify the next two styles using the same method you just used to edit the
TOC Heading 1 style.
4 For TOC Heading 2, specify Char settings
Making paragraph styles consistent You’re almost done. In the following steps, you
will make the style for the index title — TOC Index title—the same as the TOC
Heading 1 style. This is necessary because you are going to be generating the table
of contents one more time, to update it. The number of pages in the table of
contents changes as you apply formatting, and the new table of contents will reflect
the changed numbers. If you change the definition of the TOC Index title style, the
index title will be correctly formatted when the new table of contents is
generated.
1 If necessary, drag the bottom window-
of 11.5/15 AGaramond Regular. Specify Para settings of 2.5 for Left Indent and 0
for First Indent. For Tabs, add a right aligned, dotleader tab at 6.74. Remember
that you must choose Add Tab from the Position pop-up menu to record the new tab
position.
5 For TOC Heading 3, change the Char set-
shade handle of the text block down a little below the bottom margin so that you
can see the large word Index.
tings to 11.5/15 AGaramond Regular. Specify Para settings of 2.5 for Left Indent
and 0 for First Indent. Click Tabs and set a rightaligned, dot-leader tab at 6.74.
The word Index is still not formatted correctly. It should look the same as the
lines that have the TOC Heading 1 style applied to them. You will fix this in the
next topic.
6 With the pointer tool selected, hold down the Shift key to constrain the movement
to a single direction, and drag the text block so that the baseline of the title
(Contents) rests on the guide at about 2 inches. If necessary, choose View > Show
Guides.
), click in the last line, and look in the Styles palette to see that the line has
the TOC Index title paragraph style applied to it. Notice the capitalization and
spacing of the style name.
3 Click an insertion point in one of the lines
that has the TOC Heading 1 style applied to it. Hold down Ctrl (Windows) or Command
(Macintosh) as you click [No style] in the Styles palette to display the Style
Options dialog box.
4 Type TOC Index title for Name, being
careful to duplicate the capitalization and word spacing of the style name. Click
OK, and then click OK again when asked whether you want to replace the style.
262 LESSON 8
Sailing publication
You have now redefined the TOC Index title style to be exactly like the TOC Heading
1 style. When you regenerate the table of contents, everything will be formatted
correctly.
before it, you can add a space before the leader and format the space with the
attributes you want for the leader.
3 Go to the first entry that has the TOC
Heading 1 style applied to it, Leaving the Land to Set Sail. Select the text tool (
) and type a space immediately before the dot leader. Select the space you just
typed, and use the Control palette in character view to apply 11.5-point AGaramond.
Then choose Edit > Copy, because you want to use that space to format other leader
tabs in the following steps.
Regenerating the table of contents 1 Choose Utilities > Create TOC.

2 Select Replace Existing Table of Contents,
and click OK. PageMaker generates a new table of contents and replaces the old text
with the new table of contents text. The page numbers in the rest of the book have
changed to reflect the changes you made.
Formatting the dot leaders and page numbers The next problem is that the dot
leaders of the bold TOC entries are too heavy. The obvious solution is to select
the leader and apply different formatting, but if you try it, you’ll see what
actually happens.
1 Select a TOC Heading 1 leader without

SAIL ................................................................ 3 Taking to
the water ........................................................................
4 Adding
sails .............................................................................
boats ...................................................................... 5
Rafts .............................................................................
.................. 6
Canoes ............................................................................
............... 7 Planked
boats .............................................................................
.... 8 Rigging the
sails .............................................................................
9 THE EVOLUTION OF
SAILING .................................................................... 11 A
Dutch
treat .............................................................................
.. 12 l h
4 The next TOC Heading 1 paragraph, The
Evolution of Sailing, doesn’t have a space
selecting the space that precedes it.

2 Apply 11.5-point AGaramond (not bold)
before the dot leader, so after the word Sailing, paste the formatted space you
copied in the previous step.
5 In the same way, paste the formatted space
to it. The dot leader is still big and bold because it derives its formatting from
the last character before the dot leader begins. However, you don’t want to change
the paragraph formatting of the TOC entry. To reformat any kind of tab leader
differently than the characters
after the entries on the remaining TOC Heading 1 line and to the index title line.
Your table of contents should now match the sample file 08TocFin.pmd. You’ve
completed the table of contents, and, in fact,
Classroom in a Book
you’ve completed the book. You’ll hide the guides so that you can see the completed
layout more clearly.
2 Choose File > Print. Make sure that a PPD
appropriate for your printer is selected, if you have a PostScript printer.

Otherwise, select the appropriate printer. Note: You can also use the Export Adobe
PDF command, as described in Creating an Adobe PDF version of the flyer on page 41.
3 Select Print All Publications in Book.
CONTENTS
SAIL ................................................................ 3 Taking to
the water ........................................................................
4 Adding
sails .............................................................................
boats ...................................................................... 5
Rafts .............................................................................
.................. 6
Canoes ............................................................................
............... 7 Planked
boats .............................................................................
.... 8 Rigging the
sails .............................................................................
9 THE EVOLUTION OF
SAILING .................................................................... 11 A
Dutch
treat .............................................................................
.. 12 Royal
yachting ..........................................................................
.... 12 A genteel
sport .............................................................................
13 Getting
organized .........................................................................
13 Getting steamed
up ...................................................................... 14 Still
cruising
along ........................................................................ 15
Sailing past
1900 .......................................................................... 15
The
1920s .............................................................................
....... 16 The
1930s .............................................................................
....... 16 The
1940s .............................................................................
....... 17 Modern
sailing ...........................................................................
.. 17
Masts and sails 22
The Sloop Elia
11
SAILING & RACING THE WIND
TODAY ........................................................ 19 Boat
basics ............................................................................
........ 20 The
hull ..............................................................................
......... 20 The centerboard or
keel ................................................................ 21 Steering
mechanisms .................................................................... 21
The mast and
sails ........................................................................ 21
Sailing
basics ............................................................................
.... 23 Continuing
tradition .................................................................... 24
The rules of the
sea....................................................................... 25 The
great
races .............................................................................
26
INDEX .............................................................................
..................... 29
Key West Race Week 27
This choice is available to you because the publication that you’re in has a book
list in it. If the current publication doesn’t contain a book list, this choice is
grayed out. The other choices in the Print Document dialog box are the same as for
a document that doesn’t use a book list.
4 Select Print Blank Pages to print any blank pages that PageMaker may have added
to make each publication begin on a right page.
6 Choose View > Hide Guides. 7 Save 08Toc.pmd.
Printing the book

You can print a booked publication from any one of the publications within the
book. You should first check the book list contained in the publication to be sure
it’s up to date.
1 In 08Toc.pmd, choose Utilities > Book,
This publication uses a paper size larger than Letter, so if your printer cannot
print on paper larger than Letter size, you can automatically shrink it to fit the
selected paper size.
5 If you want to print, click Paper, click
and check the list to be sure it contains 08Toc.pmd, 08Chap1.pmd, 08Chap2.pmd,

08Chap3.pmd, and 08Index.pmd, in that order. Click Next Odd Page, and then click
OK. If PageMaker asks you if you want to renumber the pages, click Yes.
Reduce to Fit in the Scale section, and then click Print. If you don’t want to
print, save the printing settings you specified by holding down Shift and clicking
Done.
6 Close all open files, and quit PageMaker
When asked if you want to save changes, click Yes.

264 LESSON 8
Sailing publication
Review questions
1 What are the benefits of combining publications into a book list? 2 How do you
make PageMaker copy your
a heading style, click Edit, click Para, select Include in Table of Contents, and
click OK for all dialog boxes.
5 It means the type should have a size of 18
book list into every file in the book list?

3 What is the fastest way to create an index entry from a word? 4 What’s the
easiest way to set up the entries in a table of contents? 5 What does it mean when
a designer or
points and a leading of 20 points.
typographer specifies type as 18/20?
Answers
1 A book list lets you automate the
following tasks:
• •
Number several publications sequentially
Generate a table of contents for multiple publications Generate an index for

multiple publications (Macintosh) and choose Utilities > Book.
2 Hold down Ctrl (Windows) or Command 3 Select the word and press Ctrl+Shift+Y
(Windows) or Command+Shift+Y (Macintosh). You can also open Story Editor, choose
Utilities > Change, type the word for Find What and type ^; for Change To, click
Find, and then click Change or Change & Find.
4 Set up a heading style to include all head-
ings with that style in the table of contents. To do so, choose Type > Define
Styles, select
Lesson 9
Built-in support for both HTML and PDF in PageMaker 7.0 makes it easier to publish
new or existing PageMaker files online. In this project you will prepare a back
issue of a newsletter for the Web. You will add hyperlinks, or active areas, to the
newsletter, so that your audience can navigate to different pages or Web sites.
Then you’ll export and view the newsletter in PDF and HTML, comparing how each
format affects the production workflow and the readability of the publication.
266 LESSON 9
In this project you create a World Wide Web page from an existing newsletter
originally designed for print. The newsletter is in an archive of back issues that
are now being distributed on the Web. You will add hyperlinks so that someone can
navigate the publication on the Web, and then you will export it as Adobe PDF and
as HTML to compare the capabilities of each format. You will also use Adobe PDF and
HTML export options to enhance the on-screen readability of the newsletter. In this
project you will learn how to:
• •
Before you begin

information, see “Copying the Classroom in a Book files” on page 4.
2 Make sure that the AGaramond, AGaramond Bold, Myriad Bold, Myriad Bold Italic,
Myriad Condensed, Myriad Condensed SemiBold Italic, Myriad Roman, Poplar, Trajan,
and Zapf Dingbats fonts are installed on your system.
Add and edit hyperlinks.
Export a publication to Adobe PDF with the original layout intact. Identify areas
of a publication that cannot be reproduced using HTML.
Prepare text for HTML export by associating HTML paragraph formats with PageMaker
paragraph styles. Prepare publication graphics for HTML export. Export a
publication to HTML, approximating the original layout. Use a Web browser to
preview the Web pages you created and saved on your hard disk. This project should
take you about 2 hours to complete.
Windows only: Because of the way Windows handles fonts, you must apply bold to
Myriad Roman to use Myriad Bold; you must apply bold and italic to Myriad Roman to
use Myriad Bold Italic; and you must apply bold and italic to Myriad Condensed to
use Myriad Condensed SemiBold Italic.
3 Make sure that Acrobat Reader, Acrobat Distiller, and an Acrobat Reader-
compatible Web browser are installed. Also, make sure you have enough RAM to run
PageMaker, Distiller and Reader at the same time. You will use Reader and Distiller
for the PDF section of the lesson.
Note: The RAM requirements above apply only when creating online documents. Viewing
them requires much less RAM. HTML documents require only a Web browser to view
them, and PDF documents require only Acrobat Reader.
Classroom in a Book
4 Make sure that the PostScript driver pro-
vided with the PageMaker application is installed. On Mac OS, select a PostScript
printer in the Chooser.
5 Start the Adobe PageMaker application. 6 Open 09Begin.pmt in the 09Lesson folder.
versions of the publication, so you can compare them and evaluate the production
requirements of each format.
Comparing HTML and PDF

PageMaker supports both HTML and PDF because the wide range of online publishing
scenarios is not completely covered by either format. For example, some documents
will only be read online, while others are meant to be printed after they are
downloaded. HTML and PDF are complementary technologies that can cover most
publishing scenarios between them. They can link to each other, and a PDF document
can be embedded in an HTML page. HTML, or Hypertext Markup Language, is the file
format used by most of the pages on the World Wide Web. HTML is primarily a set of
tags that describe the sequence of text and graphics and the location of hypertext
links. Basic HTML is essentially one column of text with graphics that flow along
with the text, as if they were characters themselves. PDF, or Portable Document
Format, is a cross-platform format that is popular on the Web. You can create PDF
from any program that prints, so that you can author with software you already use.
With Acrobat Reader it is easy to view PDF documents in a Web
If the publication window does not already fill the screen, click the Maximize
button. Save the publication as 09Work.pmd in the 09Lesson folder. What you see is
the newsletter as it was originally printed. The publisher wants to make back
issues of the newsletter accessible via the Web, rather than storing them and
mailing them to readers. Of course, the design of the newsletter is not optimal for
on-screen viewing, so it would be best to redesign the publications for the screen.
The publishers, however, do not have the time or the resources to redesign several
years of back issues. Instead, they will use features in PageMaker to make the
newsletter easier to read on-screen in either PDF or HTML.
7 Set up the palettes you will need for this
lesson. If the Hyperlinks, Styles, and Colors palettes are not visible, choose
Window > Show Hyperlinks and Window > Show Colors. Drag the tab of the Hyperlinks
palette onto the already combined Styles and Colors palette to combine all three.
Close any other open palettes. To prepare this publication for online distribution,
you will first add hyperlinks to the publication to allow online navigation through
the publication. After that, you will learn how to create HTML and Adobe PDF
268 LESSON 9
browser. PDF preserves the original typography, graphics quality, and layout
precision of the original, and can include interactive forms and multimedia. You
can compare the different ways that the archived newsletter can appear online by
viewing the final HTML and PDF versions of the newsletter, which are provided on the
Classroom in a Book CD. To do this, you will use a Web browser to open files on disc
instead of over the Web.
1 Start a Web browser. In the Web browser,
This version of the newsletter was exported from PageMaker as a PDF document. It is
identical to the original in every way.
2 In the Web browser, choose File > Open
File, and double-click 09FnlHtm.htm in 09Lesson/09FinHtm. If necessary, click the

Maximize button to enlarge the browser window.
open 09FnlPdf.pdf in 09Lesson/09FinPdf. The command you use to do this may vary
depending on the browser, but it is usually File > Open File. If you don’t see the
09FnlPdf.pdf file, you may need to choose All from a file format pop-up menu in order
to see PDF documents. In many Macintosh applications, pressing Option as you choose
File > Open File displays all file types. Or on either platform, it may be easiest
just to drag the PDF file into the browser window.
This version of the newsletter was exported from PageMaker using HTML options that
approximate the original page layout. If you are familiar with dragging between
programs, and your browser supports drag-and-drop, you can simply drag HTML or PDF
files from their folder window to the browser window.
Classroom in a Book
Adding hyperlinks
Hyperlinks are one of the most significant differences between printed pages and Web
pages. A Web page can contain hyperlinks to other Web pages or other parts of the
same page. When you click a hyperlink, the Web browser takes you to the destination
of the link. Hyperlinks can be invisible or appear as specially marked text or
images on the page, depending on the page design and the viewing application. In
PageMaker, the Hyperlinks palette makes it easy to create links. Hyperlinks you
create will be active in your final document whether you export it to PDF or HTML.
One of the most important uses of a link is navigation. When a publication is on
paper, navigating through it is simply a matter of physically turning pages. On the
Web, you navigate with hyperlinks. A hyperlink consists of two parts: an anchor (a
destination) and a source (an object that jumps to an anchor). A source can jump to
only one anchor, but an anchor can be a destination for more than one source.
Before you start creating hyperlinks, you may find it helpful to see how the
hyperlinks will work when the publication is complete.
1 In 09FnlHtm.htm, scroll to the top if
necessary.
2 Click the word Exercise. The browser
takes you to the third page and its topic, Walking Your Way to Fitness.
3 Scroll to the bottom of the page and click
Return to Contents. The browser takes you back to the first page. Try out the
hyperlinks to the other pages. After the following steps, the publication you are
working on will have a complete set of hyperlinks just like the ones you just
tried. You will create hyperlinks in 09Work.pmd, which you saved earlier. You will
then save two other versions of this publication: one that you export to Adobe PDF,
and another that you will adapt for and export to HTML. Because the hyperlinks will
be active in both formats, you will create them now, before you create the other
versions of the publication.
Creating hyperlink anchors

A B
Working with hyperlinks is easier if you develop hyperlinks in an organized way, so

for this project you’ll set up each page as an anchor, then you’ll make a second
pass through the document setting up sources that jump to the anchors.
A. Hyperlink anchor (destination) B. Hyperlink source (jump)

270 LESSON 9
1 Switch to 09Work.pmd. If the publication
3 Go to page 2 and, with the text tool still
window does not already fill the screen, click the Maximize button. Select the text
tool ( ), and on page 1, highlight the text CONTENTS.
HEALTH WATCH
FIGURING OUT FAT Counting calories is important to reach or maintain a healthy
weight. But consider the source of the calories:
1 gram fat = 9 calories 1 gram protein = 4 calories
selected, select the word Nutrition at the top of the page. Choose Edit > Copy.
Click the New Anchor button ( ), paste to create the name of the new anchor, and
then click OK.
N u t r i t i o n
CONTENTS
Committing to a healthy life-style is easier when you know how your body uses the
foods you eat. Here are some facts to help you make healthful decisions about
nutrition and exercise.
SAVVY ABOUT SERVINGS You’ve probably heard this advice
Nutrition ................................................ 2
Exercise ....................................................3
Lifestyle .................................................. 4
By late morning, Johnny had lost interest in what his teacher was
A GOOD NIGHT’S SLEEP
2 Click the Hyperlinks tab to display the
Hyperlinks palette. Choose New Anchor from the Hyperlinks palette menu. Type
Contents, and then click OK. The new anchor appears in the Hyperlinks palette with
an anchor icon next to it. The black symbol to the right of the anchor name
indicates that the object to which this anchor is assigned is selected, and the
outline around the icon indicates that the anchor is text selected with the text
tool (as opposed to an entire text block).
Clicking the New Anchor button is the same as choosing New Anchor from the palette
menu.
selected, select the word Exercise at the top of the page, and choose Edit > Copy.
Click the New Anchor button, choose Edit > Paste, and then click OK.
selected, select the word Lifestyle at the top of the page, and then choose Edit >
Copy. Click the New Anchor button, choose Edit > Paste, and then click OK.
6 Save 09Work.pmd.
On page 2, you will create an anchor using a faster method.
In the Hyperlinks palette, you can see that you have created an anchor for every
page. Remember that an anchor is only half of a
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
○
1 gram carbohydrates = 4 calories
You get more than double the calories from the fat you eat than from protein or
carbohydrates. Put another way, you get more calories from a small amount of fatty
food than a large amount of lean food.
BLUNDERS
Scrambled eggs. Use an egg substitute to eliminate cholesterol. You can even add
ham and toast, as long as you skip the butter or margarine But the ham BREAKFAST
TIPS Avoid skipping breakfast or grabbing high-calorie fast foods by following
these quick tips:
breakfast
Classroom in a Book
hyperlink—it’s just the destination. You still need to create sources that jump to
the anchors.
You will create the next source using a faster method.

3 With the text tool, select the word Exer-
Creating hyperlink sources

Like anchors, you create sources using the Hyperlinks palette.
1 Go to page 1. With the text tool still
cise. You want this link to jump to the Exercise anchor, so in the Hyperlinks
palette, click the anchor icon ( ) next to the word Exercise. Type Contents to
Exercise, and then click OK.
selected, select the word Nutrition in the Table of Contents. You want this link to
jump to the Nutrition anchor.
HEALTH WATCH
1 gram fat = 9 calories 1 gram protein = 4 calories
CONTENTS
SAVVY ABOUT SERVINGS You’ve probably heard this advice
Nutrition ................................................ 2
Exercise ....................................................3
Lifestyle .................................................. 4
2 In the Hyperlinks palette, select the Nutrition anchor name in the palette (don’t
click the anchor icon), and then choose New Source from the Hyperlinks palette
menu. Type Contents to Nutrition, and then click OK.
You can type any source name you want, but each name in the Hyperlinks palette must
be different. For this project, the sources are named so that you can tell where
they jump.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
○
1 gram carbohydrates = 4 calories
food than a large amount of lean food. A GOOD NIGHT’S SLEEP
Clicking the anchor icon is the same as choosing New Source from the Hyperlinks
palette menu with an anchor name selected in the palette.
4 Create a new source from the word
Lifestyle on page 1 to the Lifestyle anchor in the Hyperlinks palette. Name it

Contents to Lifestyle.
You’ve completed the hyperlinks that jump from the contents page to all of the
sections in the newsletter.
272 LESSON 9
Adding a source on a master page

Now you will add a way for people to get back to the contents page from any page.
You will do this by adding a source that jumps to the Contents page. Note: You
can’t add an anchor to a master page because an anchor is a destination on one
specific page, and a master page item appears on multiple pages.
1 Go to the master page. Choose View >
tions of GIF, JPEG, and Web browsers. For more information about how PageMaker
converts graphics for HTML, see chapter 12 in the Adobe PageMaker 7.0 User Guide.
All graphic formats are supported when you export to Adobe PDF. Text and graphics
in PDF are compressed for Web delivery.
2 With the button graphic still selected,
Show Guides. Select the pointer tool, choose File > Place, and double-click the
09ArtA.tif file in the 09Lesson folder. Click the loaded graphic icon below the page
margin and between the vertical guides. Press the arrow keys to nudge the graphic
so that it is centered in the space between the page margin, the page edge, and the
vertical guides.
click the anchor icon next to the word Contents in the Hyperlinks palette to create
a source that jumps to the Contents anchor. Type Return to Contents, and then click
OK. A black icon appears to the right of the anchor name, indicating that the
object to which this anchor is assigned is selected. The icons appear in one of two
sizes: Large icons indicate a text link, and small icons indicate a graphics link.
3 Go to page 1, and save 09Work.pmd.
Vol. 10 - No. 27
RM
The graphic for the Return button is a TIFF image. You may be accustomed to using
graphic formats such as GIF and JPEG for HTML Web pages. However, any graphic
format PageMaker supports will convert to GIF or JPEG when you export to HTML.
Regardless of the format you use, you must still consider how well the colors and
resolution can be reproduced within the limita-
Because you added the Return to Contents button graphic and hyperlink to the master
page, it will appear automatically on all of the pages which use the Document
Master page. Because Page 1 contains the table of contents, however, the Return to
Contents button and other master page items have been hidden on this page by
deselecting the View > Display Master Items command.
Classroom in a Book
Testing hyperlinks
You have completed all of the changes that make this a useful online publication.
You can test the hyperlinks you created to make sure they work properly. You test
hyperlinks using the hand tool.
This preference doesn’t affect how the hyperlinks are exported, it only affects how
hyperlinks work when you test them in PageMaker.
5 Click the Return to Contents button at the
).
When you select the hand tool, all hyperlinks are outlined in blue. The blue
outlines only appear in PageMaker, to help you identify hyperlinks as you test
them.
2 Move the hand tool over the word Nutri-
bottom of the page. This time the destination page displays using the same view
that was in effect the last time you viewed this page.
6 On page 1, click the word Exercise. After
the Exercise page appears, choose Layout > Go Back. The Go Back and Go Forward
commands are another way to follow the trail of hyperlinks you’ve created in
PageMaker. These commands can be useful when you are testing links and don’t have
them all built yet.
7 Save 09Work.pmd.
tion in the table of contents. The hand tool changes into a pointing hand,
indicating that the word Nutrition is a hyperlink.
CONTENTS
SAVVY ABOUT SERVINGS
Nutrition ................................................ 2
Exercise ....................................................3
Lifestyle .................................................. 4
3 Click the word Nutrition. PageMaker
takes you to the Breakfast Blunders section, and centers the anchor you created on
that page. You may not like the way the window centers around the anchor. You can
change this behavior so that a destination page is always centered in the window
after a hyperlink jump.
4 Choose File > Preferences > Online. Click to deselect the Center Upper-Left of
Anchor when Testing Hyperlinks option. Click OK.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
○
HEALTH WATCH
1 gram fat = 9 calories 1 gram protein = 4 calories 1 gram carbohydrates = 4
calories
food than a large amount of lean food.
Adapting color for the Web

The newsletter was originally designed for inexpensive printing with two colors—
black, and one spot color. You will change the second color to one that displays
well on 8-bit monitors for viewing on the Web. The second color originally used in
this publication may not correspond to a color in the 216-color palette used by Web
browsers, so to ensure predictability when this page is viewed on 8-bit monitors,
you will edit the color to match a color in the online palette.
274 LESSON 9
1 Display the Colors palette. Select
PANTONE 138 CVU, and then choose Color Options from the Colors palette menu.
native for every tint. Also, to fully adapt publication colors for 8-bit Web
viewing, you must also respecify color in the original files of all imported color
graphics (except photographs). You can select a color quickly by typing the color
name into the Color Picker.
Exporting to Adobe PDF

2 In the Color Options dialog box, choose
Online from the Libraries pop-up menu. The colors in this library are named after
their position in the 216-color Web palette (before the dash) and their hexadecimal
value, the way in which color is specified in HTML (after the dash). The color
183FF9900 should be selected automatically as it is the closest match.
3 Click OK to close the Color Picker, and
It won’t take long to prepare a Web-ready Adobe PDF version of this publication.
You have already created hyperlinks to help navigate the publication, so all you do
now is add document information and export. First you will save a new copy of the
publication from which you will export to Adobe PDF. After this part of the lesson
is complete you will return to 09Work.pmd and save another copy of the publication
from which you will export an HTML version.
1 Choose File > Save As. Save the publica-
then click OK to close the Color Options dialog box. The color name updates in the
Colors palette.
4 Save 09Work.pmd.
tion 09Work.pmd as 09PWork.pmd in the 09Lesson folder. You will use 09PWork.pmd to
create the Adobe PDF version, so keep it open. When you export to Adobe PDF,
PageMaker automatically starts Acrobat Distiller, which processes the file and
produces an Adobe PDF version.
2 If you do not have enough free RAM to
Note: Although you may be able to find a color in the online browser palette that
approximates the original color well, tints based on the spot color are variations
which may not correspond to any color on the online palette. In this publication,
the designer has chosen to let the browser dither the tints rather than spend the
time finding a non-dithering alter-
run Acrobat Distiller simultaneously with PageMaker, close all open applications
other than PageMaker.
Classroom in a Book
3 Choose File > Export > Adobe PDF.
Note: In Mac OS, be sure you have already selected a PostScript driver in the
Chooser.
4 In the PDF Options dialog box, select
name. Type Volume 10 Number 27 in the text box. Leave the Author and Keyword
entries as is. Document information is often used to refine index searches in
document collections. For this reason, you should always replace the file name with
the document title. (Note this and Security are the only panels in this dialog box
in which you can change information without defining a new PDF Style.)
OnScreen for PDF Style and Acrobat for the Printer Style. (The Acrobat printer
style is created automatically the first time you export to PDF. For information on
creating and editing PDF styles and printer styles, see chapter 12 of the Adobe
PageMaker 7.0 User Guide.)
In this part of the lesson, you’ll use the default settings in the PDF Options
dialog box to create your Adobe PDF file. For most projects, these default settings
are adequate. Later in the lesson, though, you’ll look at the options that you can
change if you need to change the file size or image quality, for example.
5 Click the Doc Info tab, and enter informa-
6 Click Export. 7 In the Export PDF As dialog box, make sure the filename is
09PWork.pdf. Select the View PDF option (Windows) or View PDF Using option (Mac OS)
if you want to open the newly created Adobe PDF file in Acrobat or Acrobat Reader
rather than save it and open it at a later time. Click Save to save the PDF version
into the 09Pdf folder in the 09Lesson folder.
tion for filename, subject, author and keyword. For Title, select and delete the file
name. Type Healthy Living in the Title text box. For Subject, select and delete the
file
276 LESSON 9
PageMaker creates a PostScript file, and then starts Acrobat Distiller to convert
the PostScript into Adobe PDF. This may take a few minutes, depending on the speed
of your computer. Note: On Mac OS, a window opens showing the progress of
Distiller. The setting displayed in this window may not match those you selected in
the PDF Options dialog box. Your PDF files will be created using the correct
settings you specified. Acrobat or Acrobat Reader will launch automatically and
display the Adobe PDF version of your file. Close this PDF file and Acrobat or
Acrobat Reader when you have finished reviewing it. If the PDF file doesn’t open
automatically, navigate to the 09PDF folder and double click the 09PWork.pdf.
Acrobat or Acrobat Reader will launch and open the newly created Adobe PDF file.
1 Start a Web browser. Choose File > Open
File, and double-click 09PWork.pdf in the 09Pdf folder in the 09Lesson folder.
Note: If you don’t see the 09PWork.pdf file, you may need to choose All from a file
format pop-up menu in order to see PDF documents. In many Macintosh applications,
pressing Option as you choose File > Open File displays all file types.
Viewing the PDF version in a Web browser

Now you’ll see how the PDF file can be viewed in a Web browser. A Web browser uses
the Acrobat Reader and the PDFViewer browser plug-in to display a PDF file. When you
install Acrobat Reader, the installer automatically sets up Acrobat Reader and the
plug-in. Once again you will simulate Web viewing by using a Web browser to open
the completed file from your hard disk. If a person chooses to print this document,
the printed version will look just like the original.
2 Make sure the hand tool is selected in the Acrobat toolbar. Click the word
Nutrition. The browser takes you to the Nutrition page. 3 Click the Return to
Contents button at the bottom of the page. 4 On page 1, click the word Lifestyle.
The
browser takes you to the Lifestyle page. This is a good time to test the PDF
article you set up.
Classroom in a Book
5 Move the hand tool over the first para-
graph of the story. The hand tool turns into the article tool. Click the first
paragraph. The text you clicked is magnified to fit in the browser window.
6 When you have read to the bottom of the column, click that paragraph. Notice how
Acrobat advances to the top of the next column where the article continues.
Continue clicking forward in the story. To backtrack along the article, hold down
Shift as you click. When you reach the end of the article, notice that your next
click displays the entire page again.
Depending on your publication and service provider requirements, you may sometimes
need to customize the Distiller job options.
1 Choose File > Open, and open
09PWork.pmd in the 09Lesson folder.

2 Choose File > Export > Adobe PDF to
open the PDF Options dialog box. Save the file if necessary. The PDF Options dialog
box is where you control how content in the PageMaker file is converted—whether
hypertext links are maintained, for example—as well as add PDF-based functionality
such as security and document information.
3 Choose On Screen from the PDF Style
If the text seems too large when you view an article, switch to Acrobat Reader,
choose File > Preferences > General and lower the Max “Fit Visible” Magnification
value. Any other changes you make to Acrobat Reader preferences will affect how a
PDF displays in a browser.
7 Click Return to Contents. 8 When you are finished testing the PDF page, close the
Web browser and Acrobat Reader. 9 Switch to PageMaker and close
pop-up menu because you are preparing a Web-ready PDF version of the newsletter. A
PDF style is a file that defines a particular set of PDF Options settings. You can
choose between two predefined styles (On Screen and Print), you can define your own
PDF styles, or you can use imported styles provided by colleagues. Notice that
after you choose On Screen for the PDF Style, editing almost any of the settings on
any of the panels in the PDF Options dialog box, causes the PDF Style pop-up menu
to revert to blank. The two default PDF Style settings—On Screen and Print—cannot
be edited. However, you can use either as a basis for creating a custom PDF style,
as you did in Lesson 7. For information on printer styles, see chapter 12 in the
Adobe PageMaker 7.0 User Guide.
09PWork.pmd if needed. If PageMaker asks you to save changes, click Yes.
Setting PDF Options

Earlier in this lesson, you created an Adobe PDF file using the Export Adobe PDF
command and the Distiller default job options.
278 LESSON 9
Take a moment to check the range of options you can set in the PDF Options dialog
box.
4 If needed, click the General tab.
pare for page-at-a-time downloading (byte serving) from Web servers. This makes for
faster access and viewing when downloading the file from the Web or a network.
6 Click the Compression tab.
The On Screen PDF Style uses the Distiller Screen job options (displayed in the Job
Name pop-up menu) to convert the PageMaker document. The Distiller Screen job
options are optimized to create Adobe PDF files appropriate for display on the World
Wide Web or an intranet, or for distribution through an e-mail system. This option
set produces the smallest PDF file size and optimizes files for byte serving.
5 To see the default values for the Distiller Screen job options, click Edit Job
Options to open the Screen Job Options dialog box. This is the same dialog box,
controlling the same options, as you will see in Distiller 5.0.
Color and grayscale images above 108 dpi are downsampled to 72 dpi. Distiller
determines the best compression method and quality for color or grayscale images—
JPEG is applied to 8-bit grayscale images and to 8bit, 16-bit, and 24-bit color
images when the images have continuous, smooth tones. ZIP is applied to 2-bit, 4-
bit, and 8-bit grayscale images; to 4-bit color images and indexed 8bit color
images; and to 16-bit and 24-bit color images when the images have sharp color
changes.
7 Click the Fonts tab. Notice that the Base
fonts are embedded, and all embedded fonts are subsetted to reduce file size.
8 Click the Color tab.
The value of None in the Settings File popup menu means that information contained
in the PostScript file is used to manage color. Unmanaged color spaces in the
PostScript file are converted to RGB.
9 Click the Advanced tab.
Notice that Allow PostScript File to Override Job Options is selected, allowing
Distiller to use settings stored in a PostScript file, rather than the current job
options. Notice that the Compatibility options is set to Acrobat 3.0, and the
Optimize for Fast Web View option is selected. The Optimize for Fast Web view
option compresses text and line art and restructures the file to pre10Click Cancel
to exit the Screen Job Options dialog box without making any changes and return to
the PDF Options dialog box.
Classroom in a Book
11 Click the Hyperlinks tab. Verify that the
Internal Links option is selected to preserve the hyperlinks you just created. The
appearance of the links and the magnification are also set in this panel.
12 Click the Articles/Bookmarks tab. Verify that the Export Articles option is
selected.
fit the width of your screen so that a column of small type becomes easy to read and
follow.
13 Click the Security tab to set options to limit access to Adobe PDF files and
restrict features such as printing and editing. Because you are using the On Screen
PDF Style, no security is applied to documents.
For complete information on the options in the PDF Options dialog box, see chapter
12 in the Adobe PageMaker 7.0 User Guide.
14 Click Cancel to exit the PDF options dia-
log box.
15 Choose File > Close, and close
09PWork.pmd without saving any changes.
Preparing the HTML version

The tall columns of text on the pages of the newsletter in this lesson often don’t
fit on the screen at a readable size, because the newsletter was designed for print.
As you follow a story from the bottom of one column to the top of another, you may
find that you have to scroll up or down, making it tedious to read on screen. In
PDF, you can make it easier for a person to follow a story by setting up each story
as an article. In a publication that uses threaded stories, a PDF article
automatically leads a person wherever the text goes, even if it jumps to other
pages. Also, an article is automatically magnified to Many simple print publications
translate well to HTML, but because there are significant differences between HTML
and print, republishing print-oriented documents in HTML usually requires some
modification. You can use PageMaker to adapt print-oriented publications for HTML
without programming HTML code, but the capabilities of HTML still determine how
faithful the conversion will be to the original design. Also, because PageMaker is
capable of creating publications for print or online distribution, you can do many
things in PageMaker that cannot be done using HTML. For these reasons,
understanding the capabilities of HTML will help your publications work well on the
Web. HTML may seem limiting from
280 LESSON 9
the point of view of print design, but from the point of view of online delivery,
HTML provides many useful capabilities.
Page layout and HTML

Because a Web page can be viewed on any connected computer, HTML is designed to
accommodate the wide range of different monitors that may be used to view it. A
person can also change the size and shape of the window of the browser program in
which they view an HTML page. Accordingly, the length of lines of text on a basic
HTML page can change to adapt to the size of the window.
As a result, page size has much less significance in HTML than on paper, where the
size of a page never changes. However, if you use certain HTML options to preserve
page layout, you can “freeze” a particular page layout and page size on screen, at
the expense of convenience on monitors that don’t match the size you specify.
Whether you are republishing formerly printed publications or designing new Web
pages, preserving a PageMaker page layout is most effective when publications you
export are designed using the grid features in PageMaker. The simplest explanation
of how HTML code works is that it describes how one object follows another in a
sequence. Although special techniques can approximate page layout, basic HTML does
not include two-dimensional information, such as page coordinates, and cannot
describe overlapping foreground objects. As you export the publication to HTML,
PageMaker notifies you of layout elements that cannot be directly translated.
Typography in HTML
Type specifications that affect typographical density—such as tracking, word and
letter spacing, and kerning—cannot be preserved in HTML. Browsers support only the
most basic type specifications. The font and size are controlled by the Web browser
and customizable by anyone, and line breaks are usually determined by the size of
the window. By default, most browsers are set to
Classroom in a Book
display12-point Times Roman for body type and lists, and larger sizes of Times
Roman for heads. In addition, the following type characteristics are either
controlled by or not supported by most Web browsers and won’t be included when you
export HTML from PageMaker:
• • •
Because HTML styles are similar to PageMaker paragraph styles, adapting text to
HTML is much easier if your publication text is structured using PageMaker
paragraph styles.
HTML hyperlinks
As you have seen earlier in this project, hyperlinks are a great way to enhance a
printed page for online use. You’ve already added hyperlinks to the publication
earlier in this lesson, so that part of the conversion is complete. Now that you
know a little more about HTML, you will recognize aspects of the newsletter’s
design that you will change to make it work well in HTML.
Font, type size, and leading Font width
Strikethrough, outline, shadow, reverse, superscript, and subscript type styles

Letter and word spacing, tracking, and kerning
Spacing before or after a paragraph (other than standard spacing in HTML formats)
Numerically specified paragraph indents Tab positions
• •
Evaluating the publication for HTML

In the next sections, you evaluate the newsletter with HTML capabilities in mind
and make the necessary changes. You’ll start with the file you saved that includes
the hyperlinks you added.
1 In PageMaker, open the publication
HTML paragraph formats

Using HTML you can apply named formats to paragraphs. You apply a format based on
the function of a particular piece of text, such as a heading, a regular paragraph,
or a list. HTML formats are similar to the named styles in PageMaker in that the
designer can change the appearance of a paragraph by applying a different format.
However, a person using a Web browser can also change the appearance of an HTML
format, to make it more readable on a specific monitor.
09Work.pmd. If the publication window does not already fill the screen, click the
Maximize button. Save the publication as 09HWork.pmd in the 09Lessons folder.
282 LESSON 9
2 Make sure guides are off. If necessary,
choose View > Hide Guides.
Volume 10 - No. 27
Healthy Living
The Fitness Newsweekly
SAVVY ABOUT SERVINGS You’ve probably heard this advice already—eat five servings of
fruits and vegetables every day for better health. To meet this goal, you need to
know what counts as a serving. 1 piece of fresh fruit 3/4 cup 100% juice 1/2 cup
cut vegetable 1 cup leafy vegetable 1/4 cup dried fruit 1/2 cup dried peas or beans
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
○
Pages 1, 2, and 4 use dotted horizontal rules which can be translated into HTML,
but only as solid horizontal rules. PageMaker will convert these automatically.
N u t r i t i o n
HEALTH WATCH
calories
CONTENTS
Nutrition ................................................ 2
Exercise ....................................................3
Lifestyle .................................................. 4
BLUNDERS
By late morning, Johnny had lost interest in what his teacher was saying and
started distracting his classmates. Why was Johnny behaving so badly? It could be
because he had skipped breakfast.
Studies show that eating breakfast improves strength and endurance in the late
morning, and promotes a better attitude toward school or work. Breakfast
replenishes blood sugar levels, which supply the brain with its main energy source.
The brain stores no reserves of glucose, so blood sugar levels must be replenished
constantly. YOUR BEST BETS Although skipping breakfast causes fatigue and
restlessness, choosing breakfasts that are loaded with fat and cholesterol can lead
to heart disease. Here are some typical breakfasts and ways to make them better.
Hot or cold cereal. There is no better breakfast than this. Pick a low-sugar, whole
grain cereal like wheat flakes or shredded wheat with low-fat milk. Add a cup of
fruit and a roll with jam instead of butter or margarine.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
breakfast
food than a large amount of lean food. A GOOD NIGHT’S SLEEP One way that exercise
fights insomnia is by increasing body temperature. Studies show that people sleep
better at night if they have a relatively large change in body temperature over a
24-hour period.
ham and toast, as long as you skip the butter or margarine. But the ham adds at
least half a day’s recommended quantity of sodium. Pancakes. Add berries to the
batter and skip the butter or margarine. Use just two tablespoons of low-calorie
syrup.
BREAKFAST TIPS Avoid skipping breakfast or grabbing high-calorie fast foods by

following these quick tips: ❧ Build a healthy breakfast with ready-to-eat foods or
ones that take little preparation, such as yogurt, fresh fruits, or cereals.
❧ Top cereals with fresh or dried fruits,

or stir raisins into cooked cereal.
❧ If you’re not hungry, drink juice.

Something is better than nothing.
Did you know...?

Your body has 60,000 miles of blood vessels that, when laid end to end, would
stretch almost three times around the equator. If you are 25 pounds overweight,
your heart must pump blood through an extra 5,000 miles of blood vessels.
Recipe of the week
Fruit Smoothie
✓ 1/2 cup milk ✓ 1/2 fruit juice ✓ 2 cups chopped fruit (peaches, bananas, or
strawberries) ✓ Protein powder ✓ Egg whites ✓ Wheat germ ✓ Date sugar ✓ 1 cup ice
cubes
Nutritional information per serving Serving
size .......................................... 1 cup
Calories ........................................................ 107
Fat ..................................................................... 2 g
Cholesterol ........................................ 5.5 mg
Sodium .............................................. 22.5 mg
Protein ........................................................... 2 g
Put all ingredients except date sugar and ice in blender. Cover and process until
smooth. With motor running, add ice cubes and continue to process until smooth.
Pour in glass and sprinkle top with date sugar.
Each section is marked by a large visual banner or headline that spans the top of
the page. Later you will replace these PageMaker elements with graphics because
they consist of overlapping text blocks and graphics that cannot be reproduced
directly in HTML.
Vol. 10 - No. 27 No. 27
All of the pages contain vertical rules between columns, which cannot be translated
directly to HTML. You don’t need to do anything about this; PageMaker will
automatically delete them when you export.
Preparing the master page

PageMaker can export publication pages as one continuous HTML document. When you
use this method, PageMaker inserts a rule between each page. However, there is
already a rule across the top of each publication page which becomes redundant with
the rule PageMaker automatically inserts. That rule is on the master page, so you
will remove it before moving on to the regular pages.
1 Click the master page icon (
).
Classroom in a Book
2 Select the pointer tool, select the rule at
the top of the page, and press Delete.
to leave the paragraph return intact, but remove the character and tab. Select the
All Stories option.
Preparing the bulleted lists for HTML

There are several bulleted lists in the publication, starting with one in the
middle of the second column on the first page. Each line starts with a graphic
bullet character and a tab character. The presence of a specific font is not
guaranteed using HTML, so the bullet characters must be removed. Also, tab
positions are not preserved in HTML, so leaving the tabs in may do more harm than
good to the layout. You will use the Change command to remove both characters
throughout the publication.
1 Go to page 1. With the pointer tool still
3 Click Find. When you find one, click
Change & Find. Repeat until the first line under 3 ways to stay motivated is
selected. You don’t want to replace the next three occurrences, because they are
numbers, not bullets, so you will click Find Next instead.
4 Click Find Next repeatedly until the first
selected, select the story containing the bulleted list in the second column, and
choose Edit > Edit Story. Then choose Utilities > Change. You will search for a
sequence of characters that only appears where a line begins with a bullet and a
tab. Different bullet characters are used throughout the publication, but you can
find all of them in the same search pass by using a wildcard character that will find
any character that otherwise fits the sequence.
2 Type ^p^?^t for Find What. This tells
line under Exercise to energize is selected. Click Change & Find repeatedly until
the Search Complete message appears, and then click OK. Close the Change dialog
box. Finding and changing text throughout the publication has opened many story
windows. You do not need to work in story editor for the next set of topics, so you
can close all story windows.
5 Switch to any story window. Hold down
Shift (Windows) or Option (Macintosh) as you choose Story > Close All Stories. For
a complete list of special characters you can use in the Find and Change dialog
boxes, see online Help.
PageMaker to look for any character (^?) that has exactly a paragraph return (^p)
before it and a tab character (^t) after it. Type ^p for Change To. This tells
PageMaker
284 LESSON 9
Editing the introductory paragraphs

In the original printed version of the newsletter, each section begins with an
introductory paragraph formatted with large italic text. Later, when you export the
publication to HTML, the paragraph style for the introductory text will be mapped
to an HTML format that also uses large text. On the lower resolution of the
computer screen, italic text is difficult to read, even at the larger size. You will
edit the paragraph style to remove the italic formatting.
1 Select the TIFF image. 2 Press Delete.
Note: If you have trouble selecting the graphic, press Ctrl (Windows) or Command
(Macintosh) as you click to select. PageMaker will bypass the topmost object and
select the next object underneath.
Volume 10 - No. 27
Healthy Living
SAVVY ABOUT SERVINGS You’ve probably heard this advice already—eat five servings of
fruits and vegetables every day for better health. To meet this goal, you need to
know what counts as a serving. 1 piece of fresh fruit 3/4 cup 100% juice 1/2 cup
cut vegetable 1 cup leafy vegetable 1/4 cup dried fruit 1/2 cup dried peas or beans
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
○
HEALTH WATCH
calories
CONTENTS
Nutrition ................................................ 2
Exercise ....................................................3
Lifestyle .................................................. 4
(Windows) or Command (Macintosh) as you click Body Text Intro. Click Char, deselect
Italic, and then click Shift (Windows) or Option (Macintosh) as you click OK to
2 Go to page 1, and save the publication.
food than a large amount of lean food. A GOOD NIGHT’S SLEEP One way that exercise
fights insomnia is by increasing body temperature. Studies show that people sleep
better at night if they have a relatively large change in body temperature over a
24-hour period.
Did you know...?

Your body has 60,000 miles of blood vessels that, when laid end to end, would
stretch almost three times around the equator. If you are 25 pounds overweight,
your heart must pump blood through an extra 5,000 miles of blood vessels.
Preparing page 1
A large TIFF image appears behind the text columns on page 1. HTML does not support
overlapping foreground graphics, so if you export the page to HTML with this
graphic in its current position, it will appear in the foreground next to another
element—an undesirable result. It’s better to remove it. Note: It is possible to
keep the graphic as an HTML background on the Web page, but an image with the
dimensions of the current background graphic can significantly slow the display of
the page. You can specify an HTML background in PageMaker, but an HTML background
also tiles, or repeats, which may not be desirable in this case.
Re-creating the banner on page 1

Now you will replace the logo banner at the top of the page, which was laid out in
PageMaker. Because the banner uses large type sizes and many different fonts
arranged in a highly designed manner, it cannot be translated directly to HTML in
its current form. You can preserve its appearance by converting it to a graphic.
PageMaker can export a graphic in any of several formats, but that technique won’t
work in this case because the banner exists in PageMaker as a mixture of text and
graphics. Fortunately, PageMaker can quickly convert any page
Classroom in a Book
into an EPS file, and this is the method you will use to convert the many banner
elements into a single graphic. First you will move the issue information text out
of the banner area. You want it to remain as text so that it can be found by people
using search engines over the Web.
1 If the guides are not visible, choose View >
mately 16 picas, and W should be 45 picas. Make a note of these dimensions, and
save 09HWork.pmd.
4 Choose File > New.
The default measurement system for new publications is currently set to inches.
However, you can still specify the page size in picas.
5 Type a page size of 17p by 45p, or whatever value is just large enough to include
the size you measured. Select Wide, and deselect Double-Sided. Set all margins to
0, and then click OK. 6 Choose File > Save As. Type 09Art.pmd for
Show Guides.
2 Select the pointer tool and drag the Vol-
ume 10 Number 27 text down until its top edge snaps to the guide below the banner.
Healthy Living
Volume 10 - No. 27
a filename, and save it into the 09Lesson folder. Click Save.

7 Choose Window > Tile so you can see
When PageMaker creates an EPS file, it uses the entire page area. The current page
is too large, so you create a correctly sized page in another publication, from
which you will export the EPS file. First you’ll measure the area of the banner
elements to determine the page size of the new publication.
3 With the pointer tool selected, draw a selection rectangle around the banner
elements, including the horizontal rule. Make sure you do not select any elements
below the rule, and choose Element > Group. In the Control Palette, note the values
for H and W, which tell you the dimensions of the area you just selected. H should
be approxi-
9 Select and hold the group of banner ele-
ments until you see the pointer change into an arrow, so that you see a screen
image as you drag. Drag the grouped banner to 09Art.pmd, and drop it within the
page.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
○
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
○
HEALTH WATCH
both publications. If necessary, in 09Art.pmd choose View > Fit in Window.

8 Click the window for 09HWork.pmd to
make it the active publication. Go to page 1, select the pointer tool, and select
the group of banner elements you grouped.
Healthy Living
Volume 10 - No. 27
HEALTH WATCH
286 LESSON 9
10 Fine-tune the position of the banner ele-
3 Close 09Art.pmd. If PageMaker asks you if
ments so that all visible parts are within the page edge, particularly the sun rays
poking through the top of the banner. If necessary, adjust the page size, but be
careful—adding too much margin may cause the graphic to overlap another element on
the final layout, but too small a page would crop the graphic.
you want to save, click Yes. Switch to 09HWork.pmd, and click the Maximize button
to make the window fill the screen. Select the pointer tool and delete the original
grouped banner elements.
4 Choose File > Place. Double-click
Healthy Living
09Art.eps in the 09Lesson folder. If PageMaker asks you if you want to replace a
color, or include a complete copy of the graphic, click No in both cases. Click the
loaded graphic icon at the top left corner of the page margins.
11 Save 09Art.pmd.
Exporting and placing the EPS banner

Now you will generate an EPS version of the page you just created. Because an EPS
file is similar to a PostScript file, you can export an EPS file from the Print dialog
box in PageMaker.
1 In 09Art.pmd, choose File > Print.
Healthy Living
Volume 10 - No. 27
5 If necessary, select the crop tool (
Choose Color General for PPD. Selecting a color printer ensures that color
PostScript will be included in the new file. (Be sure the portrait option is
selected if that option is present.)
2 Click Options. Select the Write PostScript
crop the bounding box to closely fit the graphic. If the bounding box is too large,
the graphic may be lost when you create the HTML file.
6 Drag the graphic up and left so that the
top of the rectangle meets the top page margin, and the sun rays extend beyond the
top page margin.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
○
to File option and the EPS option. Specify a name of 09Art.eps. Click Browse
(Windows) or Save As (Macintosh), send the file to the 09Lesson folder, and then
click Save (Windows) or OK (Macintosh). In the Print Options dialog box, click
Save.
Healthy Living
Volume 10 - No. 27
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
○
HEALTH WATCH
) and
HEALTH WATCH
Classroom in a Book
Because the banner is now included in the publication as a single graphic,

PageMaker will be able to convert it for HTML.
7 Go to page 2 to get ready to edit it, and
1 Select the pointer tool, and select the
save 09HWork.pmd. On the Macintosh, there is a faster alternative that can convert
text and graphics to a single graphic. Select the elements and choose Edit > Cut
(or Edit > Copy), choose Edit > Paste Special, and double-click the PICT option in
the list.
Breakfast Blunders headline, which is actually a group of separate text blocks. Do

not select the word Nutrition, which you hyperlinked earlier, or the graphic
beneath it. When you are sure that only the headline is selected, press Delete.
Preparing page 2
Page 2 contains a headline (similar to the banner on page 1) that you must replace
for the conversion to HTML to go smoothly. There is also a frame containing text.
PageMaker can export the frame as is, so you will leave it alone. Note: The term
frame has a different meaning in PageMaker than it does in HTML. In PageMaker, a
frame is a shape that can contain another object. In HTML, a frame is more like a
pane—a way to divide a browser window. You will replace the headline graphic at the
top of the page, just as you did on page 1. However, this time the EPS version has
already been prepared for you. It was created by exporting to EPS as you did for
page 1.
09ArtB.eps in the 09Lesson folder. If PageMaker asks you if you want to replace a
color or include a complete copy of the graphic, click No in both cases. Click the
loaded graphic icon at the intersection of the left column guide of the second
column and the first horizontal ruler guide down from the top.
N u t r i t i o n
BLUNDERS
By late morning, Johnny had lost interest in what his teacher was
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
breakfast
ham and toast, as long as you skip the butter or margarine But the ham
BREAKFAST TIPS Avoid skipping breakfast or grabbing high-calorie fast foods by

following these quick tips:
There is a graphic in the lower half of the page that resembles the top of a recipe
card. This was drawn using the polygon tool in PageMaker, but PageMaker-drawn
graphics cannot be exported so it must be replaced by a graphic that has already
been prepared.
source. The brain stores no reserves of glucose, so blood sugar levels must be
replenished constantly. YOUR BEST BETS Although skipping breakfast causes fatigue
and restlessness, choosing breakfasts that are loaded with fat and cholesterol can
lead to heart disease. Here are some typical breakfasts and ways to make them
better. Hot or cold cereal. There is no better breakfast than this. Pick a low-
sugar, whole grain cereal like wheat flakes or shredded wheat with low-fat milk.
Add a cup of fruit and a roll with jam instead of butter or margarine.
Recipe of the week
Fruit Smoothie
1/2 cup milk 1/2 fruit juice 2 cups chopped fruit (peaches, bananas, or
strawberries) Protein powder Egg whites Wheat germ Date sugar 1 cup ice cubes
size .......................................... 1 cup
Calories ........................................................ 107
Fat ..................................................................... 2 g
Cholesterol ........................................ 5.5 mg
Sodium .............................................. 22.5 mg
Protein ........................................................... 2 g
Vol. 10 - No. 27 No. 27
2
288 LESSON 9
the Recipe of the Week graphic and press Delete.

file 09ArtC.eps. If PageMaker asks you if you want to replace a color or include a
complete copy of the graphic in the publication, click No in both cases. Click the
loaded graphic icon at the intersection of the guides where the old graphic was
positioned.
source. The brain stores no reserves of glucose, so blood sugar levels must be
replenished constantly. YOUR BEST BETS Although skipping breakfast causes fatigue
and restlessness, choosing breakfasts that are loaded with fat and cholesterol can
lead to heart disease. Here are some typical breakfasts and ways to make them
better. Hot or cold cereal. There is no better breakfast than this. Pick a low-
sugar, whole grain cereal like wheat flakes or shredded wheat with low-fat milk.
Add a cup of fruit and a roll with jam instead of butter or margarine.
The only change you make on this page is to replace the large headline type the
same way you replaced the banner and headline elements on page 1 and 2. Again, this
graphic has been already been converted for you.
1 Select the pointer tool and select the
Walking Your Way to Fitness headline, which is actually a group of separate text
blocks and graphics. Make sure you do not select the Exercise text or the graphic
beneath it. Press Delete.
Recipe of the week
Fruit Smoothie
1/2 cup milk 1/2 fruit juice 2 cups chopped fruit (peaches, bananas, or
strawberries) Protein powder Egg whites Wheat germ Date sugar 1 cup ice cubes
size .......................................... 1 cup
Calories ........................................................ 107
Fat ..................................................................... 2 g
Cholesterol ........................................ 5.5 mg
Sodium .............................................. 22.5 mg
Protein ........................................................... 2 g
Vol. 10 - No. 27 No. 27
5 Go to page 3, and save the publication.
09ArtD.eps in the 09Lesson folder. If PageMaker asks you if you want to replace a
color or include a complete copy of the graphic in the publication, click No in
both cases. Click the loaded graphic icon at the intersection of the left column
guide of the second column, and the first horizontal ruler guide down from the top.
E x e r c i s e
Preparing page 3
The table on this page was created in Adobe Table, a program included with
PageMaker 7.0. PageMaker will automatically convert it to a graphic when you
export, so you don’t need to do anything to adapt the table to HTML.
mind, and toughens the spirit.
p ( mile in 15 to 20 minutes). At the end of your walk, slow your pace to ease your
heart to a resting state. A POSITIVE ATTITUDE Walking is one of the best ways to
sort out life’s problems. When you walk regularly, problems diminish and you feel
more energetic and enthusiastic.
Walking your way
to fitness
Walking is the easiest exercise program to start. It requires no
3 Go to page 4 and save the publication.
Warm-up
Slow walking
Excercise
Brisk walking
Cool-down
Slow walking
Total Time
Preparing page 4
All you have to do on this page is replace the headline elements with the single
EPS replacement graphic. Again, this graphic has been already been converted for
you.
Week 1 Week 2 Week 3-11 Week 12

Vol. 10 - No. 27 No. 27
5 min 5 min
5 min 7 min
5 min 5 min
15 min 17 min
Add 2 minutes brisk walking per week 5 min 30 min 5 min 40 min
3
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
WALKING TALL To turn your walk into a workout, it’s important to get started on the
right foot With good posture and a brisk gait
Did you know...?

Classroom in a Book
1 Select the pointer tool and drag a selection
rectangle around the In Balance headline, which is actually a group of separate

text blocks and graphics. Make sure you do not select the Lifestyle text or the
picture below the Lifestyle text. Press Delete.
The first thing you’ll do is specify filenames and document titles for the HTML files.
It is important to understand the difference between a filename and a document
title. The filename is the name of the HTML file as it appears on disk. For this
reason, adhere to the standard file naming conventions that apply to the operating
system that your Web server uses. If you publish through an Internet Service
Provider (ISP), ask them what naming restrictions apply. The document title is the
name that appears in the title bar of a Web browser. You can use spaces in the
name, and it does not have to conform to any file naming conventions.
2 Click Untitled1 in the HTML Document
09ArtE.eps in the 09Lesson folder. If PageMaker asks you if you want to replace a
color or include a complete copy of the graphic in the publication, click No in
both cases. Click the loaded graphic icon at the intersection of the left column
guide of the second column and the first horizontal ruler guide down from the top.
L i f e s t y l e
InBalance
Becoming fit doesn’t require a huge leap. You can get there with small steps toward
reasonable goals. By gradually trading bad habits for activi-
Title column.
3 Save the publication.
Exporting to HTML
You have completed all of the manual adjustments to the publication. The rest of
the conversion will be automatic. You will export the publication to HTML with
settings that will specify how PageMaker will perform the conversion.
1 Choose File > Export > HTML.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
LEAN FOR LIFE Healthy eating doesn’t mean giving up your favorite foods and
beverages. Just l h t b l f d h i
In the HTML Document Title section, you specify the names of the HTML documents you
want to create from the publication you are exporting. You have a choice here—you
can export all of the publication pages as a single continuous HTML document, or
you can separate the publication into a number
290 LESSON 9
of smaller HTML documents. Right now, the Export HTML dialog box indicates that all
four pages will be assigned to the HTML document Untitled1. This is fine, but you
will change the name of the HTML document.
3 Click Edit, and type Healthy Living Volume 10, Number 27 for the Document
Setting export options

1 Click Options. Make sure that the
Approximate Layout Using HTML Tables When Exporting Pages option is selected, and
leave the Exported Page Width at 612 pixels. The Approximate Layout Using HTML
Tables When Exporting Pages option is what will preserve the three-column layout of
the newsletter, including the text wrap and the banner and headlines that span each
page. Next you will map PageMaker styles to HTML formats. Keep in mind that HTML
format names are standardized and that the font and size used by HTML formats are
defined by the Web browser used to view the pages.
2 In the Style Assignments section of the
Title. Leave Assign PageMaker Pages selected, and then click Done. You leave Assign
PageMaker Pages selected because you want to divide this publication into HTML
documents by page instead of assigning each text story to its own page. Now you’ll
specify the filename of the HTML document.
4 Click Document and select the 09Html
folder in the 09Lesson folder. Type 09HWork.htm as a filename. Make sure Save Images
Into This Folder is selected, and then click OK.
Options dialog box, make sure that Preserve Character Attributes is selected. This
will preserve the bold inline heads in the publication.
3 In the Style Assignments section of the
Options dialog box, make sure that PageMaker styles are mapped to HTML formats as
shown in the following table. In this table and in the Options dialog box, the
PageMaker styles in your publication are listed on the left, and the HTML formats
that currently correspond to them are listed
Classroom in a Book
on the right. To change the HTML format for which a PageMaker style is mapped,
click the format name (Windows) or arrow next to the name (Macintosh) and choose
the new format from the pop-up menu.
PageMaker style [No style] Body Text Body Text Intro Body Text List Body Text Small
Contents Footer Headline Numbered List Section Head Sidebar Head Sidebar Text
Subhead 1 Subhead 2 HTML format Body Text Body Text Heading 3 Body Text Heading 5
Heading 3 Heading 5 Heading 1 Body Text Heading 2 Heading 3 Heading 5 Heading 4
Heading 3
bullets and numbers is too great for the narrow print-oriented columns of this
newsletter. If the newsletter publisher had the time and resources to redesign
years of old issues for the Web, they would have created new, wider column widths
that would have allowed the use of standard HTML bullet and numbering formats.
Also, some heading styles were assigned to body text. For example, the PageMaker
style Body Text Intro was mapped to the HTML format Heading 3, because this was the
large text in PageMaker that started each section. HTML formats are named according
to their purpose in the structure of a document, but for this publication they are
used according to their appearance. Although this improves the appearance of the
page in up-to-date graphical browsers, it will make the page harder to read in low-
end browsers. You can also work with HTML formats directly on the layout. Just
choose Add HTML Styles from the Styles palette menu. This technique is usually most
useful when you are creating a new, blank page that you will export to HTML. For
republishing existing pages, mapping the original styles, as shown here, may be
faster.
If you are familiar with HTML formats, you may notice that some style assignments
made here are not the obvious ones. For example, HTML includes formats that
automatically add bullets or numbers to lists. Although those types of lists exist
in this publication, the corresponding HTML formats are generally not used in this
publication because the indent amount for HTML
292 LESSON 9
4 In the Graphics section of the Options
dialog box, make sure that PageMaker Chooses, Use Short Name (8.3), and Downsample
to 72 dpi options are selected, and then click OK.
5 You want to see how the HTML document turns out, so click the application icon
and specify a Web browser in which you want to view the HTML pages when PageMaker
is finished exporting. Then select View HTML.
Viewing the HTML page in a Web browser

In the Web browser, you can see how the HTML will be viewed over the World Wide
Web, although it may appear differently in other browsers. Now you can test the
hyperlinks you created, using your browser.
1 Click the word Nutrition. The browser takes you to the Nutrition article. 2 Click
the Return to Contents button at the bottom of the page. 3 On page 1, click the
word Lifestyle. The
browser takes you to the Lifestyle article. If you want the publication to be
readable by the widest range of Web browsers, such as those that do not support the
HTML tables that preserve page layout, you can export the HTML as a single column
of text. This works best with publications already designed as a single column. In
the HTML Export dialog box, open the Options dialog box and click to deselect
Approximate Layout Using HTML Tables When Exporting Pages.
6 Click Export HTML.
As the HTML is exported, a dialog box displays messages about the progress of the
conversion and notes any page elements that cannot be exported.
7 When PageMaker is finished, it may display a dialog box listing elements that were
not converted. Click OK to close the dialog box. The HTML version of the
publication appears in the Web browser you specified.
Comparing the final versions

The final step in Web publishing is to upload the publication to a Web server. This
procedure varies depending on the publishing hardware, software, and other
requirements, which are determined by your Internet Ser-
Classroom in a Book
vice Provider (ISP). Be sure to talk to your ISP for the exact steps required to
publish your pages. In this project, you can examine how the final files appear on
your hard disk after being exported from PageMaker.
1 In Explorer (Windows) or the Finder
The HTML version resembles the original well and can be viewed without a plug-in.
However, fonts and line breaks may not match the original because type
specifications are largely determined by the way each individual Web browser is set
up. The PDF version is completely faithful to the original, particularly when
printed, and the article threads make the document easier to read online. In this
project you adapted a previously printed publication for the Web, and exported it
as PDF and HTML. You should now have a better idea of the strengths of each
approach and how you might want to adapt your own publications for the Web.
3 When you finish examining the publications, close all open applications.
(Macintosh), open the folders 09Pdf and 09Html inside the folder 09Lesson, and
arrange the folder windows so that you can see the files inside them. The folder
09Pdf contains 09PWork.pdf (the PDF version you exported from the publication).
Although it is only one file, it contains all the pages, text, and graphics in the
publication. On a properly configured Web server, it will download one page at a
time so that a person does not have to download the entire file to view a page. The
folder 09Html contains 09HWork.htm (the HTML version you exported from the
publication) and all of the files linked to the publication. When you upload this
page to a Web server for Web publishing, be sure you include all of the files in
this folder. You can compare the two versions in your Web browser. The HTML version
should still be open, so just open the PDF version you exported earlier. If your
Web browser supports multiple open windows, you can open a new browser window to
compare the HTML and PDF versions side-by-side.
2 Start a Web browser. In the Web browser,
Adobe on the Web

If you have Internet access and a Web browser, be sure to visit Adobe’s home page
(http://www.adobe.com/). You will find frequently updated information about Adobe
products, free software and upgrades, tips and techniques from experts, links to
other Web sites, and information about how to configure your Web browser to view
Adobe Acrobat PDF files.
open 09PWork.pdf in 09Lesson/09Pdf.

294 LESSON 9
Review questions
1 When publishing on the Web, in which
2 First you create an anchor, or destination
situations is it better to use PDF instead of HTML? In which situations is it

better to use HTML instead of PDF?
2 How you create a complete hyperlink? 3 Where can you find colors that display
of the hyperlink jump, and then you create one or more sources that jump to the
anchor.
3 The Online library in the Color Options
dialog box contains the Web-safe palette of 216 colors.

4 When the computer is set up for a Postscript printer, choose File > Print, click
Options, select Write PostScript to File, and then select EPS. 5 Choose File >
Export > HTML, click
well in Web browsers?

4 How can you turn a PageMaker page into an EPS file? 5 What are the two ways you
can map
PageMaker paragraph styles to HTML formats?
Answers
1 PDF can be a better solution for Web
Options, and map the styles using the Style Assignments table. This is most useful
when you are republishing an existing publication. Or choose Add HTML Styles from
the Styles palette menu. This is most useful when you are building a publication
from scratch.
publishing when: You want to preserve a professional level of design and

typography.
• •
The publication is likely to be printed at the receiving computer, particularly in

color or at high resolution.
You want the online version to match a printed original exactly. You want to be
able to zoom in on the page without losing quality. HTML can be a better solution
for Web publishing when:
• You want the document to be viewable in browsers that do not support plug-ins. •
•
The publication uses a basic design which will translate easily to HTML.
Lesson 10
PDF Web page
This project is a section of a multimedia online guide that you will export using
the Portable Document Format (PDF), and compress to achieve small size and fast
display in a Web browser or in Acrobat Reader. This project uses two kinds of
links: Automatic links, which you create using PageMaker’s indexing and table-of-
contents features; and manual links, which you create using the Hyperlinks palette.
296 LESSON 10
PDF Web page
In this project, you will complete a partially built guide to a national park. The
guide is designated for viewing in a Web browser. The designer has chosen to use
PDF because of its high quality and simple workflow. To make the PageMaker
publication interactive, you will use the Hyperlinks palette, adding jumps within
the publication and to destinations outside the publication. Finally, you’ll use
the Export PDF command to print the publication as a PDF file. In this project you
will learn how to do the following:
•
Before you begin

As before, you will delete the existing PageMaker preferences or configuration file
to return all settings to their defaults and make sure that lesson fonts are
installed. Then you will open and inspect a final version of the document that you
create in this project.
Use the Hyperlinks palette to create hyperlinks for a PDF publication. Generate an
automatically hyperlinked table of contents and index. Add a hyperlink that appears
on every page by adding it to a master page. Create a hyperlink between two PDF
files.

2 Make sure that the AGaramond, AGara-
• •
mond Bold, AGaramond Italic, Birch, Myriad Bold, Myriad Italic, Myriad Condensed
Bold, Myriad Roman, Trajan, and Zapf Chancery fonts are installed on your system.
Windows only: Because of the way Windows handles fonts, you must apply italic to
AGaramond to use AGaramond Italic; you must apply bold to Myriad Roman to use
Myriad Bold; you must apply italic to Myriad Roman to use Myriad Italic; you must
apply bold and italic to Myriad Roman to use Myriad Bold Italic; and you must apply
bold to Myriad Condensed to use Myriad Condensed Bold.
3 Launch PageMaker and set up the palettes
Create invisible hyperlinks using the shape tools in PageMaker.
Set up one image as an image map, which can jump to different places depending on
where you click.
• • •
Link to a movie. Link to a URL on the World Wide Web. Export to PDF.
As you work, be sure to save the publication often.
you will need for this lesson. You will be using the Hyperlinks, Layers, Styles,
and Colors palettes. If they are not already open, choose Window > Show Styles, and
Window
Classroom in a Book
> Show Colors, Window > Show Hyperlinks, and Window > Show Layers. Close any other
open palettes. You may want to save screen space by combining the palettes. Just
drag palette tabs to other palettes.
4 Make sure the QuickTime Frame import filter is installed: Press Ctrl (Windows) or
Command (Macintosh) while choosing About PageMaker from the Help (Windows) or Apple
(Macintosh) menu. (If necessary, you can install the filter from the PageMaker 7.0
CD using the Custom install option.) 5 Make sure that Acrobat Reader, Acrobat
2 Drag 10Final.pdf from the 10Lesson
folder to your Web browser window.
Note: If the PDF file does not open properly in the Web browser, make sure Acrobat
Reader is installed properly. The first page acts as an entrance to the project. You
will get a sense of the general design of the guide by examining it. If necessary,
click the Acrobat Fit in Window button to show the entire first page of the
publication.
3 Click the Maximize button of the browser
Distiller, and an Acrobat Reader-compatible Web browser are installed. Also, make
sure you have enough RAM to run PageMaker, Distiller, and Reader at the same time.
Previewing the final version

To see what you’ll be building, first view the completed PDF file in your Web
browser.
1 Start your Web browser. Then switch to
window to expand it to fill the screen. Click Continue on the guide’s opening
screen.
Explorer (Windows) or Finder (Macintosh), and open the 10Lesson folder. Arrange the
folder window and the Web browser so you can see them both. In Windows, you can
quickly arrange windows for drag-and-drop by clicking the taskbar with the right
mouse button and choosing Tile Horizontally from the pop-up menu.
298 LESSON 10
PDF Web page
The second page is an illustration of the mountain with a superimposed diagram of

the altitude zones of flora and fauna on the mountain. Along the left side of each
page is a navigation bar with buttons that take you to other sections. The dividing
lines between the entries are actually paragraph rules.
4 Click Lowland Forest.
7 At the bottom left corner of the page, click
the Home icon.
flora & Fauna

HELP INDEX WEB LINKS
The canopy is different from trees of the lowland forest. In late summer and early
fall, the reddish foliage of low-growing huckleberry bushes will catch your eye.The
montane zone’s huckleberries are a treat for the black bears of the park!
Black Bear
Play a movie!
The next four pages correspond to the altitude zones listed in the table of
contents, starting at the lowest altitude. On these four pages, the navigation bar
includes Previous Page and Next Page buttons.
You will build the links for all of these pages. Some links will be created
automatically by PageMaker when you export to PDF. You can open the PageMaker
version of the completed publication so that you can use it as a reference as you
work through the project. First you will close the Web browser because you will not
need it until the end of the project. You will also close Acrobat Reader, which
opened automatically to display the PDF in the Web browser.
8 Close the Web browser, close Acrobat
flora & Fauna

The canopy is different from trees of the lowland forest. In late summer and early
fall, the reddish foliage of low-growing huckleberry bushes will catch your eye.The
montane zone’s huckleberries are a treat for the black bears of the park!
Black Bear
Play a movie!
Next page button Previous page button
5 Click the Next Page button. Take a look at
the page, then click the Next Page button again. Look at the next couple of pages
and stop when you reach Alpine Zone. The Alpine Zone page has no Next button as it
is the final topic page. The last three pages are the index, help, and Web Links
screens.
6 Click Help.
Reader, and open 10Final.pmd in the 10Lesson folder.
Setting up the publication

The publication you use for this project has already been designed; your job is to
complete it by adding the hyperlinks and exporting it to PDF. First you will open
the partially completed publication.
1 Open 10Begin.pmt in the folder
The Help button is on the navigation bar that appears on all topic pages. It was
set up on a PageMaker master page, so you set up the jump only once. The Help
screen describes how to navigate the publication.
10Lesson.
Classroom in a Book
2 Choose File > Save As. Name the file
1 If necessary, click the Hyperlinks tab to
10Work.pmd and save it into the 10Lesson folder. If the publication window does not
already fill the screen, click the Maximize button.
display the Hyperlinks palette.
If the page displays slowly, you can change the display resolution for images in
the publication. This does not affect the quality of the final output.
2 On page 1, select the text tool (
) and
select the words Mount Rainier.

3 Choose New Anchor from the Hyperlinks
Click Standard for Graphics Display, and click OK. Remember to change the Graphics
Display preference back to High Resolution when you require more detailed image
display, such as when you are positioning elements precisely on top of images.
palette menu. Type Title Page in the New Anchor dialog box that appears, and then
click OK. The new anchor appears in the Hyperlinks palette.
Using text and graphics as hyperlink anchors

The first step in this project is to manually create a number of hyperlinks by
defining anchors (destinations) and sources (objects that jump to an anchor). You’ll
create text hyperlinks first, setting up anchors and then associating their sources
with them. If you’re unfamiliar with sources and anchors, review Lesson 9. It’s a
good idea to create the anchor for this page while you’re here, although you won’t
be using this anchor right away. You can type any name into the Hyperlinks palette,
but each name in the Hyperlinks palette must be different. For this project,
anchors are named after the title of the page where the anchor is located. Now you
will create an anchor on page 2 so you can get to it from page 1. This time you
will create an anchor using a shortcut.
4 Go to page 2. With the text tool still
selected, select the word Contents, and click the New Anchor button ( ) in the
Hyperlinks palette. Name the anchor Contents, and click OK.
5 Choose Edit > Deselect All to deselect the
words.
300 LESSON 10
PDF Web page
6 Select the pointer tool, and in the Hyper-
11 Save 10Work.pmd.
links palette, select the Title Page anchor name (don’t click the icon). Choose Go
to Title Page from the Hyperlinks palette menu.
For this project, the sources are named to describe where they jump. You now have a
link that can take you from page 1 to 2. On the Hyperlinks palette, you can see
that a source (such as Title to Contents) is always listed under the anchor that it
jumps to (such as Contents).
Testing hyperlinks
The Go To command in the Hyperlinks palette menu is a quick way to go to the
selected palette item. By default, PageMaker centers the anchor in the publication
window. You will change this setting later.
7 Choose View > Fit in Window, even if it
You can now test the link to make sure it works properly.
). A blue outline appears around the Continue text where you created a source. Move
the hand over the Continue text.
already appears selected in the menu. Remember that an anchor is only half of a
hyperlink—it’s just the destination. To jump to the anchors, you need to create
sources to the anchors.
8 With the text tool, select the word
MOUNT RAINIER continue
Continue in the middle of the title page.

9 In the Hyperlinks palette, click Contents
The hand changes to a pointing hand, indicating that it is over a hyperlink.

2 Click the text.
&
(don’t click the icon).

10 In the Hyperlinks palette, choose New
Source from the Hyperlinks palette menu. Type Title to Contents, and then click OK.
The publication jumps to the Contents page. The Contents text is centered on the
screen, but this pushes part of the page past the edge of the window. You do not
want the hyper-
Anchor Source
Classroom in a Book
link anchor to be centered on screen after a jump, so you’ll change the preference
that controls this.
Note: The blue outlines you see when you use
Adding a source on a master page

You can add a hyperlink source to a master page, which can save time when you want
a hyperlink on every page that leads to the same anchor, such as a Help screen. You
will do this by adding a source that jumps to the Contents page.
1 Choose the Flora and Fauna master page
the hand tool do not appear when the publication is exported to PDF. In PDF, you
design the appearance of a hyperlink source.
3 Choose File > Preferences > Online. In the
Hyperlink section, deselect the Center Upper-Left of Anchor When Testing Hyperlinks
option. Click OK.
from the master pages pop-up menu by clicking the master-page icon with the right
mouse button (Windows) or by positioning the pointer over the master-page icon and
holding down the mouse button (Macintosh).
This preference exists for those times when you have more than one anchor on a page
and want to know which one you jumped to. You will return to the title page so that
you can try the link again. You haven’t yet created a hyperlink source back to the
title page, but PageMaker provides a command that lets you backtrack along pages in
the order you viewed them.
4 Choose Layout > Go Back, and choose
Note: When you click the master page icon, Flora & Fauna may already be selected,
indicating that it is the master page applied to the current page. You still have
to select it again to view and edit the Flora & Fauna master page.
2 Select the pointer tool, and select the
Home graphic in the lower left corner of the page.
View > Fit in Window.

5 Click the word Continue to go to the Con-
tents page again. PageMaker displays the Contents page using the view you used the
last time you saw the page.
302 LESSON 10
PDF Web page
3 In the Hyperlinks palette, click the anchor
) and click the
icon ( ) next to the Contents anchor. This is the same as choosing New Source from
the Hyperlinks palette menu. Name the new source Return to Contents and then click
OK.
home icon. You just used the source you added to the master page to return to the
Contents page.
6 Save 10Work.pmd
Setting up anchors for the rest of the publication

There is more than one way to create a large set of hyperlinks. You could continue
working the way you have in this lesson so far, which is to create an anchor, a
source to it, another anchor, and then another source. However, it is often better
to create all the anchors first and then all the sources. If you set up publication
anchors first, they all appear listed in the Hyperlinks palette, available for any
sources you want to create. You’ll use the latter method in this project. You will
be creating an anchor for each page, so it makes sense that each anchor should have
the same name as each page title. You continue creating each source from each page
title by copying and pasting each page title into its anchor name.
Although you can add a source to a master page, you can’t add an anchor to a master
page because an anchor is a destination on one specific page, and a master page item
appears on multiple pages. Now you will create an anchor for the next page. You can
make the anchor easy to identify by naming it after the page title. You will do
this easily by copying and pasting the page title into its anchor name.
4 Go to page 3. Select the text tool ( ), select the Lowland Forest title text, and
choose Edit > Copy. Click the New Anchor button and paste the name you copied, and
click OK.
). Go to page 4, select the words Montane Zone, and choose Edit > Copy. Click the
New Anchor button ( ) in the Hyperlinks palette, paste, and click OK.

Classroom in a Book
2 On pages 5 through 9, create anchors
based on the title of each page, just as you did in the previous step. Note:
Remember to copy each page title separately for each source, because each name in
the Hyperlinks palette must be unique.
3 Click the maximize button on the Hyper-
sources on the other pages of the guide. Finally, you will add sources to the Help,
Index, and Weblink pages from the Flora and Fauna master page.
1 Go to page 3. Select the pointer tool, and select the right facing arrow graphic
at the bottom left corner of the page. In the Hyperlinks palette, click the anchor
icon for Montane Zone, and name the new source Lowland to Montane. Click OK. 2 Go
to page 4 and select the right facing
links palette and examine the new entries. If the palette minimizes, click the
button again. Each page now has an anchor associated with it. From now on, whenever
you want to create a source, just click the anchor icon of the page to which the
source will jump.
arrow at the bottom left corner of this page. In the Hyperlinks palette, click the
anchor icon for Subalpine Zone, and name the new source Montane to Subalpine. Click
OK. Page 4 has both a Next Page and Previous Page button. You finished setting up
the button to the next page, so now you will set up a button to the previous page
by creating another source.
3 On page 4, select the left-facing arrow. In the Hyperlinks palette, click the
anchor icon for Lowland Forest, and name the new source Montane to Lowland. Click
OK.
4 Save 10Work.pmd.
Completing the hyperlink sources

You have already set up a hyperlink from page 1 to 2. Now you will finish hooking up
the navigation controls by setting up the Previous Page and Next Page buttons as
At this point, you might notice that the right and left arrow sources for this page
end up under different anchors, which can make it confusing to remember where to
click to add
304 LESSON 10
PDF Web page
a source. Just remember that the palette lists hyperlinks by anchor (destination).
You always want to click on the anchor where you want the arrow to jump, not the
anchor where the arrow is located. You might also notice that the anchors appear in
the Hyperlinks palette in the same order in which they are added. This is an
advantage of creating all the anchors first in the same order as the pages in the
publication. Anchors are easier to work with when you add them to the Hyperlinks
palette in an organized manner, because you cannot rearrange them.
4 With the pointer tool still selected, continue setting up the Previous Page and
Next Page arrows as sources on pages 5 and 6, as you did in the previous steps.
When you create each source, remember to click the anchor icon for the anchor on
the page where you want the source to jump.
) and drag to select
the Help text at the left of the page. Click the Help anchor icon on the Hyperlinks
palette, and name it To Help. Click OK.
flora & Fauna

8 Using the same method as in the previous
step, create a source named To Index from the Index text to the Index anchor. Then
create a source named To Web Links from the Web Links text to the To Web Links
anchor.
9 Save 10Work.pmd.
Creating a source from grouped elements

Now you want the Flora & Fauna text (above the sources you just created) to jump to
the title page. However, this text is made up of separate text blocks created in
PageMaker. Fortunately, you can set up all of the objects as one source simply by
grouping them.
5 Save 10Work.pmd. 6 Go to the Flora and Fauna master page by
choosing it from the Master Page pop-up menu at the bottom left corner of the
publication window.
Classroom in a Book
1 Select the pointer tool, select the three text
blocks containing the words Flora & Fauna, and then choose Element > Group.
Now that you’ve linked the Help, and Index text, all of the links on the master
page are complete. Now you can test these links.
4 Go to page 1. Select the hand tool ( ), press Tab to hide all palettes, and click
Continue. 5 Go to page 3, and click the right facing
flora & Fauna

arrow to go to page 4. Click the left facing arrow to go back to page 3. Click the
Help button and Index buttons.
6 Press Tab to display hidden palettes. 7 Save 10Work.pmd.
2 With the group still selected, click the Title Page anchor icon in the Hyperlinks
palette. Name the new source To Title, and then click OK. 3 Save 10Work.pmd.
The hyperlinks remaining to be done are those which lead to locations outside this
publication, such as Web sites, and those which PageMaker can generate
automatically, such as the table of contents and index.
Completing the linked table of contents

PageMaker lets you mark paragraphs to be included in the table of contents.
Inclusion in a table of contents is a paragraph-level attribute, so you can make it
part of a paragraph style. In this guide, you will set the Subhead style to be
included in the table of contents. This causes each occurrence of Subhead to appear
in the table of contents automatically. The Subhead style is used once on each
page.
1 If necessary, click the Styles palette tab to
display the Styles palette.

2 Go to page 3. Select the text tool, and click
an insertion point in the words Lowland Forest. You’ll use a shortcut to edit the
subhead style.
306 LESSON 10
PDF Web page
3 In the Styles palette, press Ctrl (Windows)
or Command (Macintosh) as you click the Subhead style in the Styles palette. This
opens the Style Options dialog box so that you can edit the style.
were threaded in advance to keep the story together, acting as placeholders for the
hyperlinked table of contents generated later. In 10Work.pmd, the frames are
already positioned and threaded, so all you have to do is generate the table of
contents.
Contents
Alpine Zone
Subalpine Zone
4 Click Para. Select the Include in Table of Contents option at the bottom of the
dialog box. Press Shift (Windows) or Option (Macintosh) as you click OK to close
all dialog boxes.
flora & Fauna

Montane Zone
Lowland Forest
1 If you switched to 10Final.pmd, switch
You won’t see a visible change to the text, because all you did was tell PageMaker
to include paragraphs of that style in the table of contents when you generate it
later.
5 Save 10Work.pmd.
back to 10Work.pmd. The final PDF file will include a map page that points out
important places in the national park. The map is currently in a separate file, but
it contains index entries you want in the final PDF file. Although you are not
creating the index yet, automatic hyperlinks work best if all desired publications
are in the book list the first time you generate hyperlinks, so you will add the map
file now.
2 Choose Utilities > Book. In the file list on
Generating the table of contents

You are ready to generate the table of contents. If you like, take a look at page 2
in the 10Final.pmd publication to see how the TOC should look when finished. Select
the pointer tool and click any of the headings to see how they are positioned. The
headings were laid out in advance as frames which
the left side of the Book Publication List dialog box, select the file 10Map.pmd in
the 10Lesson folder and click Insert to add it to the book list. Click OK.
Classroom in a Book
3 If the publication window does not
5 Click the loaded text icon on the X in the
already fill the screen, click the Maximize button. Go to page 2, where you will
place the Table of Contents you are about to generate.
4 Choose Utilities > Create TOC. Delete the
frame near the bottom left corner of the page as shown.
word Contents from Title and leave it blank. Select Include Book Publications. For
Format, select the No Page Number option, and then click OK.
flora & Fauna

The word Contents appears—not the same Contents page title you deleted from the
Create Table of Contents dialog box, but the subhead from the Contents page. You
will remove it soon. The other headings flow through the frames in the order they
were threaded, from bottom to top. PageMaker creates a text story containing the
new table of contents. As with any other placed story, you can position a table of
contents anywhere, but as you saw in the final publication there are already four
threaded frames set aside for the table of contents in this project. You will place
the table of contents into the bottom frame. Because the frames are already
threaded, the headings will climb through the four frames from bottom to top just
like the actual biological zones on the mountain.
flora & Fauna

Lowland Forest
Contents
6 With the pointer tool still selected, select any frame and choose Edit > Edit
Story to open the story editor. If paragraph returns are not visible, choose Story
> Display ¶.
The triangle icons in the text are hypertext markers attached to text which
PageMaker generated automatically. Now we’ll edit this contents list to include
only our main topics: Lowland Forest, Montane Zone, Subalpine Zone, and Alpine
Zone.
308 LESSON 10
PDF Web page
7 Click the style name TOC Subhead to the
11 Save 10Work.pmd.
left of the word Contents to select the entire paragraph, and then press Delete.
8 In the same way, delete the paragraphs
containing the words Help, Index, and Web links. Make sure you delete the triangle
icons that accompany those words.
Creating a multiple-source image map out of one graphic

Since you added the table of contents, a person can now use Page 2 to jump to the
other pages. However, you don’t have to build a table of contents using text. You
can also use graphics. You will complement the text table of contents you created
by also building graphic links on page 2, so that a person does not have to click
on text. The mountain image behind the table of contents contains several pictures
that can function as graphic links to the same sections marked by the text. You
would normally set them up as sources by selecting each of them, but in this case
they can’t be selected separately because they are all part of a single Photoshop
image. However, you can still create multiple sources for a simple image by drawing
invisible shapes over the image in PageMaker. Before you create these links, you’ll
create a new layer that contains all the links you are about to draw. This makes it
easier to find, lock, and hide the next set of links you create, which you will make
invisible.
1 Click the Layers palette tab or choose
9 When you are finished, close story editor.
The page should appear as shown below.

Contents
Alpine Zone
Subalpine Zone
flora & Fauna

Montane Zone
Lowland Forest
PageMaker has automatically set up these table of contents entries as hyperlinks.

You can test them to see if they work.
) and click any
heading. After PageMaker jumps to the page, you can return to the TOC page by
clicking the Home icon.
Note: Hyperlinks generated by the table of
Window > Show Layers. Click the New Layer button ( ), name the layer Hidden Links,
and then click OK. For the next step, make sure the Hidden Links layer remains
selected in the Layers palette.
contents feature do not appear on the Hyperlinks palette.
Classroom in a Book
You will lock the Default layer so that you know all of the objects you are about
to draw end up on the Hidden Links layer, and so you don’t accidentally select
other items.
2 In the Layers palette, select the Hidden
selected, create a new source from the shape to the Lowland Forest anchor in the
Hyperlinks palette. Name it Contents to Lowland.
Montane Zone
Link layer so that new elements appear on it. In the Default layer, click the lock
column. A pencil icon appears to indicate that the default layer is locked.
Lowland Forest
Now you will set the default stroke and fill color for the link sources you are
about to create. You will temporarily set them to be visible while you edit them.
After you complete them, you will make them invisible.
If you find it difficult to position the shape because the background image is too
coarse, choose File > Preferences > General and select High Resolution for graphics
display. You can create a source using any shape tool. For this lesson, you will
use the rectangle tool for all of the shapes on this page.
5 With the rectangle tool still selected, draw
no objects are selected. If the command is dimmed, no objects are selected. In the
Colors palette, click the Stroke icon, and click Paper. Then click the Fill icon,
and click None.
), and draw a
shape over the fern picture within the Lowland Forest zone. With the square still
a shape over the bear picture within the Montane Zone. With the rectangle still
selected, create a new source to the Montane Zone anchor in the Hyperlinks palette.
Keep the shape within the zone; don’t overlap the Lowland Forest zone. Name it
Contents to Montane.
6 Draw a shape over the flower in the Subal-
pine Zone. With the rectangle still selected, create a source from the shape to the
Subalpine Zone anchor in the Hyperlinks palette. Name it Contents to Subalpine.
310 LESSON 10
PDF Web page
7 Draw a shape around the mountain goat,
Linking to a movie
You can include multimedia elements in a PDF file. To take advantage of this
feature, you will add a QuickTime movie to this guide. As with most video formats,
movie performance is usually less than satisfactory over the Internet. However,
when publishing a PDF on a CD, movies work quite well. You’ll select the large bear
image on the page and replace it with a QuickTime movie. PageMaker actually imports
only a single frame of a movie. However, when you export a publication to PDF or
HTML, the exported file automatically includes a hyperlink to the full movie. The
exported file and the movie need to be in the same folder. Note: For cross-platform
compatibility (necessary on the Web), a movie must be in the flattened QuickTime
format. Its name mustn’t exceed eight characters, and must be followed by the
extension .mov.
1 Go to page 4. With the pointer tool
and create a source from the shape to the Alpine Zone anchor in the Hyperlinks
palette. Name it Contents to Alpine.
Alpine Zone
e Zone
You don’t want these white rectangles to be visible, so now you will make them
invisible. Because you locked the other layer, you will be able to select all of
the shapes on the Hidden Links layer at once without affecting the rest of the
publication.
8 Choose Edit > Select All. In the Colors
palette click the Both button and click None. Choose Edit > Deselect All. Note:
From this point, if you want to select and edit the shapes, remember that they are
currently invisible. You will have to lock the Default layer and draw a selection
rectangle around the area where a shape is located. You’ll now unlock the Default
layer so that you can work on the other sections.
9 In the Layers palette, click the pencil icon
selected, click in the middle of the large bear to select it.

2 Choose File > Place. Select Bear.mov in
the 10Lesson folder. Make sure Replacing Entire Graphic is selected, and click Open
(Windows) or OK (Macintosh). Note: If Replacing Entire Graphic is dimmed, you need
to install the QuickTime Frame import filter from the PageMaker 7.0 CD (using the
Custom install option).
3 In the QuickTime Frame Import dialog
in the lock column of the Default layer to unlock it.

10 Save 10Work.pmd. 11 Select the hand tool (
), and test any of the invisible sources you just created.
box, leave the first frame of the movie displayed, and click OK.
Classroom in a Book
PageMaker replaces the bear image with the movie’s first frame (the same image).
(Because PageMaker imports only a single frame of the movie, you can’t test the
movie until you create the PDF file.)
Importing URL anchors

You can also import a list of URLs into the Hyperlinks palette, such as a browser’s
Bookmarks file. In this project, a URL you need is already available from a file.
1 Choose Import URLs from File from the Hyperlinks palette menu, select the file
10URL1.htm in the 10Lesson folder, and then click Open. The URLs in the file appear
in the Hyperlinks palette after the existing URLs.
flora & Fauna

to Paradise and from White River campground to Sunrise, you will enter Mount
Rainier’s montane zone. The canopy is different from trees of the lowland forest.
In late summer and early fall, the reddish foliage of low-growing huckleberry
bushes will catch your eye.The montane zone’s huckleberries are a treat for the
black bears of the park!
Black Bear
Play a movie!
4 Save 10Work.pmd.
Creating URL anchors

A person reading this guide can find additional information on related Web sites.
You’ll add those Web sites as anchors in the Hyperlinks palette using several
methods.
1 Go to page 9, and choose New URL from
the Hyperlinks palette menu.Type

http://www.aqd.nps.gov/natnet/wv/ biodiv.htm and then click OK.
2 In the PageMaker publication, select the
If you want to see the contents of the 10URL1.htm file, you can open it in a text-
editing application.
2 With the text tool still selected, click an insertion point after the words
Biological Diversity, and then press Return or Enter. Type Endangered Species, and
then select the words you just typed. 3 Click the globe icon for the URL that ends
text tool ( ). Taking care not to select any characters other than the words (such
as the paragraph return), drag to select the two words Biological Diversity.
3 In the Hyperlinks palette, click the globe
in /es.htm. Name a new source called To Endangered Species page, and then click OK.
Deselect the text.
4 Save 10Work.pmd.
icon for the URL you just created. Name a new source called To Biodiversity page,
and then click OK.
4 Save 10Work.pmd.
312 LESSON 10
PDF Web page
If you have an active Internet connection, you can import URLs directly from a Web
page by choosing Import URLs from Web from the Hyperlinks palette menu and typing
the location of the page containing the URLs.
3 Using Explorer (Windows) or the Finder
(Macintosh), drag the file 10URL2.htm from the 10Lessons folder into the Web browser
window.
Dragging URL anchors

If your browser and your operating system support drag-and-drop between programs,
you can also drag and drop URLs directly into a PageMaker publication. You can also
drag URLs in from other programs that support drag-and-drop. When you drag a URL
into a PageMaker publication, it is automatically added to the Hyperlinks palette
as an anchor. The URL you will use is in a Web page stored in the 10Lesson folder,
so you will open the Web page.
4 If 10Final.pmd is open, close it.
Position the Web browser window and the PageMaker publication window so that you
can see the text in both windows. In Windows, you can quickly arrange windows for
drag-and-drop by clicking the taskbar with the right mouse button and choosing Tile
Horizontally from the pop-up menu.
5 Switch to the Web browser, and drag the
). Click an insertion point after the words Endangered Species, and then press
Return or Enter. Type Watchable Wildlife, and then select the words you just typed.
2 Open a Web browser. Arrange the folder
window and the Web browser windows so that you can see the contents of both.
link Watchable Wildlife and drop it on the words Watchable Wildlife which you
highlighted in PageMaker. Take care to drag the link right away without selecting
the text— if you simply click, you’ll open the link instead. On the Macintosh, if
you don’t drag the link immediately a pop-up menu will appear.
Classroom in a Book
The new source and anchor are automatically added to the Hyperlinks palette.
block containing the Web links.
Note: If you only see the first part of the link in PageMaker, the link may be
wrapping to a second line in the Web browser. Some Web browsers do not let you drag
more than one line of text. Try making the browser window wider to fit the entire
link on one line.
6 In PageMaker, click the maximize button
9 Save 10Work.pmd.
If your Internet connection is active, you can test URL hyperlinks the same way you
would any other kind of hyperlink. Note: The URL anchors in this publication were
current at the time of publication, but may have changed. If you have trouble
connecting to these URLs, double-click them in the Hyperlinks palette and type any
working URL you want.
so that the publication window fills the screen.

7 With the text tool still selected, click an insertion point in the text you just
linked, and choose Edit > Select All. In the Styles palette, click WWW Links. This
style visually identifies text that links to the Web. Formatting text does not
affect its hyperlinks.
) and position it over the words Biological Diversity. The hand tool changes to a
pointing hand with a letter W, indicating that it is over a Web link. Click the
words Biological Diversity. The page appears in your Web browser. If PageMaker asks
you to find a Web browser, locate one on your computer.
PageMaker only asks for a browser the first time you connect to a Web URL.

314 LESSON 10
PDF Web page
You can change the Web browser PageMaker uses in the Online Preferences dialog box.
Choose File > Preferences > Online.
11 Close the Web browser and switch back to PageMaker.
Promote/Demote button ( ) to move the movie entry to the second level, type black
bears as a new first-level entry, and then click OK.
Promote/demote button
Adding index entries

This guide will include an index generated by PageMaker. Like the table of
contents, PageMaker can automatically create hyperlinks from index entries so that
a person can go to an index entry by clicking it. Some entries have already been
added to the index. You will complete the index by adding a few entries yourself.
1 Go to page 4. Select the text tool (
4 Save 10Work.pmd.
Generating the hyperlinked index

To include the index in the publication, you must generate it. The index will
automatically include links to the separate map publication that you included in
the book of publications you set up when you generated the table of contents
earlier.
1 If necessary, choose View > Show Guides. 2 Go to page 8, the page where you will
), and
select the words black bears near the end of the article. Choose Utilities > Index
Entry.
flora & Fauna

ter Mount Rainier s montane zone. The canopy is different from trees of the lowland
forest. In late summer and early fall, the reddish foliage of low-growing
huckleberry bushes will catch your eye.The montane zone’s huckleberries are a treat
for the black bears of the park!
Black Bear
Play a movie!
2 Make sure black bears is the entry in the
top of the Topic column, and then click OK. You’ve just added that text to the
index.
3 With the text tool still selected, select the
place the index you will generate. Choose Utilities > Create Index. Delete the
Title and leave it blank. You will include index markers in the separate Map.pmd
file, so make sure Include Book Publications is selected, and click OK. When
PageMaker finishes processing, the loaded text icon appears. Placing an index is
just like placing a text story from a word processor.
word movie near the bottom right corner of the page (taking care not to select
spaces), and choose Utilities > Index Entry. Click the
Classroom in a Book
3 Check to make sure Layout > Autoflow is
6 Choose File > Preferences > Online. Dese-
selected. Position the loaded text icon at the guide intersection where the Control
Palette reads 6p for X and 5p3 for Y. Click to flow the index into the columns. The
index includes many more entries than the ones you added, because the publication
was partially indexed before you opened it.
Index
A Alder Lake M1 alpine tundra 6 alpine zone 6 B bald eagle 3 black bears 4 movie 4
Box Canyon M1 H hawks 3 huckleberry bushes 4 I Ipsut Creek M1 Ipsut Pass M1 L
Longmire 3, M1 Louise Lake M1 lowland forest zone 3 M magenta paintbrush 5 montane
zone 4 mountain goat 6 Mowich Lake M1 Muir Snow Field 6, M1 N Narada Falls M1
Nisqually Entrance M1 Nisqually River M1 Nisqually-Paradise Road M1 O Ohanapecosh
3, M1 owls 3 P Panorama Point 6, M1 Paradise 4, 5, M1 R Reflection Lake M1 S Silver
Falls M1 Stevens-Canyon Entrance M1 subalpine zone 5 Sunrise 4, 5 Sunrise Road M1
Sunrise Visitor Center M1 Sunshine Point M1 T Tipsoo Lake 5, M1 trees western
hemlock 3 western red cedar 3 tundra 6 W White River 4 White River Entrance M1
wildflowers, subalpine 5
lect the Outline Link Sources When Hand Tool is Selected option, and then click OK.
7 On page 8, click the black bears entry.
PageMaker jumps to the correct page.

8 Save 10Work.pmd
Exporting to PDF
The final step in building the guide is to create a PDF file from it. Not only can
PageMaker export to PDF directly, it also provides a high degree of control over
how the PDF is created. When PageMaker exports to PDF, it sends the publication to
Acrobat Distiller in a process much like printing. The PDF version of the
publication that Distiller produces will take up much less disk space than the
original publication but will still be viewable at high quality across platforms,
by using the Acrobat Reader. Note: If the amount of memory installed in your
computer is not much more than the amount recommended for PageMaker, free up memory
by closing all other applications except PageMaker.
1 Choose File > Export > Adobe PDF. Save
flora & Fauna

C campgrounds Cougar Rock M1 Ipsut Creek M1 Ohanapecosh M1 Sunshine Point M1 White

River M1 Carbon River 3, M1 Carbon River Entrance M1 Comet Falls M1 D deer 3
M = Map of Mt. Rainier
You have completed building the multimedia publication. Before you export it to
PDF, you can test the automatically generated index hyperlinks with the hand tool.
). The cursor
changes to a pointing hand when positioned over the hyperlinked index entries. In
PageMaker you will simulate as much as possible the way the publication will look
in PDF, by hiding all palettes and turning off the blue outlines that mark the
hyperlinks automatically generated by PageMaker.
Note: Hyperlinks generated by indexing do not
appear on the Hyperlinks palette.

5 Press Tab to hide all palettes, and choose
the file if necessary. If PageMaker asks you if you want to include other
publications in the book or if you need to save the publication, click Yes in both
cases. Note: In Mac OS, be sure you have a PostScript driver selected in the
Chooser before choosing File > Export.
View > Hide Guides.

316 LESSON 10
PDF Web page
2 In the PDF Options dialog box, select On
Screen for PDF Style. Verify that Acrobat is selected for Printer Style. You will
use the default settings for all the panels except the Doc Info panel in this
dialog box.
alpine, subalpine, montane, and lowland forest zones in the text box. Leave the
Author and Keyword entries as is.
For information on the options available in the various tab panels of the PDF
Options dialog box, see chapter 12 in the Adobe PageMaker 7.0 User Guide.
3 Click the Doc Info tab to change the filename, subject, author, and keyword
information. For Title, select and delete the file name. Type Mount Ranier Guide in
the Title text box. For Subject, select and delete the file name. Type Fauna and
flora of
Document information is often used to refine index searches in document collections.

For this reason, you should always replace the file name with the document title,
for example. (This and Security are the only panels in which you can change
information without defining a new PDF Style.)
4 Click Export. 5 In the next dialog box, select the View
PDF option (Windows) or View PDF Using option (Mac OS) if you want to open the
newly created Adobe PDF file in Acrobat or Acrobat Reader rather than save it and
open it at a later time. Then click Save to save the 10Work.pdf file in the 10Lesson
folder.
Classroom in a Book
PageMaker automatically starts Acrobat Distiller and processes the PDF file.
Processing may take a few minutes. Depending on your settings, Acrobat opens the
PDF version of the publication in Acrobat or Acrobat Reader. If the PDF file doesn’t
open automatically, locate the 10Work.pdf file in the 10Lesson folder, and double
click to open it in Acrobat or Acrobat Reader. When you select On Screen for PDF
Style, Distiller uses the Screen job options. The Distiller Screen job options are
optimized to create Adobe PDF files appropriate for display on the World Wide Web or
an intranet, or for distribution through an e-mail system. This option set produces
the smallest PDF file size and optimizes files for byte serving. The default settings
for these options use Acrobat 3.0 compatibility to ensure maximum efficiency over
the Internet. However, Acrobat 3.0 PDF documents may not open properly in versions
of Acrobat earlier than 3.0. The Base 14 fonts are embedded; all fonts are
subsetted. Hyperlinks are preserved, as are articles and bookmarks. No security is
applied to the Adobe PDF file. Note: On Mac OS, a window opens showing the progress
of Distiller. The setting displayed in this window may not match those you selected
in the PDF Options dialog box. However, your PDF files will be created using the
correct settings you specified.
For more information, see Exporting to Adobe PDF on page 274 in Lesson 9 and
chapter 12 in the Adobe PageMaker 7.0 User Guide.
Viewing the PDF in a Web browser

You can view the completed PDF version of the guide in a Web browser.
1 If you still have the PDF file open in
Acrobat Reader, close the PDF file. Also, close Acrobat Distiller (if necessary) and
PageMaker, because you will longer need those programs for this lesson.
2 Start your Web browser. 3 Switch to Explorer (Windows) or the
Finder (Macintosh), and open the folder on your hard disk that contains the PDF file
you just created. Arrange the folder window and the Web browser window so you can
see both. In Windows, you can click the taskbar with the right mouse button and
choose Tile Vertically from the pop-up menu.
4 Drag 10Work.pdf from the 10Lesson
folder window to your Web browser window. To make the browser window fill the
screen, click the Maximize buton.
318 LESSON 10
PDF Web page
5 Click Continue, and then click any other
Answers
1 Hyperlink anchors appear in the order that you create them. They cannot be
rearranged in the Hyperlinks palette. 2 Choose New URL from the Hyperlinks
hyperlinks in the publication.
palette menu and type the URL of the file where it will exist on the volume where
you will publish the PDF.
3 Put the hyperlink source on a master page. 4 Acrobat Distiller is like a software
version
6 Click the zoom tool ( ) and click text. PDF allows page magnification, and
antialiases type so that type displays smoothly at many sizes.
of a printer, but instead of creating printed pages, it creates PDF pages. Acrobat
Reader is used by compatible Web browsers to display PDF pages in a Web browser
window, or it can display PDF pages on its own.
You’ve successfully added hyperlinks to a publication, and you’ve converted a

publication to a PDF document that you can publish on the Web.
Review questions
1 In what order do hyperlink anchors
appear in the Hyperlinks palette?

2 How do you link to another file, such as a PDF document? 3 How do you make a
hyperlink source appear in the same position on more than one page? 4 What is the
difference between Acrobat Distiller and Acrobat Reader?

Adobe PageMaker 7 0 Professional

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Adobe PageMaker 7 0 Professional

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Adobe PageMaker 7 0 Professional

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What is the purpose of the document?

What is the purpose of the document?

What is the difference between Acrobat Distiller and Acrobat Reader?

What is the difference between Acrobat Distiller and Acrobat Reader?

Classroom in a Book

Assembling a two-column ﬂyer

Assembling the second double-page spread

Setting up the master pages

Formatting the Kayaking article

Preparing for commercial printing

Newsletter on the Web

PDF Web page

Completing the linked table of contents

Creating a multiple-source image map out of one graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Generating the hyperlinked index Viewing the PDF in a Web browser

About Classroom in a Book

Installing Adobe PageMaker

the How_to_Install.wri (Windows) or How_to_Install.txt (Mac OS) ﬁle on the

System Folder/Application Support/Adobe/Fonts (Mac OS) If you install a Type 1,

Creating and printing lesson projects

Installing the Classroom in a Book fonts

Program Files/Common Files/Adobe/Fonts (Windows)

Program Files\Adobe\PageMaker 7.0\Rsrc\Usenglsh\Ppd4 on your hard drive.

Installing PPDs (Windows only)

turn, using the Windows Control Panel.

Copying the Classroom in a Book ﬁles

In Windows, unlock the ﬁles you copied:

a Book CD into your CD-ROM drive.

reference points 58 resizing graphics 58 copying between publications 68, 71 Create

In this project you’ll assemble a single-page, black-and-white ﬂyer from start to

Range kerning text Using the Snap to Guides option

Restoring default PageMaker settings Changing the view of a publication Creating a

Locating ﬁles and fonts

Restoring default settings

Specifying multiple columns Locking the guides

the following location, depending upon your system:

Macintosh System Folder: Preferences:

Adobe PageMaker 7.0P Prefs

Opening an existing publication

2 If the publication window does not ﬁll the

As you look at the publication window, notice the following elements:

Spacious three bedroom, two bath Victorian

by a premiere Boston architect.

A. Zero point marker B. Tool palette C. Horizontal ruler D. Page E. Publication

Toolbox Displays tools that you use for

Styles and Colors palettes Displays the

Pointer Rotating Line Rectangle Ellipse Polygon Hand

Text Cropping Constrained line Frame tools Zoom

Control palette Lets you make precise

Page icons Indicates the currently

Changing the view of a publication

Spacious three bedroom, two bath Victorian

Landscaped by a premiere Boston architect.

3 Click the Maximize button in the Styles

Working with the toolbox and palettes

2 Position the pointer over the title bar of

window again to return the palette to its full size.

11 Click the Colors palette tab to make it the

active palette (or choose Window > Show Colors).